HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2002-R0048 - Purchase Agreement - Silent Wings Museum - 01_23_2002Resolution No. 2002-R0048
January 23, 2002
Item No. 50
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to
execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract between the City of Lubbock and
Pharr Construction Company, Inc, of Lubbock, Texas, for the Silent Wings Museum, and any
other related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this Resolution as
if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the Council.
Passed by the City Council this 23rd day of January 2002.
WINDY SITT�), A
ATTEST:
Rebecca Garza, City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
1i ` —
Victor Kilman
Purchasing Manger
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
William de Haas
Contract Manager/Attorney
cp Ccdocs/PharrConstr.Res
January 18, 2002
�tso /, Z/ ; g .0 ?
.ldoz - .bdoyf
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
ITB #00 1 -02113M
EDA PROJECT NO.
'0,4 00 0� PUrmed Pz4alww #p
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
ITB #002-01/13M, Addendum #5
a:
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
k ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
162513 T11 STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PM PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX: (806) 775-2164
s http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us
ADDENDUM # 5
ITB # 001-02/BM
Silent Wings Museum
MAILED TO VENDOR: January 17, 2002
CLOSE DATE: January 18, 2002 @ 1:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. In DIVISION 15 - Mechanical, add SECTION 15083 - PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION (attached).
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Bruce MacNair, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164
or Email to: bmacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
ruce MacNair
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID.
p
f .
Maw
ITB #002-01/BM Addendum #5
0
ITB #002-01/BM, Addendum #5
SECTION 15083 - PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing pipe and equipment insulation.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors" for pipe insulation shields and protection
saddles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100°F (3S`C) or higher.
B. Dual -Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold.
C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75°F (24"CC).
D. Thermal resistivity is designated by an r-value that represents the reciprocal of thermal
conductivity (k-value). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous
material exactly 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick. Thermal resistivity (r-value) is expressed by the
temperature difference in degrees Falircnhcit (Kek'ins) between the two exposed faces required
to cause 1 BTU per hour (1 Watt;) to flow through I square foot (I ;quart meter) at mean
temperatures indicated.
E. Thermal Conductivity (k-value): Measure of heat flow through a material at a given
temperature difference; conductivity is expressed in units of Btu x inchih x sq. ft. x dcg F (,W x
m'sq. m x K).
F. Density: Is expressed in pcf (I;gicu. m).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying K-value, thickness, and
accessories.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation
including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or
other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label
insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory.
I. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50
or less.
2. Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of
150 or less.
ITB #002-0118M Addendum #5
1TB #002-01/BM, Addendum #5
1.6
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after testing of piping and duct systems.
B.
Schedule insulation application after installation and testing of heat trace tape.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Glass Fiber:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH.
C. Manville.
d. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
e. USG Interiors, Inc. - Thermafiber.Division.
2. Cellular Glass:
i;
a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
3. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular:
�+
a .
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Halstead Industrial Products.
�P
C. IMCOA.
d. Rubatex Corporation.
4. Calcium Silicate:
a. Manville.
b. Owens-Corning Corporation.
�r+s
2.2
GLASS FIBER
A.
Material: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin.
B.
Jacket: All-purpose, factory -applied, laminated glass -fiber -reinforced, flame-retardant kraft
paper and aluminum foil having self-sealing lap.
'^
C.
Blanket: AS.TM C 553, Type II, Class F-1, jacketed flexible blankets.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.32 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.046 W x ni/sq. m x K)
.,,
average maximum, at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.
r
D.
Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, jacketed.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 Btu x inch/h x -sq. ft. x deg F (0.037 W x m/sq. m x K)
average maximum at 75°F (24"C) mean temperature.
2. Density: 10 pcf (160 kg;cu. m) average. maximum.
E.
Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service.
ITB #002-0l/BM Addendum #5
ITB #002-01/BM, Addendum #5
1. Type: Non-flammable, solvent -based.
2. Service Temperature Range: \sinus 20" to 180"F (Minus 29" to 82"C).
F.
Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for
outside service.
2.3
CELLULAR GLASS
A.
Material: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells,
incombustible.
B.
Facing: ASTM C 921, Type 1, factory -applied, laminated foil, flame-retardant, vinyl facing.
C.
Form: The following as indicated:
>
1. Blocks: ASTM C 552, Type 1.
2. Boards: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
3. Preformed Pipe: ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2 (jacketed).
4. Special Shapes: ASTM C 552, Type III, in shapes and thicknesses as indicated.
D.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.38 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.055 W x m/sq. m x K) average
maximum at 75"F (24"C') mean temperature.
E.
Minimum Density: 7 pcf 0 12 1('/Cu. m).
F.
Maximum Density: 9.5 pcf (152 kg �:u. 111).
2.4
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR
A.
Material: Flexible expanded closed -cell structure with smooth skin on both sides.
1. Tubular Materials: ASTM C 534, Type I.
j
2. Sheet Materials: ASTM C 534, Type 11.
B.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.30 Btu x Mchih x sq. ft. x cicg F (().04' W x m/sq. m x K) average
maximum at 75"F (24"C).
C.
Coating: Water based latex enamel coating recommended by insulation manufacturer.
-;' 2.5
INSULATING CEMENTS
!�* A.
Mineral Fiber: ASTM C 195.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 1.0 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x dear F (0.14 W x ni/sq. In x K) average
P"
maximum at 500"F (260"Q mean temperature.
2. Compressive Strength: 10 psi ! 70 k 11�i) at 5 percent deformation.
B.
Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite: ASTM C 196.,
1. Thermal Conductivity: 1.10 Btu x incll'h x sq. ft. x cicg F (0.159 W
average maximum at 500"F (`2,60"(') mean temperature.
.Y...
2. Compressive Strength: 5 psi (35 kll, j at 5 percent deformation.
C.
Mineral Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C 449.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 1.2 Btu x inc.l,.li x sq. tt. x deg F (0.171; \1' rn sq. m ; K
average maximum at 100' I _ =' C' ; mean temperature.
2. Compressive Strength: 100 p;i i690 ki'a) at 5 percent deformation.
ITB #002-01IBM
Addendum #5
ITB #002-01/BM, Addendum #5
2.6 ADHESIVES
A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Adhesive: Solvent -based, contact adhesive
recommended by insulation manufacturer. _
I
B. Lagging Adhesive: MIL-A-3316C, non-flammable adhesive in the following Classes and
r" Grades:
a. .
q.
1. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass .cloth and tape to unfaced glass fiber insulation,
sealing edges of glass fiber insulation, and bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass fiber
insulation.
2. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
2.7 JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated glass -fiber -reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.
C.
D.
2.8
1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm. (1.2 ng/Pa/s/sq. m) maximum, when tested
according to ASTM E 96.
2. Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 781.
PVC Jacketing: High -impact, ultra -violet -resistant PVC, 20 mils (0.50 min) thick, roll stock
ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
PVC Fitting Covers: Factory -fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20 mil (0.50 mm)
thick, high -impact, ultra -violet -resistant PVC.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
.ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 ounces
per sq. yd. (272 gm per sq. m).
1. Tape Width: 4 inches (102 mm).
2. Cloth Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type I.
3. Tape Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type II.
B. Bands: 314 inch 09 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: Type 304, 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel:.0.005 inch (0.13 mn1) thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.
4. Brass: 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
5. Nickel -Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 inin) thick.
C. Wire: 14 ga`�c (1:6 mm) nickel copper alloy, 16 gage (1.6 mm), soft -annealed stainless steel, or
16 gaue (1.6 nim), soft -annealed galvanized steel.
D. Corner Angles:_'8 gage (0.3 nim), I inch by I inch (25 mm by 25 mm ) aluminum, adhered to 2
inchcs by 2 inches (50 mm by 50 mm) kraft paper.
ITB #002-01/BM'Addendum #5
rr++
ITB #002-01/BM, Addendum #5
E.
Anchor Pins: Capable of supporting 20 pounds (9 1<g) each. Provide anchor pins and speed
-
washers of sizes and diameters as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation type and
thickness.
2.9
SEALING COMPOUNDS
�•.,
A.
Vapor Barrier Compound: Water -based, fire -resistive composition.
"
1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perni (4.6 ng/Pa/s/sq. m) maximum.
2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F (Minus 29 to X2 deg C).
B.
Weatherproof Sealant: Flexible-elastomer-based, vapor -barrier sealant designed to seal metal
joints.
r�
r
1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm (1.2 n,- Pa, sisq. m) maximum.
2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 250 de- F (Minus 46 to 121 dc,-, C).
t,
3. Color: Aluminum.
~~~ -
PART 3 - EXECUTION
i;
3.1
PREPARATION
t
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, and dirt.
B.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water. Mix insulating cements contacting stainless -
steel surfaces with demineralized water.
MIR
1 Follow cement manufacturer's printed instructions for mixing and portions.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each mechanical system.
B.
Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do
not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.
C.
Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes and equipment having surface operating temperatures
below 60"F (I 6"C).
*-
D.
Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
E.
Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces.
F.
Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.
G.
Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a
vapor barrier.
H.
Seal Ends: Except for flexible elastomeric insulation, taper ends at 45 degree angle and seal
with lagging adhesive. Cut ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with
adhesive.
I.i
I.
Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturer's recommended coverage -per -gallon rate.
ITB #002-01/BM
Addendum #5
R
0
11
K.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ITB #002-01/BM, Addendum #5
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Flexible connectors for pipes.
2. Vibration control devices.
3. Testing laboratory labels and stamps.
4. Nameplates and data plates.
5. Fire protection piping systems.
6. Sanitary drainage and vent piping.
7. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.
8.. Piping specialties including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves,
and flow regulators.
PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive.
Stagger joints on double layers of insulation.
Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves, and specialties, except as otherwise
indicated.
Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints.
Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, at least 3 inches (76 mm) wide, and of same
material as insulation jacket. Secure with adhesive and outward clinching staples along
both edges of butt strip and space 4 inches (100 mm) on center.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap seams at least 1-1/2 inches (40 n1m). Apply insulation
with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing
lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) on
center.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation applied to piping systems
with surface temperatures at or below 35°F (1.7"C).
4. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply on seams and joints,
over staples, and at ends butt to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids .with
vapor barrier coating.
6. Repair damaged insulation jackets, except metal jackets, by applying jacket material
around damaged jacket. Adhere, staple, and seal. Extend patch at least 2 inches (50 mm)
in both directions beyond damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference
of the pipe.
F. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of the
roof flashing. Seal with vapor barrier coating. Apply insulation for exterior applications butted
tightly to interior insulation ends. Extend metal jacket for exterior insulation outside roof
flashing at least-2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing. Seal metal.jacket to roof flashing
with vapor barrier coating.
G. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, terminate insulation
flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor barrier coating.
ITB #002-01/BM Addendum #5
rR
ITB #002-01/8M, Addendum #5
H. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire -rated walls and partitions. Apply an aluminum jacket with factory -
applied moisture barrier over insulation. Extend 2 inches (50 min) from both surfaces of wall or
partition. Secure aluminum jacket with metal bands at both ends. Seal ends of jacket with
vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with joint sealer. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
I. Fire -Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire -
rated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around
penetration with firestopping or fire-resistant joint sealer. Refer to Division 7 for firestopping
and fire-resistant joint sealers.
J. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top
of floor.
K. Flanges, Fittings, and Valves - Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation ends with
vapor barrier coating. Apply premolded, precut, or field -fabricated segments of insulation
around flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive.
1. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation.
2. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches (50 nun) or 1-pipe diameter, which ever is greater.
3. Apply materials with adhesive, fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure
with wire or tape.
4. Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3 inches (DN 75) pipe size with premolded
insulation.
5. Insulate elbows and tees 3 inches and larger with premolded insulation or
insulation material segments. Use at least 3 segments for each elbow.
6. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and seal
circumferential joints with butt strips.
7. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with 2 layers of lagging adhesive
to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mrn). Install glass cloth between layers.
Overlap adjacent insulation by 2 inches (50 nun) in both directions from joint with glass
cloth and lagging adhesive.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments. Install saddles, shields, and inserts as specified in Division 15 Section "Supports
a .'; and Anchors." For cold surface piping, extend insulation on anchor legs a minimum of 12
inches (300 mm) and taper and seal insulation ends.
L M. Inserts and Shields: Cover hanger inserts and shields with jacket material
matching adjacent pipe insulation.
3.4 GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Bond insulation to pipe with lagging adhesive.
B. Seal exposed ends with lagging adhesive.
C. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound.
3.5 CELLULAR GLASS PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Cellular Glass Insulation: Join sections of cellular glass insulation with vapor barrier
compound. Secure insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Seal joints with
manufacturer's recommended joint sealer.
ITB #002-01/BM Addendum #5
ITB #002-01/BM, Addendum #5
P" 1. Multiple Layer Installations: Stagger joints of multilayer installations. Secure inner
layer with glass fiber reinforced tape. Secure outer layers with 2 metal bands for each
insulation section.
B. Finishing: Apply manufacturer's recommended weather barrier mastic.
o. 3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
�* A. Slip insulation on the pipe before making connections wherever possible. Seal joints with
adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, cut one side longitudinally and apply to
the pipe. Seal seams and joints with adhesive.
B. Valves, Fittings, and Flanges: Cut insulation segments from pipe or sheet insulation. Bond to
valve, fitting, and flange and seal joints with adhesive.
1. Miter cut materials to cover soldered elbows and tees.
2.. Fabricate sleeve fitting covers from flexible elastomeric cellular insulation for screwed
valves, fittings, and specialties. Miter cut materials. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation.
3.7 EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install board and block materials with a minimum dimension of 12 inches (305 min) and a
maximum dimension of 48 inches (1219 mm).
B. Groove and score insulation materials as required to fit as closely as possible to the equipment
and to fit contours of equipment. Stagger end joints.
C. Insulation Thicknesses Greater than 2 Inches (50 nnu): Install insulation in multiple layers with
staggered joints.
D. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joint.
E. Secure sections of insulation in place with wire or bands spaced at 9 inches (225 nim) centers,
except for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation.
F. Protect exposed corners with corner angles under wires and bands.
G. Manholes, Handholes, and Information Plates: Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes,
handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.
H. Removable Insulation: Install insulation on components that require periodic inspecting,
cleaning, and repairing for easy removal and replacement without damage to adjacent
insulation.
I. Finishing: Except for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation, apply 2 coats of vapor barrier
compound to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 min). Install a layer of glass cloth
embedded between layers.
3.8 GLASS FIBER EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Secure insulation with anchor pins and speed washers.
B. Space anchors at maximum intervals of 1 S inches (450 min) in both directions and not more
than ; inches ("5 mm) from edges and joints.
C. Apply a smoothing coat of insulating and finishing cement to finished insulation.
ITB #002-01/BM Addendum #5
ITS #002-01/13M, Addendum #5
3.9
CELLULAR GLASS EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Join sections of insulation with vapor barrier compound.
B.
Secure insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Seal joints with manufacturer's
e_.
recommended joint sealer.
C.
Secure inner layer of multiple layer installations with glass fiber reinforced tape. Secure outer
layers with 2 metal bands for each insulation section.
3.10
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Install sheets of the largest manageable size.
B.
Apply full coverage of adhesive to the surfaces of the equipment and to the insulation.
C.
Butt insulation joints firmly together and apply adhesive to insulation edges at joints.
3.11
FINISHES
A.
Paint finished insulation as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply 2 coats of
protective coating to exposed insulation.
3.12
APPLICATIONS
A.
General: Materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B.
Interior, Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping
systems:
1. Domestic cold water.
2. Storm water. Insulate only roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater leaders of storm
water piping.
�. Domestic hot water.
4 Sanitary drains for fixtures accessible to the disabled.
5. Overflow Drain Piping: Same as stormwater.
C.
Interior, Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping
systems:
1. Domestic cold water.
2. Storm water. Insulate only roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater leaders of storm
water piping.
z
3. Domestic hot water.
4. Recirculated hot water.
5. Over Drain Piping: Same as storm water.
D.
Equipment: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following indoor equipment:
'•
1. Domestic cold water equipment, tanks, and pumps.
3.13
PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULES
A.
General: Abbreviations used in the following schedules include:
ITS #002-01/13M
Addendum #5
ems+
A*
ITB #002-01/BM, Addendum #5
1. Field -Applied Jackets: P - PVC, K - Foil and Paper, A - Aluminum, SS - Stainless Steel.
2. Pipe Sizes: NPS - Nominal Pipe Size (DN - Nominal Dimension).
B. Domestic Cold Water and Storm Water All Sizes (Interior): 1/2 inch (13 nim) thick glass fiber,
cellular glass, or flexible elastomeric insulation. Field -applied jacket is not required.
INTERIOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER AND RECIRCULATED HOT WATER
VAPOR
FIELD -
PIPE SIZES
THICKNESS
-BARRIER.
APPLIED
NP
MATERIALS IN INCHES
REQ'D
JACKET
1/2 TO
GLASS FIBER 1/2'
NO
NONE
1-1/4
CELLULAR GLASS 1
NO
NONE
P"
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 1/2
NO
NONE
1-1/2 TO 4
GLASS FIBER -1/2
NO
NONE
CELLULAR GLASS 1
NO
NONE
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 3/4
NO
NONE
5 TO 10
GLASS FIBER 3/4
NO
NONE
�.
CELLULAR GLASS 1-I/2
NO
NONE
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 3/4
NO
NONE
12 TO 36
GLASS FIBER I
NO
NONE
CELLULAR GLASS 1-1/2
NO
NONE
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 3/4
NO
NONE
SANITARY DRAINS
AND TRAPS EXPOSED AT FIXTURES FOR
DISABLED
y4r j
VAPOR
FIELD -
PIPE SIZES
THICKNESS
BARRIER
APPLIED
�»
NP( 5)_
MATERIALS IN INCHES
RE 'D
JACKET
°
1 TO 1-1/2
GLASS FIBER 1
NO
NONE
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 1/2
NO
NONE
3.14
EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULES
INTERIOR EXPOSED DOMESTIC COLD WATER EQUIPMENT,
TANKS, AND PUMPS
VAPOR
FIELD -
THICKNESS IN
BARRIER
APPLIED
MATERIAL
FORM INCHES
RE 'D
.JACKET
r.
�.;
GLASS FIBER
BLOCK OR 1
YES
(P)(K)(A)(SS)
BOARD
CELLULAR GLASS BLOCK I-I/2
YES
(P)(K)(A)(SS)
FLEXIBLE
SHEET 3/4
YES
NONE.
ELASTOMERIC
ITB #002-01/BM Addendum
#5
s�
ITB #002-01/BM, Addendum #5
INTERIOR EXPOSED DOMESTIC COLD WATER EQUIPMENT, TANKS, AND PUMPS
VAPOR
FIELD -
THICKNESS IN _
BARRIER
APPLIED
MATERIAL
FORM INCHES
REO'D
JACKET
GLASS FIBER
BLOCK 2
NO
(A)(SS)
CELLULAR GLASS
BLOCK 2
NO
(A)(SS)
END OF SECTION 15083
�e
b
'
i f
i
ITB #002-01/BM Addendum #5
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13T" STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX: (806) 775-2164
hftp://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #4
ADDENDUM # 4
ITB # 001-02/BM
Silent Wings Museum
MAILED TO VENDOR: January 16, 2002
CLOSE DATE: January 18, 2002 @ 1:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any
item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected -by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. In lieu of the one 1" (one -inch) clear tempered glass as called out on sheet A2.01, details 15/A6.04 and
16/A6.04, and glass type GL-4 in section 08800 of the specifications, use 1/2" (one -half -inch) clear tempered
glass.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Bruce MacNair, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164
or Email to: bmacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
\
Bruce MacNair
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID.
ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 4
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #3
City o Lubbock
�f ADDENDUM # 3
!^"! PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING ITB # OO 1 —O2/BM
1625 13TH STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 Silent Wings Museum
PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX: (806) 775-2164
http://purchasing.ci.l ubbock.tx. us
a MAILED TO VENDOR: January 14, 2002
r CLOSE DATE: January 1.8, 2002 @ 1:00 P.M.
I
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any
item called for in the ITB documents is.supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Under GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, paragraph 9 Contract Documents, Subparagraph 9.3
regarding Worker's Compensation Insurance Experience Rating, is deleted in its entirety.
'^ All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Bruce MacNair, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
" P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164
or Email to: bmacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Bruce MacNair
` Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID.
r! '
4 i
ITB #001-02/13M Addendum 3
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13T" STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX: (806) 775-2164
hftp://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us
MAILED TO VENDOR:
CLOSE DATE:
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #2
ADDENDUM # 2
ITB # 001-02/BM
Silent Wings Museum
January 11, 2002
January 18, 2002 @ 1:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any
item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Budget amount for this phase (Construction) of the project is $1,600,000.00. The $1,882,200.00 stated in the
La opening paragraph of the Notice to Bidders includes Construction and Exhibit design.
** 2. In DIVISION 1 "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", (Work Restrictions) add page number 2 (attached).
_ 3. Asbestos Removal: Contractors may obtain the King Consultants asbestos removal certification letter from
Mr. David Jones, Deputy Director of Aviation, Lubbock International Airport.
4. Contractors are required to secure City of Lubbock Building Permits. However, these permits will be at no
charge to the contractor.
5. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Requirements: Good Faith Efforts (Information to be submitted)
City of Lubbock treats bidders' compliance with good faith efforts requirements as a matter of
responsiveness. Each solicitation for which a contract goal has been established will require the
PM bidders/offerors to submit the following information with its bid as a condition of responsiveness:
1) The names and addresses of DBE firms that will participate in the contract;
2) A description of the work that each DBE will perform;
3) The dollar amount of the participation of each DBE firm participation;
"~ 4) Written and signed documentation of commitment to use a DBE subcontractor whose
participation it submits to meet a contract goal;
5) Written and signed confirmation from the DBE that it is participating in the contract as provided in
the prime contractor's commitment; and
6) If the contract goal is not met, evidence of good faith efforts.
6. To gain access to the building/site during bid preparation, bidders must contact Mr. David Jones,
Deputy Director of Aviation, Lubbock international Airport
7. Sing -In sheets from the Pre -bid meeting, held on January 8, 2002 @10:00 A.M., are attached hereto.
8. Drawings and Specifications:
1) Sheets SK-1 through SK-16, and E3.01A are added as attached.
2) Section 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING, Bid Option #1 is added as attached.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
a Bruce MacNair, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 2
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #2
Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164
or Email to: bmacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Bruce MacNair
n� Senior Buyer
"^ PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID.
PIPE
r*
ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 2
rwh
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #2
PART I - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 2 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
r�•
END OF SECTION 01140
ppi
01140-2
PREBID #00 1 -02/13M
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
January 8, 2002 @ 10:00 AM
OLD TERMINAL BUILDING (6202 N 11127)
PLEASE PRINT
City of Lubbock
, Q IME
'-4 E""-"' '�M'N
BRUCE MACNAIR
'11
SCSIs
P.O. Box 2000
City: Lubbock
State, ZipCode: Texas 79457
v
P
is
(806)775-2163
(806)775-2164
BMacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
Address: k-t) v
City:
%L C-_VCAh4t%W%0Lt%XClWt
State, Zip Code: -It-,
Address: 20Ajw0Y jQf Z!P4V
City:444 '60c A
(Mtv
—
&State, Zip Code: 79'J1 2 -5
,oWl,p TTwt,,
Address: tf c
City:.
(goC
7 oc*-7
State, Zip Code:
L,
Sete j4 -7
Address: 7,4,o&
City: ''6 -�s '-"
1404)u
G .9/0)
—
State, Zip Code: c? 2 V Z_
v, 2
f-,%
-Prvf
Ad
City�
C2Ak_) _
-7 ". 49v
)
744(V-jff3
State, Zip Code:
PAW ax*tc
Address: j+lp AZ 4?
ty: "'d
Vr(9 AV,4- Aok:7-
sate, Zip Code: 7T*0j
A ke Luer►5
Address: 6WUndlete- AVe-
city: Dglta-s
CMIT)
96-1-0111
(TY)
964q6%
1
MDjjetj-S@ pleoetud.
State, Zip Code:
F1
Address: to.
City: "'
3
-7,4,35,1
Pe A
_—�
State, Zip Code: '7f &]o
JoN $9waill)
Address: f V441y.-V /7r2
City: Z Lhhod
State, Zip Code: '?�,Y OY
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code: -r,,,$
Address:
City: 1 bb,,
Tfl. 4 qy,,Yl
State, Zip Code: -1 Ce
7-
:wv
PREDID #001-02/13M
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
January 8, 2002 @ 10:00 AM
OLD TERMINAL BUILDING (6202 N IH 27)
PLEASE PRINT
City of Lubbock
BRUCE MACNAIR
Q
P.O. Box 2000
City: Lubbock
State, Zip Code: Texas 79457
E
T f,
(806)775-2163
,
"
(806)775-2164
I
BMacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
Address:
City: &A 4 CX__
IPG
(Fj3(a
07-MIL
_1 —la
State, Zip Code:
Ltr_
Address:
city: 'de-OCK
711- WO
-79-7 - 9liqlz
5 vn 14 il "Ake."ji ap,
State, Zip Code:
�� �S s
G�z�L�hn
Address:
City:
C__j
'711- 7444
State, Zip Code:
S71<1>AAC,�/f4
LZZ_22,,D 45iqO
Address:
City:
b
'7',/7 2
C! ft;
76 3 33 V
State, Zip Code:
,754414-17M,Al- Qo
Address:
City: _ ( 4-1S.% Ce
-7 (-3
State, Zip Code:
Addres's i ,VUB
C_ f9lK
Ity: -
Ytate, Zip Code:
C. pAw-Ile144d
24�ZAjCrl CIZ-
'Address:
City: 2r"ryq
State, Zip Code: >;- 6),5
1qlt0l;lC
pavi , 54,,
�
Address: Y
City: t.
13-AN'State,
473
q ZJ 3-W
Zip Code: - '
9), 12
lam
Address:
City: 4;izl1X'
_ 4
v ml
—
State, Zip Code:
#14m
Address: F. 0, � _2270..2
Kc,
City: . L-WODo'
(40
(to&
A, 3 et 3 75-
gob
70 -04, V 0
State, Zip Code: )-I4oS
Address:— 46&- F-3e,_J 71-
city: tvtkho� JLC -rey
State, Zip Code: 1 4,
PREBID #001-02/BM
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
January 8, 2002 @ 10:00 AM
OLD TERMINAL BUILDING (6202 N Ill 27)
PLEASE PRINT
COMI*ANY
RE PRESENT IV&
JG ....... . . ..
-TELEPHONE"
NUMBER -l1MBER
FAX
...... .... . .. ....
ADDRESS
P.O. Box 2000
City of Lubbock
BRUCE MACNAIR
City: Lubbock
(806)775-2163
(806)775-2164
BMacnair@nmil.ci.lubbock.tx.us
State, Zip Code: Texas 79457
51
Address: tj Z5 -tj =
City: t-0l&v6t-v '"ry
State, Zip Code: M3
(tV2
?-415%j-p&V-
,
a44p&. CVA4
DO/%4L4UL
Address: 106
City:
%�0-,
(5Ob
-a--
State, Zip Code: TA -
Nag,? nfes�
Address: M�c -3 ZZ2
City:
State, Zip Code: 7X 7ej*,5,z-
74-
h1&w-v Pt *w,
Address:.2%ErS 2-pf
City: 4,-,,64o,-X
State, Zip Code;p,-y (/z 3
06
7ys-- 6 ZV3
7y,S--g z �ev
AA
Address: 5tt4- 34
City: LJL_ L_
State, Zip Code: -7142�4
8743
fttAnrcep�ke,cvj
y-t
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
PREBID #001-02BM
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
January 8, 2002 @ 10:00 AM
OLD TERMINAL BUELDING (6202 N IH 27)
PLEASE PRINT
.TELEPHCJNE
FAX
�5-MAIL:
COMPANY
REP1tE5EN'CATIVE
MAILING AIIDRESS .. ' ..
NUMBER
NUMB1uR;.
ADDiSB _ ...
P.O. Box 2000
City of Lubbock
BRUCE MACNAIR
City: Lubbock
(806)775-2163
(806)775-2164
BMacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
State, Zip Code: Texas 79457
Address: 2TV&I A41,, ^r
CA )
AA mClV— "j.r
1�, �w ,
City: Z"ieac gfy
74 �- #1
'9 '1'- vxo,,QcG
t e— jp�r
State, Zip Code: —I' 41>
Address:
(L125 )
City:I U', � k)
State, Zip Code:'
Address:.? ?q't
('SA6)
Sob
city:
74t 9"P'77
�7-Ti'7�}
}�►'�S f'I�ZG at.oL .C�
, zips..-� ��/'0
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
( U
( U
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
(_ ____)
(^�
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address:
City:
State, Zip Code:
Address: U ( )
City:
State, Zip Code:
PAM
1. PROVIDE AIRTIGHT SEPARATION BETWEEN WORK SPACE, ROOM 125, AND ROOM 120 (N.I.C.)
AT ALL TIMES DURING CONSTRUCTION.
F
2. MODIFY WALL LAYOUT AT ROOM 124. REF. SK-3 OF THIS ADDENDUM.
3. PROVIDE 2HR FIRE SAFING INFILL BETWEEN TO OF EXISTING WALLAND BOTTOM OF ROOF
DECK AT 2HR AREA SEPARATION WALL BETWEEN ROOM 125 AND ADJACENT SPACE,
ROOM 120 (N.I.C.).
4. THE INFILL OF EXISTING OPENINGS BETWEEN ROOM 102 AND ROOM 103 TO OCCUR AT BOTH
SIDES OF WALL AND TYP. AT 3 OPENINGS. REF. SHT. A2.01 OF THE BID DOCUMENTS.
5. CLARIFY TOP OF STEEL DIMENSION AT STEEL TUBE SUPPORT SHOWN ON WALL SECTION
02/A6.00 TO READ 111'-5" IN LIEU OF 100'-0".
6. PROVIDE SELECT FILL AT SPACE BETWEEN NEW STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SLAB AND EXISTING
14" THICK CONCRETE SLAB.
7. METAL ROOF DECK TO HAVE ACCOUSTICAL INFILL AT EACH RIB EQUAL TO N.R.C. .95 PER
METAL DECK MANUFACTURER.
8. ALL METAL STUD FRAMING AT EXTERIOR WALLS TO BE 16 GA. @ 24" O.C. ALL METAL
STUD FRAMING'AT INTERIOR WALLS TO BE 22 GA. @ 24" O.C.
9. REVISE ROOM FINISHES AT ROOMS 100, 101, 101 A, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112,
113, 114, 116, 117, 118, 119, 122. REF. SK-4, 5. & 6 OF THIS ADDENDUM.
10. ADD FINISH TYPE ENTRANCE FLOOR, EF-1 AT VESTIBULE 100.
REF. SK-7 OF THIS ADDENDUM.
11. END WALL CONDITIONS AT WALL TYPE "B" TO RECEIVE WOOD WALL CAP. REF. 09/A8.02
OF THE BID DOCUMENTS AND SK-8 OF THIS ADDENDUM.
Project no: I Reference:
01-0419-101 BID DOCUMENTS
IL
a - HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING
PW 2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 voice: 214.720.6000
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fox: 214.720.6005
Internet: http://www.hok.com
Issued to:
ALL BIDDERS
Date:
iI 11 JANUARY 2002
Sketch No. SK-1
Scale: -_-^
SILENT WINGS
LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
All reproduction & intellectual property rights reserved Q 2002
12. REVISE FASCIA DETAIL AT ROOF OVERHANG. REF. SK-9 OF THIS ADDENDUM.
13. THE UNDERSIDE OF EXISTING OVERHANG AT ROOM 126 TO RECEIVE 1 LAYER 5/8" GYP. BD.
ON 7/8" FURRING CHANNELS. REF. 04/A6.00 AND 09/A6.03 OF THE BID DOCUMENTS AND
SK-10 OF THIS ADDENDUM.
^* 14. FURR-OUT THE UNDERSIDE AND SIDES OF EXISTING STAIR RUNNERS WITH 2 LAYERS 5/8"
GYP. BD. ON MTL. STUD FRAMING TO PROVIDE 1 HR. FIRE RATING. REF. SK-11 OF THIS
.h
ADDENDUM.
15. CLARIFICATION OF ALLOWABLE LIMITS TO SITE CONSTRUCTION AREA AND ACCESS POINTS
CONSTRUCTION AREA. REF. SK-12 OF THIS ADDENDUM.
16. REVISE OPTION #1 TO BE NEW BUILT-UP ROOF SYSTEM IN LIEU OF MODIFIED BITUMEN
°^ ROOF SYSTEM. REF. ATTACHED SPECIFICATION SECTION 07511.
17. PROVIDE POWER SUPPLY AND JUNCTION BOX ABOVE DOOR FOR REQUIRED POWER AT DOORS
' 126A AND 126B. REF E3.01A OF THIS ADDENDUM.
18. REVISE 09/A6.03 AND 04/A6.00 FOR ROOFING SYSTEM TO BE MULTI -PLY BALLASTED
BUILT-UP ROOFING TO MATCH EXISTING ROOF
SYSTEM. INSTALL PER ROOFING MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS & RECOMMENDATIONS. REF.
SK-13 & SK-14 OF THIS ADDENDUM.
19. CLARIFY CONCRETE STAIR @ SOUTH ENTRY TO ROOM 126. REF. SK-15 OF THIS ADDENDUM.
20. CLARIFY CONCRETE LANDINGS @ NORTH END OF ROOM 126.
REF. SK-16 OF THIS ADDENDUM.
21. METAL ROOF DECK IS 20 GA., REF. SHEET OF S1.01 OF THE BID DOCUMENTS.
I
Project no: Reference: Issued to: Date:
01-0419-101 I BID DOCUMENTS I ALL BIDDERS 11 JANUARY 2002
tie • _ _ � Sketch No.
`� SK-2
�e
r,, > r ti� `l/`'� ► Scale:
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP. •� '�
. ;t
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING
.:�".:�+�•"r`
2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 voice: 214.720.6000 `�df' °'' SILENT WINGS
F" LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fox: 214.720.6005 LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Internet: http://www.hok.com rJ
All reproduction & intetMctuol ra ert ri hts reserved 2002 V
EN
6" \-ACCESSIBLE SIGNA(
AT EACH RESTROOP
DOOR
1" TEMPERED GLASS
PANEL
C
16/A6.04
EXHIBITS
124 �j
15/A6.04
o
(ALIGN VERIFY THAT EXISTING CC
FALLS WITHIN NEW WALL
� 1
PATCH OPENING IN p
FLOOR ,
pf
P REF. 04/A6.04
D
6 WING WALLS 6'
9' TALL PERPENDICULAR
-, D TO CURVED WALL. D
D D D D s-
Ir
..: D D
� .tl
Project no: Reference: Issued to: Date:
01-0419-101 l SHEET A2.01 ALL BIDDERS 11 JANUARY 2002
Sketch No.
SK — 3
IL
Scale:
p9�IR P Ih
t.
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING � •�. i..,�„-„-.•e;;•� s .a.
SILENT WINGS
h•+ 2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 Voice: 214.720.6000
'? +::
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fox: 214.720.6005 --„�A.>.`"";:'::�'` � LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
x' Internet:htta://www.hok.com /�� �0 LUBBOCK, TEXAS
All reproduction & lntellectuct property rights reserved 20a2
Project no: Reference: Issued to: Date:
01— 0419-101 SHEET A8.00 ALL BIDDERS 11 JANUARY 2002
Sketch No. SK-4
Scale:
N.T.S.
4 i47Z
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING
2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 voice: 214.720.6000 kSILENT WINGS
_ �4
Dallas, Texas 75201 ,
LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Fax: 214.720,6005
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Internet:http://www.hok.com
All reproductiom & intellectual property rights reserved 0 2002
Reference:
SHEET A8.00
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS. GRAPHICS CONSULTING
2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 voice: 214.720.6000
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fox: 214.720.6005
t Internet:httc://www.hok.Com
Issued to:
ALL BIDDERS
�'Wd A�
s
Date:
11 JANUARY 2002
Sketch No.
SK-5
Scale:
N.T.S.
SILENT WINGS
LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Project no: Reference: Issued, to: Date:
01 — 0419-101 SHEET AB.00 I ALL BIDDERS I 11 JANUARY 2002
t Sketch No.
SK-6
.'``yak
Fz �'7, r'�`E11, Scale:
}}++ t�, i e ° N.T.S.
pa'
t
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING
2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 voice: 214.720.6000
t�
f'4 SILENT WINGS
Dallas, Texas 75201 rg>: 214.720.6005 LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Internet:http://www.hok.com �� ��_ �; -y i LUBBOCK, TEXAS
All reproduction & intellectuol- property rights reserved 0 2002
:ESTROOMS)
RER: SANY METAL
530 BEIGE
TOILET PARTITIONS
RER: FORMICA
299-58 EBONY OXIDE
MATTE
TOP
RER: FORMICA
7251 GRAPHITE CORRUGATION
MATTE
CABINET FRONTS
RER: FORMICA
7698-58 ASHEN CERAMIC
MATTE
TOP do BACKSPLASH
RER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS OR EQUAL
SWID25 ORIGAMI WHITE
EGGSHELL
RER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS OR EQUAL
SW1023 ERMINE
EGGSHELL
RER: SHERWIN WILLIAMS OR EQUAL
SW1014 HEMATITE
EGGSHELL
t.le
RUBBER COVE BASE
®MANUFACTURER:
STYLE:
COLOR:
HEIGHT:
ARMSTRONG
RUBBER COVE BASE
06 OUVINE
4"
CONCRETE STAIN
L.M. SCOFFIELD
®MANUFACTURER:
STYLE:
LITHOCHROME
COLOR:
A-57 PLATINUM
ENTRANCE FLOORING
C/S ENTRANCE FLOORING SYSTEMS
®MANUFACTURER:
STYLE:
ENTRANCE CARPETING PWPT—C—TILE
COLOR:
TO BE SELECTED
FINISH
PLAN LEGEND
- Project no: Reference:
01 — 0419-101 I SHEET AB.00
FLOOR FINISH WALL FINISH
BASE FINISH `--CEILING FINISH
DENOTES CHANCE IN FLOOR FINISH
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING. INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING
2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 Voice: 214.720.6000
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fox: 214.720.6005
' Internet: http://www.hok.com
All reproduction do intellectual property rights reserved 0 2002
Issued to:
ALL BIDDERS
Date:
11 JANUARY 2002
Sketch No.
SK-7
Scale:
N.T.S.
SILENT WINGS
LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
No Text
fANDING SEAM METAL ROOF METAL ROOF DECK W/ ACCOUSTICAL
7ELT INFILL @ EACH RIB (N.R.C..95).
IN & A VARIES OMIT INFILL BEYOND CURTAIN WALL
REF. STRUCT.
ETAL PANEL CLIP
IN 1 1/2» S� LOPE_ WOOD BLOCKING
VELS & 1:12 END CLOSURE
iING TOP
PREFINISHED METAL
END FLASHING
� PREFINISHED METAL
'o EAVE FLASHING
' STEEL TEE
REF. STRUCT.
PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA
_ 3 h FLASHING
1 PREFINISHED METAL LINER PANEL
t - — ON 1 1/2" FURRING CHANNELS
PAINTED STEEL ROOF JOIST
STEEL ANGLE SUPPORT REF. STRUCT.
• REF. STRUCT. STEEL ANGLE SUPPORT
— PREFINISHED METAL FLASHING REF. STRUCT.
5 1/2" BACKER ROD & SEALANT
two
2
E
fi
t
k
Project no: Reference: Issued to: Date:
01-0419-101 ( 08/A6.03 I ALL BIDDERS I 11 JANUARY 2002
Sketch No.
SK-9
i-.._ 31.ASr4, Scale:
*
At
• i
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.,� =�
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING r5-.
#r SILENT WINGS
0* 2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 voice: 214.720.6000
�;�r•.`r' c: LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fox: 214.720.6005 ` • Internet: http://www.hok.Com LUBBOCK, TEXAS
All reproduction h inteflectuoi property rights reserved 0 2002
I,VIV�,i\L I L L/iIVUIIVU
r.
E:.
�0
r
\ 1 LAYER 5/8"
ON 7/8" FURF
\ O OVER EXISTING
sow
�I
EL = 9,_0„
:RET ANDING
., N \
7
1
f
Project no: Reference:
t 01 — 0419-101 O1/A4.00
ILf —
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING
oft 2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 voice: 214.720.6000
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fax: 214.720.6005
Internet: http://www.hok.com
Issued to:
ALL BIDDERS
D?K
4
EW WALL
COL/
Date:
11 JANUARY 2002
Sketch No. SK-10
Scale: 1/8,
SILENT WINGS
LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
i
�
—
, 8 1
0
DLUMN
k,
EXISTING COLUMN
Y.
P-R-EFUNCTION /
117 •
LINE OF DROPPED SOFFIT
AT UNDERSIDE OF EXISTING
STAIR. PROVIDE 2 LAYERS
OF 5/8" GPY. BD. ON METAL
/ FRAMING AT BOTH BOTTOM
AND SIDES TO COMPLY
\ WITH 1 HR. FIRE RATING
4
/nil
r ` Project no: Reference: Issued to: Dote:
01-0419-101 i 02/A3.00 ( ALL BIDDERS ( 11 JANUARY 2002
Sketch No. SK-11
1i.Mke//� Scale:
W�, Q 1/4'
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP. 70'4
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING
2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 Voice: 214.720,6000 SILENT WINGS
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fox: 214.720.6005 LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Internet:http://www.hok.com j�w LUBBOCK, TEXAS
All reproduction k intellectuol property rights reserved Z 2002 /
LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION FENCE
so.-o.
LINE OF SUNG FENCE o
o
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
FENCING
o p
_ c p
G.0 PROVIDE NEW SITE ACCESS GATE
G-0• HIGH CHAIN LINK WITH 3 BARB WIRE
STRANDS AT TOP TO MATCH EXISTING FENCE
EXISTING BUILDING �O
4
f
OWN
Project no: Reference: Issued to: Date:
01-0419-101 SHEET GO.01 I ALL BIDDERS 11 JANUARY 2002
• _ _ _ ���0 �A Sketch No. SK-12
Scale:
{, N.T.S.
HELLMUTH OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING 70214
"..��yP�
2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 voice: 214.720.6000 SILENT WINGS
LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fax: 214.720,6005 rt:R'. LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Internet: http://www.hok.com %J
All reproduction k intellectual Pros)ertV rights reserved 0 2002
O
j
TOP OF STEEL
ELEV = 124'-0"
.4•r
10/A6.03 0 1'-9 1/2"
PREFINISHED METAL --- I-
GUTTER
6" METAL STUD
@ 16" O.C.
PREFINISHED RIBBED
_ METAL PANEL
-----=----------------- -,
REF.
TMEP BATT iiNSULATION
FLASH TUBE PENETRATION -
PER 6MACNA ARCHITECTURAL
MANQAL, 4TH ED., PLATE 117
T.O. STEEL TUBE
ELEV = 116'-6"1
I
L----- ----------------
o :. I 1
I I
I
BALLASTED BUILT-UP ROOF
�^ SYSTEM TO MATCH EXISTING
ROOF SYSTEM. INSTALL PER
T.O. STEEL TUBE ROOFING MANUFACTURERS
ELEV = 112'-5" RECOMMENDATIONS & REQ'MTS.
OIL T.O. EXIST. ROOF
ELEV = 111'-11"
Project no: Reference.
01-0419-101 I 04/A6,00
• �,es,
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP,
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING
2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 vo;ce: 214.720,6000
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fox: 214.720.6005
Internet: http://www.hok.com
All re roduct;on do inteuectuel pfoperty rights reserved C 2002
Issued to:
ALL BIDDERS
Y1,Mi� 'rI
��`
SLOPI
-` `-1:12
Date:
11 JANUARY 2002
Sketch No.
SK-13
Scale:
3/8'
SILENT WINGS
LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
J
VVIIM UUNUL&W tAJILNLKJ
Project no: Reference: Issued to: Dote:
01-0419 —101 09/A6.03 ALL BIDDERS I 11 JANUARY 2002
I L kSD A Sketch No. SK-14
5
Scale:
f i"4
11 - HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING. INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING
2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 Voice: 214.720.6000 SILENT WINGS Of
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fox: 214.720.6005 LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Internet: http://....hok.Com LUBBOCK, TEXAS
All reproduct;on & intellectual property fights reserved 0 2002
DOOR AS SCHED.
1 1/1' DW STEEL PIPE
" PAINTED HANDRAIL
PROVIDE BLOCKING AT WALL
wee
AS REQ'D.
LINE OF EXIST W
1/2• EXPANSION INT
DISCHARGE FOR ROOF
DRAINS
REF. MEP 1" 1'-11" •�
N
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 14 REBAR
STAIR W/ BROOM FINISH ® 12• D.C.
SELECT FILL
EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB
eta*
EQ. EQ. L EO.
�n
fi
• DIA STEEL PIPE
HANDRAIL
WALL MOUNT BRACK BLOCKING AT WALL
'D.
LINE OF EXIST. WAIL
1/2• EXPANSION
JOINT o
e� DISCHARGE FOR ROOF
DRAINS SURFACE MOUNT
REF. MEP BRACKET, TYP. 1•Co
N
CAST -RI -PLACE CONCRETE
STAIR W/ BROOM FINISH EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB
Project no: Reference: Issued to: Date:
01 — 0419-101 03/A3.00 & 04/A3.00 I ALL BIDDERS , 11 JANUARY 2002
• - _��� fi Sketch No. SK-15
Scale:
`�. 1/2'
V La
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM,- LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING�f '• ,,� ���'
19p SILENT WINGS
.,� 2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 Voice: 214.720.6000 o'
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fax: 214.720.6005 � LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
k Internet: http://www-hok.com LUBBOCK, TEXAS
` All reproduction & 7nteuectuol property rights reserved 2002
NOTE: CONCRETE LANDINGS TO BE
REINFORCED CONCRETE TOPPING SLAB
OVER EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB.
REINFORCE WITH WWM 4X4-W2.OX2.0 MIN.
SLOPE, CROSS SLOPE & CHANGES IN
LEVELS TO BE T.A.S. COMPLIANT
CONCRETE LANDING
ff
�60 �
/
70
8 03/ 6.04
A s\oJ /
s
CONCRETE LANDING
q� O/
r)
r�o
Project no: Reference: (Issued to: Date:
01-0419-101 I SHEET A2.01 j ALL BIDDERS I 11 JANUARY 2002
` Sketch No. SK-16
�`�� l��r Scale: 1/S"
LU
n
HELLMUTH, OBATA + KASSABAUM, LP.
ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING, PLANNING, INTERIORS, GRAPHICS CONSULTING F� !S , �-9 ; SILENT WINGS
2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800 LB 106 Voice: 214.720.6000
Dallas, Texas 75201 Fox: 214.720.6005 LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Internet:http://.W..hok.cor. LUBBOCK, TEXAS
All reproduction & intellecluol praperty rights reserved Q 2002
ig
[AN-10-02THU 08:22 AM SCHMIDT STACY ENGRS
FAX NO, 2148241155
P. 02/02
K 7
tax
V
TAU c A
F 'Imw
< to"
stfz! M. 4-5
'44
pI.
4 ;
$K.tS
IU4)r
\CX76LF%
rl,;L*LS N-
Al
z
D
1 .4 0-45
ONA evw
K
OK POWER SUPPLY AND JUNCTION BOX ABOVE DOOR FOR SECURITY.
SCALE: 111T = I' - 0'
SCHUMT& SILENT %MN08 JOB NO. DWG.NO.
STACY c*nuLnNr. ENriNwm 1189001
4W Cr"LACE DATE: E3.01a
2711 N. �MELL AM AnnFMnl lei
pro
r7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 07511 -13UILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
BID OPTION #1
PARTI-GENERAL
SUMMARY
rt
This Section includes built-up asphalt roofing systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Performance Requirements:
1. Prevent water migration from entering building through roof membrane and related
flashings.
2. Provide system of components which results in Factory Mutual wind uplift rating of 1-90
and Fire Hazard Classification Class 1, in accordance with FM Loss Prevention Data
Sheet 1-28.
Interface with adjacent systems: provide for watertight interface with related flashings,
counterflashings, copings and expansion joints.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, including manufacturer instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples: For each product included in roofing system.
D. Research/evaluation reports.
E. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install
manufacturer's products.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary components for roofing system from single roofing system
manufacturer. Provide secondary materials as required by manufacturer of primary materials.
C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire -test -response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by
01/11/02
07511 -1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
rM
1. Maintain Class A, ASTM E 108, for application.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference „at project site.
1. Discuss sequence and scheduling of work and interface with other trades.
2. Conduct tour of roof deck and review substrate surfaces to receive roofing and flashings.
Report on substrate acceptability, possible problem areas and recommend remedies.
3. Minimum Agenda:
a. Review requirements for Work and conditions that could possibly interfere with
successful performance of Work.
b. Establish installation schedules and sequence.
C. Coordinate work with in -place and subsequent construction.
d. Review weather and working conditions.
e. Review installation procedures, including:
1) Substrate requirements.
2) Insulation requirements.
3) Membrane requirements.
4) Surfacing requirements, including sequencing
5) Roof terminations, night seals, flashings, roof drains and expansion joint
requirements.
6) Mechanical equipment placement, supports, and height requirements.
7) Inspection, testing, and quality control procedures.
8) Procedures for making roof penetrations after membrane installation.
9) Protection requirements for construction period beyond roofing installation.
10) Warranty requirements, Owner expectations and exclusions.
E. Conform to NRCA — Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, except where more stringent
requirements are indicated.
°* F. Manufacturer's qualified technical representative shall visit Project site to advise applicator of
t.: procedures and precautions for installation of roofing materials and upon completion of roofing
to verify warranty requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or
workmanship within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.- Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
"" 01/11/02 07511 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
Built-up Asphalt Roofing:
a. Firestone Building Products Company.
b. GAF Materials Corporation.
C. Intec/Permaglas; Div. of U.S. Intec, Inc.
d. Johns Manville International, Inc.
2.2 BASE -SHEET MATERIALS
A. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type I, nonperforated, asphalt -impregnated and -coated, glass -
fiber sheet, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES
A. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt -impregnated, glass -fiber felt.
B. Cap Sheet: ASTM D 3909, asphalt -impregnated and -coated, glass -fiber cap sheet, with white
coarse mineral -granule top surfacing and fine mineral surfacing on bottom surface.
2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type I, asphalt -impregnated and -coated, glass -fiber sheet,
dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
2.5 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
B. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as recommended by built-up roofing system
manufacturer for application.
2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with built-up roofing.
B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing
system manufacturer for application.
C. Cold -Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt -based, one- or two-
part, asbestos -free, cold -applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with
built-up roofing base flashings.
D. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -
resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to
substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
"" 01/11/02 07511 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.7 ROOF INSULATION
A. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 per
inches, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B. Cold Fluid -Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid -applied adhesive formulated
to adhere roof insulation to substrate.
C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board.
D. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic -fiber insulation board.
E. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic -fiber insulation board, 1/2" inch thick
2.9 METAL FLASHINGS
A. General
1. Shop fabricate components to maximum extent possible to minimize site fabrication.
2. Fabricate to allow for adjustments in field for proper anchoring and joining.
3. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, free from distortion and defects.
4. Fabricate corners form one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; solder for rigidity;
seal with sealant.
5. Verify all flashing shapes are compatible with roofing system.
6. Materials:
a. Pre-finsihed galvanized steel, smooth finish, .032 inch, minimum
b. Color to be selected by Architect.
B. Sheet Metal Thickness/Mass:
1. Flashing: In accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Chapter 4.
2. Coping, fascia/gravel stop: In accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal
manual, Table 3-1
C. Flashing and Counter Flashing:
1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Chapter 4
2. Hem exposed flashings on underside 1/2'; miter and seam corners.
3. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend minimum 2 inches over wall surfaces.
D. Expansion Joint:
1. Premanufactured roof/roof bellows:
a. Field verify size to match existing.
l_
A 01/11/02 07511 - 4
N
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
b. Curb mounted with 26 gauge aluminum flanges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
A. Remove existing roofing system to existing concrete substrate. Prepare existing concrete
substrate to receive new roofing according to manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C. Nailer Strips: Mechanically fasten 4-inch nominal width wood nailer strips of same thickness
as insulation perpendicular to sloped roof deck.
D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness.
Where overall insulation thickness is 1-1/2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints
of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each
direction.
F. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:
1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate recommended by
manufacturer and allow primer to dry.
2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
3.
G. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.
3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines
for the Application of Built-up Roofing."
B. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing membrane sheets are
not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
C. Substrate -Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering
building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.
01/11/02 07511 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
m.
D. Install one lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants.
Attach base sheet as follows:
I. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
E. Install two ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without
stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies
throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply
sheets over and terminate beyond cants.
r�
1. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
F. Cap Sheet: Install lapped granulated cap sheet starting at low point of roofing system. Offset
laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching. Lap in direction
to shed water. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants.
1. Embed cap sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at
�^* penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and
4 inches onto field of roofing membrane.
C. Install stripping, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, where metal
flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing.
3.5 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install metal work in accordance with SMACNA.
B. Install units plumb, level, square and free from warp or twist while maintaining dimensional
tolerances and alignment with surrounding construction.
C. Apply asphalt mastic on metal surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials and
dissimilar metals.
D. Miter, lap seam and close corner joints with solder. Seal seams and joints watertight.
E. Install expansion joint per manufacturer's instructions.
F. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and roof accessories.
END OF SECTION 07511
01/11/02 07511 - 6
ITB #001-02/8M. Addendum #1
10ty of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13T" STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX: (806) 775-2164
http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us
MAILED TO VENDOR:
CLOSE DATE:
ADDENDUM # 1
ITB # 001-021BM
Silent Wings Museum
January 7, 2002
January 18, 2002 @ 1:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any
item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Replace original Bid Submittal Contract with attached LUMP SUM BID SUBMITTAL CONTRACT.
2. In DIVISION 1 "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", replace original Section 01100 (Summary) with attached
Section 01100 (Summary).
3. In DIVISION 1 "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", replace original Section 01310 (Project Management and
Coordination) with attached Section 01310 (Project Management and Coordination).
4. In DIVISION 1 "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", replace original Section 01770 (Closeout Procedures) with
- attached Section 01770 (Closeout Procedures).
5. In DIVISION 8 "DOORS AND WINDOWS", add the attached Section 08800 (Glazing).
4 6. Glass type and color are included in Section 08800 (Glazing), see item 5 above.
O
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Bruce MacNair, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
(; Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164
or Email to: bmacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
r�
ruce MacNair
' Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID.
•' ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 1
r.
r- ;
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
DATE:
PROJECT NUMBER: #001-02113M - SILENT'WINGS MUSEUM
Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a SILENT WINGS MUSEUM, having carefully
examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and
the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended
project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to
construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein
and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract
documents.
BASE BID: Renovation to existing air terminal building and construction of an addition to accommodate exhibition
spaces and ancillary spaces for the Silent Wings Museum.
($ )
MATERIALS:
r
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL BASE BID: ($ )
._ OPTION #1: Remove existing built-up roof and replace with new ballasted modified bitumen roof system.
PM
MATERIALS: ($
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL OPTION #1 (ADD): ($ }
OPTION #2: Add six clear anodized aluminum panels over existing mosaic tile at front.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL OPTION #2 (ADD): ($ )
OPTION #3: At exterior metal panel wall systems in rooms 116 and 126, remove 6 inch metal stud framing at 24 inches
o.c. and batt insulation. Replace with structural steel studs at approximately 15' o.c., horizontal girts as
t,
recommended by the metal panel manufacturer and add 2-1/2" thick rigid insulation board.
r+ MATERIALS: ($
SERVICES: ($
TOTAL OPTION #3 (DEDUCT): ($
OPTION #4: On exterior metal panels, standing seam metal roof, flashing, and soffit panels, change paint from "Old
Town Grey" to Duranar XL "Silver".
MATERIALS: ($
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL OPTION #4 (ADD): ($ )
OPTION #5: Delete Lithochrome concrete color in room 126.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
P41,
TOTAL OPTION #5 (DEDUCT): ($
The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the
accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated.
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project by Octoberl, 2002, thereafter as stipulated in the
specifications and other contract documents. Substantial completion and a certificate of occupancy for the renovations to
the existing building must be completed by August 15, 2002; substantial completion and certificate of occupancy for the
construction of the addition must be completed by September 1, 202. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as
liquidated damages the sum of $250.00 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess
of the time set forth herein above for completion of each phase of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general
conditions of the contract documents. The liquidated damages for completion of each phase may be additive. If final
completion is not achieved by October 1, 2002, liquidated damages increase to $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) per
calendar day.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on
which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
.� 2
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable
without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the
bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all
necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars
($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the
event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents,
insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of
receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the
undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a
competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be
changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid
price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID
PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM
PRIOR TO BID OPENING.
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTEST:
Z
Secretary
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
w Addenda No.
Date
Addenda No.
Date
Addenda No.
Date
Addenda No.
Date
r+
M/WBE Firm:
Date:
Authorized Signature
(Printed or Typed Name)
Company
Address
City,
State
Telephone:
Fax:
County
Zip Code
3
No Text
r
t
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
To Be Completed by Bidder
And Attached to Bid Submittal
I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been
reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of
Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock,
furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid.
Contractor OW (Signature) Contractor (Print)
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME:
' (Print or Type )
WORKER'S COMPENSATION EXPERIENCE RATING:
For states that do not participate in the National Council on Compensation Insurance Rating, attach a letter from your insurance
company that verifies their workers compensation rating is equivalent to the National Council on Compensation Insurance rating.
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS:
Name of Agent/Broker:
Address of Agent/Broker:
City/State/Zip:
Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( }
Agent/Broker Email Address:
Date:
NOTE TO CONTRACTOR
If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid and award
the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please
contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165.
BID #001-02/13M - SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
.�. 5
IN
_ ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
.» SECTION 0I I00 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Project consists of renovations to existing 1950's air terminal and construction of
a one-story addition to accommodate exhibits describing the history and role of gliders during World
War II.
1. Project Location: 6202 N. IH 27;Lubbock, Texas 79403
2. Owner: City of Lubbock; Lubbock International Airport; Administration Offices; 5401 N. Martin
Luther King Blvd.; Lubbock, Texas 79403.
B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated December 20, 2001, were prepared for Project
by Hellmuth, Obata + Kassabaum, LP (HOK); 2001 Ross Avenue, Suite 2800; Dallas, Texas 75201.
1.3 CONTRACT[S]
A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.
1.4 WORK SEQUENCE
!- A. Work in the existing building shall be substantially complete with certificate of occupancy by August
15, 2002. Work in the new addition shall be substantially complete with certificate of occupancy by
September 1, 2002.
1.5 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Except as noted, Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations,
including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor shall not occupy or utilize any
areas above the ground floor of the existing building.
f.
1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for performance of certain construction
` operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this
Contract. This contract will include the following construction of a new entry plaza and parking lot
modifications.
a
B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly,
without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
t;
ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 1
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
1.7 FUTURE WORK
A. Future Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for additional work to be performed at the site
after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of
preparatory work under this Contract. The Contract for future work will include the installation of
exhibits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
- ` PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
j
a
"` ITB #00 1 -021BM Addendum 1
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
SECTION 0 13 10 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
Q
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
I . General project coordination procedures.
2. Conservation.
3. Coordination Drawings.
4. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
5. Project meetings.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation
and field -engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to
ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,
included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and
operation.
B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures
with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure
orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the
following:
C.
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings. r
6. Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
�`" ITS #001-02/BM Addendum i
r
ITB #001-021BM, Addendum #1
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into,
k the Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates
maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is
required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
I . Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for
mechanical and electrical installations.
B. Staff Names: Within 5 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home,
mobile, and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals
assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary
telephone.
1.5 . PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Attendees:_ Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required,
of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and
times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a
time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 7 days after execution of the Agreement.
Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review
responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and
its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties
shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work..
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
•�- b. Phasing.
C. Critical work sequencing.
d. Designation of responsible personnel.
0" e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
k.
E-
ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 1
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
..,A g. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
h. Submittal procedures.
i. Preparation of Record Documents.
j. Use of the premises.
k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
1. Parking availability.
in. Office, work, and storage areas.
n. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
0. First aid.
p. Security.
q. Progress cleaning.
r. Working hours.
C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at bi-weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings
with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,
supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination,
or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other
items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to
status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine
whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to
Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be
expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure "that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
-' 3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off -site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12)• Quality and work standards.
13) Change Orders.
14) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should
have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous
meeting and report.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised
schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
Oi
ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 1
ram-+,
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
V" PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
ii
e
w ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Warranties.
5. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
6. Final cleaning.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products
of those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list,
and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services
and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final
Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and
similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials; and similar items to location designated by Owner.
Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel
of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction
tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaningrequirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect
will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items,
1TB #001-02/BM Addendum 1
ITB #001-021BM, Addendum #1
,., either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion,
complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the
list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment,
and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect
will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that
must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit 3 copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas
disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.[
k
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record
Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's
reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue or black line prints of Contract Drawings and
Shop Drawings.
I. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown
originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is
Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints.
ITB #001-021BM Addendum 1
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily
identified and recorded later.
` b. Record data as, soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before
enclosing concealed installations.
2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
�'" 3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and .
similar identification where applicable.
4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
j'"" DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable
E paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
C. . Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract
t modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that
indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment
furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings, where applicable.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification
Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the
Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of
each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and
maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1. . Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment
descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations.
2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance, and
copies of warranties and bonds.
EP'!
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data
in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate
contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front
and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and
subject matter of contents.
I.7 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work
where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 1
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
.+, 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as
necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- I!2-by-1l-inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to
identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES;"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the
surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or
that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and
equipment not part of a system.
1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation,
provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and
course content.
B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each
system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each
training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline.
1. Include instruction for system design and operational philosophy, review of documentation,
operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
"'" A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local
laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface
or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or fora portion of Project:
!!1!
ITB #001-021BM Addendum 1
ITS #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
., a.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign
substances.
b.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign
deposits.
C.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
d.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of
stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weatheringof
exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
e.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
f.
Sweep concrete floors broom -clean in unoccupied spaces.
g.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if
�^
visible soil or stains remain.
h.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or
broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking
care not to scratch surfaces.
i.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
j.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace
finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show
evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical
nameplates.
^^ k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove
excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
1. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
in. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting
from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace
` burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy
r
starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new
fixtures.
p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project
of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
s-r D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess
materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage
systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
r�
ITS #001-021SM Addendum 1
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1 SUMMARY
" A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications:
1. Doors.
2. Glazed curtain walls.
3. Glazed entrances.
4. Storefront framing.
5.. Interior glass panels.
1.2
A.
B.
�4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass
thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size
openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or.
heat treated or fully tempered) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according
to the following requirements:
.a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As specified by applicable code for parts/ portions of
building.
b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not
more than 15 deg rees off vertical and under wind action.
1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
C. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm.
d. Thickness of Tinted and Heat -Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint
F color indicated throughout Project.
e� C. Thermal Movements:. Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from a maximum
change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C) in ambient and surface temperatures, respectively, acting on
glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures
of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss.
r*
m D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified
based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and a nominal 1;'2-
inch- 13-mm -) wide interspace.
ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 1
i
P"
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
3. Center -of -Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer
program, expressed as Btu!' sq. 11. x h r de F (W'sq. m x K).
4. Center -of -Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298
WINDOW 4.1 computer program.
5. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic
clear float glass; 12 inch long bead of glazing sealant in colors indicated.
C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
D. Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports.
E. Shop Drawings: Indicating sections and details of glass and glazing materials at framing members
including head, mullions, transoms, jambs, and sills.
F. Informational Submittals: Test reports of glazing sealant; Certifications specified in Quality Assurance;
Manufacturer's instructions, Letter certifying compatibility and use of glazing .gaskets.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to
determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid,
optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Glass of each type to be produced by same manufacturer.
C. Certifications: Manufacturer's letter certifying glass and glazing compatibility; Manufacturer's letter
certifying that sealed insulating units meet or exceed specifications.
D. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z97.1.
E. Glazing Publications: Comply with recommendations of the following, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."
2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines".
F. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked with certification label of Insulating Glass
Certification Council or Associated Laboratories, Inc.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by manufacturer, in
which manufacturer agrees to furnish replacements for units that deteriorate from normal use by
developing defects attributable to the manufacturing process, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project
site, within warranty period.
ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 1
w ITB #001-021BM, Addendum #1
1. Coated Glass:
a. Defects: Peeling, cracking, and other indications of deg radation of metallic coating.
b. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Insulating Glass:
a. Deterioration: Failure of hermetic seal resulting in obstruction of vision by dust, moisture,
or film on interior surfaces of glass.
b. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
I'
` PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Glass Manufacturers:
1. PPG Industries.
2. Guardian Industries
3. Libbey-Owens Ford Co.
B. Acceptable Glass Coating/ Laminating Manufacturers:
1. Guardian Industries
2. Viracon
3. Interpane
2.2 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class
as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.
B. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select);
class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to
bottom edge of glass as installed. Heat soak all tempered glass units.
C. Coated Glass, General: Provide coated glass complying with requirements indicated in this Article and
in schedules at the end of Part 3.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat -strengthened) coated float glass in place of coated annealed glass where
needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to
comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated.
D. Insulating -Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated
interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in
this Article and in the Insulating -Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3.
ITB #001-02/BM Addendum 1
t ,
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
1.
Provide Kind HS (heat -strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist
thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass -
design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully
I
tempered) where safety glass is required by governing agencies.
2.
Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Insulating -
Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured
perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.
3.
Sealing System: Dual seal with manufacturers standard primary and secondary sealants.
4.
Spacer: Manufacturer'sstandard.
5.
Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard.
n•
6.
Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6 mm.
7.
Interspace Content: Air.
8.
Acceptable Product: PPG "Solargreen" (Exterior) plus %z inch air space + "Sungate 500 (3)"
�^^
(low-E coating).
2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing
channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Colors of Exposed Sealants: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 920, Type S (single component), Grade NS (nonsag), Class 25,
Use NT (nontraffic), M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O.
PM
2.4 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of
100 percent with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800.
^ B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed -cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both
surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for
the following types:
1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid
r,,,, sealant.
2.5 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of type and material indicated below or as
recommended by storefront, curtainwall, and glazing manufacturer, and of profile and hardness required
to maintain watertight seal:
1. EPDM dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 846.
2. Silicone dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 1115.
3. Silicone soft compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type 11, black.
ITB #001-021BM Addendum 1
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated,.and with a
0" proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
9
W
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by
glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with
edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
glazing publications.
1. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
2. ' Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance
and appearance from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site.
3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by sealant
compatibility and adhesion testing.
4. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
5. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm)
unless gaskets and glazing tapes ate used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances.
B. Protection:
1. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
2. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations,
including weld splatter.
C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged, including natural
causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
ITB #001-021BM Addendum 1
Poll
. 0-
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INVITATION TO BID
1610
TITLE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
BID NUMBER: 001-02/13M
ACCOUNT NUMBER: 253.90138.8304.20000
EDA PROJECT NUMBER:
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
00
bm
r�
!r^
t
INDEX
1.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
2.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3.
BID SUBMITTAL
4.
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
.r.
5.
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
6.
PAYMENT BOND
7.
PERFORMANCE BOND
S.
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
9.
CONTRACT
.•M
10.
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
11.
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
12.
SPECIFICATIONS
No Text
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
t ITB #001-021BM
E , Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in
the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401,
until 1:00 o'clock p.m. on January 18th, 2002 or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all
planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described
project with a budget amount of $1,882,200,00:
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of
the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is
actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above
first written.
Bids are due at 1:00 o'clock p.m. on January 18th, 2002 and the City of Lubbock City Council will
consider the bids on January 24th, 2002 at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon
thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities.
The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current BA9 Mating of -a or superior.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the
total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary
bonds within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. The bid bonds of all bidders shall be
retained until after the award of contract is made. The bid bond of the successful bidder shall be retained until the
contract is fully executed by all parties, the receipt of all necessary insurance certificates, and the posting of
performance and payment bonds. The failure of the bidder to accept an award and file acceptable insurance
certificates and required bonds within 15 days after notice of award shall be just cause for cancellation of the
award and forfeiture of the bid bond to the City of Lubbock as liquidated damages. Award may then be made to
the next lowest responsive and responsible bidder.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all
local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have
been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -
mandatory pre -bid conference on January Oth, 2002 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Old Terminal Building (6202 N. IH
27), Lubbock, Texas.
Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 162513'
Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the
bidder for a $100 refundable charge per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained through City of
Lubbock, 1625 13th St., Room L04, Lubbock, TX 79401, Phone: (806) 775-2167. Plans and specifications will
be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment,
the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's
account number.
- CONTINUED NEXT PAGE -
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
' included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which
document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision
of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale
and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage
scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in
.,F. response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or
national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with
disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability.
If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please
contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the
meeting.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
""A Victor Kilman 0
Purchasing Manager
Owl
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1 BID DELIVERY. TIME & DATE
1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later 1:00 p.m.
CST, January 181E 2002 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will
be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a
sealed envelope or container plainly labeled m the lower left-hand comer: "ITB #001-02/BM SILENT
WINGS MUSEUM'S and the bid opening date and timer Bidders musfalso include their company name
MUSE.
and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to:
Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager
City of Lubbock
1625 13th Street, Room L-04
Lubbock, Texas 79401
1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a
bid does not ensure tF at the tiid"Ift be delivered on time or delivered at all: if bidder does not hand
deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt.
1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier
service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic
transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS.
1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an
addendum.
2 PRE -BID MEETING
2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda
as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandatory pre -bid meeting
will be held at 10:00 a.m. January 8t6; 2002 in;Old Terminal Building„(6202 N. IH 27- Lubbock. Texas.
All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they
represent.
2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attendthe pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The
City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do
not attend the pre -bid meeting.
3 ADDENDA &MODIFICATIONS
3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda.
3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may
request an in thereof from the Purchasing Department: At the request of the bidder, or in the
event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be
made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department: Such addendum issued by the
Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will
become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO
VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS 1WILLBE`B`1NDtNG. In orderto have a request for
interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the
City of Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than ten (10) days before the bid .closing date.
3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock
shall not be legally'bound by_any*amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information
supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in
i' preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with
any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in
any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in
preparing responses.
3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders.
4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all
requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications.
4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations
that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to
Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to
comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid.
4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents,
shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received,
and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it
shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided
sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications.
If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions,
then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and
adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must
be submitted no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the opening of bids.
BID PREPARATION COSTS
5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the
preparation and submission of a bid.
5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or
equipment.
5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder.
6 TRADE SECRETS. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT
6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision,
including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions.
6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to
release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular
portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from
public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the
event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being
confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal
position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In
the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent
jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the
Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be
made available to the requester.
6.3 Marking your entire bid CON FIDENTIAUPROP RI ETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open
Records Act.
The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may
be required to pay.
8 CONFLICT OF INTEREST
8.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with
any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock in regard to this bid.
2
8.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered,
conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special
treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other
exercise of discretion concerning this bid.
9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
9.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the
General Conditions.
9.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for
the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work
contemplated by said contract documents.
9.3 The Bidder's attention is called to the provision that no Contractor, Subcontractor or other
company or business entity, that has a Worker's Compensation Insurance Experience Rating of
greater than one (1) will be permitted to work on the proposed construction project. Bidders that
.'. have a Worker's Compensation Experience Rating greater than one(1) will be considered non-
responsive bidders. The Contractors Workers Compensation Rating is based on the National Council on
Compensation Insurance rating. The City understands that not all states participate in this program. For
those contractors whose states do not participate, the City will accept a letter from their insurance
company that verifies that their workers compensation rating is equivalent to the National Council on
Compensation Insurance rating. Written evidence of a Worker's Compensation Insurance Experience
Rating of greater than one (1). or equivalent, must be submitted with the bid documents.
10 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by
,. the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without
charge. The contract documents may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders.
11 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS
11.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the
bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language. requirements. etc., or any
combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source.
Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing
Office no later than ten (10) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will
be made.
#f,.! WOODW POLL 11# MU1 A09T 1100IttYAilwOsi 1fi11 U1r. ALL P40IMMS"
1111100111111IMMIM OR CLA110CATON TM IA(MMtAT1r011 TO 60 3)
6KMV IN 110111111111111110 M ''INNO LATWIR TXMI "K (M CALF M DA" PV" TO TIM
BRUCE MACNAIR, SENIOR BUYER
City of Lubbock
1625 131 Street
Lubbock, Texas 79401
Fax: (806) 775-2164
Email: bmacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
12 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
12.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed by OCTOBER 1, 2002.
Substantial completion and certificate of occupancy for work in the existing building must be completed by
August 15, 2002, and substantial completion and certificate of occupancy for work for the new addition
must be completed by September 1, 2002.
12.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided,
however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work
3
contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be
submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the
progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems
necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified.
13 PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the
contract documents.
14 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock, prior to final acceptance of this project, requires the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all
bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the
contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been
notified.
15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will
be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the
Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until
incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods
set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to
procure a satisfactory project.
16 GUARANTEES
16.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against -
defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner,
a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work,
and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects
appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or
workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock).
16.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and
warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data
(including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and
firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as
the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be
recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure.
The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the
procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein.
16.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub-
contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be
delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations
contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and
under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default.
16.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this
Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the
Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or
any document incorporated in this Contract by reference.
The Contractor will be furnished ten (10) sets of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his
use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or
others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor.
4
Obw
19
21
22
PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials,
supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any
and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the
date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have
been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by
the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
(d) A letter, on Contractor and Subcontractor insurer's letterheads, stating the Worker's Compensation
Insurance Experience Rating for Contractor and Subcontractor.
(e) If, after award of contract, the Contractor adds or substitutes subcontractors, then an insurer's letter
stating the Worker's Compensation Insurance Rating shall be provided to the City for each added or
substituted subcontractor.
TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions
of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the
materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a
way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or
other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the
project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the
location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve
the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by
Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by
Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, and the private utility owner, as applicable, at
Contractor's expense.
BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and
shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be
necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs,
and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and
replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of
barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
EXPLOSIVES
22.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the
Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of
the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use
utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods
as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
22.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
5
22.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this
contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or
below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such
notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may
deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations.
23 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the
work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and
telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by
this contract is in progress.
24 INSURANCE
24.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as
required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do
business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the
City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided thirty (30) days in advance
of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the
right to subrogation against the city. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense,
through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that
specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company
authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this
contract, whether performed by the Contractor or subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided
covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages
shall be submitted before contract execution.
24.2 The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City of Lubbock (the City) as additional insured. It
shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents
including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor.
25.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less
than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The
bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil
Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations
thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract
documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable.
Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or
holidays unless the following conditions exist:
25.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary
service to its citizens.
25.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is
approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a
diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time.
25.1.3 A longer workweek is authorized under Section 01140 — Work Restrictions of the specifications.
25.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the
Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the
weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative
to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on
weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative.
25.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done
under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately
6
ki
r*�
commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such
condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life.
26 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project
under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount,
not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the
work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with "the Owner's' Representative, or
.» Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his
classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the
copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made,
or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees
according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which
schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on
whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each
calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his
particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these
contract documents.
27 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES
Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the
'- bidder without being considered.
28 PREPARATION FOR BID
�•. 28.1 The bidder shall submit his bid in duplicate on forms furnished by the City or electronically reproduced by
the bidder. Forms electronically reproduced by the bidder must be identical in every respect to the forms
` furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the
price for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall
be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in
words and the price written in figures, the price,written in words shall govern. Bidder's bid submittal
must be in duplicate and must Include the following:
■ Bid Submittal Form
■ List of Subcontractors
■ City of Lubbock Insurance Requirement Affidavit
■ Bid Bond
■ DBE Requirements (See Section 32.3 Below)
28.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a
bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be
given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If
the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address
must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing
agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid.
The bid shall be executed in ink.
28.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and
endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner he City does not accept bids by fax.
However, there are companies in Lubbock that will receive, seal. and deliver faxed bids. These
ompanies are listed in the Yellow Pages under Mailing Services Bids delivered using` this service must
be delivered on -time and addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders and endorsed on the outside of
the envelope in the following manner,l:
28.3.1 Bidder's name
7
29
30
28.3.2 Bid for [title].
28.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids,
but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
28.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been
opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE,
ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR
TO BID OPENING.
BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the
following:
(a) Notice to Bidders
(b) General Instructions to Bidders
(c) Bid Submittal Form and "Exhibit A"
(d) Statutory Payment and Performance Bonds
(e) Contract
(f) General Conditions of the Agreement
(g) Special Provisions
(h) Technical Specifications
(i) Insurance Certificates
0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered
incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of
Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein
in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy
the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations
deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall
furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock
reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the
City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the
work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include:
(a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required.
(b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified,
without delay or interference.
(c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder.
(d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services.
(e) Worker's Compensation Experience Rating.
31 BID AWARD
31.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to
waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole
discretion.
31.2 The City reserves the right to accept the Total Base Bid and Alternate Bids in any order or combination
that serves its best interests. The low bid shall be determined on the price combination of the Total Base
Bid and any accepted Alternate Bids or Options.
31.3 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to
specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may
result in disqualification of the bid.
31.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be
cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to
determine possible Anti -Trust violations.
31.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than
..., lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder
would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident biddershome state.
31.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the
State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the
Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all
other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the
same may be applicable.
31.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR
FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR
GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS
INVITATION TO BID.
31.7 The successful bidder must satisfy the City as to the bidder's ability to perform the work and meet all
contractual obligations set forth in the contract to be executed.
32 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) REQUIREMENTS
32.1 The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
ITB, Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE's) will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids and
will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in
consideration of an award.
' 32.2 A DBE is defined as a small business concern which is at least 51 % owned and controlled by one or more
socially and economically disadvantaged individuals, or in the case of any publicly owned business, at
least 51 % of the stock of which is owned by one ore more socially and economically disadvantaged
individuals. Socially and economically disadvantaged include Women, Black Americans, Hispanic
Americans, Native Americans, Asian -Pacific Americans, and Asian -Indian Americans.
32.3 Good Faith Efforts (Information to be submitted)
City of Lubbock treats bidders' compliance with good faith efforts requirements as a matter of
responsiveness.
r. Each solicitation for which a contract goal has been established will require the bidders/offerors to submit
the following information with its bid as a condition of responsiveness:
1. The names and addresses of DBE firms that will participate in the contract;
2. A description of the work that each DBE will perform;
3. The dollar amount of the participation of each DBE firm participation;
4. Written and signed documentation of commitment to use a DBE subcontractor whose
participation it submits to meet a contract goal;
5. Written and signed confirmation from the DBE that it is participating in the contract as
provided in the prime contractor's commitment; and
6. If the contract goal is not met, evidence of good faith efforts.
32.4 Demonstration of good faith efforts
The obligation of the bidder is to make good faith efforts. The bidder can demonstrate that it has done so
either by meeting the contract goal or documenting good faith efforts. Examples of good faith efforts are
found_ in Attachment 7 of the Airport's DBE plan, http://pur-chasing.ci,lubbock,tx,us/vendor.htm .
0"
The following personnel are responsible for determining whether a bidder who has not met the contract
goal has documented sufficient good faith efforts to be regarded as responsive: Persons assigned to
evaluate bids or proposals as specified on the City's "Request to Solicit Competitive Bids or Proposals —
Procurement Document Submittal Form."
We will ensure that all information is complete and accurate and adequately documents and bidder's good
faith efforts before we commit to the performance of the contract by the bidder.
32.5 Administrative reconsideration
Within 10 days of being informed by City of Lubbock that it is not responsive because if has not
documented sufficient good faith efforts, a bidder may request administrative reconsideration. Bidders
should make this request in writing to the following reconsideration official: Victor Kilman, Purchasing
Department, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457. The reconsideration official will not
have played any role in the original determination that the bidder did not make/document sufficient good
faith efforts.
As part of this reconsideration, the bidder will have the opportunity to provide written documentation or
argument concerning the issue of whether it met the goal or made adequate good faith efforts to do so.
The bidder will have the opportunity to meet in person with our reconsideration official to discuss the issue
of whether it met the goal or made adequate good faith efforts to do so. We will send the bidder a written
decision on reconsideration, explaining the basis for finding that the bidder did or did not meet the goal or
make adequate good faith efforts to do so. The result of the reconsideration process is not
administratively appealable to the Department of Transportation.
32.6 Good Faith Efforts when a DBE is replaced on a contract City of Lubbock will require a contractor to make
good faith efforts to replace a DBE that is terminated or has otherwise failed to complete its work on a
contract with another certified DBE, to the extent needed to meet the contract goal. The City will require
the prime contractor to notify the DBE Liaison Officer (DBELO) immediately of the DBE's inability or
unwillingness to perform and provide reasonable documentation.
In this situation, we will require the prime contractor to obtain our prior approval of the substitute DBE and
to provide copies of new or amended subcontracts, or documentation of good faith efforts. If the
contractor fails or refuses to comply in the time specified, our contracting office will issue an order
stopping ail or part of payment/work until satisfactory action has been taken. If the contractor still fails to
comply, the contracting officer may issue a termination for default proceeding.
32.7 Counting DBE Participation
The City will count DBE participation toward overall goals as provided in 49 CFR 26.55.
32.8 Certification
The DBELO will use the certification standards of Subpart D of part 26 and the certification procedures of
Subpart E of part 26 to determine the eligibility of firms to participate as DBEs in DOT -assisted contracts.
In addition, the Department of Aviation has approval from Citibus, the City's transit authority and the
Affirmative Action and Contract Compliance Division of the City of Houston, Texas to assist in applying
certification standards. To be certified as a DBE, a firm must meet all certification eligibility standards.
The City will make their certification decisions based on the facts as a whole.
32.9 Process
The City's certification application form and documentation requirements are found in Attachment 5 of the
Airport's DBE Plan.
For information about the certification process or to apply for certification, firms should contact: Mark
Earle, Director of Aviation, Lubbock International Airport, Rt. 3 Box 389, Lubbock, Texas 79403, 806/775-
3126, mearle _mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us.
In the event the City proposes to remove a DBE's certification, the City will follow procedures consistent with 26.87. Attachment 6 to the Airport's DBE Plan sets forth these procedures in detail. To ensure
separation of functions in a decertification, the City has determined that the Purchasing Manager will serve
as the decision maker in decertification proceedings. The City has established an administrative "firewall"
10
I
to ensure that the Purchasing Manager will not have participated in any way in the decertification
proceeding against the firm (including the decision to initiate such a proceeding).
If the City denies a firm's application or decertifies it, the firm may not reapply until 12 months have passed
from our action.
32.10 Certification Appeals
Any firm or complainant may appeal the City's decision in a certification matter to DOT. Such appeals
may be sent to:
Department of Transportation Office of Civil Rights Certification Appeals Branch, 400 r St., SW,
Room 2104, Washington, DC 20590.
The City will promptly implement any DOT certification appeal decision affecting the eligibility of DBEs for
all DOT -assisted contracting (e.g., certify a firm if DOT has determined that our denial of its application
was erroneous).
32.11 "Recertifications"
The City will review the eligibility of DBEs that the City might have certified under former part 23, to make
sure that they meet the standards of Subpart D of part 26. The City will complete this review within four
,- years beginning October, 1999. In order to comply with requirements of re -certification each currently
certified DBE the airport works with as well as any new applicant for certification will be required to submit
a Statement of Personal Net Worth as shown in Exhibit 9 of the Airport's DBE plan.
For firms that the City has certified or reviewed and found eligible under part 26, the City will review their
eligibility everyfive years following the date of their certification. These reviews will include the following
components: -
1. The City of Lubbock will require that the firm complete a new DBE Certification Form.
2. The City of Lubbock may use on -site visits where necessary to make proper determinations.
3. The City of Lubbock will use any discretion to certify a firm on reliance of the decisions made by
.•, - DOT or another recipient, to make an independent certification decision based on additional
documentation provided by another recipient or to require the applicant to proceed through our
application procedure without regard to the action of the other recipient
4. City of Lubbock reserves the right to determine recertification procedures on a case -by -case
basis.
32.12 "No Change" Affidavits and Notices of Change
The City will require all certified DBEs to inform the DBELO, in a written affidavit, of any change in its
circumstances affecting its ability to meet size, disadvantaged status, ownership or control criteria of 49
CFR part 26 or of any material changes in the information provided with the DBE's application for
certification.
The City. will also require+
I all owners of all DBEs the City has certified to submit, on the anniversary date of
their certification, a "no change" affidavit meeting the requirements of 26.830). The text of this affidavit is
the following:
I swear (or affirm) that there have been no changes in the circumstances of [name of DBE firm] affecting
its ability to meet the size, disadvantaged status, ownership, or control requirements of 49 CFR part 26.
'�' There have been no material changes in the information provided with [name of DBE]'s application for
certification, except for any changes about which you have provided written notice to the City of Lubbock
under 26.83(I). [Name of firm] meets Small Business Administration (SBA) criteria for being a small
'^ business concern and its average annual gross receipts (as defined by SBA rules) over the firm's previous
three fiscal years do not exceed $16.6 million.
The City will require DBEs to submit with this affidavit documentation of the firm's size and gross receipts.
The City will notify all currently certified DBE firms of these obligations by newsletter or direct mail
beginning October, 2000. This notification will inform DBEs that to submit the "no change" affidavit, their
owners must swear or affirm that they meet all regulatory requirements of part 26, including personal net
'"` 11
worth. Likewise, if a firm's owner knows or should know that he or she, or the firm, fails to meet a part 26
eligibility requirement, the obligation to submit a notice of change applies.
32.13 Bidders List
The City of Lubbock will create a bidders list, consisting of information about all DBE and non -DBE firms
that bid or quote on DOT -assisted contracts. The purpose of this requirement is to allow use of the
bidders list approach to calculating overall goals. The bidders list will include the name, address,
DBE/non-DBE status, age, and annual gross receipts of firms.
The City will collect this information in the following ways: a notice in all solicitations and direct request to
firms quoting on subcontracts to report information directly to the DBELO. The City of Lubbock will work
closely with all prime bidders in order to collect necessary information of all firms who quote to them on
contracts.
32.14 Monitoring Payments to DBEs
The City will require prime contractors to maintain records and documents of payments to DBEs for three
years following the performance of the contract. These records will be made available for inspection upon
request by any authorized representative of the City of Lubbock or DOT. This 'reporting requirement also
extends to any certified DBE subcontractor.
The City will keep a running tally of actual payments to DBE firms for work committed to them at the time
of contract award.
The City will perform interim audits of contract payments to DBEs. The audit will review payments to DBE
subcontractors to ensure that the actual amount paid to DBE subcontractors equals or exceeds the dollar
amounts stated in the schedule of DBE participation.
32.15 Reporting to DOT
The City will report DBE participation to DOT annually on Form 4630, as modified for use by FAA
recipients.
33 Veteran's Preference
It shall include in all contracts for work on any project funded under the grant agreement which involve labor, such
provisions as are necessary to insure that, in the employment of labor (except in executive, administrative, and
supervisory positions), preference shall be given to Veterans of the Vietnam eraand disabled veterans as defined
in Section 47112 of Title 49, United States Code. However, this preference shall apply only where the individuals
are available and qualified to perform the work to which the employment relates.
34 Confidentiality
The City will safeguard from disclosure to third parties information that may reasonably be regarded as confidential
business information, consistent with Federal, state, and local law. The City of Lubbock will maintain efforts to be
consistent with the law as set forth in: the Freedom of Information Act under USC: Title 5. The relevant text is
found in § 552(b)(2) and (4). The City of Lubbock will interpret these parts as policy to refuse the release of and
access to, any information deemed to be related solely to the internal personnel rules and practices of an agency;
or as trade secrets and commercial or financial information obtained from a person and privileged or confidential.
Further, in compliance with USC: Title 18 § 1905 concerning the disclosure of confidential information: The City
of Lubbock will not publish, divulge, disclose or make known in any manner or to any extent not authorized by law _.
any information coming to us in the course of employment or official duties or by reason of any examination or
investigation made by, or return, report or record made to or filed with the City of Lubbock, which information
concerns or relates to the trade secrets, processes, operations, style of work, or apparatus, or to the identity,
confidential statistical data, amount or source of any income, profits, losses, or expenditures of any person, firm,
partnership, corporation, or association; or permits any income return or copy thereof or any book containing any
abstract or particulars thereof to be seen or examined by any person except as provided by law.
Notwithstanding any contrary provisions of state or local law, we will not release personal financial information
submitted in response to the personal net worth requirement to a third party (other than DOT) without the written
consent of the submitter.
12
r"
35 Non Discrimination Clause
-- The contractor or subcontractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in
the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR part 26
in the award and administration of DOT assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these
requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or
such other remedy, as the recipient deems appropriate.
36 Prompt Payment
The prime contractor agrees to pay each subcontractor under this prime contract for satisfactory
performance of its contract no later than 30 days from the receipt of each payment the prime contractor
receives from City of Lubbock. The prime contractor agrees further to return retainage payments to each
..� subcontractor within 30 days after the subcontractor's work is satisfactorily completed. Any delay or
postponement of payment from the above referenced time frame may occur only for good cause following
written approval of the City of Lubbock. This clause applies to both DBE and non -DBE subcontractors.
The City of Lubbock will require that all contractors comply with the Texas Government Code 2251.022.
Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code generally defines past due dates and provides for payments
for goods and services to vendors, general contractors, and subcontractors. Failure to comply with the
provisions of Texas Government Code Chapter 2251 include the right to charge interest on overdue
accounts and right to collect attorney's fees in the event of formal administrative or judicial action to collect
an invoice payment or interest due. A copy of Texas Government Code 2251.022 is attached as
Attachment 8 in the Airport's Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Plan.
37 Monitoring and Enforcement Mechanisms
The City will bring to the attention of the Department of Transportation any false, fraudulent, or dishonest conduct
in connection with the program, so that DOT can take the steps (e.g., referral to the Department of Justice for
criminal prosecution, referral to the DOT Inspector General, action under suspension and debarment or Program
Fraud and Civil Penalties rules) provided in 26.109. The City also will consider similar action under our own legal
authorities, including responsibility determinations in future contracts.
The City of Lubbock WILL REQUIRE CERTIFICATION that work contracted with a DBE is actually performed by
the DBE. We may follow up this certification by conducting on -site evaluations to monitor the performance
obligated in the contract.
In the event of non-compliance with the DBE regulation by any participant in our procurement activities, the City of
Lubbock shall be entitled to pursue any and all remedies allowed by the laws of the State of Texas and the Federal
Government. Such remedies may include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
a. Civil action, in a court appropriate jurisdiction, for breach of the contract. Such damages may be set
forth in the contract as predetermined damages, consequential damages arising out of the breach
and/or specific performance.
b. Criminal prosecution may result from the commission of fraud or other criminal activity on the part of a
party to the contract. In the event that a crime is perceived to have occurred, the city may refer the
case to the appropriate law enforcement or prosecutorial authority for further action. In such event the
city anticipates cooperating with such agency in the investigation and prosecution of a criminal case.
Owl 13
y
- ....__ ..4L_
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
DATE: i? gr„�nu;rrry 18, , 2002
PROJECT NUMBER: #001-02IBM -SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
tw ;
Bid of Pharr Construction Co., Inc.. d /b/a Pharr, & Company (hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
` Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation to Bid for the construction of a SILENT WINGS MUSEUM, having carefully
examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and
the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended
project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to
construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein
and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract
documents.
BASE BID: Renovation to existing air terminal building and construction of an addition to accommodate exhibition
spaces and ancillary spaces for the Silent Wings Museum.
MATERIALS:
- (� � 000 d
SERVICES:
TOTAL BASE BID: allIx - - � ��r�/ii' L� ° '1' c a 1 0.3, C '0j
OPTION #1: Remove existing built-up roof and replace with new ballasted modified bitumen roof system.
MATERIALS: Eighty -Nine Thousand, Six Hundred Ninety -One and.'-<ty Centq$89,(zQl..(0
SERVICES: _Fifty-Nine__Thousand,L Seven Hundred__N_inety,7 QqK, end Forty ($592,794 40 )
Cents
TOTAL OPTION #1 (ADD): One Hundred Forty -Nine Thousand_ Four. HundK_ed_ ($149 , 4Rfz�
- Eighty -Six and no/100
OPTION #2: Add six clear anodized aluminum panels over existing mosaic tile at front.
MATERIALS: Three Thousand Fir Hyindred dol l ars aid Twenty Cents
SERVICES: Two Thousand Two Hundred Sixty -Six dollars and Eighty Centel$ 2 2Hti 80
TOTAL OPTION #2 (ADD): Five Thousand, Six Hundred Sixty Seven and no/100- ($5 667 00
1
Sl1
OPTION #3: At exterior metal panel wail systems. in rooms 116 and 126, remove 6 inch metal stud framing at 24 inches
o.c. and batt insulation. Replace with structural steel studs at approximately 15' o.c., horizontal girts as
., recommended by the metal panel manufacturer and add 2-112" thick rigid insulation board.
MATERIALS:Five Thousand, Two Hundred, Eighty -Six and Sixty Cents, ($5,286.60 }
SERVICES: Three Thousand, Five Hundred Twenty -Four dollars and forty $3,524.40 )
cents
TOTAL OPTION #3 ( 4sdffi): (Add) Eight Thousand, Eight Hundred Eleven & ($ 8,811. 00 )
.., _ to/100
OPTION #4: On exterior metal panels, standing seam metal roof, flashing, and soffit panels, change paint from "Old
Town Grey" to Duranar XL "Silver".
.� MATERIALS:One Thousand, Nine Hundred Ninety -Four Dollars and No Cent $1,994.00 )
SERVICES: None ($ -0- )
TOTAL OPTION #4 (ADD):One Thousand, Nine Hundred Ninety -Four and no/100 ($l, 994.00 )
OPTION #5: Delete Lithochrome concrete color in room 126.
MATERIALS: Twelve Thousand Seven Hundred Twenty -Five and Forty Cents ($12,725.40 )
" SERVICES: Eight Thousand Four Hundred Eighty -Three and Sixty Cents 8 483.60 )
TOTAL OPTION #5 (DEDUCT): TwentX-One Thousand, Two Hundred Nine and no/1 V2 , 209.00 . )
r�+
The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the
accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated.
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project by Octoberl, 2002, thereafter as stipulated in the
specifications and other contract documents. Substantial completion and a certificate of occupancy for the renovations to
the existing building must be completed by August 15, 2002; substantial completion and certificate of occupancy for the
construction of the addition must be completed by September 1, 202. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as
liquidated damages the sum of $250.00 (IWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess
of the time set forth herein above for completion of each phase of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general
conditions of the contract documents. The liquidated damages for completion of each phase may be additive. if final
completion is not achieved by October 1, 2002, liquidated damages increase to $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) per
calendar day.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 28 of the General instructions to Bidders.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on
�* which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
2
r-
i
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable
without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the
bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all
necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5Z of total amount bid Dollars
($ 57. ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the
event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents,
insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of
receipt of writtennotification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the
undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a
competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be
changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid
price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID
PRICE MU`r3' BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM
� P 1 4=: TYJ CiII°r OPENING.
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTEST:
�_ 41
Secretary
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addenda No. I Date_ _n i m 7/ n�
Addenda No. 2 Date 01 / 11 / 02
Addenda No. 3 Date 01 14/02
Addenda No. 4 Date 01 16/02
MIWBE Firm:
Date: January 18, 002
7 Au rized Signature
John K. Pharr
(Printed or Typed Name)
Pharr & Companv
Company
P.O. Box 2791
Address
Lubbock
Lubbock
City,
County
' Texas
79408
State
Zip Code
Telephone: 806 -
Fax: 7
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Minority Owned
Yes No
1.
Floor Covering - Yates Carpet, Inc
2.
Ceramic Tile - Gc.! , � Tj 1 e
3.
Painter- Charles.Hargrove & Associates
4.
Mechanical - Bruce Thornton..A/C, Inc.
6,
Fire Sprinkler - Abco Fire Protection, Inc.
6.
Steel Erection - Bennett Steel Erectors, Inc.
7_
Roof - AG'Mckinney Company / Lydick -Hooks Roofing
Co. of Lubbock
S.
Concrete - Pharr & Company
.,�
9
Earthwork - Westar Paving Company
10.
Millwork - Hunter Millworks, Inc.
11.
Glass & Glazing - Crafton's Glass, Inc.
12.
Drywall, Ceiling - Hamilton Acoustical Company
13.
Electrical- Stover Electric
imp
r"
4
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
6..; To Be Completed by Bidder
And Attached to Bid Submittal
1, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been
�•• reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. if I am awarded this contract by the City of
` Lubbock, 1 will be able to, within fifteen ('! 5) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock,
` furnish a valid insurance certificate to.the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid.
'01/
aw► Tnhn 'R - Pharr
Contras r (Signature) Contractor (Print)
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Pharr Construction Co., Inc. d/b/a Pharr & Company
(Print or Type )
WORKER'S COMPENSATION EXPERIENCE RATING: _74
For states that do not participate in the National Councr7 an Compensation Insurance Rating, attach a letierfrom your insurance
company that verifies their vmftr!s compensation rating Is equivalent to the National Council on Compensation Insurancerating.
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: 907 North Avenue 0 Drive
Name of Agent/Broker: Steve Deal Boley—Featherston Insurance
Address of Agent/Broker. P.O. Drawer 10
rn
City/State0p:
Wichita Falls, Texas 76307
AgentlBroker Telephone Number. O 723-7� 11
Agent/Broker Email Address: www. bfinsurance . com
Date: Taniinrg 18, 2002
s
NOTE TO CONTRACTOR
If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid and award
the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please
contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165.
P- BID #001-021BM - SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
s
THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
AIA Document A310
Bid Bond
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we
Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company, 907 North Avenue Q Dr., Lubbock, TX 79403
as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
8144 Walnut Hill Lane #1199, LB99
Dallas, Texas, 752314345 (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety)
a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin
as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
y City of Lubbock (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner)
as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of '
*** FIVE PERCENT OF BID AMOUNT *** Dollars( 5% )
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for (Here insert full name, address and description of project)
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
F"
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee, shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee,
in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with
good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in
e ' the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or .bonds, if the
Principal shall pay to the Obligee, the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such
larger amount for which the Obligee, may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this
obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
hi
( Signed and sealed this 18th day of January, 2002
(Witness)
itness)
Jopfn K. Pharr (Title) Vice —President
Fidelity and GuaratV Insurance Underwriters,
Inc.
'Stadi Gross
AIA DOCUMENT A310 - BID BOND - AIA ® - FEBRUARY 1970 ED - THE AMERICAN
�*+ INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C.20006
(Seal)
(Surety) (Sea!)
(Title) Attorney -in -Fact
Printed on Recycled Paper 9193
TheSt ftl POWER OF ATTORNEY
Seaboard Surety Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
s� St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
,g7ge-
Power of Attorney No. 20290 Certificate No. 9 U
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, and that
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under
the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, and
w� that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do
hereby make, constitute and appoint
Donal Boley, Steve Deal and Staci Gross
Wichita Falls Texas
of the City of State their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,
p.w each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings,
contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the
performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings cej�—irei, or.pelmitted in -any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
st December 1999
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be si er"�an"8'sealeii 4thi� day of
� Y
Seaboard Surety Company C L "' " o, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine InsuranceorrJpatty ?.,•'e raz Fidelitv and Guaranty Insurance Company
r St. Paul Guardian Insuranc Compan�.,t-' Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
QIIIa ,� if y� #' a1�MP�R�I�m iWiWPi0 rR4T�n'^p •°� tev�r Ayy,een.,,wG
>nO � �. ��56 ��f otSBAL;•'.e° ��,,y,�(a�< i9J�
State of Maryland
City of Baltimore THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE. Assistant Secretary
On this lst day of December 1999 before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared John E Phinney and
�P Thomas E. Huibregtse, who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and
Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St, Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and
Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty _Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of
said Companies; and that they, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the
r� corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers. A-
NFA
e a ffiHprgRy U
In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. m PU
eVl?
My Commission expires the 13th day of July, 2002. �oqE ca"I a� REBECCA EASLEY-ONOKALA, Notary Public
e�
rn
86203 Rev. 7-2000 Printed in U.S.A.
This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul
Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc, on September 2, 1998, which resolutions are now in full force and
effect, reading as follows:
RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating
to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attomey(s)-in-Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in
accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the
Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or any Vice President, or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary,
under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and
the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power. of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes
only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any
such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so exe-
cuted and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which
it is validly attached; and
RESOLVED FURTHER, that Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of
Attorney issued them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other
writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an
Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company.
I, Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company,
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force
and effect and has not been revoked.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand this 18t1 day of January 2002
}�f y � � O`'`-�S4q JP1.�xSYg91� �YY.Y'-,4 • i .
* fay`poa�Ai �4 y!�PY'AA),i -P � 4i
19Z7 �1t �. Flm It A t � tfED /
1977 issi
ofntw iy is: aW ar +r fa`a/7
tNfi" µ 6 a
e ta'` ; Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary
To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800421 388 and as*,�fowthe of Atto y clerk. Please refer to the Power of Attorney number,
the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to whic�,t7 a poweixis a`tta
4�
L $
it rqy N��•SM
l {}
ITS #001-02/BM, Addendum #1
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13' STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX: (806) 775-2164
http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.fx.us
ADDENDUM # 1
ITB # 001-02/BM
Silent Wings Museum
MAILED TO VENDOR: January 7, 2002
CLOSE DATE: January 18, 2002 @ 1:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any
item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Replace original Bid Submittal Contract with attached LUMP SUM BID SUBMITTAL CONTRACT.
2.. In DIVISION 1 "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", replace original Section 01100 (Summary) with attached
Section 01100 (Summary).
3. In DIVISION 1 "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", replace original Section 01310 (Project Management and
""" Coordination) with attached Section 01310 (Project Management and Coordination).
4. In DIVISION 1 "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", replace original Section 01770 (Closeout Procedures) with
attached Section 01770 (Closeout Procedures).
5. In DIVISION 8 "DOORS AND WINDOWS", add the attached Section 08800 (Glazing).
6. Glass type and color are included in Section 08800 (Glazing), see item 5 above.
All requests for additional information. or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Bruce MacNair, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164
�^ or Email to: . bmacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
N
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
ruce MacNair
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID.
ITS #001-02/13M Addendum 1
ITB #001-02/BM, Addendum #2
P"
City of.lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
e*� 1625 13T" STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX: (806) 775-2184
httpJ/purchasing.ci.lubbock.bc.us
MAILED TO VENDOR:
CLOSE DATE:
ADDENDUM # 2
ITB # 001-02/BM
Silent Wings Museum
January 11, 2002
January 18, 2002 @ 1:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any
item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain In effect.
1. Budget amount for this phase (Construction) of the project Is $1,600,000.00. The $1,882,200.00 stated in the
opening paragraph of the Notice to Bidders includes Construction and Exhibit design.
2. In DIVISION 1 "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", (World Restrictions) add page number 2 (attached).
3. Asbestos Removal: Contractors may obtain the King Consultants asbestos removal certification letter from
Mr. David Jones, Deputy Director of Aviation, Lubbock International Airport.
4. Contractors are required to secure City of Lubbock Building Permits. However, these permits will be at no
charge to the contractor.
5. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Requirements: Good Faith Efforts (Information to be submitted)
City of Lubbock treats bidders` compliance with good faith efforts requirements as a matter of
responsiveness. Each solicitation for which a contract goal has been established will require the
bidders/offerors to submit the following information with its bid as a condition of responsiveness:
1) The names and addresses of DBE firms that will participate in the contract;
2) A description of the work that each DBE will perform;
3) The dollar amount of the participation of each DBE firm participation;
4) Written and signed documentation of commitment to use a DBE subcontractor whose
participation it submits to meet a contract goal;
5) Written and signed confirmation from the DBE that It is participating in the contract as provided in
the prime contractor's commitment; and
6) If the contract goal is not met, evidence of good faith efforts.
6. To gain access to the building/site during bid preparation, bidders must contact Mr. David Jones,
Deputy Director of Aviation, Lubbock International Airport
7. Sing -In sheets from the Pre -bid meeting, held on January 8, 2002 @10:00 A.M., are attached hereto.
8. Drawings and Specifications:
1) Sheets SK-1 through SK-16, and E3.01A are added as attached.
2) Section 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING, Bid Option #1 is added as attached.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Bruce MacNair, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
ITa #001-02/BM Addendum 2
s Jan-14-02 05,25pm From -CITY OF LUBBOCK-PURCHASING
8067752164 7-960 P.01/01 F-969
i i rs ami -uunm. Haaanaum sa
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13T" STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH; (806) 775-2167 FAX: (505) 775-2164
hnp J/purchasing. ci.lubbock.tx. us
MAILED TO VENDOR:
CLOSE DATE:
ADDENDUM # 3
1TB '# 001-021BM
Silent Wings Museum
January 14, 2002
January 1.8, 2002 @ 1:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any
item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Under GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, paragraph 9 Contract Documents, Subparagraph 9.3
regarding Worker's Compensation Insurance Experience Rating, is deleted in its entirety.
Ail requests for additional Information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Bruce MacNair, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79467
Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164
or Email to: bmacnair@maii.cUubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Bruce MacNair
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID.
ITS #001-02JBM Addendum 3
i
Jan-16-02 04:22pm From -CITY OF LUBBOCK-PURCHASING 8067752164
7-454 P.01/01 F-028
ITB 0001-02/BM, Addendum #4
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
162513T" STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH, (806) 775-2167 FAX: (e06) 775-2164
http://purchasing.ci.lubback.tx:us
MAILED TO VENDOR:
CLOSE DATE:
ADDENDUM # 4
ITB # 001-02/BM
Silent Wings Museum
January 16, 2002
January 18, 2002 @ 100 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any
item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. In lieu of the one 1" (one -inch) clear tempered glass as called out on sheet A2.01, details 151A6.04 and
16/A6.04, and glass type GL-h in section 08800 of the specifications, use 1 /2" (one -half -inch) clear tempered
glass.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Bruce MacNair, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
004 P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 7W7
Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164
or Email to; bmacnair@mail.ci.Iubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
tea✓
Bruce MacNair
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID.
ITB,9001-0215M Addendum 4
;__J.--17-02 12:34pm From -CITY OF LUBBOCK-PURCHASING
P
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1626 13n' STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (306) 775.2167 FAX:.(806) 775.2164
hnpl/purchssing.dJubbock.1x.us
80677521'64 T-603 P.01/12 F-038
ITB #002-01/6M, Addendum WS
ADDENDUM # s
ITB # 001-02/BM
Silent Wings Museum.
MAILED TO VENDOR: January 17, 2002
CLOSE DATE: January 18, 2002 @ 1:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not.
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. In DIVISION 15 - Mechanical, add SECTION 15083 - PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION (attached).
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Bruce MacNair, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Ouestions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164
or Email to: bmacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
G
ruts Ma
cNair
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID.
iT8 4002-011BM Addendum 45
�e��ia� �aQa��itacta26
�aorvsne2csa� �a�rl,�ifiLrc��n
%} G Jpox 27,9.1
Yfd (o /, Fezff4 79408
(806) 70-520
,Fax (84) 70-58frM
January 18, 2002
.R,
Victor Kilman
Purchasing Manager
City of Lubbock
1625 - 137`h Street, Room L-04
Lubbock, Texas 79401
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
ITB 9001-02BM
{ LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Victor,
We did put forth the "good faith effort" to solicit bids from minority DBE subcontractors. It
is unfortunate that DBE contractors in this area are extremely limited. Our firm is a supporter of
the DBE program and we always put forth the effort to obtain bids from the eligible companies.
We advertised this project in the Associated General Contractors' bulletin soliciting DBE
subcontractors bids. We also sent letters to companies listed on the HUB search via the
internet. We are enclosing copies of those bulletins and letters for your use. If you have any
questions or need further information, please feel free to contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & CO NY
ohn K. Pharr
V ice -President
JKP/kb
Enclosures
Af Alitl\6�.
From: Renea McWhorter To: Pharr Company Date: 1/7/02 Time: 10:05:28 AM Page 11 of 14
BIDDING 1/18
UBBOCK: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM ITB#001-02/BM
`="ID DATE: JANUARY 18, 2002 AT 1 00 P.M. EST. COST: .$1, 682:200
PRE -BID CONFERENCE: JANUARY 8, 2002 AT 10:00 A.M. in the Old Terminal Building 6202 N 1H 27
rRLACE: Addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, 1625 13m Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, TX 79401
RCHITECT: City of Lubbock
_NOWN BIDDER:
*AGC PHARR AND COMPANY P. O. BOX 2791 LUBBOCK, TX 79408 8061763-5263 8061763-5843
,.WORK & MATERIALS: SITE: site clearing, earthwork, concrete footings CONCRETE: structural concrete formwork; concrete reinforcing,
ry-shake color hardener, grout steel base plates METAL: structural steel, steel joists, metal roof deck WOOD & PLASTICS: rough
arpentry, interior architectural woodwork THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION: building insulation,'metai roof panels, metal wall panels,
ioint sealants DOORS & WINDOWS: steel doors & frames; flush wood doors, access doors & frames, aluminum framed entrances &
c orefrcnts, door hardware, glazing, glazed aluminum curtainwalls FINISHES: gypsum board assemblies, gypsum board shaft wall
�;semblies, ceramic tile, resilient floor tile, resilient wall base, carpet, carpet tile, painting SPECIALTIES: toilet compartments, toilet
ccessories MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL.
Pharr & Company
907 N Ave. Q Dr. (P.O. Box 2791)
Lubbock, TX 79403 (79408)
Phone. 806/763-5263
F.ax: 806/763-5843
Soliciting Disadvantaged Business Enterprise to bid: Silent Wings Museum
BID DATE: January 18, 2002 at 100 P.M.
We specifically invite Small Business Concerns and Women owned Business Concerns and Small Business
C;nnnprns 0wnpd/C:nntrnllpd by Sncially and Fr:nnnmie-aliv nisadvantanpd Individuals
40" BIDDING 1/22
ABILENE: TRAUMA CENTER ADDITION HENDRICK HEALTH SYSTEM
BID DATE. JANUARY 22, 2002 AT 4:00 P.M.
"LACE: in Tom Roberts Conference Room at Hendrick Health System 1242 North 19th St. Abilene, TX
,RCHITECT: Tittle Luther Partnership 340 Beech Street Abilene, TX 79601 915/673-8178
BIDDERS.
*AGC JOHN CROWE P. O. BOX 3422 ABILENE, TX 79604 9151676-0132 91516764615
:"~AGC JEFF LUTHER CONSTRUCTION 542 PLUM ABILENE, TX 79602 9151676-8294 9151676-5801
AGC ROSE BUILDERS, INC. P. O. BOX 1598 ABILENE, TX 79604 9151673-0194 9151675-6183
WORK AND MATERIALS: SITE: demo work for remodeling, site clearing, excavation and fill base materials, excavation and fill base
materials, finish grading, soil treatment, drilled piers, asphaltic concrete paving, portland cement concrete paving, CONCRETE: Formwork,
!'"einforced, cast in place, MASONRY: masonry, precast stone, METALS: structural steel, steel joist, steel deck, cold formed metal framing,
,fetal fab, metal pan stairs, expansion joint cover assemblies, WOOD AND PLASTICS: misc carpentry, plastic laminate clad paneling,
i HERMAL AND MOISTURE: dampproofing, Bldg insulation, exterior insulation and finish system, cementitious spray on fire resistive
materials, firestopping, preformed roof panels, built up asphalt roofing, thermo plastic single, poly membrane roofing, flashing and sheet metal,
r Sint sealants, DOORS AND WINDOWS: steel doors and frames, plastic faced wood doors, access doors, aluminum curtain- wall and
!ntrances, aluminum sliding doors, automatic entrance doors, door hardware, glazing, FINISHES: gyp board, ceramic tile, epoxy terrazzo,
acoustical ceiling, resilient sheet flooring, resilient the flooring, terrazzo tile flooring, resilient wall base and accessories, painting,
SPECIALTIES: plastic laminate toilet partitions, privacy curtain tracks, metal wall louvers, corner guards and crash rails, metal lockers, fire
n.xtinguishers cabinets, toilet and bath accessories, EQUIPMENT: x-ray viewing equipment, FURNISHINGS: modular plastic laminate
':asework, SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION: bullet resistant protection, radiation protection, CONVEYING SYSTEM: hydraulic elevators,
,AECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL:
'ROM! RErlEA MCWHORTER TO: PHARR COMPANY DATE: 1I10/02 TIME: 8: 13:2.2 PM PAGE 2 OF 2
mot.
i :ONA: CROCKE T COUNTY CCSD HIGH SCHOOL FIELD HOUSE ADDITION & RENOVATIONS
€b1D DATE: JANUARY 17, 2002 AT 2:00 P.M.
PRE -BID CONFERENCE: JANUARY 10, 2002 AT 2:00 P.M. in front of Crockett County CCSD High School Field House
r—ACE: Addressed to Mr. Larry Taylor, Superintendent, 797 Avenue D, Ozona, TX 76943
LCHITECT: Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc., 612 Broadway, Lubbock, TX 79401 8061749-1153
biDDERS:
-AGC PHARR AND COMPANY P. O. BOX 2791 LUBBOCK, TX 79408
8061763-5263 8061763-5843
1'*`":nton-Renfroe, Inc. 1001 E. Slaton Rd. Lubbock, TX 79404
8061748-1999 806r748-9993
I : Construction 5002 Tabosa Drive San Angelo, TX 76904
9151658-4895 915/654-9581
,,ohnston Construction -- Box 1147 Big Spring, TX 79721
915/263-2971 915/263-8681
Master Builders Box 50653 Midland, TX 79710
915/683-0936 915/687-3144
?�';Crea 4601 Arden Rd San Angelo, TX 76901
915/949-5800 915/223-1234
i, licksilver Construction 1205 E 46th Lubbock, TX 79424
806T763-6157 806/763-6160
MATADOR: REHABILITATION OF MATADOR APARTMENTS ADDENDUM ONE {1}
D DATE: JANUARY 17, 2002 AT 2:30 P.M.
-ACE: Addressed to the Matador Housing Authority, 706 Dundee, Matador, Texas
ARCHITECT: Jones Rowntree Architects, 2734 82"d, Lubbock, Texas 8061792-0096
!'-ADDERS:
igc J. L. Elliott Construction 8002 Abbeville B Lubbock, TX 79424
806/794-6969 8061798-3474
Amico Construction 309 E. Pecan St Celina TX 75009
972/382-4388 9721382-4390
Donald Smith Builder P.O. Box 8097 Horseshoe Bay, TX 78657
830f598-1502 8301598-1044
-tbbock Building Services P.O. Box 65600-194 Lubbock, TX 79464
8061798-7005 806/798-8256
'ardroup & Assocs. 4408 Brownfield Dr Lubbock, TX 79410
806T/95-8032 8061793-2055
, 0HNSON COUNTY: WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY, CLEBURNE STATE PARK
ID DATE: JANUARY 17, 2002 AT 2:00 P.M.
LACE: Addressed to the Texas Parks and Wildlife Dept, Contracting and Project Controls Branch, 4200 Smith
School Rd., Austin, TX.
ARCHITECT: Axiom Engineers, 3933 Steck Ave., Suite B-119, Austin, TX 78759, 512/349-0117,
UBBOCK: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM ITB#001-0218M
BID DATE: JANUARY 18, 2002 AT 1:00 P.M. EST. COST: $1,882,200
ARE -BID CONFERENCE: JANUARY 8, 2002 AT 10:00 A.M. in the Old Terminal Building G202 N IH 27
LACE: Addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, 1625 13�h Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, TX 79401
RCHITECT: City of Lubbock
BIDDERS:
-AGC BROWN — MCKEE, INC.
P.O. BOX 3279
LUBBOCK, TX 79452
806r745-4511 806R48-1681
'kGC LEE LEWIS
P.O. BOX 65197
LUBBOCK, TX 79464
8061797-8400 8061797-8492
kGC PHARR AND COMPANY
P_ O. BOX 2791
LUBBOCK, TX 79408
8061763-5263 8061763-5843
`AGC SANDIA CONSTRUCTION
2723 813' St
LUBBOCK, TX 79423
806/745-9450 806R45-9420
Art Cuevas Construction
7406 83rd
Lubbock, TX 79464
806/866-9000 8061866-91 GO
P")enton-Renfroe, Inc.
1001 E. Slaton Rd.
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/748-1999 806/748-9993
�reenstreet Construction
112 E.32"d
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/745-9444 806r745-8722
t James Griffin Construction
4414 Ave. A
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/765-0029 8061744-4410
Danny Klein Construction
4310 93rd
Lubbock, TX 79423
806/794-9610 806/798-1310
like Klein G/C
1340 E 44th
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/747-4739 806/747-9869
hoenix I Restoration
6822 Maple Ave,
Dallas, TX 75235
214/902-0111 2141904-9635
t✓lains Builders Inc.
6005 N IH-27
Lubbock, TX 79403
806/763-3461 8061763-3463
Wardroup & Assocs.
4408 Brownfield Dr
Lubbock, TX 79410
806/795-8032 8061793-2055
"navid Wood Construction
8219 Zadar Ave.
Woifforth, TX 79382
806/866-2731 8061866-2736
Pharr & Company
907 N Ave. Q Dr. (P.O. Box 2791)
Lubbock, TX 79403 (79408)
Phone: 8061763-5263
-Fax: 806/763-5843
Soliciting Disadvantaged Business Enterprise to bid: Silent Wings Museum
BID DATE: January 18, 2002 at 1:00 P.M.
We specifically invite Small Business Concerns and Women owned Business Concerns and Small
P
=P.OM: RENEA MCWHORTER TO: PHARR COMPANY DATE: 1114/02 TIME; 8:43:34 AM PAGE 9 OF 18
BIDDING 1118
Pharr & Company
907 N Ave. Q Dr. (P.O. Box 2791)
Lubbock, TX 79403 (79408)
Phone: 8061763-5263
Fax: 806/763-5843
Soliciting Disadvantaged Business Enterprise to bid: Silent Wings Museum
BID DATE: January 18, 2002 at 1:00 P.M.
We specifically invite Small Business Concerns and Women owned Business Concerns and Small Business
Concerns Owned/Controlled by Socially and Economically Disadvantaged Individuals.
JBBOCK: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM iTB#001-02/BM
BID DATE. JANUARY 18, 2002 AT 1:00 P.M. EST. COST: $1, 882,200
ZRE-BID CONFERENCE: JANUARY 8, 2002 AT 10:00 A.M. in the Old Terminal Building 6202 N IH 27
LACE: Addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock,
1625 13t' Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, TX 79401
RCHITECT: City of Lubbock
KNOWN BIDDER:
-AGC BROWN — MCKEE, INC. P.O. BOX 3279
LUBBOCK, TX 79452
8061745-4511 806/748-1681
"WC LEE LEWIS P.O. BOX 65197
LUBBOCK, TX 79464
8061797-8400 8061797-8492
\GC PHARR AND COMPANY P. O, BOX 2791
LUBBOCK, TX 79408
8061763-5263 806f763-5843
4'AGC SANDIA CONSTRUCTION 2723 81" St.
LUBBOCK, TX 79423
8061745-9450 806I745-9420
Art Cuevas Construction 7406 83rd
Lubbock, TX 79464
806/866-9000 806/866-9100
Pwenton-Renfroe, Inc. 1001 E. Slaton Rd.
Lubbock, TX 79404
8061748-1999 8061748-9993
"reenstreet Construction 112 E.32nd
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/745-9444 806/745-8722
"James Griffin Construction 4414 Ave. A
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/765-0029 806/744-4410
Danny Klein Construction 4310 93rd
Lubbock, TX 79423
806/794-9610 806/798-1310
""ike Klein G/C 1340 E 44th
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/747-4739 806/747-9869
hoenix I Restoration 6822 Maple Ave.
Dallas, TX 75235
214/902-0111 214/904-9635
plains Builders Inc. 6005 N IH-27
Lubbock, TX 79403
806/763-3461 806/763-3463
Wardroup & Assocs. 4408 Brownfield Dr
Lubbock, TX 79410
806/795-8032 806R93-2055
$",avid Wood Construction 8219 Zadar Ave.
Wolfforth, TX 79382
806/866-2731 806/866-2736
JORK & MATERIALS: SITE: site clearing, earthwork, concrete footings
CONCRETE: structural concrete
formwork, concrete reinforcing,
.ry-shake color hardener, grout steel base plates METAL: structural steel, steel joists, metal roof deck
WOOD & PLASTICS: rough
carpentry, interior architectural woodwork THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION: building insulation, metal
roof panels, metal wall panels,
, 'tiint sealants DOORS & WINDOWS: steel doors & frames, flush wood doors, access doors & frames,
aluminum framed entrances &
torefronts, door hardware, glazing, glazed aluminum curtainwalls FINISHES:
gypsum board assemblies,
gypsum board shaft wall
assemblies, ceramic tile, resilient floor tile, resilient wail base, carpet, carpet tile, painting SPECIALTIES: toilet compartments, toilet
accessories MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL.
TMD
TEMPORARIES
SPECIALIZING IN CONSTRUCTION
*Laborers *Carpenters 'Welders
ANY TRADE YOU MIGHT NEED!
TMD Can Also Do Payrolling For Your Company
"We Carry the Workman's Compensation and General Liability for ALL of Your Employees"
TMD handles all FICA, FUTA, SUTA and year-end W-2s
P"
4706 Brookdale, Wichita Falls, TX
(940) 691-6848
t* f-ROM: t<ENEA MGYYHORTER 1 0: &HARR I.OMPANY UATE: 111 �/VZ I )ME: C: 1 /: -4 AM
W."
Pharr & Company
907 N Ave. Q Dr. (P.O. Box 2791)
Lubbock, TX 79403 (79408)
Phone: 8061763-5263
Fax: 8061763-5843
Soliciting Disadvantaged -Business Enterprise to bid: Silent Wings Museum
BID DATE: January 18, 2002 at 1:00 P.M.
We specifically invite
eAGE .6 OF
usiness Concerns and Women owned Business Concerns and Small
'Controlled by Socially and Economically Disadvantaged Individuals.
_UBBOCK: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM ITB#001-02/BM ADDENDUM TWO {2}
3113 DATE: JANUARY 18, 2002 AT 1:00 P.M. EST. COST: $1,882,200
PRE -BID CONFERENCE: JANUARY 8, 2002 AT 10:00 A_M_ in the Old Terminal Building 6202 N IH 27
.LACE: Addressed to victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, 1625 le Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, TX 79401
411CHITECT: City of Lubbock
31DDERS:
'AGC BROWN — MCKEE, INC.
P.O. BOX 3279
LUBBOCK, TX 79452
8061745-4511 8061748-1681
AGC LEE LEWIS
P.O. BOX 65197
LUBBOCK, TX 79464
8061797-8400 8061797-8492
r'
`AGC PHARR AND COMPANY
P. O. BOX 2791
LUBBOCK, TX 79408
8061763-5263 8061763.5943
'AGC SANDIA CONSTRUCTION
2723 81°' St_
LUBBOCK, TX 79423
8061745-9450 8061745-9420
Art Cuevas Construction
7406 83rd
Lubbock, TX 79464
806/866-9000 806/866-91.00
Inc.
1001 E. Slaton Rd.
Lubbock, TX 79404
8061748-1999 806/748-9993
'Penton-Renfroe,
Greenstreet Construction
112 E.32nd
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/745-9444 806/745-8722
'James Griffin Construction.
4414 Ave. A
Lubbock, TX 79404
8061765-0029 806/744-4410
Danny Klein Construction
4310 93rd
Lubbock, TX 79423
8061794-9610 8061798-1310
Mike Klein GIC
1340 E 44th
Lubbock, TX 79404
8061747-4739 806/747-9869
Phoenix I Restoration
6822 Maple Ave.
Dallas, TX 75235
2141902-0111 214/904-9635
Plains Builders Inc.
6005.N IH-27
Lubbock, TX 79403
806/763-3461 806/763-3463
Wardroup & Assocs.
4408 Brownfield Dr
Lubbock, TX 79410
806/795-8032 8061793-2055
David Wood Construction
8219 Zadar Ave.
Wolfforth, TX 79382
806/866-2731 806/866-2736
Sandia' .
2723 81 st Street
Lubbock, TX 79423
Phone: 806/745-9450
Fax: 8061745-9420
Soliciting Disadvantaged Business Enterprise to bid: Silent Wings Museum
BID DATE: January 18, 2002 at 1:00 P.M.
We specifically invite
I
s and Women own
lially and Economi
Disadvantaged
and Small
3
ROM: RENEA MCWHORTER TO: PHARR COMPANY DATE: ii16102 TIME: 7:20:44 PM PAGL 2 OF 2
( acon Construction
Box 850756
Mesquite, TX 75186
214J222-8533 214/222-8542
t Construction
Route 1, Box 137
Ranger, TX 76470
254/647-5161 254/647-6297
_.rt
KDAT
1900A Northpark
Fort Worth, TX 76104
8171870-0555 817/336-1811
!)Agnhattan Environmental
111 W 50 #810
Tulsa, OK 74103
918/582-7078 918/582-1025
f' firth Texas Municipal Construction Co.
6334 Maple Ave. #550
Dallas, TX 75235
214/358-4013 214/366-0371
;tagcn industries
500 Sandau Rd., #600A
San Antonio, TX 78215
210/494-1520 210l497-1521
PEECO
438 McBride Lane
Corpus Christi, TX 78408
361/289-8891 361/289-7733
P,yrcell Contracting Limited
7978 Hwy 22
Meridian, TX 76665
2541435-2387 254/435-6119
"-hard Waters Construction
PO Box 204372
Austin, TX 78720
512/257-1974 51ZG31-0008
3 Engineering & Construction
2521 Landing Switch Rd.
Longview, TX 75602
903/660-1020 903/668-4199
Specialized Construction
9710 Interstate 30
Little Rock, AR 72209
501J562-4435 501/570-7831
terra Utilities
3216 W. Ave. T
Temple, TX 76504
254f742-2777 2541742-2755
;e McDaniel Blackman Corp.
5280 Trail Lake Dr.
Fort Worth, TX 76133
8171263-6343 817/346-1875
Pharr & Company
907 N Ave. Q Dr. (P.O. Box 2791)
Lubbock, TX 79403 (79408)
Phone: 806/763-5263
Fax: 806/763-5843
'^ Soliciting Disadvantaged Business Enterprise to bid: Silent Wings Museum
BID DATE: January 18, 2002 at 1:00 P.M.
We specifically invite Small Business Concerns and Women owned Business Concerns and Small
Business Concerns Owned/Controlled by Socially and Economically Disadvantaged Individuals.
I�
UBBOCK: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM ITB#001-02/BM ADDENDUM FOUR (4)
olD DATE: JANUARY 18, 2002 AT 1:00 P.M. EST. COST: $1,882,200
PRE -BID CONFERENCE: JANUARY 8, 2002 AT 10:00 A.M. in the Old Terminal Building 6202 N IN 27
"PLACE: Addressed to Victor Kiiman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, 1625 ISO Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, TX 79401
,RCHITECT: City of Lubbock
UIDDERS:
`AGC BROWN — MCKEE, INC.
P.O. BOX 3279
LUBBOCK, TX 79452
80617454511 8061748-1681
01AGC LEE LEWIS
P.O. BOX 65197
LUBBOCK, TX 794"
806179741400 8061797-8492
4GC PHARR AND COMPANY
P. O. BOX 2791
LUBBOCK, TX 79408
8061763-5263 806R63-5843
AGC SANDIA CONSTRUCTION
2723 81" St.
LUBBOCK, TX 79423
8061745-9450 8061"745-9420
Art Cuevas Construction
7406 83rd
Lubbock, TX 79464
806/866-9000 806/866-9100
eienton-Renfroe, Inc.
1001 E. Slaton Rd.
Lubbock, TX 79404
806f748-1999 8061748-9993
;reenstreet Construction
112 E.32nd
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/745-9444 806/745-8722
--ames Griffin Construction
4414 Ave. A
Lubbock, TX 79404
8061765-0029 806f744-4410
Danny Klein Construction
4310 93rd
Lubbock, TX 79423
8061794-9610 8061798-1310
dike Klein G/C
1340 E 44th
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/747-4739 8061747-9869
t 'hoenix 1 Restoration
6822 Maple Ave.
Dallas, TX 75235
214/902-0111 214/904-9635
Mains Builders Inc.
6005 N IH-27
Lubbock, TX 79403
8061763-3461 806f763-3463
David Wood Construction
8219 Zadar Ave.
Wolfforth, TX 79382
8061866-2731 806/866-2736
d*�
Sandia
2723 81 st Street
Lubbock, TX 79423
Phone: 806/ 745-9450
Fax: 806I745-9420
Soliciting Disadvantaged Business Enterprise to bid: Silent Wings Museum
BID DATE: January 18, 2002 at 1:00 P.M.
We specifically invite Small Business Concerns and Women owned Business Concerns and Small
Business Concerns Owned/Controlled by Socially and Economically Disadvantaged Individuals.
FROM: RENEA MCWHORTER TO: PHARR COMPANY DATE: 1117/02 'T1ME: 7:30:44 PM PAGE 1 OF 4
I
WEST TEXAS CHAPTER
ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA, INC
LUBBOCK PLAN ROOM UPDATE
January 17, 2002
New Plans Received
PROJECT
LOCATION
BID DATE
ARCHITECT
New Floor Covering for Denver City ISD
Denver City
1/30/02 3:00 PM
Grimes
Women's Center of the Permian Basin
Odessa
1/31102 5:00 PM
Cooper Construction
Roof Replacement for Jackson Elementary
Lubbock
1124102 2.30 PM
Adling Associates
Addenda Received
. LO.
PROJECT
LOCATION BID DATE CHANGE
ARCHITECT
2 #1
New Floor Covering for Denver City ISD
Denver City NONE
Grimes
#5
Silent Wings Museum
Lubbock ' NONE
City of Lubbock
17 #1
Roof Repair at 1100 W. 42nd Street
Odessa NONE
City of Odessa
s
Updated Bidders
SIZE
SIZE
r
Pharr & Company
907 N Ave. Q Dr. (P.O. Box 2791)
Lubbock, TX 79403 (79408)
Phone: 8061763-5263
Fax: 8061763-5843
Soliciting Disadvantaged Business Enterprise to bid: Silent Wings Museum
BID DATE: January 18, 2002 at 1:00 P.M.
We specifically invite Small Business Concerns and Women owned Business Concerns and Small
Business Concems Owned/Controlled by Socially and Economically Disadvantaged individuals.
UBBOCK: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM IT8#001=020M ADDENDUM FOUR (4)
BID DATE: JANUARY 18, 2002 AT 1:00 P.M. EST. COST: $1,882,200
PRE -BID CONFERENCE: JANUARY 8, 2002 AT 10:00 A.M. in the Old Terminal Building 6202 N IH 27
GLACE: Addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, 1625 1 e Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, TX 79401
J2CHITECT: City.of Lubbock
BIDDERS:
'AGC BROWN — MCKEE, INC.
P.O. BOX 3279
LUBBOCK, TX 79452
8061745-4511 8061748-1681
"0*1kGC LEE LEWIS
P.O. BOX 65197
LUBBOCK, TX 79464
$061797-8400 8061797-8492
AGC PHARR AND COMPANY
P. O. BOX 2791
LUBBOCK, TX 79408
8061763.5263 8061763-5943
`AGC SANDIA CONSTRUCTION
2723 81't St_
LUBBOCK, TX 79423
806/745-9450 8061745- 420
Denton-Renfroe, Inc.
1001 E. Slaton Rd.
Lubbock, TX 79404
8061748-1999 8061748-9993
""anny Klein Construction
4310 93rd
Lubbock, TX 79423
806/794-9610 8061798-1310
like Klein G/C
1340 E 44th
Lubbock, TX 79404
806/747-4739 806/747-9869
Phoenix I Restoration
6822 Maple Ave.
Dallas, TX 75235
214/902-0111 214/904-9635
David Wood Construction
8219 Zadar Ave.
Wolfforth, TX 79382
8061866-2731 806/866-2736
� �dnvnPhcrr�t �orl,dfiuc��iasz
LL January 14, 200.2
,,. Afa Inc. d/b/a AAA Fire
1703 East 50th Street
Lubbock, Texas 79404
ATTENTION: LAWRENCE FITHEN
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB 4001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
G Jgox 279-1
9ff41W010, 96W4 79408
(806) 70-526Y
Sax (806) 70-58'M
Lawrence,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday, January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
JKP/kb
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
s
�A C-
•ef IxE�\``•� INT[DRitf
5 N l l t •ft►O NStttT���`
9 0 J6ax 27,9-1
24iwd' 'Faw� 79408
(806) 7a-5263
Sax (806) 768-5893
January 14, 2002
.q A. K. Concrete, Inc.
3412 Fordham
Lubbock, Texas 79415
ATTENTION: JOHN
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Dear John,
We are bidding the above referenced project on'Friday, January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office if you
would like to look at them, or at the local AGC office. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKPAb
`ICY re
�a Cr
AYtR\t�.
S K 11 L �'` • •.• • til INTIOR Ty
,90ONfl����
YAa" & W y
January 14, 2002
American Paint & Blinds
4423 - 341h Street
Lubbock, Texas 79410
ATTENTION: BUD VENABLE
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Y G. Jhax 2791
�w cJt, Jexaa 79408
(806) 70-5263
Sax (806) 763-584Y
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday , January 18, 2002. We would
appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the local AGC
office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in submitting a bid
for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
JKP/kb
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
f K l� t �'• w, ,,. ,�L IH TI OiITP
r�
tqx & n, M-�
wenewl wanAw"
�d�ubf/utc�io�2
January 14, 2002
.• Anthony Mechanical, Inc.
P.O. Box 2706
Lubbock, Texas 79408
ATTENTION: MIKE POWELL -
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB 4001-02BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Mike,
9. 6 fox 279-1
ya'Wd, garab 79408
(806) 70-520
Sax (806) 70-584?
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday, January 18, 2002. We would
appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the local AGC
office if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in submitting a bid
for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
JKP/kb
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
/t
John K. Pharr
Vice President
A Ce
<rir[t�c►'
5 K I I
& V
�ooyvnzphcta�t Lo?26f/GtLC�t4�2
e
January 14, 2002
B & B Cleaning Service
5016 - 18"' Street
Lubbock, Texas 79416-5612
ATTENTION:
WANDA HARDAWAY
REFERENCE:
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02BM
LUBB OCK,TEXAS
Wanda,
5'6 Xox 2794
�f'rct�foc%, XW4 79408
(806) 769-5269
, aix (806) 7a-58M
We are bidding the above referenced project on .Friday , January 14, 2002. We would
appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the local AGC
office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in submitting a bid
for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
}
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/kb
sf
lit .
Rill * •. u. V.
WTroR11,
�;•ows�s��
ru�a
& V
�onv�rl,�iccal �Pdna�ucCia�
January 14, 2002
9. 0 fox279-1
YNUWA, geras 79408
(806) 70-5263
gaz (806) 763-SSAY
Comfort Masters Heating & Air Conditioning, Inc.
1101 East 58t' Street
Lubbock, Texas 79404
ATTENTION: GLENN DAVIS
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB 4001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Glen,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday, January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
"'°' We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office if you
would like to look at them, or at the local AGC office. Please call if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/kb
A C=
KIt� INTTGRITT
_ 'tjtONSI1T\\l
felp AAA &
January 14, 2002
R14
Paz 2794
c, r�ura6 79408
(808) 763-52B3
gaz (806) 70-584Y
Commercial Woodworks, Inc.
502 East 34' Street
Lubbock, Texas 79404
ATTENTION: MODESTO HINOJOSA
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02BM
LUBBOCK,TEXAS
Modesto,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday 3 January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office if you
would like to look at them, or at the local AGC office. Please call if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
A Ce
SKILL +ftROM INII Rifl
sR.
A,
January 14, 2002
KSRA
.�, Drexals Paint
2609 Emporia Street
Lubbock, Texas 79415
KKKA
ATTENTION: DREXAL ROBINSON
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB 4001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
r' as 2791
79408
(806) 70-520
gas (806) 70-58-M
Drexal,
f d t F' d J 18 2002 at 1.00 m
We are bidding the above re erence pn ro3ec ori ay, anuary p .
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office if you
would like to look at them, or at the local AGC office. Please call if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/lcb
�A Ce
Lem
�F41YE1���,. INTIGAITT
�s'ONSW
" .07exW 7 408
�� �ovt�fitac�dt6 (806) 7a-5263
�anvjr�hcra� �anb rc�ian Sax (806) 763-58'M
January 14, 2002
G. Electric, Inc.
2617 - 801h Street
Lubbock, Texas 79423
ATTENTION: GENARO GARCIA
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB 4001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Genaro,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday„ January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely, _
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/kb
J Est
�F flit �.
` ,l�ON•tt•1��
2�
lip
(k 9�
mac, geaaa 79408
Q?Melaal (806) 70-5.263
rednviiaewca1 Aux (806) 763-58M
January 14, 2002
.•, Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co.
P.O. Box 1361
Lubbock, Texas`79408
ATTENTION: KEVIN BRYANT
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB 9001-02BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Kevin,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday, January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pin.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office if you
would like to look at them, or at the local AGC office. Please call if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
t
Vice President
JKP/kb
e
_a c-
& W"nl.al'"ff
�aorun2t�i�tu� �or�,�firzcc�casa
January 14, 2002
Henley Interiors, Ltd.
7409 - 83`d Street
Lubbock, Texas 79424
ATTENTION: JAMES C. HENLEY
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITS #001-02BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
6 boa 2791
9"U"h, r' exaa 79408
(806) 763-5263
Sax (806) 763-584y
James,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
. '00�—
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/kb
t
� A Cy
S R l l l +ti�ONlt/51��, INTT OII Y
(mewl leo"Aac" (806) 7&-5268
leomme4104%/ gaa 6806) 70-5848
January 14, 200.2
Loya Painting
Rt. 6 Box 556
Lubbock, Texas 79423
ATTENTION: MANUEL R. LOYA, JR.
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Manuel,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday,, January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/kb
• pt � r
�A C�
OF AVE
K I l • .•• �l INTf D1117Y
& W"N6't"w
�venP/cal �a��if/caG�?6
,�„ �d�:���tP/tGtu� �druf�f/zcc�tion
January 14, 2002
Lubbock Carpet World, L.T. D.
4015 - 34'h Street
Lubbock, Texas 79410-4015
ATTENTION: GARY
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Gary,
9. G gox 27.91
Ya�&ch, garW 79408
(806) 70-526S
Aaix (806) 70-5848
We arc bidding the above referenced project on Friday,. January 14, 2002. We would
appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the local AGC
office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in submitting a bid
for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/kb
J� CO�s
E►\6�, +Tn �nr
�j�ON31.1��
Sly
&� 2701
�o1c, ga 4 79408
(806) 70-5263
����� �ayuc22uc�ian as (806) 70-5843
January 14, 2002
MIR Lubbock Glass & Mirror Co.
P.O. Box 368
Lubbock, Texas 79408.
ATTENTION: DELBERT SANDERS
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Delbert,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday , January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office if you
would like to look at them, or at the local AGC office. Please call if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office..
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/kb
• ��� CtN �
r�s
�A C�
KIIL ,� • ��
�j�ON31�31�
006w:
AAa44
wwwA al �o t/ucc�o�id
�Pdnvr�a�ci�zl ��✓uzc�
January 14, 2002
Lydick -Hooks Roofing Co. of Lubbock, Inc.
P.O. Box 2605
Lubbock, Texas 79408
ATTENTION: RANDY HOOKS
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Randy,
36w 79408
(806) 70-52a
Sax (806) 7a-5843
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday, January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
JKP/kb
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
c
m 'A C,.
K itl ♦IjpCNf1�\tta
w� �i�rvficac (806) 70-520
n�
ro"Mm/uitw Ieona►uc&W 56 (806) 70-584y
January 14, 200.2
RI Mendez & Son Painting
P.O. Box 366
Smyer, Texas 79367
ATTENTION: LARRY MENDEZ
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB 4001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Larry,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday., January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
RIM
John K. Pharr
., Vice President
JKP/kb
CN +C
s
�A C'!
1 K I l l •« ... •♦ INTIORITT
,tONflf\=\
PRO
&
wersN/cu� �an�`zex�a�
JIM" �Oiiiril2PhGl� �ar��iai2
January 14, 2002
.�, Royal Concrete
110 E. 861b Street
Lubbock, Texas 79404
ATTENTION: PAUL RODRIGUEZ
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB 4001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
° . G fox 279-1
Zd&ck, Sarud 79408
(806) 70-5263
Sax (806) 763-58M
Paul,
We are bidding the above referenced project on ' Friday, January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office. 4
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/lcb
A
♦�Y
ISM
KILL
279-1
hoc%, geaad 79408
(806) 70-520
9ax (806) 70-5848
January 14, 2002
R & R Ditching
4818 Kent Street
Lubbock, Texas 79415-9775
ATTENTION: WAYLAND PATTERSON
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02/BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
4
Wayland,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
Sincerely,
E
PHARR & COMPANY
1"'"
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/kb
-
f
�A C
IN
*'jfONfl���
lip
Cx Vr
�vPrnP/ia� �dr�f u►,c�d�d
SP�rurnP/ecr�l �ar��icec�ion
January 14, 200.2
�., Sal's Woodworks, Inc.
Slaton Highway, Suite A
Lubbock, Texas 79404
r.
ATTENTION: SALVADOR E. REVILLA
L REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02/BM
t.
LUBBOCK, TEXAS -
9. G. Sox 2797
lso , 369 791108
(806) 70-526Y
Sax (806) 70-58M
w. Sal,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
n
r JKP/kb
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
/Jdof K. Pharr
Vice President
J P
�A C�
X i l l
AAa44 & Wwnl�
�O�Yl�I�2e2Gilii` �oruL���ldi2
January 14, 2002
Selle Insulation Company
4602 Locust Avenue
Lubbock, Texas 79404-3740
ATTENTION: JEFF REESE
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Jeff,
6 Ax 2791
YaMod, 79408
(806) 768-5268
9aa (806) 70-58AY
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday-, January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project.
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
JKP/kb
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
AA
_1.
John K. Pharr
Vice President
A�C c
.��IkttIC" r+n I r
�nP/ca� �an�acia2d
�a,►n�n�iciu�l �arus�ir.�cc�2
January 14, 2002
Yates Carpet, Inc.
5278 West 341h Street
Lubbock, Texas 79407
&x 2791
ov/c, �araa 79408
(806) 70-520
Sax (806) 768-584Y
ATTENTION: PAT GARRY
REFERENCE: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - ITB #001-02BM
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Pat,
We are bidding the above referenced project on Friday, January 18, 2002 at 1:00 pm.
We would appreciate receiving a bid for this job. Plans will be available at our office or at the
local AGC office, if you would like to look at them. Please advise if you are interested in
submitting a bid for this project..
If you have any questions, please contact our office.
E:
Sincerely,
PHARR & COMPANY
John K. Pharr
Vice President
JKP/kb
srr
s
A C-
•j�ON{Itt��
ow
s�
arR
Bond #SA4506
STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(PUBLIC WORKS)
(Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of Contract Amount)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That
Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company
(hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
(hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held.and firmly bound unto
4:
City of Lubbock
(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of
ONE MILLION FOUR HUNDRED NINETY-FOUR DOLLAR $) $1,494,452.00
THOUSAND FOUR HUNDRED FIFTY-TWO AND
NO/100THS
for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs,
administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
...-WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee,
Dated the 23rd day of January 2002 to
•+ SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same
LL, extent as if copied at length herein.
r�
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal
shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the
prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be void;
otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of
Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions, conditions and limitations of said
Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed this instrument this
23rd day of January 2002
Pharr Co
)
f'
Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company
Z-)„ _ (Principal)
BY Wf A-1. /1-0.11`%'~
FidelitKand Guaranty Insurance
By
Staci Gross
s
ters, Inc. (Surety)
Attorney -in -Fact
DeStPaul
POWER OF ATTORNEY
Power of Attorney No.
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
20290
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Certificate No. 90418091
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, and that
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under
the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, and
that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do
hereby make, constitute and appoint
[ME
Donal Boley, Steve Deal and Staci Gross
Wichita Falls Texas
of the City of , State , their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact.
each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings,
contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the
performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings recltiire "a or_petnitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed.a 'sealed this lst day of December 1999
Seaboard Surety Companynited States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company' •' Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
�q ^ws {/pa ��sugq s�jTYA�y 11Y
�t-
� ���� ,gyp VOgA)i;:m /�'iCOPPOFA TF:Pi W
N 7927 O:_SEAL..'e� %,.;581LL,an N tan' 1977 g 1� I
State of Maryland
City of Baltimore THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE, Assistant Secretary
On this 1st day of December 1 1999 , before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared John F. Phinney and
Thomas E. Huibregtse, who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and
Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and
Guaranty Insurance Company. and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of
said Companies; and that they. as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the
corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers.
�G{,P EAS(F�,
m b
e` N�rARY yS
In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. m pU
etc
My Commission expires the 13th day of July, 2002. a9Ecoll �v
*ktUl- A AA4 -
REBECCA EASLEY-ONOKALA. Notary Public
86203 Rev. 7-2000 Printed in U.S.A.
0
SrPaul Surety
IMPORTANT NOTICE:
To obtain information or make a complaint:
You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies,
coverages, rights or complaints at:
1-800-252-3439
You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at:
P.O. Box 149104
Austin, TX 78714-9104
FAX 4 1-512-475-1771
Your notice of claim against the attached bond may be given to the surety company that issued
the bond by sending it to the following address:
Mailing Address: St. Paul Surety Claim
P.O. Box 4689
r
Federal Way, WA 98063-4689
Physical Address: St. Paul Surety Claim
31919 First Avenue South
Suite 100
Federal Way, WA 98003
You may also contact the St. Paul Surety Claim office by telephone at:
Telephone Number: 1-253-945-1545
PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES:
.,
If you have a dispute concerning a premium, you should contact the agent first. If you have a
dispute concerning a claim, you should contact the company first. If the dispute is not resolved,
you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance.
ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND:
This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached
document.
SND C14ECK
pIN
A �_.
PERFORMANCE
BOND
Bond #SA4506
STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(PUBLIC WORKS)
(Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of Contract Amount)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That
Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company
(hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
r- (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held.and firmly bound unto
City of Lubbock
(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of
ONE MILLION FOUR HUNDRED NINETY-FOUR DOLLAR $) $1,494,452.00 )
THOUSAND FOUR HUNDRED FIFTY-TWO AND
NO/100THS
MM
for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs,
administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee,
dated 23rd day of January 2002 to
""* SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same
extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal
shall faithfully perfomr the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and
contract documents, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full
!"" force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of
Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be
d; determined in accordance with the.provisions, conditions and limitations of said
1. Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
'- IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed this instrument this
23rd day of January 2002
Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company
(Principal)
FiAity,�anmd Guaranty Insurance"Underwriters, !nc. (Surety)
0y_ < Y_ Z�O�
Staci Gross Attorney -in -Fact
ii
No Text
ACCRD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANC DATE(MM/DD/YY)
ID C 1 01/22/02
PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
"ley Featherston Insurance HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
. O. Box 97513 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
,,ichita Falls TX 76307-7513
Phone: 940-723-7111 Fax: 940-322-9549 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE
oURED 'INSURERA: Bituminous Casualty Corp
INSURER B: RLI Insurance
Pharr Construction Company Inc INSURERC: Texas Workers Comp Ins Fund
Lubbock 27979408 INSURERD: Great American South Inc
INSURER E:
.0 V r-KAU t_J
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
INSR
LTR
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
POLICY EFFECTIVE
DATE MM/DD/YY
POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE MM/DDfYY
LIMITS
GENERAL LIABILITY
EACH OCCURRENCE
$1, 000, 000
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire)
$ 50,000
l
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
CLP3092945B
07/31/01
07/31/02
CLAIMS MADE Fill OCCUR
MED EXP (Any one person)
$ 5,000
PERSONAL SADVINJURY
$1,000,000
GENERAL AGGREGATE
$2 , 000 , 000
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER
PRODUCTS - COMWOP AGG
$2 , O 0 0 , O Q 0
POLICY PRO-
JECT LOC
L
_S
AUTOMOBILE
LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
CAP3119920B
07/31/01
07/31/02
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
(Ea accident)
$1 OOO OOO
r r
X
BODILY INJURY
(Per person)
$
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
X
X
BODILY INJURY
(Per accident)
$
HIRED AUTOS
NON -OWNED AUTOS
PROPERTY DAMAGE
(Per accident)
$
GARAGE LIABILITY
AUTO ONLY . EA ACCIDENT
$
OTHER THAN EA ACC
$
ANY AUTO
$
AUTO ONLY: AGG
EXCESS LIABILITY
EACH OCCURRENCE
$5 , 000 , 000
I B
X OCCUR CLAIMSMADE
ERU0004673
07/31/01
07/31/02
AGGREGATE
$ 5,000,000
$
DEDUCTIBLE
$
X RETENTION $ 10,000
Y
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
EMPLOYERS LIABILITY
TSF0001108071
07/31/01
07/31/02
OTH-
TORY LIMITS ER
E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
$ 1000000
E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE
$ 1000000
E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT
$1000000
OTHER
]
Equipment Floater
TIM1038410
07/31/01
07/31/02
Scheduled $87,700
D
Builders Risk
TIM1038410
07/31/01
07/31/02
All Risk VARIOUS
ESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2E: SILENT WINGS MUSEUM. CITY OF LUBBOCK IS ADDITIONAL INSURED UNDER
TZT -.T T IT-) ' I t• TTTM TTT TTTLID nILI 0TTDDP1r+AM1rf1LT TLT LATT^D r1L+ PlTTV ALA Trmr3r%r+TI
IS PROVIDED UNDER GENERAL LIABIITY, AUTO & WORKERS COMPENSATION.
CERTIFICATE HOLDER I N I ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER: CANCELLATION
I CITY OF LUBBOCK
I 1625 13TH STREET, RM L-04
P O BOX 2000
LUBBOCK TX 79457
CITYLUO SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRAT1Ot
DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL
IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR
REPRESENTATIVES.
1
1rO,RD �vINSURANCE BINULK
n i BINDER IS A TEMPORARY INSURANCE CONTRACT, SUBJECT TO THE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE F
-723-7111 COMPANY
-321 3549 Bituminous Casualty Co
B .ey Featherston Insurance
P. 0. Box 97513
W*ahita Falls TX 76307-7513
B Ley Featherston Insurance
c.,.E: 421-3231 sue CODE:
CUSIOMERiD: PHA3RC—�
City of Lubbock
P 0 BOX 2000
Lubbock TX 79409
COVERAGES
TYPE OF INSURANCE
F' 'PERTY CAUSES OF LOSS
IDASIC 7 BROAD 17, SPEC
f 4ERAL LIABILITY
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
�._ CLAIMS MADE F71 OCCUR
Towner S Contractor Prot.
RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE:
ANY AUTO
ALL OWNED AUTO$
w.. SCHEDULED AUTOS
HIRED AUTOS
NON -OWNED AUTOS
ITO PHYSICAL DAMAGE DEDUCTIBLE L, J ALL VEHICLES
COLLISION:
° OTHER THAN COL:
XRAGE LIABILITY
ANY AUTO
9CCFSS LIABILITY
UMBRELLA FORM
RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE:
WORKER'S COMPENSATION
AND
EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY
3'PECIAL CONTRACTOR: PHARR 6 C&—WA
CONDITIONS/
OTHER
44OVERAGES
LAME & ADDRESS
yr iv ui 01/25/02
:VERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM.
-j BiNDERIK 25069
X AM I X 12:01 AM
01/22/02 12:01 PM 02/21 02 tNOON
PS X IRTMO POLICCY (�70 EXTEND COVERAGE IN THE ABOVE NAMED COMPANY
R 1 HzrIDER
IESCRIP11ON OF OPERATIONSNENICLEWROPE RTY (►nclucling Locaflon)
SILVER WINGS MUSEUM, 6202 N IH 27,
LUHBOCK,TX
COVERAGEIFORMS
SCHEDULED VEHICLES
MORTGAGEE
LOSS PAYEE
Vtt
ACORD 76-5 (1l98) NOTE: IMPORTANT STATE INFORMA
LIMITS
DEDUCTIBLE I GOIN6 X I AMOUNT
EACH OCCURRENCE 16500,000
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire)
S
MED EXP (Any one Demon)
t
PERSONAL & ADV INJURY
L
GENERAL AGGREGATE
S 50 O , 0_O o
PRODUCTS • COMPIOP AGO
f
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
s
BODILY INJURY (Per parnon)
fp
RMLY INJURY (Per accl4ant)
S
PROPERTY DAMAGE
f
MEDICAL PAYMENTS
S
PERSONAL INJURY PROT
^_
S
UNINSURED MOTORIST
f
s
ACTUAL CASH VALUE
S
STATEDAMOUNT
OTHER
AUTO ONLY • EA ACCIDENT
f
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY:
EACH ACCIDENT
S
AGGREGATE
s
EACH OCCURRENCE
f
AGGREGATE
S
SELF-MURED RETENTION
f
YVC STATUTORY LIMITS
E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
S
E.L DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE
f
F-L DISEASE • POLICY LIMIT
y�
S
FEES
S
TARES
S
ESTIMATED TOTAL PREMIUM
S
ADDITIONAL INSURED
CONDITIONS
This Company binds tho kinds) of Insurance stipulated on the reverse side, The Insurance is subject to the
terms, conditions and limitations of the policy(les) in current use by the Company.
This binder may be cancelled by the insured by surrender of this binder or by written notice to the Company
stating when cancellation will be effective. This binder may be cancelled by the Comparry by notice to the
Insured in accordance with the policy conditions. This binder Is cancelled when replaced by a policy. If this
binder is not replaced by a policy, the Company is entitled to charge a premium for the binder according to the
Rules and Rates in use by the Company.
Applicable in California
When this form is used to provide Insurance in the amount of one million dollars ($1,000,000) or more, the title
of the form is changed from "Insurance Sinder' to "Cover Note".
Applicable in Delaware
The mortgagee or Obligee of any mortgage or other instrument given for the purpose of creating a lien on real
property shall accept as evidence of Insurance a written binder issued by an authorized insurer or its agent if
the binder includes or is accompanied by: the name and address of the borrower; the name and address of the
lender as loss payee; a description of the insured real property; a provision that the binder may not be canceled
within the term of the binder unless the lender and the insured borrower receive written notice of the cancel-
lation at least ten (10) days prior to the cancellation; except in the case of a renewal of a policy subsequent to
the closing of the loan, a paid receipt of the full amount of the applicable premium, and the amount of
Insurance coverage.
Chapter 21 Title 25 Paragraph 2119
Applicable in Nevada
Any person who refuses to accept a binder which provides coverage of less than $1,000,000.00 when proof is
required: (A) Shall be fined not more than $500.00, and (9) is liable to the party presenting the binder as proof
of insurance for actual damages sustained therefrom.
TOTAL P.02
CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST
A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
(1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on
proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
(2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity
prior to beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the
contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of
any person providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide
coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both
English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices
shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words
or changes:
r 2
n*ae
PM
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see
reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the
identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal
requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to
report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
(8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing
of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the
duration of the project;
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the
project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this
rule;
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during
the duration of the project;
(F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten)10 days
after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by
paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they
are providing services.
PM 3
f L 1 [_ f 1: to C___ t: t f E__ [ __ _ [ I t f
CONTRACT
•, STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 23rd day of January, 2002 by and between the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so,
hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Pharr Construction Company, Inc. of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock
and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and inconsideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the
PM CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements
described as follows:
BID #001-02/BM -SILENT WINGS MUSEUM - $1,494,452.00
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own
proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance
and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract
documents as defined in the General Conditions of the Agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within five (5) days after the date written notice to do so shall
have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with
the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make
payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year and day first above written.
ATTEST: CITY F LUBBOCK, TEX R)
13�1_,InX JZ
City Secretary R
APP VED AS TO CONTENT:
'PAJ 1 &4 CONTRACTOR:
Owner's Representative
r� ons�rA�o 0
APPROVE AS TO FORM:
�7 By.
ty Attorney
PRINTED NAME:
TITLE: `'i Ce
ATTEST: COMPLETE ADDRESS:
ow Co orate Secretary Pharr Construction Company, Inc.
P.O. Box 2791
Lubbock, Texas 79408
pow
°"" 1
r-+
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMEN
a-,
s+�
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
r.,
1. OWNER _
Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of
Lubbock, Texas.
2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co-
partnership or corporation, to wit PHARR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY INC. who has agreed to perform the
work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative.
3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as
referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative, H. DAVID JONES, DEPUTY DIRECTOR, so designated who
will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as
may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or
inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the
Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid Submittal
Form including "Exhibit A", Signed Contract, Statutory Bonds, General Conditions of the Agreement, Special
Provisions, Technical Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to
Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes
referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents".
5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or
words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation
or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable;"
"Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's
Representative.
6. SUBCONTRACTOR _
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no
responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due
Subcontractor.
7. WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of
the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last._
business address known to the party who gives the notice.
e�*
1
8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality and
free from material defects. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and
quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade
meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents _
has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still
may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will
check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANE AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished ten (10) copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor
and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. Additional sets of plans and
specifications may be purchased by Contractor at Contractor's expense for the price of J§qa per set.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the
Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the
Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Contractor whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and
grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the
completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall
suspend its work in order to permit Contractor to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief
as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the
Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes,
marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by
Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Contractor at
Contractor's expense.
r"
V"
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority
to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The
r Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work
which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work
and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the
.., execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be
conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15)
calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection
by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from
time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may
deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said
material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall
furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the
proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and
instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and
instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications
provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or
inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's
Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any
and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall
keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory
to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions
given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate
supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance
�- of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the
r^
Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and
location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the
contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or
Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms
or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all
modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's
Representative and Contractor.
0-4
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work
to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the _
work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of
work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall
inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion,
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or
men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's
Representative's written consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and
completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is
also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of
any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such
structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public
observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be
approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at
any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any
observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the
time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any
such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its
completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has
previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without
approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for
examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at
a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or
require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to
furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons
competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated.
All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials
or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative,
be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and
approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the —
requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such
tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective,
and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
4
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
7„ Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such
inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance
with the requirements of the contract documents.
It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in
the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not
in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written
notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy
such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial
action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit,
in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either
before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying bond
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a
claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of
work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid
according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract;
otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make
such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in
said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual
expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered
by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative
when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of
the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the
compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following
methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced,
then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the
extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged
t, by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for
performance of the extra work.
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph
shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen,
timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for
the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred,
5
together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age
Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other
insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by
them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be
kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's
Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the
type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership
Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for
the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent
(15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit,
overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not
embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office
must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall
be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case
any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra
work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should
a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and
the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making
written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as
provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of
any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived.
It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the
specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that
such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these
contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in
these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owner's Representative and a
clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's
Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance
with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding
of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and
specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any
request for clarification must be submitted no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the opening of
bids.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of
work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the
Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall
comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the
Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give
reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
6
Ia
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
-� precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment
and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or
municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold
harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages,
expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or
contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attomeys' fees and expenses, in connection
with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any
manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject
... matter of this contract.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an
Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given
_ by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses,
are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to
supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or`any of its subcontractors.
28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided thirty (30) calendar days in advance of cancellation or
change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by
Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of
self-insurance, rights to subrogation' that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by
virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the
City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver..
The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor,
'^ or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance
specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as additional insured. It shall be the
contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers
compensation coverage for each subcontractor.
A. General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1.000,000.00
.► Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and $1.000,000.00 per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
A..
Underground Damage Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard AGG
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury
Advertising Injury
Fire Damage (Any one Fire)
Property Damage
Pressurized Vessel Endorsement
Mobile Equipment Endorsement
Heavy Equipment
B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance.
For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single
Limit in the aggregate and $500,000.00 per occurrence. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract
execution.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance.
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,.000,000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -
owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City of
Lubbock is to be named as additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the
endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
E. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance.
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract pace (100%
of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
E. Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $3,000,000.00 on all contracts
with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile
Liability coverages.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least statutory/$500,000.00.
Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority
to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-
83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's
or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental
entity.
r
,.,
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor' in Section 406.096, Texas Labor
Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has
undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with
the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without
limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -
operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to
provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or
delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a
project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of
Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on
the project, for the duration of the project.
3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being
awarded the contract.
4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new
certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project.
6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and
�-- for one year thereafter.
7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by
the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the
project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and
report lack of coverage.
9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services
on the project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas
Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate
of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person
providing' services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project;
and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects
the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by
paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the
Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will
provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the
duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance
carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance
Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative
penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the
Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor
does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the
governmental entity.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner
for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence
of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the
insurance company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date bome by
such certificate.
10
W
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at
the address shown in the bid specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or
cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
(9) A Contractor shall:
(a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of
any coverage agreements;
(b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental
entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for
all persons providing services on the project; and
Y (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project
that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current
coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other
�-, posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type
and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and
any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be
�., the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional
words or changes:
°^ REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to
this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This
includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing
0." 11
labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of
their employer or status as an employee. "
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive
information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has
provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;"
and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,
to:
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing
services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning
work on the project;
(iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language:
"By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a
certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is
representing to the govemmental entity that all employees of the
person signing this contract who will provide services on the
project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for
the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on
proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and
that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate
insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the
commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing
false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to
administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or
other civil actions.';
(iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown
on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the
project;
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project
and for one year thereafter;
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as
required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to
the person for whom they are providing services.
12
U0
rM
29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of
1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such
individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee
compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment.
30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN. AND FURNISHERS
.. OF MACHINERY. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees,
harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in
any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and
furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of
*^ this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor
shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid,
discharged or waived.
If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of
those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five
(5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain
unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a
sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such
indebtedness.
31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material
or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof.
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and
save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except
that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or, manufacturers is specified or
required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material
or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers,
agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's
Representative prior to bidding. - -
32. LAWS AND
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form,
the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the
Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such
laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor
observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in
writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the
work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within
said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or
local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors
perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's
Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
13
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as
the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may
enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as
though embodied herein.
33. SUBCONTRACTING
The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this
contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as
provided by the contract documents.
34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL. COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are
essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in
this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified,
then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner
may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $500 (FIVE HUNDRED) PER DAY,
not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every
working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial -
completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into
consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages
the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount
agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and
is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach.
IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS
OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT.
35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall
be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as
shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution
shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this
contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that
when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may
direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the
construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the
Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE
The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this
project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and
has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that
14
rw.
P..
it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been
delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors
employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public
enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all
justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days
of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the
extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial,
and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided
herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived.
37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such
work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in
securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except
where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in
which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such
stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the
event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the
specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material
to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated
to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they
are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing
their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are
expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and
agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ
somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method,
payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project.
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way
encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under
this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be
liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without
limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner and any of its officers, agents and employees,
against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising
from or growing out of the performance of this contract.
40. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by
the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the
specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the
••� bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to
receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all
expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner
15
and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of
Owner's Representative.
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective
work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's
Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection
with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there
are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by
Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's
agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for
partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine
the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if
submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a
certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor
up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's
Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the
Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be --
retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by
Owner under the terms of the contract documents.
Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to
enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work
performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said
partial payment is attributable.
43_ SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31)
working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been
substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time,
if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's
Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding
the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete
the work within the time provided in this contract.
The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final
completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final
completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's
Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion,
Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final
completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final
completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the
obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or
warranties implied by law or otherwise.
16
0
0
45. CORRECTION OF WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative
on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and
Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming
to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of
other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any
such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative,
�-+ Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the
contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and
Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which
shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's
Representative.
46. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify
the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of:
., , r ,,. . .:.... _.
(a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the
amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor
shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's
Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception.
Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner
shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right
under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by
Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's
Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed
denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed
that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor,
and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and
Owner's Representative, by Contractor.
48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after
written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the
written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety
on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be
delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no
further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required.
After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and
17
equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the
Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or
credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for
under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice
hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with
diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract
documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or
otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective
manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and
supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor,
machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall
be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time
become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than
the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the
Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the
sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said
Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper
having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of
the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of
any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost
under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain
bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which
would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be
credited therewith.
In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall
have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as
provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract
accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be,
shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would
have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract,
or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the
Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over -
to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price,
and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time
designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of _.
the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided,
however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of
such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to
the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the
date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net
sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at -
either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the
Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners.
18
r-1R
The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted
by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this
paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise
of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies
available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in
paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth.
49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY
The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually
performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be
liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the
project which is the subject matter of this contract.
50. BOND
The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in
the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the
Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the
amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall
be submitted on forms acceptable to the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do
business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so
furnished.
51. SPECIAL PROVISIONS
In the event special provisions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special provisions
conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special provisions shall
control. In the event there is a discrepancy between the specifications and the general conditions, the
specifications shall control.
52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the
work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the
prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to
direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work
�^^ covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's
work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and
vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or
effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's
Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation.
54. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at
the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus
materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition.
In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
19
MEMO IN-TV-1 3 -�• •
Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same
may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in
any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the
Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the
City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a
Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in
the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project
or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts
and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least
twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and
provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If
the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5)
days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied.
In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper
performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage,
disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or
asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective
gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum
products or byproducts and/or asbestos.
20
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
RE: RESOLUTION NO.6262, ITEM NO. 39, APRIL 8, 1999
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
11.50
Air Conditioner Installer
12.50
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
6.25
Asbestos Worker
9.00
Asbestos Supervisor
12.50
Bricklayer
12.50
Bricklayer -Helper
7.00
Carpenter
11.00
Carpenter -Helper
7.00
Cement Finisher
8.00
Drywall Hanger
11.00
Electrician
13.75
Electrician -Helper
7.00
Equipment Operator -Heavy
9.50
Equipment Operator -Light
8.50
Floor Installer
9.50
Glazier
10.50
Insulator-Piping/Boiler
11.50
Insulator -Helper
7.00
Iron Worker
11.00
Laborer -General
6.00
Mortar Mixer
6.00
Painter
9.50
Plumber
12.50
Plumber -Helper
7.00
Roofer
9.00
Roofer -Helper
7.00
Sheet Metal Worker
10.00
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
7.00
Welder -Certified
11.00
WK
s-�
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Cr
Hourly Rate
Asphalt Heaterman
9.00
Asphalt Shoveler
6.00
Concrete Finisher
8.00
Concrete Finisher -Helper
7.00
Electrician
12.00
Flagger
6.00
Form Setter
7.00
,,. Form Setter -Helper
6.25
Laborer -General
6.00
Laborer -Utility
6.75
Mechanic
8.00
Mechanic -Helper
7.00
Power Equipment Operators
Asphalt Paving Machine
7.75
Bulldozer
8.00
Concrete Paving Machine
7.75
Front End Loader
7.25
Heavy Equipment Operator
8.00
Light Equipment Operator
7.25
Motor Grader Operator
9.50
Roller
6.75
Scraper
7.25 "
Tractor
7.25
Truck Driver -Light
6.50
Truck Driver -Heavy
7.00
EXHIBIT C
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor
Standards Act.
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Legal Holiday Rate
The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the fair Labor Standards Act.
A
SPECIFICATIONS
P"
.m
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION..........................................................................1
2.0
EXPLORATION, SAMPLING AND FIELD TESTING.................2
3.0
LABORATORY TESTING............................................................3
4.0
GENERAL SOILS AND DESIGN CONDITIONS .........................4
4.1 Site Description...................................................................4
4.2 Description of Soils- Building Area......................................4
4.3 Design Conditions- Building Area........................................4
5.0
SITE PREPARATION ......................... ............... .. ...............7
6.0
CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA.......................................................8
6.1 Site Drainage.......................................................................8
i
6.2 Quality Control....................................................................8
7.0
LIMITATIONS...............................................................................10
8.0
REPORT DISTRIBUTION.............................................................12
TERRA ENGINEERS, i
LUBBOCK
r"
P"
SOIL INVESTIGATION
Silent Wings Museum
Lubbock, Texas
l
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This report contains the results of the soil investigation recently done for the
proposed Silent Wings Museum, Lubbock, Texas. This investigation was conducted
according to the instructions from Mr. John McGinley, Deputy Director for Operations &
Safety, Lubbock International Airport, Lubbock, Texas. The objectives of this
investigation were to conduct subsurface exploration, field-testing and laboratory testing,
and subsequently, based on the findings to develop recommendations for the proposed
structure including foundation type, depth and allowable bearing values of the soil.
TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.
LUBBOCK
STR 1526 2
11 /27/2001
2.0 EXPLORATION, SAMPLING AND FIELD TESTING
At the request of the client, the sub -surface conditions were explored by two (2)
test holes drilled to a depth of 35.0 feet at locations shown in the boring location plan
(Figure 1). The drilling was performed using CME-75 Drilling Rig with hollow stem
augers in order to secure reliable data on the natural moisture content of the soil and
ground water, if any. Standard penetration tests were made at depths of 2.5, 5.0 feet and
at 5.0 feet interval thereafter. The number of blows per foot of the split spoon sampler (in
6-inch increment) is shown in the boring logs and in Figure 2. The sampling was
performed in accordance with the ASTM D-1586; however the number of blows on the
split spoon sampler is limited to a maximum of 25 for the first 6 inches of penetration and
if the penetration of the sampler for the first or the second 6 inches increment is less than
6 inches, the actual penetration obtained for the respective increment is reported in the
I
boring logs.
The changes in soil strata as observed during drilling operations were carefully
determined and are shown in the boring logs. All soil samples were kept in moisture -
proof plastic bags to preserve the in -situ moisture content, identified by the hole number
and the depth of the hole, and transported to the laboratory for additional tests and
evaluation.
The boring was monitored during and immediately after drilling for the presence
and level of groundwater. However, the groundwater table was not observed in both the
test holes during drilling.
LUBBOCK
STR 1526 3
11/27/2001
3.0 LABORATORY TESTING
All samples have been classified following the procedures outlined in ASTM D-
2487 based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Soils are described in the boring
logs using the methods prescribed in ASTM D-2488, using a Munsell Soil Color Chart,
published by Macbeth Division of Kollinorgen Corporation, Baltimore, Maryland, 1975
edition.
Soil samples, which indicated maximum plasticity characteristics, were selected
and :Atterberg Limit tests were performed on these samples according to procedures
outlined in ASTM D-4318. Percentage by weight of material passing sieve # 200 was
determined by ASTM D-1140 for the same samples. Moisture content for all samples
were determined by the procedures outlined in ASTM D-2216. Six (6) Shelby tubes
samples were retrieved, out of which four (4) were from borings #1 and #2 at the depths
between 2.5 and 4.5 feet for Triaxial compression tests. The other two (2) additional
samples were retrieved to determine the soil stiffness coefficient for the subgrade beneath
the existing pavement. However, four (4) out of six (6) samples performed well during
testing, while two (2) samples crumbled during testing (see Attachment 1 through 4). A
typical soil sample collected at the vicinity of borehole #1 and was tested for moisture
density relation in accordance with ASTM D-698 (see Table 1 and Attachment 5).
All soil samples collected with reference to this project will be stored for a period
of six (6) months from the date when this report is submitted. The samples will be
discarded after elapse of this time period, unless this office is instructed.
TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.
LUBBOCK
STR 1526
11 /27/2001
4.0 GENERAL SOILS AND DESIGN CONDITIONS
4.1 Site Description
Site is located on a plain land covered with concrete pavement. To the north of the
site is the old Lubbock International Airport building, south of the site is bound by
existing airport building, to the east airport and to the west of the site is the existing old
terminal. Two test holes each 35 feet were drilled through an existing concrete pavement.
4.2 Description of Soils- Building Area
The hole #1 is drilled through a 4-inch thick concrete slab while hole #2, is drilled
through a 14 inch concrete slab on a caliche base. In hole #2 below the slab and the base,
there are layers of sandy lean clay (CL). In hole #1, the clay layer extends to a depth of 6
feet, while in hole #2, the clay layer extends to a depth of 14 feet. In hole #1, there is a
layer of clayey sand (SC) between the depths of 6 and 15 feet. Below 15 feet in both
s
c
holes, there are layers of silty sand (SM) or clayey sand (SC) with sandstone and or
cemented with caliche rock pieces. These soil layers are overconsolidated, very strong
and common in West Texas area. These hard soil layers are so hard that they form as an
excellent stratum for bearing foundations. However, some of these soil layers can be hard
to cut during excavations compared to other types of soils normally encountered in West
Texas area. All the silty sand layers are nonplastic. The topsoil layers have.a plasticity
index between 9 and 18. Hence there are no soil layers that are potentially expansive in
nature from a foundation point of view.
4.3 Design Conditions - Building Area
The Triaxial compression tests indicate that the values of moduli of elasticity of
the soil samples at 50% ultimate strength are 900, 1500, 2850, and 800 psi. respectively.
I
LUBBOCK
STR 1526 5
11 /27/2001
The data from these tests are shown in Attachments #1 through #4. It is reported that the
proposed building lightly loaded and single storied with a maximum total column load
equal to 35 Kips. The topsoil layers are relatively soft because of the increase in moisture
contents due to the presence of the concrete slab on the top. Since the building is
categorized as a lightly loaded one, it is recommended that the spot and or continuous
footings be used as the foundation for the building. The allowable bearing value for the
soil at a depth of 2.5 feet below the ground level is 1000 psf with a minimum width of
footing equal to 18 inches. For heavier loads, a drilled pier type foundation is
recommended. The piers shall be placed at a depth of 15 feet below the existing ground
level and the allowable net bearing capacity is recommended as 6000 psf. The piers can
be belled to increase its bearing area. The holes can be drilled without any casing as the
soil has sufficient cohesion and the hole would hold during the placement of concrete
'i
after drilling.
The structural engineer has expressed as desire to use the existing slab for the
building as much as possible. The Modulus of subgrade reaction of the soil below the
existing slab for a 1 x 1 foot footing is 75 lbs per square inch per inch. However, all new
floor slabs shall be placed on compacted soil and the compaction shall be performed as
recommended in the Section 5.0 Site Preparation. Also, the soil that exists at the top is
susceptible to loss of strength when inundated with water. It is recommended to avoid
landscape very close to the building foundation, since the soil can lose strength when
subjected to excessive moisture. It is further recommended to provide good drainage
around the building so as to maintain good bearing for the soil (see Section 6.1 for more
specific information).
rERRA ENGINEERS, ING.
LUBBOCK
STR 1526 6
11 /27/2001
The above given bearing values are for the depths indicated and for soil in its
natural condition. If the intended area for the footings is over excavated and subsequently
filled by existing or transported soil to the required level, in such situations the footings
or the piers placed on loose soil material can be susceptible to large differential
settlements. In such instances, it is recommended that the soil fill shall meet the
requirements for transported soil (see Section 5.0 Site Preparation), and shall be filled in
9.0 inch lifts (or less than 9.0 inch) and each lift shall be compacted to a density such that
the compacted dry density is 95% of the in dry density as determined by ASTM
D-698. The compaction must be tested before each lift is placed over the previous one.
C
TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.
0
LUBBOCK
H
STR 1526 7
11 /27/2001
5.0 SITE PREPARATION
It is recommended that the top 2.0 inches of soil shall be removed to clear the
debris, roots and vegetation, if any, except in the area where the concrete slab exists. In
the building area, below the natural soil, it is recommended that at least 9.0 inches of soil
be scarified and compacted in order to obtain a uniform surface. The compaction shall be
performed such that the compacted dry density shall be at least 95% of the computed
laboratory dry density as determined by ASTM D-698. If the ground elevation has to be
increased, the soil fill shall be placed on top of the compacted soil such that each
compacted layer shall not exceed 9.0 inches in thickness and the compaction shall be
performed as per the above specification.: If the transported soil is different from the
existing soil, then the soil shall be tested for Atterberg limits (ASTM D-4318), maximum
dry density and optimum moisture (ASTM D-698). The liquid limit of the transported soil
I
shall not exceed 35 and plasticity index shall be between 7 and 12. The new layer of
compacted soil shall be placed only after the bottom layer has been compacted and to'sted
for the required densities.
TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.
LUBBOCK
STR 1526 g
11 /27/2001
6.0 CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA
6.1 Site Drainage
It is recommended to provide adequate drainage outside the building. Provision of
flowerbeds or lawns close to the building can have very detrimental effects on the
foundation because of the possibility of softening of the clayey soils with increase in
moisture. Flowerbeds and lawns shall be placed sufficiently away from the building or
placed in waterproof structures, so that they will not supply any moisture to the soil under
the building. It is also recommended that the site drainage be well developed. Surface
water shall be directed. away from the foundation soil (use a slope of about 5% within
10.0 feet of the foundation). No waterlogging shall be allowed near the structure or in the
pavement at any time.
6.2 Quality Control
i
Construction inspection and quality control tests shall be planned and scheduled
to verify materials and placement is in accordance with the specifications. Subgrade
preparation, field density tests, and concrete strength are very important and therefore
shall be monitored and recorded. The drilling for the piers shall be monitored by a
geotechnical engineer for the placement of the pier on the correct soil strata, which may
vary from pier to pier. It is recommended that Terra Engineers, Inc. shall perform quality
control services in order to ensure quality construction inspection and material testing for
the project. Terra Engineers, Inc. would be pleased to provide these services and can also
assist with construction inspection, planning and scheduling. We also recommend that
Terra Engineers, Inc. be retained, to review the final design document to verify that the
TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.
LUBBOCK
}
STR 1526 g
11 /27/2001
recommendations made in this report have been interpreted as intended, and to inspect the
installation of all foundations.
TERRA ENGINERRS, INC
LUBBOCK
STR 1526 10
11 /27/2001
7.0 LIMITATIONS
Every effort has been made to accurately evaluate the subsurface conditions at the
above referenced site in accordance with the standard engineering principles and
practices. No other warranty or guarantee, expressed or implied, is made other than that
the work was performed in a proper and workmanlike manner. However, it must be
recognized that boulders or gravel of sizes larger than 1.5 inches cannot be retrieved by
the SPT sampling tube.
The foundation recommendation stated in this report is based on only two (2)
borings to a depth of 35.0 feet at locations shown in the boring location plan (Figure 1).
The conclusions reached in this report are exclusively for engineering design and were
based on the field tests and results of laboratory tests conducted on samples recovered
from two (2) test holes drilled to a depth specified by the client. Further, the
recommendations presented herein are based on analyses, which presume the conditions
of soil properties in the areas between the borings to have a reasonably uniform variation
as revealed by the exploratory borings. Consequently, careful observations must be made
during construction to detect significant deviations of actual conditions throughout the
construction area from those inferred from the exploratory boring. Should any unusual
conditions be encountered during construction, this office should be notified immediately
so that further investigations and supplemental recommendations can be made to modify
the foundation design to suit the new existing conditions.
The Terra Engineers, Inc. shall not accept the responsibility for all the adequacies
of the recommendations given in this report if another party is retained for QA/QC during
TERRA
LUBBOCK
s
STR 1526 11
11 /27/2001
pier drilling and installation and to perform the construction material testing during the
construction phase.
Due to changes in the current technology, changes to the project site conditions,
changes in project specification etc., this report and the recommendations made in here
shall be outdated with in a period of one (1) year from the date of the report. We strongly
recommend that the client should contact Terra Engineers, Inc. to determine whether this
report is valid after the expiration of the above mentioned time period.
4
TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.
LUBBOCK
i
STR 1526 12
11 /27/2001
r
I
8.0 REPORT DISTRIBUTION
Terra Engineers, Inc. prepared this report for the sole and exclusive use by its
client, based on specific and limited objectives. All reports, boring logs, field data,
laboratory test results and other documents prepared by Terra Engineers, Inc. as
instruments of service shall remain the property of Terra Engineers, Inc., and reuse of
these documents is not permitted without written approval from Terra Engineers, Inc. The
client may release the information to third parties, which may use and rely upon the.
information at their discretion. However, any use of or reliance upon the information by
a party other than specifically named above shall be solely at the risk of such third party
and without legal recourse against Terra 'Engineers, Inc., its parent company, or its
subsidiaries and affiliates, or their respective employees, officers or directors, regardless
of whether the action in which recovery of damages is sought is based upon contract, tort
f
(including the sole, concurrent or other negligence and strict liability of Terra Engineers,
Inc.), statute, or otherwise. This information shall not be used or relied upon by a party
that does not agree to be bound by the above statement. Terra Engineers, Inc. assumes no
responsibility or obligation for the unauthorized use of this report by a third party.
We appreciate the opportunity to be of assistance on this project. If you should
have any questions, please feel free to call us.
of r
Very truly yours, p.1 �.......,F.1-y
TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.et
.r
30199
C. V. G. Vallabhan, Ph.D., P. E.
Geotechnical Engineer �sSJC+IAiw ��
INC.
LUBBOCK
STR 1526 13
11 /27/2001
Table 1 Moisture Density Relationship, (ASTM D-698)
Location Description Maximum Dry Optimum
Density, pccf Moisture Content
Dark reddish
Test hole #1 brown sandy lean 116.3 12.8 %
clay
INC.
LUBBOCK
rrnm-LU860CK }hTERNkTIOM Ai%PORT }o0fi??53}33 T-}Og P.0041004 F-14j
iU—t CUUI US•Z2
CAL WOW
81
dr
A ex� '
cot
® de
0
rag t"M
n
•
ri.00R PLAN
i
No. of blows per foot (N)
0 10 20 30
0-
5
10
t
15
t
Q.
20
25
30
35
40 50
mmmmmmmmmmmammmm1mmmMama
ammmmmmmmm
mama
PON
immm
mmmmmmmmmmmmmammm
Name�.
immmmmam
MISH.am10:1z
m
Cmmmmmmmmm:mmm1
Cmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
mammmmiiNN
mIma
ro
mummm
ni0rA�
mamma
IMMM0�1MMONiIN.mammmi
iimmommommum
mmmm.
1001i
am
mam
M
Ci
lai
:'m'.
l "
..
Mmm===
jMPM11FWMqW�M
Note: An arrow indicates N is greater than 50 blows/R.
Figure 2 Standard Penetration Test, ASTM D-1586
Method of Sampling: ASTM D-1586, Split -Barrel Sampler
Size of Samples: 2-in.
Method of Drilling: Wet _ Dry X
Method of Advancing Sampler: 140-lb Hammer, 30-1n. drop
STR 1526
11 /12/01
TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.
LUBBOCK
BORING LOG
PEST HOLE NO. I
Project:
Silent Wings Museum
Location:
Location:
International Airport
Date of Drilft:
11-9-01
Client:
City of Lubbock
Name of the Driller:
Eugene Edwards & Keith Carroway
Depth of GWr:
Surface Elevation.
Unknown
Diameter:
17 7/8"
Depth:
135 ft.
Boring Method —JSTR No.:
IHSA 1526
Depth, ft
I
Description
USC
Moisture
Content, %
Liquid
Limit, %
Plastic
Limit,
knIL %
Pla
sticity asticity
Index
Passing
# 200, %
SPT,No.ofBIowsper6"
1st Znd 3rd
Remarks
�
TS
'Concrete
A"
2.5
Sandy Lean Clay, Dark Reddish Brown
CL
17.8
33
15
18
67.4
2
4
6
5
Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Brown
CL
14.8
27
13
14
62.5
2
3 1
3
10
Clayey Sand w/caliche, Pink
SC
14.8
27
18
9
39.5
5
5
5
15
Silty Sand w/sandstone, Reddish Yellow
SM
6.3
13
13
25
20--
--
Silty Sand w/cemented caliche, Reddish
Yellow
SM
6.5
5
18
*25
*5.5
Penetration
25
Clayey Sand w/cemented caliche,
Reddish Yellow
SC
7.8
*25
*0.5
Penetration
30--
35--
-
-
Silty Sand w/cemented caliche, Reddish
Yellow
Silty Sand w/cemented caliche, Reddish
Yellow
SM
SM
7.9
7.4
22
22
*25
*25
*3.0"
Penetration
*5.5-
-
40
45--
150
1
Is- I op Son TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.
mm
TEST HOLE NO. 2
BORING LOG
Client:
City of Lubbock
Surface Elevation: Diameter:
Unknown 7 7/8"
Depth, ft Description
TS Concrete 14"
Base 8"
2.5 Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Brown
5
Sandy Lean Clay, Yellowish Red
10 t I Sandy Lean Clay w/caliche, Light
Brown
Location:
Date of Drilling:
Lubbock International Airport
11-9-01
Name of the Driller:
Depth of GWr: _W
Eugene Edwards & Keith Carroway
--------—
Depth:
Boring Method:
STR No.:
35ft.
HSA
1526
USC
Moisture
Uquld
Plastic
Plasticity
Passing
SPT, No. of Blows per 6"
Remarks
Content,%
Unit, %
Limit, %
Index
# 200, %
1st 2nd 3rd
CL
16.0
33
16
17
61.1
3
7
11
3
4
8
CL
14.6
25
16
9
59.6
5
9
11
CL
12.1
28
13
15
56.6
15 Silty Sand w/sandstone, Reddish Yellow SM 8.1 10 11 12
J
20 Silty Sand w/sandstone caliche, Reddish SM 9.5 25 25 22
Yellow
I
25 Silty Sand w/sandstone caliche, Reddish SM 10.6 16 *25 *0.5"
Yellow Penetratio
30 Silty Sand w/sandstone caliclie, Reddish SM 7.2 *25 *3.0"
Yellow Penetration I
35 Silty Sand w/sandstone caliche, Reddish SM 6.2 13 *25 *5.0"
Yellow Penetratio i
40
45
50 -i- I I I I I I I I I_ I I
TS- T4 Soil TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.
TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. 5208 - 34TH STREET
P.O. BOX 16605 LUBBOCK TEXAS 79490 6605 (806)793-4767' FAX (806) 793-4768
ATTACHMENT - I
Client: Lubbock International Airport Date of Report: 11-19-2001
Project/STR No.: 1526
Project: Silent Wings Museum Invoice No.: 23269
Bore hole#: I Sample No.: 5765
Sampling depth, ft.: 3.5-4.0 Date of Sample: 11-09-2001
Description of soil: Reddish brown sandy lean clay Date tested: 11-15-2001
Checked by: Tested by: B. Abraham
TEST PARAMETERS
[Dia. of sag!ple, in.: 2.8 Ht. of saLngle, in.: 5.69 Applied confining pr., 12si: 8.0
Triaxial Test (unconsolidated and undrained)
90
80
P"
7A
i
60 -
50 -
ry
*J
C') 40
30
20
10
A
0.0
0.1 0.2
Strain, inlin
0.3
Quality Review/Date
FATRIAXIALTiles%City of LubbockN11526-5765 Silent vAngs.doc
SOIL INVESTIGATION - MATERIAL TESTING - ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES - PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES - NDT
TEST PARAMETERS
Dia. of sam le, in.: 2.8 Ht. of sample, in.: 5.58 A1212lied confining r.,psi: 15.0 —
Triaxial Test (unconsolidated and undrained)
100
90
80
70
.y
60
a
N
50
N
+L+
N
40
30
20
10
0
I
f
I
•
1
A
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3
Strain, in/in
Alaz
Quality Review/Date _
FATRMIAL1Flles\City of Lubbock11526-5765A Silent wings.doc
SOIL INVESTIGATION MATERIAL TESTING ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES • NDT
100 -
90 -
80 -
70 -
6-
U) 0
CL
U) 50 -
U)
40
30
20
10
n
Triaxial Test (unconsolidated and undrained)
Y
W 7
--- --- -----
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
0.0
0.1 0.2
Strain, inlin
0.3
Quality Review/Date
FATIRLAXIALTiles0ty of Lubbock%l 5215,57656 Silent %mngs.doe
SOIL INVESTIGATION - MATERIAL TESTING - ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES - PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES - NDT
Dia. of sam le, in.: 2.8
100-
s0
80
70
.N 60
Q.
N 50
L
N 40
30
20
10
0
TEST PARAMETERS
Ht. of sam 1e, in.: 5.57 Ap2lied confining r., si: 8.0
Triaxial Test (unconsolidated and undrained)
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3
Strain, in/in
Quality Review/Date
FATRlAXIAL%Files%City of Lubbockl1526.5764 Silent wings.doc
SOIL INVESTIGATION MATERIALTESTING • ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES NDT
& IN
TERRA ENGINEERS; INC.
5208-3.
r:.;..
P.O. BOX 16605 • LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79490-6605 -
(806) 793-4767 FAX (8
/
ATTACHMENT - 5
Client:
Lubbock Inieinat onA Airport Dated Report:
1 I-19-2001
Project:
Silent Wings Museum Project No.:
STR 1526
Description
Dark reddish brown sandy lean clay Invoice No.:
23269
of sample:
Sample No.:
5763
Location of
BH #1 Date of Sample:
11-09-2001
sample:
Date tested:
0 ❑
11-13-2001
Method:
ASTM J)
Lx1
-698 ASTM D-1557 Tested by:
ElC El
Procedure:
A
B
SOIL MOISTURE DENSITY RELATIONS
General test parameters
Soil seive data
Sample preparation:
Moist ®
Dry ❑
% Retained'/4-in
0.00
Type of rammer:
Mechanical ®
Manual ❑
% Retained 3/8-in.
0.00
Specific gravity:
Actual ❑
Estimated ®
% Retained #4
0.00
Maximum Dry Density, pcf = 116.3 Optimum Moisture, % = 12.8
120
c
a�
0,
0
Q 11C
105 +
5
10 15 20
Moisture Content (%)
Quality Review
Tftis report is for the sole use of the client addressed. The use of our company name must receive Vw written consent. It applies only to the sample tested. and does not necessarily nepresem identJU
f:wmGtonf ileMSTMC
SOIL INVESTIGATION - MATERIAL TESTING - ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES • PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SET
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(The following Specification Sections were prepared by Hellmuth, Obata + Kassabaum, LP,
except for those sections prepared by L.A. Fuess Partners and
Schmidt & Stacy Consulting
Engineers.)
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100
Summary
01140
Work Restrictions
01250
Contract Modification Procedures
01290
Payment Procedures
01310
Project Management and Coordination
01320
Construction Progress Documentation
01330 ,,
Submittal Procedures
01400
Quality Requirements
01420
References
01500
Temporary Facilities and Controls
01600
Product Requirements
01700
Execution Requirements
01731
Cutting and Patching,
.01732
Selective Demolition
' 01770
Closeout Procedures�°�
i
DIVISION 2- SITE WORK
ti ,
02230
Site Clearings
••��
02300
Earthwork
02351
Concrete Footings
/�•� O/
DIVISION 3- CONCRETE
03100
Structural Concrete Formwork
03200
Concrete Reinforcing
03300
Structural Concrete
03301
Dry -Shake Color Hardener
03600
Grout Steel Base Plates
DIVISION 4- MASONRY- NOT USED
DIVISION 5- METAL
05100 Structural Steel
05200 Steel Joists
05300 Metal Roof Deck
12/20/01 TOC-1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
DIVISION 6- WOOD AND PLASTIC
06100
Rough Carpentry
06402
Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7-
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210
Building Insulation
07411
Metal Roof Panels
07412
Metal Wall Panels
07920
Joint Sealants
DIVISIONS-
DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 .
Steel Doors and Frames
08211
Flush Wood Doors
08311
Access Doors and Frames
08411
Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
08711
Door Hardware
08800
Glazing
08911
Glazed Aluminum Curtainwalls
- DIVISION 9- FINISHES
09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies
09265
Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies
09310
Ceramic Tile
09651
Resilient Floor Tile
09653
Resilient Wall Base
09680
Carpet
09681
Carpet Tile
09900
Painting
DIVISION 10- SPECIALITIES
10155-
Toilet Compartments
10801
Toilet Accessories
DIVISON 11- EQUIPMET- NOT USED
DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS- NOT USED
DIVISON 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION- NOT USED
DIVISION 14- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT- NOT USED
12/20/01
TOC-2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
DIVISON 15- MECHANICAL
15000
General Conditions for Mechanical Work
15010
Basic Mechanical Requirements
15030
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
15050
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
15060
Hangers and Supports
15081
Duct Insulation
15170
Motors
15241
Mechanical Vibration Controls
15330
Sprinkler Systems
15400
Plumbing
15403
Natural Gas Distribution
15411
Water Distribution Piping
15420,
Drainage and Vent Systems
15458
Water Heaters- Electric
15782
Packaged Rooftop HVAC Units
15815
Metal Ducts
15820
Duct Accessories
15836
Unit Heaters- Electric
15838
Power Ventilators
15855
Dif i4sers, Registers, and Grilles
- 15886
Air Filters
15991 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing- DX
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL
16050
Base Electrical Materials and Methods
16120
Conductors and Cables
16130
Raceways and Boxes
16140
Wiring Devices
16145
Lighting Control Devices
16425
Switchboards
16452
Grounding
16470
Panelboards
16475
Fuses
16476
Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers
16481
Motor Controllers
16512
Exterior Lighting Fixtures
16515
Interior Lighting Fixtures
16721
Fire Alarm Systems
12/20/01 TOC-3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
The following specification sections were prepared by L.A. Fuess Partners Inc., Structural Engineers:
DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK
02351 CONCRETE FOOTINGS
DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE
03100 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCING
03300 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
03600 GROUTING STEEL BASE PLATES
DIVISION 5 — METALS
05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05200 STEEL JOISTS
05300 METAL ROOF DECK
"^ 12/20/01
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15000
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15030
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15081
DUCT INSULATION
15170
MOTORS
15241
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
15330
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15400
PLUMBING
15403
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
15411
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15420
DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS
15458
WATER HEATERS - ELECTRIC
15782
PACKAGED ROOFTOP HVAC UNITS
15815
METAL DUCTS
15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15836
UNIT HEATERS - ELECTRIC
15838
POWER VENTILATORS
15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
15886
AIR FILTERS
15991
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING - DX
DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16140
WIRING DEVICES
16145
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16425
SWITCHBOARDS
16452
GROUNDING
16470
PANELBOARDS
16475
FUSES
16476
DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16481
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
16512
EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
16515
INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
16721
r
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS '�
FA
rrpq i �c
EDGAR A. STACY III
o . ,� W55
p0 % i1p., sT f�;::' �►�'s
6�4
12/20/01
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
work under this Contract. This contract will include the following construction of a new entry
plaza and parking lot modifications.
r
B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out
smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
1.7 FUTURE WORK
A. Future Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for additional work to be performed at
the site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful
completion of preparatory work under this Contract. The Contract for future work will include
the installation of exhibits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
01100 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 01140 - WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 USE OF PREMISES
A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site _
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to existing building excluding portion occupied
by F.A:A. and, generally, to east of building.
2. Under no circumstances is access to be allowed onto airport property, including runways
and taxiways beyond the temporary fencing.
3. Owner Occupancy: Allow for partial Owner and Owner's Tenant's occupancy of site.
4. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to Owner, Owner's employees, Owner's Tenant's and emergency vehicles at all
times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install
equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such
occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and
partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems
serving occupied portions of building.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of building.
12/20/01 01140 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
1:3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
'A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the, Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
"-+ A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 7 days, which ever is less, after receipt of
Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum
and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
OM the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.
12/20/01 01250 -1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect..
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA
Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change
in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01250
12/20/01 01250 - 2
r*d+
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including Submittals Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7
days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
C. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
C. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
' f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
0" 12/20/01 01290 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times:: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form. listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
12/20/01 01290 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
P"
F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage,
on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of
mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application.
°^ a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from
every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application
who is lawfully entitled to a Iien.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
6. Copies of building permits.
7" 7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
�* 9. Performance and payment bonds.
10. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
.�, 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
12/20/01 01290 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
12/20/01
01290 - 4
0
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing
requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
B. Staff Names: Within 5 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including
home, mobile, and office _telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of, list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone.
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
r^ 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of
the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule, a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 7 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and
other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
ow 12/20/01 01310 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
C. Critical work sequencing.
d. Designation of responsible personnel.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
g. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
h. Submittal procedures.
i. Preparation of Record Documents.
j. Use of the premises.
k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
1. Parking availability.
In. Office, work, and storage areas.
n. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
o. First aid.
p. Security.
q. Progress cleaning.
r. Working hours.
C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at bi-weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of
meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier`, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off -site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
12/20/01 01310 - 3
Aw
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
M 12) Quality and work standards.
13) Change Orders.
14) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since.
the previous meeting and report.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
�. 12/20/01 01310 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Preliminary Construction Schedule.
2. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Submittals Schedule.
4. Daily construction reports.
5. Material location reports.
6. Field condition reports
7. Construction photographs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and
distributing meeting and conference minutes.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
3. Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be
started.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
12/20/01 01320 - 1 _.
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
4 -
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the following activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without
adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
r H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity
relationships.
1.4 SUBMITTALS w
A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with projects
- names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information -
specified.
B. Submittals Schedule: Submit 5 copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit 2 printed copies; one a single sheet of reproducible
media, and one a print.
D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit 2 printed copies of initial schedule, one a
reproducible print and one a blue- or black -line print, large enough to show entire schedule for
entire construction period.
E. Construction Photographs: Submit electronic files of each photographic view within 3 days of
taking photographs.
12/20/01 01320 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit 2 copies at weekly intervals.
G. Material Location Reports: Submit 2 copies at monthly intervals.
H. Field Condition Reports: Submit 2 copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
I. Special Reports: Submit 2 copies at time of unusual event. ~
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and
reporting.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules -and reports. T
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved. --
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required
by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar -chart schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to
maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time
for manufacture or fabrication.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &
Scheduling."
12/20/01 01320 - 3 „�
9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final
Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 15 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and
major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,
purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
R._ 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division I
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
a,,,, Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 5 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned
and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for
preparation of payment requests.
1. Refer to Division I Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment
procedures.
G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
proposed change on the overall project schedule.
2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar -chart -type construction schedule within
five days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
,,, 12/20/01 01320 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.4
2.5
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -chart -type,
Contractor's Construction Schedule within 15 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback
was received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an
estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
5. Accidents.
6. Meetings and significant decisions.
7. Unusual events (refer to special reports).
8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
9. Meter readings and similar recordings.
10. Emergency procedures.
11. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
12. Change Orders received and implemented.
13. Construction Change Directives received.
14. Services connected and disconnected.
15. Equipment or system tests and startups.
16. Partial Completions and occupancies.
17. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Material Location Reports: At bi-weekly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials
delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously
reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery
dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.
C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions
and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information.
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for
changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
12/20/01 01320 - 5
r.
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule five days before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect and Owner, testing and
inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule
.� responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take a minimum of six exterior and,
ten interior color photographs from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. Show.
existing conditions adjacent to property.
B. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take ten color photographs monthly, coinciding with
cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Photographer shall select vantage
points to best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
1. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of periodic photographs in field office at
Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for
those submitted to Architect.
C. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of ten color photographs after
date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will
direct photographer for desired vantage points.
END OF SECTION 01320
12/20/01 01320 - 6
i.
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop _
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.
2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule and
construction photographs.
3. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and
Delegated -Design Submittals.
4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Retain options in
subparagraph above with either subparagraph below. Delete both subparagraphs below if
Project Record Documents and operation and maintenance manuals are included in
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: .Written information that does not require Architect's approval.
Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD.Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
12/20/01 01330 - 1 __.
r
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
D. Processing Time: Allow_ enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
,�. if processing must be delayed to permit coordination_ with subsequent submittals.
Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
3. Allow 15 days for processing each resubmittal.
4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
'X. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on label or beside title
block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by
Architect..
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Unique identifier, including revision number.
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Other necessary identification.
F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents
on submittals.
G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
,�, 12/20/01 01330 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of
copies to Architect.
2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action
taken and will be returned.
H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals
received from sources other than Contractor.
1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the
related submittal.
2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Destination (To:).
d. Source (From:).
e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f. Category and type of submittal.
• g. Submittal purpose and description.
h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
i. Remarks.
j. Signature of transmitter.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect
in connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise
indicated:
12/20/01 01330 - 3 -
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
W"
a. Initial Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of each submittal where
selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required.
Architect will return submittal with options selected.
b. Final Submittal: Submit four copies, unless copies are required for operation and
maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation
and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be
returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a. single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
l . If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
- - a.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
C.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d.
Standard color charts.
e.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f.
Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring.
"~
g.
Printed performance curves.
h.
Operational range diagrams.
- i.
Mill reports.
Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
k.
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
1.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
-+
In.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n.
Notation of coordination requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Dimensions.
b.
Identification of products.
C.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
d.
Roughing -in and setting diagrams.
e.
Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
f.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g.
Templates and patterns.
h.
Schedules.
i.
Design calculations.
J.
Compliance with specified standards.
k.
Notation of coordination requirements.
1.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
12/20/01 01330 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed
wiring.
3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by
40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).
4. Number of Copies: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print of each
submittal and two blue or black line prints of each submittal. Architect will return the
reproducible print. Architect will retain two prints. Submit three prints where prints are
required for operations and maintenance manuals.
D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Management
and Coordination."
E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.
2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified,
and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review
of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated.
Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:
5. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that
show approximate limits of the variations.
6. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit two full sets of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
7. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain
one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set
as a Project Record Sample.
a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
12/20/01 01330 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
8. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for
the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
2. Number and name of room or space.
3. Location within room or space.
G. Delegated -Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
H. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation."
I. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
J. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
K. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form: LL
I. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
�-* 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
µ 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
a 12/20/01 01330 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel
certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements.
I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements.
J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
. of product, for compliance with performance requirements.
K. Compatibility Test Reports: ` Prepare. reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements.
M. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency.
N. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project. Include the following information:
l . Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
12/20/01 01330 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
7. Limitations of use.
O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
.R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory -authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
z
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service representative
making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
S. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
T. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
,� 12/20/01 01330 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECTS ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each
submittal to appropriate party.
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
12/20/01 01330 - 9
I
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific'quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified
in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also
cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by Architect,
Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of
required tests and inspections.
2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction
disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed
construction complies with requirements.
B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements.
Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups
are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction,
coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples.
�,,, 12/20/01 01400 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for
each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a
design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with
performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Description of test and inspection.
3. Identification of applicable standards.
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.
5. Number of tests and inspections required.
6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality -control service.
D. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
12/20/01 01400 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
C.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications:' A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
i E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct
testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types
of tests and inspections to be performed.
1. Testing Agency Responsibilities:, Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality -assurance service to Architect , with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
G. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
12/20/01 01400 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
I. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are
engaged to perform.
2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services
specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction..
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality -control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.
1. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar
quality -control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
12/20/01 01400 - 4 _,
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested
and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work.
D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing.
E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established
by the Contract Documents.
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
L ' Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
3. Submit a certified written report, in - duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality -control service through Contractor.
4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
G. Associated Services: Coopbrate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and-:.:
similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notifyi.
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field -curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance
and quality -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
0+ 12/20/01 01400 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality -control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
t
12/20/01 01400 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
noted, "scheduled," and specified have the same meaning as indicated.
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within, the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor,
or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,
erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
12/20/01 01420 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
J. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed
a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar
with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
K. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the. Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality
levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that
are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly
with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within
reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are
minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.
E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the
recognized name of the standards and regulations.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale
Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' 'National Trade &
Professional Associations of the U.S."
12/20/01 01420 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
y
END OF SECTION 01420
1lw�
�4
llsq
�i
�•, 12/20/01 01420 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect,
testing and inspecting agencies and personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without
payment of use charges.
C. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and
without payment of use charges.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar
procedures performed on temporary utilities.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and
NFPA 241.
1. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
12/20/01 01500 - 1
r�
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
�., A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use
of temporary service to use of permanent service.
1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service
during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of
previously assigned responsibilities.
B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities
by all parties engaged in the Work:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable
condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm) 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain -link
fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8--
inch- (60-mm) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8
inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails and three strands galvanized barbed-wire at top.
Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. Do not insert fence posts into existing concrete
pavements.
C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry".
D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;
with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively.
E. Tarpaulins: Fire -resistive labeled with flame -spread rating of 15 or less.
F. Water: Potable.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Field Offices: Prefabricated Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and
serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as
++ indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size
required by location and class of fire exposure.
N." 12/20/01 01500 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or
combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar
nonabsorbent material.
D. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Drinking -water fountains or Containerized drinking -water units,
including paper cup supply.
1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water
temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7.2 to 12.7 deg C).
E. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide
vented, self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic
control.
I. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.
F. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to
120-V plugs into higher -voltage outlets; equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset
button, and pilot light.
G. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for
surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be
nonmetallic sheathed cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as
required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use
of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the
remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company
recommendations.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is
available, provide trucked -in services.
12/20/01 01500 - 3 _ .
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements
cannot be used for that purpose.
B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove
effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide
drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor
drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove
and dispose of effluent off -site in a lawful manner.
1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants
that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
2. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by sewer department officials.
3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After
heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.
4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify
effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before
use.
r D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
k facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
2. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
IWO from pans.
E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water fixtures.
ow Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and
maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar
disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste
containers for disposal of used material.
2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.
3. Drinking -Water Facilities: Provide bottled -water, drinking -water units.
F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently enclosed
portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F (18.3 deg C) for
finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed.
N
,�„ 12/20/01 01500 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation
requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
H. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution
system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period.
Include meters, transformers, overload -protected disconnecting means, automatic ground -fault
interrupters, and main distribution switchgear.
I. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as
long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
J. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and
equipment.
1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if
single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not
exceed safe length -voltage ratio.
K. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
2. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per 500 sq. ft. (45 sq. m), uniformly distributed,
for general lighting, or equivalent illumination.
3. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp every 50 feet (15 m) in traffic areas.
4. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per story in stairways and ladder runs, located to
illuminate each landing and flight.
5. Install exterior -yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction
operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed.
L. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for
common -use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate
telephone line for each field office and first -aid station.
1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers, including police and fire
departments, ambulance service, Contractor's home office, Architect's office, Engineers'
offices, Owner's office, and principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
2. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving
telephone calls when away from field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction
and support facilities for easy access.
12/20/01 01500 - 5 �_
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in
sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to
Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs.
Comply with details indicated.
2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and
visitors.
C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or
unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section
"Execution Requirements " for progress cleaning requirements.
1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled,
for each type of waste material to be deposited.
2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of
waste materials Project will .produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide
detailed information for on -site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials.
Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used
to dispose of all waste materials.
r^+ D. Common -Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, heated and air-conditioned field
office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of
sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 10 persons at Project
• site. Keep office clean and orderly.
1. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
m.,
a. Desk and four chairs, four -drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack, and
bookcase.
b. Provide a room for Project meetings. Furnish room with conference table, folding
chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack board.
2. Provide an electric heater with thermostat capable of maintaining a uniform indoor
temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg C).
3. Provide an air-conditioning unit capable of maintaining an indoor temperature of 72
deg F (23 deg Q.
4. Provide fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc
(215 lx) at desk height. Provide 110- to 120-V duplex outlets spaced at not more than 12-
foot (4-m) intervals, 1 per wall in each room.
E. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open
shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on -site.
mom 12/20/01 01500 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of
noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms
near Project site.
B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater
from heavy rains.
C. Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or
pest -control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents,
roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest -control service to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using
environmentally safe materials.
D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, install enclosure fence with
lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project site or portion
determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will
prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
I. Set portable chain -link fence posts in concrete bases.
2. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and
other construction operations.
3. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.
E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning
signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed,
provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
I. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide
insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material
drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or
similar materials.
3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with
load -bearing, wood -framed construction.
4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire -retardant -treated wood framing and other materials.
12/20/01 01500 - 7
r"
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
H. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,
install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against
•� reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible
from space being served, with sign mounted above.
a. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended
purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each
r usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire -
protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking
in hazardous fire -exposure areas.
4. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition.
5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete
installation of permanent fire -protection facility, including connected services, and place
into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
6. Develop and supervise an overall fire -prevention and first -aid fire -protection program for
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish
procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings
and information.
7. Provide hoses for fire protection of sufficient length to reach construction areas. Hang
hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire -protection purposes only and are
not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from
damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
2. Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground fuzes.
Protect from damage during excavation operations.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as
available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to
permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
I2/20/01 01500 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
l . Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division I Section
"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
12/20/01 01500 - 9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
i
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selecting products for use
in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled -content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for
a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
D. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for
Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
�„ 12/20/01 01600 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each
product.
1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
2. Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and
for variations from Contract requirements.
3. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of
receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable
product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response,
or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply
with the Contract Documents.
B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product -
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Documentation:. Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. ^`
j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution.
12/20/01 01600 - 2
M
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Pf oject site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage.
9. Protect stored products from damage.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
P, 12/20/01 01600 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document
using appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a
single product and manufacturer, provide the product named.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by
the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.
a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a
list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products' listed that
complies with requirements.
a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
12/20/01 01600 - 4
-ram
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers
listed that complies with requirements.
a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.,
5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of
the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed
product.
-� 6. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and
matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed
MIR product matches satisfactorily.
0
a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and
complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the
Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
7. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and
manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns,' textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture
from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS.
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 45 days after the
Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion
of Architect.
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
0
12/20/01 01600 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to
other required -submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) `
END OF SECTION 01600
12/20/01 01600 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2: Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Progress cleaning.
5. Starting and adjusting.
6. Protection of installed construction.
7. Correction of the Work.
B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner -accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels,
and final cleaning.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.
B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land -surveying
services of the kind indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
12/20/01 01700 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: ' The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence 'and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting
the Work.
1. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public.
utilities serving Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Proceed with installation only . after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or
relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than 3 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
D. Space Requirements:. Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include
12/20/01 01700 - 2
1Z
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
3.' Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of one permanent benchmark on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
,�„ 12/20/01 01700 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field -engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
D. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real
property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that
principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the
survey.
1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or
with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." Provide one copy to
Owner.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
;B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
F. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
G. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
12/20/01 01700 - 4 -.
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
ii
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste. materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg Q.
3. Containerize hazardous . and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed , Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on -site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
RM 12/20/01 01700 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Cutting and Patching."
I. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01700
1
12/20/01 01700 - 6 —
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM _
- SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
C. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. See
Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching mechanical and electrical installations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 7 days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the
following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List
utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate
how long service will be disrupted.
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations signed and sealed by
Professional Engineer showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting
and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
7 A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
12/20/01 01731 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or
abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to minimize interruption of services to occupied
areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
12/20/01 01731 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
on
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Concrete and or. masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond -core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services:, Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
• entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
C. Patching: Patch construction`by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections of these Specifications.
... 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence
of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
END OF SECTION 01731
P 12/20/01
01731 -3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes demolition and removal of the following:
1. Selected portions of a building or structure.
2. Selected site elements.
3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
B. See Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
C. See Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
d
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property
and shall be removed from Project site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed
for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if
proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include measures for the following:
I . Dust control.
2. Noise control.
12/20/01 01732 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition
and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility
•"6 services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
C. Predemolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
... and site improvements that might be misconstrued as. damage caused by selective demolition
operations. Submit before Work begins.
D. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner and/or Owner's Tenants will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to
selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be.
disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's `
and/or Owner's Tenant's operations.
B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without
written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials have been removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by
Owner under a separate contract.
3. except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site will not be permitted.
�* 12/20/01 01732 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire -protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
1. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to patch the exposed Work listed below
that is damaged during selective demolition. If it is impossible to engage original
Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
any element, including but not limited to wall penetrations for new openings and roof
penetrations for mechanical requirements, might result in structural deficiency or unplanned
collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition
operations. Recommendations for corrective actions shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and the contractor's professional engineer.
12/20/01 01732 - 3
9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in
writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during
changeover.
C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving
areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary
utilities before proceeding with selective demolition that bypass area of selective
demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and
construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction
operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building
exterior.
3.4
B. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to
limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural
support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to
remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being
demolished.
0
POLLUTION CONTROLS
Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread
of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental -protection regulations.
1. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition
enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.
Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
"^ 12/20/01 01732 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations.
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire -
suppression devices during flame -cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting
elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during
• selective demolition operations.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
12/20/01 01732 - 5
I
S
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A.
General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demo
operations.
{
B.
Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
l;
3.7
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materia.
accumulate on -site.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 01732
01732
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
• of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit 3 copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.[
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
12/20/01 01770 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS"
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents
for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue or black line prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop.Drawings.
1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up
Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
-- equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings, where applicable.
,. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual
performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for
continued use and reference.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
r operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment
descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations.
P" 12/20/01 01770 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance,
and copies of warranties and bonds.
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets.
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
1.7 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1l-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer. i
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,
and equipment not part of a system.
1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
12/20/01 01770 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of
instruction, and course content.
B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline.
1. Include instruction for system design and operational philosophy, review of
documentation, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer`s written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification:
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
1 �
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities;
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
R* foreign deposits.
C. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
f. Sweep concrete floors broom -clean in unoccupied spaces.
g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
7" Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
i. Remove labels that are not permanent.
j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
^^ 12/20/01 01770 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
1. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
in. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
'END OF SECTION 01770
12/20/01 01770 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Topsoil stripping.
2. Removing above -grade site improvements.
3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place.
4. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.
1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials
shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.
1:3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site -clearing operations.
f
B. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: As specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off -site when satisfactory soil materials are not
available on -site.
.. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil -bearing water
runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
B. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
*-* 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
"�"' 12/20/01 02230 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.2 UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
B. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted.
Arrange to provide temporary utility services.
C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
3.3 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to
facilitate new construction.
3.4 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
END OF SECTION 02230
12/20/01 02230 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
�-- A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades.
2. Excavating and backfilling.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
^ B.
Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill.
C.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations:
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect.
Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
i
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
r-,
D.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
^^ E.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below
the ground surface.
F.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
G.
Utilities include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities
having jurisdiction.
..., B.
Testing and Inspection: The Owner will engage a soil testing and inspection service for quality
control testing during earthwork operations to inspect and test all soil materials proposed for use
in all excavation and fill operations.
p,,, 12/20/01
02300 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. The contractor shall review the Soil Investigation report dated November 15, 2001, and
prepared by Terra Engineers. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn therefrom by the contractor. Additional test borings and other exploratory
operations may be made by the contractor at no cost to the Owner. The contractor shall satisfy
the requirements for excavation and fill as described in the Soil Investigation report.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Fill material: On site excavated material free from vegetation, rocks larger
than 4 inches in diameter or other objectionable material, and reasonablyfree from lumps of
earth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3:1 PREPARATION
-A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, freezing temperatures or frost, and other
hazards created by earthwork operations. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.
B. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
D. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions
encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
B. Excavate for structures, pavements, and walks to indicated elevations and dimensions. Extend
excavations for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other
construction, and for inspections. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base
to receive other work.
12/20/01 02300 - 2 _,
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Excavate utility trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and invert elevations of uniform
widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls
vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit.
D. Proof roll subgrades, before filling or placing aggregate courses, with heavy pneumatic -tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities.
F. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation
of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect.
G. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory soil materials, without intermixing, in shaped,
graded, drained, and covered stockpiles. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of
excavations and outside drip line of remaining trees.
3.3 BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Utility Trench Backfill: Place, compact, and shape bedding course to provide continuous
support for pipes and conduits over rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill
unauthorized excavations.
1. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of
particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility
pipe or conduit. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final
subgrade.
2. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade,
except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
B. Fill: Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations.
C. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
D. Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in
loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4
inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers.
E. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to
ASTM D 698:
' 12/20/01 02300 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95
percent.
F. Grading: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated. Grade lawns, walks, and unpaved subgrades to tolerances of plus or minus 1 inch (25
mm) and pavements and areas within building lines to plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
G. Subbase and Base Courses: Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared
subgrade. Place base course material over subbase. Compact to required grades, lines, cross
sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 1557.
H. Under slabs -on -grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade. Compact to required cross
sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
•B. Allow testing agency to test and inspect subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements. '
C. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved deg ree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.5 PROTECTION AND DISPOSAL
A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
D. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
12/20/01 02300 - 4
ft
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 02351- CONCRETE FOOTINGS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavating and cleaning.
2. Placing concrete and reinforcing steel.
3. Furnish templates and place anchor bolts and dowels.
B. Products Installed, not Furnished Under This Section:
1. Reinforcing Steel
2. Structural Concrete
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
2. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
3. Section 03300 - Structural Concrete
4. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings of reinforcement, dowels and anchor bolts.
B. Submit a log of footings installed indicating the following:
1. Identification mark.
2. Footing size.
3. Top of footing elevation.
4. Bottom of footing elevation.
5. Concrete quantity.
6. Concrete fill placed under footing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE (SEE RELATED SECTIONS)
�^ PART 3 - EXECUTION
A
12/20/O1 02351-1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.
Excavating:
1.
Excavate for footings of required size and depth (minimum).
2.
Clean bottom of excavations of loose dirt, debris and loose material.
3.
Where soft material is encountered, excavate to firm bearing.
4.
Fill over -excavations with concrete.
B.
Tolerances:
1.
Maximum lateral variation off of centerlines: 2 inches
2.
Footing size: not smaller than required sizes
3.
Top elevation: plus one inch, minus 2 inches
4.
Placement of anchor bolts: within 1/4 inch any direction
C.
Drainage and Pumping:
1.
Maintain bearing surface of footing excavations dry.
2.
Remove accumulated water and ice and excavate to firm, dry surface.
D.
Reinforcing and Anchor Bolts:
1.
Tie reinforcing securely into cages or mats.
2.
Support reinforcing above ground with special chairs or precast bolsters.
3.
Secure reinforcing and anchor bolts in place, prevent shifting during placement of
concrete.
4.
Use templates to position anchor bolts accurately.
E.
Concreting:
t
1.
Do not place concrete into or through standing water or mud.
2.
Place concrete within 8 hours of excavating.
3.
Place concrete in one continuous operation for each footing.
4.
Consolidate concrete by vibrating.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Laboratory Services:
1. Inspect condition of bearing surface prior to placing concrete.
2. Check sizes and quantity of reinforcing bars, tieing and securement.
3. Monitor placement and consolidation of concrete.
4. Maintain logs of footing installation to verify Contractor's log.
3.3 CLEAN-UP
END OF SECTION 02351
12/20/01 02351 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
.. SECTION 03100 - STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION:
A. Section includes:
1. Furnish, install and remove formwork for concrete.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcing
2. Section 03300 Structural Concrete
3. Section 02351- Concrete Footings
1.3• REFERENCES
A. Codes and Specifications i
1. American Concrete Institute:
a. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
b. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
c. ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice.
3. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non -extruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Construction Joints: Submit diagrams of construction joints.
B. Product Data:
.- 1. Form oil
2. Form release agent
3. Form sealer
C. Samples:
1. Rustication forms
2. Reglet
12/20/01 03100 -1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials off of the ground and protected from weather.
1. Prevent warpage, twisting and excessive moisture gain of wood materials.
2. Discard damaged or deformed materials.
B. Protect smooth faces of form liner materials from abrasion, denting or scarring during handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Design and construct forms to withstand stresses due to weight of fresh concrete, vibration
during consolidation and loads of equipment and workmen.
B. Limit deflections of forms to provide smooth, straight surfaces without unsightly bulges and
deformations.
C. Limit deformations of forms for architecturally exposed surfaces to 0.0025 times the span of
each component (facing material, studs and walers).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wood forms for unexposed concrete surfaces: No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine or Douglas Fir
dressed to uniform and smooth contact surfaces.
B. Wood forms for concrete surfaces exposed to view: Commercial Standard Douglas Fir concrete
form plywood, moisture resistant, not less than 5 plies, minimum thickness of 9/16 inch with
one smooth face. Line forms with one of the following:
1. Plywood: Commercial Standard Douglas Fir, concrete form, exterior, 3 ply, not less 1/4
inch thick with one smooth face.
2. Fiberboard: Treated, hard pressed fiberboard having low degree of water absorbability,
not less than 3/16 inch thick with one smooth side.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Rustications and bevels: steel, polyvinyl chloride or milled and sealed white pine.
B. Corner chamfers: 3/4 inch white pine or pvc.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Form ties: bolt rods or patented devices of sufficient strength to withstand pressure due to wet
concrete (30001bs. minimum tensile strength); adjustable in length, and removable to a depth of
12/20/01 03100 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
at least 1 inch from the face of the concrete.
1. Ties for exposed concrete surfaces shall be equipped with plastic cones 5/8 inch in
diameter.
2. Do not use wire ties, or makeshift ties that leave unsightly marks or depressions on the
face of the concrete.
B. Form oil: non -staining, paraffin -base oil having specific gravity of between 0.8 and 0.9; shall
not prevent bonding of finish materials; shall not stain surface of concrete.
C.
Form release agent: non -staining, chemically inert
1. Example product: Synthex by Industrial Synthetics Corp.
D.
Form sealer
1. Example product: Formfilm by W.R. Grace Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
A.
Design forms to withstand pressure and weight of wet concrete without bulging or excessive
deflection. Comply with ACI 318.
B.
Construct forms to required shapes, lines and dimensions; provide necessary studs, walers, ties,
centering, molds and supports.
"^
1. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar.
2. Construct forms to be easily removable without damage to finished surfaces.
3. Forms shall not have unsightly marks or deformations on exposed faces.
�-
4. Thoroughly clean forms of concrete laitance before re -use.
5. Provide clean -outs at the base of vertical forms for removal of foreign materials before
placement of concrete.
C.
Support of forms: provide adequate shoring under forms to support loads imposed by wet
concrete, equipment and workmen.
1. Shores shall be sufficiently strong and closely spaced to prevent excessive deflections or
distortion during placement of concrete.
2. Comply with ACI 347.
D.
Tying of forms: provide sufficient form ties to prevent bulging or collapse of forms under
weight of wet concrete.
1. Place ties in a uniform and orderly pattern.
2. Lubricate ties to prevent bonding with concrete.
E.
Special features: place in forms any wood strips, blocking, molding, and liners necessary to
produce required shapes.
1. Attach feature strips to forms in a manner that will not leave unsightly marks on exposed
concrete surfaces.
r„
2. Coat wood strips, blocking and molding with form sealer.
12/20/01 03100 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. Provide chamfer strips in corners of formwork.
4. Provide dove -tailed anchor slots coordinated with masonry.
F. Coatings:
1. Coat contact surfaces of wood forms for un-exposed concrete surfaces with form oil.
2. Coat contact surfaces of wood forms for exposed surfaces with form release agent before
each use.
G. Construction joints:
1. Locate construction joints only where required as shown on submittals.
a. Do not locate construction joints between lateral bracing elements of walls and
columns.
b. Locate construction joints in beams and slabs approximately at midspan between
supports.
C. Construction joints shall be plumb and level. In order to avoid irregular lines at
horizontal construction joints in exposed concrete faces, tack a continuous strip of
dressed lumber, one inch thick, to inside of wall or grade beam form, with its lower
edge at line of construction joint. About one hour after placing, concrete in lower
part of wall or grade beam, remove strip, level off irregularities which appear in
joint line with wood float and remove any laitance present.
d. Provide shear keys and waterstops as required in construction joints.
R. Grade Beams:
1. Sides of grade beams shall be formed unless specifically noted or shown otherwise on the
Drawings. +
a. Dimensional tolerances shall conform to ACI requirements for formed beams
b. Bulges and offsets and any condition of the formwork that would cause beam sides
to become skewed or wider than void box bottom forms shall be repaired before
placing concrete.
3.2 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Remove forms completely, unless specifically required otherwise.
B. Remove forms carefully to avoid damage to concrete surfaces.
C. Do not remove forms until concrete has adequately set.
1. Clamps and tie rods may be loosened after 24 hours following placement of concrete.
a. Maintain sufficient ties to hold forms in place. —
b. Withdraw through -wall ties toward the inside (or unexposed) face of walls and
beams.
C. Prevent spalling during removal of ties. --
2. Concrete strength tests may be used as evidence that concrete has adequately set for form
removal.
a. Minimum strength shall be 75% of design strength.
D. Remove forms sequentially and in smallunits to prevent shock, overload or undue eccentricity
in the structure. Do not store materials or place heavy equipment on structures for which forms
12/20/01 03100 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
have been removed unless concrete strength is equal to design strength, or re -shores have been
installed. Remove forms in a manner that does not require a large portion of the structure to be
self-supporting (i.e. a full bay of framing), and install shores immediately as form removal
progresses.
E. Do not remove forms until supporting structures (columns, foundation or hangers) are
permanently in place and full strength.
F. Structure required to support subsequent construction shall be re -shored. Install re -shores
plumb and tight to the structure and concentric with form supports. Re -shore materials shall
have safe load capacity sufficient for transfer of required loads. Re -shore sufficient levels of
structure so that the imposed loads due to forms, wet concrete and construction loads does not
exceed the combined live load capacity of the levels that re -shores extend to. Space re -shores
sufficiently close together to provide a uniform distribution of load to the supporting structure.
END OF SECTION 03100
12/20/01
03100 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Preparation of shop drawings
2. Fabrication and placement of reinforcing
B. Related Sections
1. Section 03300 - Structural Concrete
2. Section 02350 - Footings
3. Section 03100 - Structural Concrete Formwork
4. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services —
1.3 REFERENCES `
A. Codes and Specifications
1. American Concrete Institute:
a. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. —
b. ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures.
2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice.
3. American Welding Society, AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel"
B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A185, Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement.
2. ASTM A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
3. ASTM A706, Standard Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
4. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
12/20/01 03200 -1
P
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Submit shop and installation drawings for review by Architect, including:
a. Sizes and quantities of reinforcing
b. Reinforcing lengths and details of bending
C. Placement instructions
d. Details and spacing of supports for reinforcing
e. Reference Engineer's reinforcing designations
f. Reproduce Engineer's notes regarding placement of reinforcing.
2. Review of Shop Drawings will be for reinforcing sizes, spacing, and general detail only;
excluding quantities, lengths and fit of materials.
3. Reproductions of Contract Drawings shall not be used for shop drawings.
B. Quality Control Submittals
1. Submit certified copies of mill reports, evidencing compliance with requirements of
Specifications.
2. Submit copies of laboratory testing and inspection reports.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in tagged bundles grouped as to reinforcing size and length.
B. Store reinforcing on skids off of the ground and stacked to permit drainage. Prevent build-up of
rust and dirt on reinforcing. Protect reinforcing from contamination that would prevent bonding
of concrete.
C. Do not bend, twist or warp reinforcing during handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Steel
1. Deformed bars: new billet steel conforming to ASTM A615 of required grades.
2. Welded wire mesh: conform to ASTM A185.
3. Spirals: smooth bars conforming to ASTM A615 Grade 60.
4. Reinforcing bars to be welded: conform to ASTM A706 Grade 60.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Reinforcing supports: comply with ACI 315, Chapter 5.
R 1. Provide concrete bricks or chairs with bearing plates where supports are in contact with
soil.
2. Provide plastic -tipped chairs of suitable color where concrete soffitts will be exposed to
view.
3. Provide continuous supports with spacers for slab reinforcing.
P"
12/20/01 03200 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication
1. Cut reinforcing to required lengths
2. Bend reinforcing cold with suitable equipment. Do not heat or stretch material. Bend
radii and extensions shall comply with ACI 318.
3. Do not use reinforcing with kinks or unrequired bends.
4. Do not re -straighten reinforcing bent more than 30 degrees.
B. Tolerances: comply with ACI 318.
C. Marking: mark reinforcing to correspond with shop drawings.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Laboratory Services
1. Inspect fabricating and bending procedures
2. Inspect fabricated materials
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean reinforcing of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil and grease.
B. Where required, coat reinforcing with rust inhibitor and touch-up shop coatings.
3.2 PLACEMENT
A. Place reinforcing of required sizes and quantities in proper position. Use sufficient supports and
spacers to maintain position during placement of concrete.
1. Do not place reinforcing supports against exposed faces of precast panels, beams, walls
or copings.
B. Secure reinforcing in position with wire ties complying with ACI 318.
1. Clip or bend tails of tie wire away from exposed faces, do not leave tie wire within 1 1/2"
of any exposed surface.
C. Maintain position of reinforcing mats in walls with metal spacers between the mats.
D. Tolerances
1. Top reinforcing in slabs and beams
a. Members 8 inches deep or less: + 1/4 inch
b. Members more then 8 inches but not over 2 feet deep: + 1/2 inch
C. Members more than 2 feet deep: + one inch
12/20/01 03200 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Lengthwise of members: + 2 inches
3. Concrete cover to formed surfaces: + 1/4 inch
4. Minimum spacing between reinforcing bars: 1/4 inch
E. Support reinforcing in slabs -on -grade and slabs -on -deck on bolsters or blocks.. Do not lift
reinforcing during concrete placement.
3.3 COLD BENDING OF BARS IN THE FIELD
A. Dowels connecting concrete of different pour sequences may be bent in the field to facilitate
form placement and removal with the following conditions:
1. Maximum bar size is ##4,
2. Maximum angle of bend is 90 degrees, and
3. Bars may be bent and straightened one time only.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Laboratory Services
1. Inspect reinforcing sizes, quantities and placement.
2. Inspect support and securement of reinforcing.
3. Inspect condition of reinforcing.
3.5 PROTECTION a
A. Place reinforcing to provide required coverage of concrete.
B. Comply with minimum requirements ACI 318.
END OF SECTION 03200
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 03300 - STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Design of concrete mixes
2. Furnish and place cast -in -place concrete
3. Curing and finishing of concrete
4. Non -shrink grout for structural steel
B. Related Sections
1. Section 02515 - Concrete Paving and Sidewalks
2. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcing
3. Section 03100 - Structural Concrete Formwork
4. Section 02350 - Footings
5. Section 03600 - Grout for Steel Baseplates
6. Section 01410 - Laboratory Testing and Inspection
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute:
I. ACI 117, Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials.
2. ACI 211.1, Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and
Heavyweight Concrete.
3. ACI 214, Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete.
4. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
5. ACI 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete.
6. ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting.
7. ACI 306, Cold Weather Concreting.
8. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
9. SP15, Field Reference Manual, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings with
Selected ACI and ASTM References.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM C31, Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field.
12/20/01 03300 - 1
0
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. ASTM C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
4. ASTM C42, Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
S. ASTM C94, Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete.
6. ASTM C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
7. ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
8. ASTM C156, Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials.
9. ASTM C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
10. ASTM C172, Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete.
11. ASTM C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method.
12. ASTM C260, Standard Specification for Air- Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
13. ASTM C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
14. ASTM C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete.
15. ASTM C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
16. ASTM C567, Test for Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete.
17. ASTM C618, Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.
18. ASTM C1017, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing
Flowing Concrete.
19. ASTM E1155, Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness
Using the "F Number" System (Inch -Pound) Units.
C. Corps of Engineers:
1.4
1. CRD-C13, Standard Specification for Air- Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
2. CRD-0572, Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Water Stops.
3. CRD-C621, Corps of Engineers Specification for Non -Shrink Grout.
D. Field Reference Manual: Contractor shall have available in field office a copy of ACI SP-15.
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: submit manufacturers data indicating product compliance for the following:
1.
Admixtures
2.
Floor hardener
3.
Curing compound
4.
Reglets
S.
Masonry anchors
6.
Waterstops
7.
Non -shrink grout
Material Certifications: submit certifications showing compliance for the following:
1. Fly ash.
2. Sieve analyses for structural concrete aggregates:
a. Coarse aggregate.
b. Fine aggregate.
12/20/01 03300 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Structural Concrete Mix Designs for each class of concrete
D. Concrete Delivery Tickets: Submit sample ready -mixed concrete delivery tickets in accordance
with ASTM C94 for each class of concrete.
E. Construction Joints: submit drawings indicating proposed locations of construction joints.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Batch Plant Qualifications - conform to the "Check List for Certification of Ready -Mixed
Concrete Production Facilities" of the National Ready -Mixed Concrete Association.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Transporting: Ready -mixed concrete supplier shall have sufficient capacity and adequate
facilities to provide continuous delivery at the rate required for continuous placement
throughout any sequence of placement.
B. Storage of Materials
1. Store cement in weathertight buildings or bins which prevent intrusion of moisture or
contaminants. Store different types of cement in separate facilities.
2. Stockpile aggregates to prevent segregation and contamination with other materials.
Thaw frozen aggregates before use.
3. Sand shall be drained to a uniform moisture content before use.
4. Store admixtures securely to prevent contamination, evaporation, damage or temperature
variation in excess of the range recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Delivery: Truck mixers, agitators and non -agitating units shall conform to the applicable
requirements of ASTM C94, "Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
MANUFACTURERS
Ardex Inc.
The Burke Company
Cormix
Dayton Superior
Euclid Chemical Company
W.R. Grace & Company
12/20/01 03300 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
0"
G. L & M Construction Chemicals Inc.
H. Master Builders
I. W.R. Meadows
J. Sika Corporation
K. Thoro System Products
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Portland cement: conform to ASTM C150 Type I or III. Cement shall be provided from a single
source.
B. Fine aggregate: conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C33, natural bank or river sand,
washed and screened, consisting of hard, durable, uncoated particles free of deleterious matter,
and graded from coarse to fine to produce a minimum percentage of voids.
C. Coarse aggregate: conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C33, gravel or crushed stone,
suitably processed, washed and screened; consisting of hard, durable particles without adherent
coatings.
D. Water: potable, city water. E
IJ ADMIXTURES
A. Air -entraining agent: conform to, ASTM C260 and CRD C-13,
B. Water -reducing, set -controlling admixture: conform to ASTM C494.
C. Calcium chloride shall not be permitted in concrete mixtures.
D. Fly Ash: conform to ASTM C618, carbon content not greater than 3% by volume.
E. Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used in concrete to be poured on metal floor deck.
2.4 CURING AND FINISHING PRODUCTS
A. Curing Compound
1. Conform to ASTM C309.
2. Clear, non -yellowing, fast curing, chemically neutral, without oils, fillers, extenders and
stabilizers.
3. Shall not inhibit bonding of flooring adhesives.
4. . Shall not inhibit bond breaker, where applicable.
5. Minimum 30 percent solids by volume.
am
12/20/01 03300 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Waterproof Paper:
1. Waterproof paper for curing concrete - 2 ply fiber -reinforced, asphaltic kraft paper,
conform to ASTM C171.
C. Abrasive Aggregate: aluminum oxide aggregate.
D. Floor Hardener:
1. Penetrating liquid for subsequent application.
2. Non -staining.
3. Combination curing compound and hardener shall not be used.
4. Do not apply to concrete until at least 28 days after concrete is placed.
E. Cement Floor Leveling Compound: cementitious, flowable, specially formulated for feather-
edge application.
F. Sealer:
1. Clear acrylic
2. Clear, non -yellowing, fast curing, chemically neutral, without oils, fillers, extenders and
stabilizers.
3. Shall not inhibit bonding of flooring adhesives.
: 4. Shall not inhibit bond breaker, where applicable.
•G. Curing and finishing products and their application shall comply with applicable air -quality and
environmental regulations.
i
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Waterstops: polyvinyl chloride, bulb type with minimum 3 inch ribbed extension into concrete
each side of joint. One side shall be split for anchoring to formwork.
1. Representative products: Sealtight No. 6316, W.R. Meadows Co.
2. Alternate Product: "Synko-flex Waterstop", Synko-Flex Products
B. Non -Shrink Grout: pre -mixed, non -shrinking, minimum compressive strength 5000 psi in 28
days, conform to U.S. Army Corp of Engineers Specification No. CRD-C621.
1. Grout exposed to view shall be non -oxidizing
2.6 CONCRETE MIXES
A. General: Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,
water, and admixtures where applicable. Design concrete mixes to be workable and appropriate
for each application, to bond readily to reinforcement, without segregation or the formation of
excessive free water on surfaces.
B. Selection of Proportions
1. Determine proportions of ingredients in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5 to provide
required strength, slump, resistance to weathering, placeability, durability and surface
hardness for each class of concrete.
12/20/01 03300 - 5
FE
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Provide admixtures as required or appropriate to enhance workability, control set or
improve strength.
C. Required Average Strength for Mix Design:
1. Where suitable strength test records for the concrete production facility are available,
design strength may be based on the standard deviation in accordance with ACI 318.
2. Where strength test records are not available, design strength shall be based on the
following:
Specified Strength Required Average Strength
F'c - psi F'cr - psi
F'c <=3000 F'c + 1000
3000 < F'c <=5000 F'c + 1200
F'c > 5000 F'c + 1400
D. Documentation of Average Strength: provide evidence of average strength for each class of
concrete in accordance with ACI 318 by field strength tests, strength test records or trial
mixtures.
E. Concrete Mix Designs: submit mix designs for each class of concrete.
1. Indicate the following for each mix design:
a. Class designation.
b. Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and water.
C. Water -cement ratio, design strength, slump, and air content.
d. Type of cement and aggregates.
e. Type and dosage of admixtures.
2. Mix designs shall be adjusted as required by weather and jobsite conditions to maintain
specified strengths throughout the course of the work without additional cost to the
Owner.
3. As strength data becomes available during the progress of the work, mix designs may be
adjusted in accordance with ACI 31.8.
4. Minimum Cement Content: Cement content shall not be less than 320 pounds per cubic
yard.
5. Fly ash content shall be limited to 30 percent of weight of Type I cement used.
F. Strength Gain: design concrete mixes to obtain required strengths in 28 days or less from date of
placement.
2.7 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
A. Do not mix concrete for placement in the work until mix designs and corresponding strength
tests reflect that each proposed mix will develop strengths required and mix designs have been
reviewed for compliance.
B. Batching and Mixing:
1. Batch and mix ready -mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
r
12/20/01 03300 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Batch site -mixed concrete with scales accurate to within 0.4 percent of their total
capacities. Operation of batching equipment shall consistently measure ingredients within
1 percent for concrete and water, 2 percent for aggregates and 3 percent for admixtures.
Mixing of site -batched concrete shall be in accordance ACI 301.
C. Admixtures: Air -entraining admixtures and other chemical admixtures shall be charged into
mixer as solutions and shall be accurately measured by means of a mechanical dispenser. The
liquid shall be considered as part of mixing water.
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Laboratory Inspection
1. Verify required plant certifications
2.- Inspect batching equipment periodically
3. Inspect batching and loading of transit -mix trucks at the start of each day of production.
B. Materials Testing
1. Sieve analysis of aggregates
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
I
A. Do not begin delivery of concrete materials until formwork, reinforcement, and all items
required to be embedded in the concrete are complete, properly positioned and secured in place.
1. Remove snow, ice, debris and excessive water from forms.
2. Pre -wet soil and sand subgrades and surfaces of precast concrete to receive fresh
concrete.
3. Position and secure expansion joint materials, anchors, waterstops, screeds, control joint
forms, and expansion caps on slip -dowels.
4. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from the inner surfaces of conveying
equipment, formwork and reinforcing.
B. Prepare and have ready in good working condition chutes, tremies, pumps, buggies, vibrators T
and all other equipment necessary for the orderly and continuous placement of concrete.
C. Where carton -form void forms are used, inspect condition before placing concrete. Replace
crushed or weakened boxes and tape all joints. Repair sides of grade beam or wall excavations
so that not more than 3 inches of ground is visible beyond the edge of void boxes.
D. Inspect and repair vapor barrier where applicable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conveying:
12/20/01 03300 - 7
.f
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Prevent separation, segregation and loss of ingredients.
2. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as possible.
3. Take special precautions with belt conveyors to prevent segregation of ingredients,
drying and rise in temperature during conveying.
4. Pumps or pneumatic equipment shall have adequate pumping capacity. Slump loss due
to pumping shall not exceed 2 inches. Do not convey concrete through pipes made of
aluminum or aluminum alloy.
5. Thoroughly clean conveying equipment at the end of each placement sequence.
B. Depositing:
1. Place concrete continuously in horizontal layers not more than 12 inches deep. Exercise
care to avoid seams or weakened planes within the concrete. Deposit concrete into (not
away from) previously deposited concrete.
2. Do not place fresh concrete on partially hardened or contaminated concrete.
3. - Do not place concrete which has partially set.
4. Exercise care to avoid splashing forms and reinforcing with concrete.
5. Place concrete in forms as near as possible to its final position, do not transport in the
forms with vibrators or screeds.
6. Do not drop concrete directly into standing water, use a tremie with the outlet near the
bottom of the place of deposit.
7. Use tremies, chutes or hoppers to place concrete where a vertical drop greater than 5 feet
is required.
8. Do not place concrete when slump tests indicate plasticity that is greater than required
limits.
C. Consolidating:
1. As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate by means of mechanical vibrators
and suitable hand tools, to work the mixture well into all parts and corners of the forms,
and entirely around the reinforcement and inserts. Consolidation of concrete shall be in
accordance with ACI 309.
2. Mechanical vibrators shall have minimum frequency of 7000 revolutions per minute.
3. Do not over -vibrate concrete or use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Insert
vibrators vertically at frequent intervals, do not drag vibrators through concrete.
4. Do not insert vibrators into lower courses that have begun to set.
5. Maintain spare vibrators on the job site during all concrete placing operations.
D. Bonding:
1 Before depositing new concrete on or against previously deposited concrete which has
partially or entirely set, thoroughly clean and roughen surfaces to receive fresh concrete.
2. Re -tighten and thoroughly clean forms and reinforcement.
3. Apply 1 to 2 inches of grout to concrete surfaces. Grout shall be of identical mix to
concrete without coarse aggregate.
4. Deposit new concrete before grout attains initial set.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Construction Joints
1. Each unit of structure (beam, column, footing, slab or wall) shall be monolithic in
12/20/O1 03300 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C.
construction except where specifically required to be otherwise.
2. Where required, construction joints shall be located near the midspan of beams, joists and
slabs.
3. Construction joints shall be located only where required or shown on accepted submittals.
Weather Conditions:
1. Cold Weather: Temperature of concrete delivered at job site shall conform to the
following:
Air Temperature Concrete Temperature
30 to 45 degrees F. 55 to 90 degrees F.
0 to 30 degrees F. 60 to 90 degrees F.
Below 0 degrees F. 65 to 90 degrees F.
a. Water heated to above 100 degrees F shall be combined with aggregates before
cement is added. Do not add cement to water or aggregates having a temperature
greater than 100 F.
b. Conform to ACI 306.
C. When the outdoor temperature is less than 40 degrees F, maintain temperature of
concrete at not less than 50 degrees F for required curing time.
2. Hot Weather: Temperature of concrete delivered at job site shall not exceed 90 degrees
F. Add ice to mixing water as required to control temperature of mixture.
a. Conform to ACI 305.
b. Make provisions for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling or wet cover
when necessary:
C. Use evaporation retarders, and finishing aids when necessary to achieve sound,
durable surfaces.
Floor Flatness and Levelness Tolerances:
1. General: Tolerances in floor slab elevation shall not exceed the following:
a. For slabs on grade, and level suspended slabs shored until after testing: plus or
minus 1/4 inch in 10 ft in any direction, maximum 1 inch variation between
columns, but not to exceed Fl and Ff limits below. Laser leveling of floor slab
surface may be used.
b. For unshored suspended slabs: floor slab thickness shall not vary by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet in any direction, but not to exceed Ff limits below. See Division 5
Sections for steel frame tolerances. Laser leveling of floor slab surface shall not be
used.
2. Definitions:
a. Ff - maximum variation in floor elevation within any 2-foot length; "flatness."
b. Fl - maximum variation in floor elevation between any 2 points separated by 10
feet; "levelness."
C. Specified overall value - minimum average for Project.
d. Local value - minimum within each column bay.
3. Floor flatness and levelness measurements:
a. Measurements shall be made where requested by Owner or Architect, at Owner's
expense.
b. Measurements shall be made in accordance with ASTM E-1155 and ACI 117.
4. Typical unless noted otherwise.
12/20/01 03300 - 9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
a. Slab -on -Grade
(1) Specified Overall Value — Ff30 / F120
(2) Minimum Local Value - Ff20 /_F115
3.4 FINISHING EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES
A. General
1.
Comply with ACI 302.
2.
Double screed slabs at required elevations.
.n. 3.
Apply finishing products and cure in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.
B. Slab Surfaces
1.
Float Finish
a. Locations
(1) Initial finish for all horizontal surfaces
(2) Final finish where topping slabs, waterproofing membrane or roofing is to
be placed over finished surface.
b. Method - after concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off and leveled begin
first float. Check levelness and correct as required during first float. Second float
shall produce a uniform and true surface with a sandy texture.
2.
Trowel Finish
a. Locations - all floor slabs except where specifically required otherwise.
*^ _
b. Method - First apply float finish, then power -trowel and finally hand trowel to
-
produce a densei smooth surface free of trowel marks and blemishes, and uniform
in texture and appearance. Do not add cement slurry or water to surface during
..,
finishing. Grind high spots and fill low spots with specified materials.
3.
Broom Finish
a. Locations - Concrete ramp surfaces.
b. Method: After float finish, power -trowel and provide coarse transverse striations
with a stiff fiber brush. After brushing, provide indentations perpendicular to the
slope of the ramp approximately 1/4th inch wide and deep and at 6 inch intervals
with a metal grooving tool.
4.
Non -Slip Finish:
a. Locations: Interior, steel pan type stair treads and platforms, exterior concrete stair
and ramps.
b. Method: After floating, but before troweling, apply abrasive aggregate to surface
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, then steel trowel to a smooth,
even finish. Rub finished surfaces with abrasive stone or sandblast to remove
�-*
laitance or cement coating in order to expose abrasive aggregate:
C. Saw -Cutting Concrete Slabs -on -Grade
,.•. 1.
Saw joints as soon as possible after finishing, but only after concrete is hard enough.
Concrete is hard enough when saw blade does not dislodge aggregate and when edges of
sawcut do not ravel.
2.
Joints shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch wide and 1/4 of the slab thickness deep.
3.
Formed strips may be used in lieu of saw -cutting in the same locations and to equal depth
as sawn joints.
12/20/01
03300 - 10
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Formed Surfaces
1. General: Boles resulting from the removal of bolts or tie rods shall be solidly filled with
cement grout. Fill holes passing entirely through concrete members from the inside face
with a plunger -type grease gun or other device that will force the mortar through to the
outside face.
2. Rough Form Finish: for surfaces not exposed to view
a. Remove fins exceeding 1/4th inch in height, and grind bulges that interfere with
other trades.
b. Fill holes and honeycombs.
3. Smooth Form Finish: for surfaces exposed to view
a. Remove all fins, bulges and unsightly form marks.
b. Fill holes and honeycombs to match surrounding concrete surfaces.
C. Provide rubbed finish where satisfactory form finish cannot be achieved.
4. Rubbed Finish
a. Apply finish as soon as possible after casting concrete, no later than the day
following form removal.
b. Wet surface and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive to produce uniform
color and texture.
C. Form tie holes and honeycombs shall be patched and dressed to match color and
texture of surrounding concrete.
5. Grout Cleaned Finish
a. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be finished.
b. Mix 1 part Portland cement and 1 1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to
produce a grout with the consistency of thick paint. Use white cement as
necessary to match color of surrounding concrete. Wet concrete surfaces to
prevent absorption of water from the grout. Apply grout uniformly, filling all
holes and air bubbles. Remove excess grout. After initial set, rub surface with
burlap. Wet cure for minimum 36 hours after final rubbing.
3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying,
excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical damage.
B. Preservation of Moisture: protect surfaces not in contact with forms from moisture loss with one
of the following methods immediately after finishing and continuing for a period of at least 7
days:
1. Ponding or continuous sprinkling
2. Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet.
3. Application of sand kept continuously wet.
4. Continuous application of steam or mist.
5. Application of waterproof sheet materials.
6. Application of curing compound in conformance with ASTM C309, "Specification for
Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete". Apply curing compounds
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use curing compound on
any surface against which additional concrete is to be placed or other material is to be
bonded unless it is proven that the compound will not inhibit bonding, or positive
12/20/01 03300 -11
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
measures are taken to completely remove the compound from areas to received bonded
materials.
C. Protect surfaces cast against forms from' 'moisture loss by.keeping forms wet until removed.
After form removal, protect exposed surfaces by one of the methods specified.
D. Curing shall be continued for a period of 7 days for Type I cement, or 3 days for Type III
cement, or until tests indicate that the concrete has attained 70 percent of required strength.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection
1. Concrete Compression Testing: Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM
C172. Make one strength test for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof of each mix
design of concrete placed in any single day. A single strength test shall consist of 4
cylinders: one to be tested at 7 days age; two to be tested at 28 days age; and one
reserved for future test if requested. Mold and cure specimens from each sample in
accordance with ASTM C31. Test concrete specimens in accordance with ASTM C39.
2. Determine slump for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to
vary, in accordance with ASTM C143.
3. Determine total air content of normal -weight concrete sample for each strength test in
accordance with ASTM C231.
•- _ 4. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test.
h 5. Inspection and Monitoling:
a. Inspect concrete mixing and loading of transit -mix trucks at plant.
b. Monitor addition of water to concrete at job site and length of time concrete is
allowed to remain in truck during pour.
C. Certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered (or poured),
amount of water added and time at which cement and aggregate were discharged
into truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from truck.
B. Contractor's Responsibilities
1. Furnish necessary labor to assist testing agency in obtaining and handling samples at job -
site.
2. Advise testing agency in advance of operations to allow for assignment of testing
personnel and testing.
3. Provide and maintain for use of testing agency adequate facilities for proper curing of
concrete test specimens on project site in accordance with ASTM C31.
C. Evaluation and Acceptance:
1. Strength level of a given class of concrete will be considered satisfactory if each of the
three following requirements is met for that class of concrete:
a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed
specified strength.
b. No individual strength test result (average of two cylinders) falls below specified
strength by more than 500 psi.
C. 90 percent of strength test results equal or exceed specified strength.
2. Concrete strength tests made and tested by testing laboratory shall be sole criteria of
12/20/01 03300 - 12
.r•
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
concrete strength unless in -situ tests are made in accordance with Building Code by a
qualified independent testing laboratory. Concrete for which strength tests do not meet
criteria for acceptance shall be considered inadequate until proven otherwise.
3. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the requirements of ACI 301, Chapter
18, have been complied with.
4. In any case, where strength tests of concrete fail to meet criteria specified herein,
Architect shall be sole judge of structural adequacy of concrete.
In such case, burden of proof of structural adequacy shall be responsibility of Contractor.
Strength evaluation shall conform to requirements of ACI 318, Chapters 5 and 20.
If strength evaluation testing indicates, in opinion of Architect, that structure is of
inadequate strength; portions of structure in question shall be repaired or removed and
replaced as directed by Architect at no additional expense to Owner.
If strength tests fall below specified strength, but not so low as to cause concern for
structural adequacy, Architect may request improved conditions of curing or modification
of design mixes to improve strength.
3.7 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of the work, remove forms,- equipment, protective coverings and any rubbish
resulting therefrom from the premises. Finished concrete surfaces shall be left in a clean
condition, satisfactory to the Owner. After sweeping with an ordinary broom and removing
mortar, concrete droppings, loose dirt, and mud, wash concrete floors and platforms with
soapsuds and scrub with a steel fiber brush. Mop up the suds and flush the surfaces with clean
water. Provide adequate measures during scrubbing, mopping, and flushing operations to keep
excessive or injurious amounts of water off resilient tile floors. Any damage occasioned to such
floors by or on account of such operations shall be promptly, effectively and satisfactorily
repaired.
B. Remove all concrete not required by the Drawings caused by overpour, bulging or collapse of
forms or error in form construction.
1. Remove bulges from sides of beams and walls.
2. Remove excess concrete at intersections of grade beams.
END OF SECTION 03300
12/20/01 03300 - 13
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 03301
DRY -SHAKE COLORED HARDENER
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Division 1 Specification
sections, apply to work -of this section.
B. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and supervision to install the dry -shake colored floor
hardener as specified or shown in drawings. Work includes providing pre -mixed, ready -to -use
surface hardener; proportioned, mixed, packaged at the manufacturing factory and delivered to the
jobsite ready to apply; placing, finishing and curing as specified.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
B. ACI 302 iR "Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction."
C. ACI 304 'Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing of
Concrete."
D. ACI 305R "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting."
E. ACI 306R "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting."
F. ASTM C309 "Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete."
r
�,,, 12/20/01 3301-1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit specified manufacturer's complete technical data sheets for the
following:
L Dry -shake colored hardener
2. Curing compounds
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section shall have a minimum of 10 (ten) years documented experience in floor hardener
manufacturing.
B. Contractor Qualifications: Concrete work shall be performed by firm with [five] 5 years
experience with work of similar scope and quality.
C. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 316.
D. Conform to ACI 305 during hot weather.
E. Conform to ACI 306 during cold weather.
F. Obtain each specified material from same source and maintain high degree of consistency in
workmanship throughout Project.
I
G. A notification of the manufacturer's authorized representative must be given at least 2 weeks before
the start of work.
H. Colored Concrete Mock -Up:
1. At location on Project selected by Architect, place and finish 10 feet x 10 feet
area.
2. Construct sample -using processes and techniques intended for use on permanent
work, including curing procedures. Include samples of control, construction, and
expansion joints in sample panels. Mock-up shall be produced by the individual
workers who will be performing the work for the project.
3. Accepted mock-up provides visual standard for work of Section.
4. Mock-up shall remain through completion of the work for use as a quality
standard for finished work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in original. factory unopened, undamaged packaging bearing identification of
product, manufacturer, batch number, and expiration data as applicable.
B. Store the product in a location protected from damage, construction activity, and precipitation in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
12/20/01 3301-2 T
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Do not use specified product under conditions of precipitation or freezing conditions.' Use
appropriate measures for protection and supplementary heating/cooling or to ensure proper drying
and curing conditions in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Floor hardener manufacturer shall provide Material Safety Data Sheets. The applicator shall be
responsible to post these sheets during the application of the floor hardener.
C. Professional practices as described in ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting and 306R Cold
Weather Concreting should be followed
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCTS
A. Dry -shake Colored Hardener: Lithochrome Color Hardener by L.M. Scofield Company. Color: A-
57 Platinum Grey.
B. Curing Compound: Colbrcure Concrete Sealer color mtched curing/sealing compound by L.M.
Scofield Company.
C. Joint Sealants shall be color matched to the concrete as recommended by L.M. Scofield
Company.
PART 3 EXECUTION '
3.1 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. A recommended minimum cement content of five (5) sacks per cubic yard of concrete shall
be used.
B. Slump of the concrete shall be consistent throughout the project at four (4) inches or less. At
no time shall the slump exceed five (5) inches
C. Calcium chloride shall not be added to the mix since it causes mottling and surface
discoloration.
D. Supplemental admixtures, such as additional water -reducing admixtures, water -proofing
agents, and super plasticizers shall not be used.
E. Do not add water to the mix in the field.
F. Maximum air content shall not exceed 3%.
3.2 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Move concrete into place with square -tipped shovels or concrete rakes.
B. Vibrators, when used, shall be inserted and withdrawn vertically.
"" 12/20/01 3301-3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Concrete shall be struck to specified level with wood or magnesium straight edge or mechanical
vibrating screed.
D. The concrete surface shall be further leveled and consolidated with highway magnesium straight
edge and or magnesium bull float.
E. Mechanically float the concrete surface as soon as the concrete surface has taken its initial set
and will support the weight of a power float machine equipped with float shoes or combination
blades and an operator.
3.3. INSTALLATION — DRY -SHAKE COLORED HARDENER
A. Apply the first two thirds (2/3) of the specified application rate to the freshly floated concrete
surface. Bleed water shall not be present during or following the application of the first and second
shake.
B. Do not throw the shake but distribute it evenly by hand or mechanical spreader designed to
apply floor hardeners. Consult manufacturer for recommended manufacturers of mechanical
spreaders.
C. As soon as the material has absorbed moisture, indicated by uniform darkening of the surface,
mechanically float the concrete surface a second time, just enough to bring moisture from the base
slab through the shake.
D. Immediately following the §econd floating, apply the remaining one third (1/3) of the specified
application rate. If applied by hand, broadcast in the opposite direction of the first for a more
uniform coverage. If a mechanical spreader is used, apply the same manner as previously
described.
E. As soon as this material has absorbed moisture, mechanically float the concrete surface a third
time.
F. At no time shall water be added to the surface.
G. As the surface further stiffens, remove the float blades to expose the power finishing blades or
raise slightly combination blades. Flat trowel the surface to remove marks and pinholes
H. Further troweling operations can be done, each time raising the blades, until the desired texture
or finish is obtained. DO NOT BURNISH TROWEL COLORED SURFACE FLOOR
HARDENERS
3.4 CURING
A. Color hardener concrete shall be cured with the specified liquid membrane curing compound as
recommended by the manufacturer of the color hardener.
B. Apply immediately after the floor surface has hardened sufficiently so that the application of the
curing compound will not mar the surface. Apply uniformly over the entire surface at a coverage
12/20/01 3301-4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
rate recommended by the manufacturer and meeting or exceeding the moisture retention
requirements of ASTM C309.
C. There should be no free water on the surface at the time of the application.
�. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finish work as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Prohibit foot or vehicular traffic on floor surface as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Barricade area to protect flooring as directed by manufacturee.
D. Protect floor surface from sub -trades until final inspection and acceptance..
END OF SECTION
a.m
12/20/01 3301-5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 03600 - GROUTING STEEL BASE PLATES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Grout for steel baseplates
B. Related Sections
1. Section 03300 - Structural Concrete
2. Section 05100 - Steel Columns —
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM C1090, Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical
Specimens from Hydraulic Cement Grout
2. ASTM C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Non -
Shrinkable)
B. Corps of Engineers:
1. CRD-C621, Specification for Non -Shrink Grout.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer's data indicating product compliance for the following:
1. Non -shrink grout.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store grout materials in dry condition above ground.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
12/20/01 03600 - 1
0-,
P"
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Non -Shrink Grout:
1. Pre -mixed non -shrinking, high strength grout.
2. Compressive strength in 28 days: 5000 psi minimum, but not less than specified strength
of base concrete.
3. Comply with ASTM C1107, and CRD-C621.
4. Nonoxidizing, if grout will be permanently exposed to view.
5. Exhibits positive expansion when testing in accordance with ASTM C1090.
6. Acceptable products:
a. Euco N-S Grout, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Masterflow 713, manufactured by Master Builders Co.
C. SikaGrout 212, manufactured by Sika Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation:
1. Clean slab or foundation of dirt and loose material down to sound concrete.
2. Remove oil, grease, and paint from areas of base plates or foundations to be grouted.
3. Roughen adjacent concrete surfaces where possible.
4. Thoroughly wet concrete contact area at least 4 hours prior to grout placement, or as
instructed by grout manufacturer. Keep wet, and remove excess water prior to
placement.
B. Mixing
1. Use mechanical mortar mixer.
2. Use the minimum amount of mixing water needed for placement.
3. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for:
a. Quantity of water used in mix.
b. Length of mixing time.
C. Pot life.
d. Retempering.
C. Forms
1. Use side forms if grout space is thicker than 1-1/2 inches.
2. When forms are required, use strong, securely anchored forms, sealed to prevent grout
leakage.
3. Remove forms only after grout is completely self-supporting.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Placement and Consolidation
1. Bearing plates shall be fully grouted, without cavities, pockets, or air bubbles.
2. Place grout continuously, and from one side to avoid entrapment of air pockets and to
ensure good consolidation.
12/20/01 03600 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. Remove voids by rodding and vibrating during placement.
4. Do not overwork grout.
S. Use grout holes for baseplates larger than 24 inches in width.
B. Curing
1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for curing.
2. Do not vibrate or disturb grout during curing period.
END OF SECTION 03600
H
12/20/01 03600 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 05100 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel columns
2. Steel beams
3. Fusion welded anchors
4. Miscellaneous angles and plates
..S. Bolts
6. Steel assemblies to be embedded in concrete
7. Laboratory testing and inspection
8. Shop painting
9. Supplementary parts and members necessary to complete and erect structural steel frame
k
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05300 - Metal Roof Deck
2. Section 05200 - Steel Joists
3. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Fabrications
4. Section 03600 - Grouting of Base Plates
5. Section 01410 - Laboratory Testing and Inspection
6. Section 09900 - Painting
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS (LATEST EDITION)
A. American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC:
1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
2. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
3. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
4. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated,
Welded and Seamless.
3. ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard
_ Quality.
4. ASTM A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot- Galvanizing) Coatings on Products
12/20/01 05100 -1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, bars and strip.
5. ASTM A143, Recommended Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot -
Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement.
6. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
7. ASTM A193, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High -Temperature Service.
8. ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard
Fasteners.
9. ASTM A325, Standard Specification for High -Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
10. ASTM A441, Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Structural Manganese
Vanadium Steel.
11. ASTM A449, Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs.
12. ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
13. ASTM A501, Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing.
14. ASTM A572, Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Columbium -
Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality:
15. ASTM A992, Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building
Framing.
16. ASTM B117, Standard Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.
17. ASTM D522, Standard Test for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings with Conical
Mandrel Apparatus.
C. American Welding Society:
1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
2. AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
D. Industrial Fasteners Institute:
1. Handbook on Bolt, Nut and Rivet Standards.
E. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI B18.2, Fasteners.
2. ANSI B27.2, Plain Washers.
F. Steel Structures Painting Council, SSPC:
1. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 1, Good Painting Practice.
2. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop and installation drawings showing shop and erection
details including member sizes, grades of materials, details of fabrication and erection, and end
connections.
1. Do not begin fabrication of materials prior to review of shop drawings.
2. Review of shop drawings is for member sizes, spacings, detail, and general compliance
with Contract Documents only.
12/20/O1 05100 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. Material quantities, lengths, fit, verification of job conditions and coordination with other
trades are responsibility of Contractor.
4. Reproductions of Contract Drawings shall not be used for shop drawings.
B. Erection Procedure: Submit descriptive data illustrating general procedure for erection of
structural steel including sequence of work, proposed schedule and details of temporary staying
and bracing.
C. Submit Mill Certifications showing compliance of materials with ASTM and AISC
Specifications.
D. Submit Mill Certifications (Manufacturer's Inspection Certificates) for bolts, nuts and washers.
E. Submit manufacturer's data sheets or certified test results indicating compliance with
requirements for manufactured components.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS .
A. Arc -Welding: Welding procedures and techniques, welders and tackers shall be qualified in
accordance with AWS D1.1.
1. Welders to be employed on Work shall maintain current AWS certification throughout
duration of Project.
' 2. If requested by Architect, submit identifying stenciled test coupons made by operator
whose workmanship is, subject to question, and if reasonable doubt of proficiency exists,
welder shall be re -qualified and certified by independent testing laboratory at no
additional expense to Owner.
3. Work suspected of deficient quality may be subject to removal of coupons from any
location on any joint for testing. Remove sections of welds found defective and properly
rewelded before proceeding with work.
B. Steel Fabricator: not less than 5 years of experience in fabrication of structural steel.
C. Steel Erector: not less than 5 years of experience in erection of structural steel.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of anchor bolts and other anchorage assemblies to be embedded in concrete
or masonry construction. Provide setting drawings, instructions and templates required for
proper placement of anchor bolts and embeds.
B. Sequence shipments of fabricated steel to expedite erection and minimize field handling of
material.
C. Store structural steel above ground on skids or platforms, and protect from corrosion. Store
packaged materials in unbroken containers.
D. Do not bend or damage materials during shipment, handling and erection.
12120/O1 05100 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
E. Take precautions in the removal of packaging or bundling devices to prevent damage to
materials.
F. Certification numbers for fasteners shall appear on product containers and shall correspond to
identification numbers on mill test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel, normal grade: ASTM A36.
B. High Strength Structural Steel: ASTM A572 - Grade 50.
C. High Strength Structural Steel (W-Sections): ASTM A992 — Grade 50.
D. Steel Pipes: ASTM A53 - Grade B (35,000 psi yield).
E. Steel Tubes: ASTM A500 - Grade B.
.F. Erection Bolts and Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, ANSI B18.2.1, and ANSI B18.2.2.
G. High Strength Bolts: ASTMA325N, ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.2.2.
1. Manufacturer's symbol and grade markings shall appear on bolts and nuts.
H. High Strength Anchor Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B7 threaded rod.
I. Washers: ANSI B27.2 Type A.
J. Welding Electrodes:
1. Welding electrodes shall conform to AISC Specifications. Use E70 electrodes for ASTM
A36 and ASTM A572 Grade 50 Steel. Use E8018 for ASTM A441 steel.
2. Coatings of low -hydrogen electrodes shall be thoroughly dry when used. Electrodes
taken from hermetically sealed packages shall be used within 4 hours, or shall be dried in
accordance with AWS D1.1 before use.
3. Do not use electrodes of any type that have been wet.
K. Paint for structural steel:
1. Rust -inhibiting primer with performance exceeding that of Federal Specification TT-P-
86g, Type I or III.
2. Paint and methods of paint application shall comply with applicable air -quality and
environmental regulations.
3. Paint shall be compatible with welding procedures and shall produce no significant
difference in strength of weld material.
4. , Paint shall meet or exceed requirements for abrasion - Fed. Test No. 141; elongation -
ASTM D522; and salt spray - ASTM B117.
5. Acceptable Products:
12/20/O1 05100 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
Tnemec 10-99
Valspar 13-R-29
Carboline Phenoline 305
L. Zinc -Coating: Where galvanizing steel is required, zinc -coating shall conform to ASTM A123
and A143. Zinc -coating for threaded products shall conform to ASTM A153. Do not galvanize
ASTM A490 bolts.
M. Cold Galvanizing: Z.R.C. Cold galvanizing compound as manufactured by Z.R.C. Chemical
Products, Quincy, Mass. and used for repair only.
N. Shear Studs
1. Headed fusion welded shear connectors with proper ferrules and accessories especially
designed to create composite deck action by mating of shear connectors, concrete deck,
and supporting beam.
2. Steel shall conform to ASTM A108 grades C1010-1020, minimum tensile strength of
60,000 psi.
3. Studs shall be of uniform diameter, heads concentric and normal to shaft, and weld end
chamfered and solid flux.
i2 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
•A. Complete penetration butt weld moment connections to develop 100% of flexural capacity of
member.
B. Except as specifically noted otherwise, detail bolted connections using bolts conforming to
ASTM A325N, Bearing Type Connections with threads allowed in shear plane. Details shall be
in accordance with Section 7 of the AISC Specification for Structural Joints.
C. Weld connections for diagonal bracing to develop full strength of member in tension, unless
noted otherwise.
D. Do not use welds in combination with bolts in the same face of any connection.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate materials in accordance with applicable AISC Specifications and Standards.
B. Pre -assemble work as much as possible and deliver to site ready for erection. Mark and match -
mark pieces where field assembly is required.
C. Prior to fabrication; straighten materials, remove twists and bends and clean faying surfaces of
scale and rust.
D. Clean members to be painted with power tools in accordance with SSPC standards.
E. Provide required camber in beams to within 1/8th inch per 10 feet of beam length. Mark all
beams indicating direction of fabricated camber or natural camber due to rolling tolerance.
12/20/01 05100 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
F. Provide members of required sizes, weights, shapes and lengths. Do not splice members to
achieve required lengths except where specifically allowed by the Architect. Do not alter
member shapes or lengths or enlarge bolt holes in the field for proper fit; return materials to the
fabrication shop for correction where required. Member splices allowed for the convenience of
the fabricator or erector shall not result in additional cost to the Owner.
G. Punch or drill holes for bolts. Hole sizes shall conform to AISC Specifications.
H. Compression joints shall have both contact surfaces milled for precision fit. Other joints shall
be cut or dressed straight and true, and prepared as required for welding. Components of
assemblies and built-up members shall be pinned and rigidly maintained in accurate position
during final assembly.
2.4 WELDED CONSTRUCTION
A. Comply with AWS D 1.1.
B. Clean surfaces of loose scale, rust, paint, grease and dirt. Remove oil with benzine. Wire brush
welds after depositing for visual inspection. Welds shall be smooth and uniform in cross
section, shall be free of porosity and clinkers, and shall have required fusion and penetration
into base metal.
C. Secure members in proper position for welding.
D. Take proper precautions to minimize residual stresses and distortions in members being welded.
E. Preheat and interpass temperatures shall conform to Table 4.2, AWS D1.1. continuous fillet
with minimum sizes specified by AWS D1.1
F. Prepare members to be butt -welded in accordance with AISC recommendations for pre -
qualified welds, and provide required clearances and back-up bars. Remove back-up bars after
completing welds.
G. Lay fillet welds of required sizes in proper position and with gaps not exceeding AISC
recommendations.
H. Tack welding shall not affect quality of finished welds.
2.5 BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide holes at right angles to members of sizes recommended by AISC Specifications. Short -
slotted holes shall not be used.
B. Provide beveled washers for surfaces out of parallel more than 1:20.
C. Provide bolts of sufficient length to extend entirely through nuts.
12/20/01 05100 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Protect fasteners from dirt and moisture at job site. Only as many fasterners as are anticipated
to be installed and tightened during a work shift shall be taken from protective storage.
Fasteners not used shall be returned to protected storage at end of shift. Fasteners shall not be
cleaned of lubricant that is present in as -delivered condition. Fasteners for slip critical
.� connections which must be cleaned of accumulated rust or dirt resultingfrom job site
conditions, shall be cleaned and relubricated prior to installation.
E. Anchor bolts and erection bolts:. tighten with a suitable wrench not less than 15 inches long.
Tap bolt heads with a hammer while tightening.
-- F. High Strength Bolts (typical, except as noted otherwise): install bolts in properly aligned holes,
and tighten to snug tight condition. Snug tight condition is defined as the tightness that exists
when all plies in a joint are in firm contact.
G. Hand tighten and tack weld (nut -to -bolt shank) bolts required to be "finger -tight".
H. Holes for anchor bolts in base plates may be oversized in accordance with AISC Specifications.
Provide washers as indicated on Drawings.
2:6 COATINGS
•A. SHOP PAINTING
1. Apply one coat of rust -inhibitive primer to exposed surfaces of structural steel members
except: surfaces required to be field welded, to be encased in concrete, to be spray
fireproofed, and top flanges of beams with shear connectors to support metal deck.
^" 2. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be painted of all loose mill scale, dirt, rust, and other
foreign matter with steel scrapers, wire brushes, or sandblasting in accordance with SSPC
SP-3. Remove oil and grease with solvents.
^ 3. Mix paint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, continuously stir during
application, and do not add thinner after initial m11ixing.
4. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, thoroughly work over
-. surfaces and into comers. Minimum dry thickness of coating shall be 2 mils.
5. Repair damage to coating prior to delivery.
B. GALVANIZING
1. Galvanize exposed steel members where noted on Drawings.
... 2.7 PRODUCTS
A. FUSION WELDED ANCHORS
1. Comply with AWS D1.1, Section 7.
2. Clean surfaces to be welded of rust, oil, grease, paint and dirt. Remove mill scale by
scraping or sandblasting.
3. Weld headed studs with appropriate equipment properly adjusted for climactic
conditions.
4. Remove ceramic ferrules after welding.
12/20/O1 05100 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Shear Studs:
1. When temperature is below 32 degrees F, one stud in each 100 shall be tested.
2. Minimum of 2 shear studs shall be tested at start of each production period in order to
determine proper generator, control unit and stud welder setting. Studs shall be capable
of being bent 45 degrees from vertical without weld failure. If, after welding, visual
inspection reveals that sound weld or full 360 degree fillet has not been obtained for a
particular stud, stud shall be struck with hammer and bent 15 degrees off perpendicular
toward nearest end of beam. Studs failing this test shall be replaced.
B. Inspection of Structural Steel:
1. Provide access to materials in fabrication and full cooperation to testing laboratory.
2. Following testing services shall be performed:
a. Inspect fabrications in shop.
b. Check temporary bracing of steel frame.
C. Check location and condition of anchor bolts.
d. Check plumbness and tolerance of steel frame.
e. Qualification of welders and welding techniques.
f. Visually inspect erection bolts.
g. Inspection of high -strength bolting:
(1) In accordance with Section 9 of AISC Specifications for Structural Joints.
(2) Confirm that fasteners meet project specification and are properly stored and —
handled. ,
(3) Confirm that faying surfaces have been properly prepared before
connections are assembled. —.
(4) Visually inspect connections.
h. Visually inspect field and shop welds.
i. Complete -penetration welds.
(1) Ultrasonic or X-ray testing per AWS Standards.
(2) Testing shall be performed on 100% of shop and field complete -penetration
welds.
j. Re -inspect corrective measures required at expense of Contractor.
C. Remove and replace Connections found to be faulty at no additional cost to the contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify condition and position of anchor bolts and embeds in concrete prior to commencing
erection.
B. Correct misaligned or missing components required for connections to steel framework before
commencing erection.
12/20/01 05100 - 8
PWI
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.2 ERECTION AND FIELD ASSEMBLY
A. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications. Work shall be plumb, square,
true to line, level and in proper position and orientation.
B.
Provide temporary bracing and guys to maintain stability of framework during erection for
stresses and loads due to erection equipment and its operation, weight of structure, wind, and
temporary loads imposed during erection. Check and adjust bracing frequently during progress
of erection and assembly. Maintain temporary bracing until all components of the structure
required for lateral stability are in place and final connections made.
PON
C.
Do not stack materials on partially completed framework, or in a manner to cause damage or
overloading of the structure.
D.
Tolerances shall be in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice and as follows:
1. Individual members plumb or level to within 1:750.
2. Vertical dimensions: 1/4 inch per story, exclusive of elastic shortening of columns.
3. Floor framing members: +-1/4 inch from column splice next above.
4. Horizontal dimensions: +-1:2000 for overall length or width.
E.
Field Assembly:
1. Assemble steel framework accurately to lines and elevations indicated and within
specified tolerances. Align and adjust members forming parts of a completed frame
before fastening.
2. Erect structural steel in proper sequence with work of other trades.
3. Tie anchor bolts securely in position before concrete is placed.
4. Thoroughly clean bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact before
assembly.
5. Adjust bolt holes requiring enlargement only by reaming, not by drifting or burning.
6. Erection bolts may be tightened and left in place, except in architecturally exposed work.
Fill holes left from removed bolts by plug welding. Grind welds smooth where
architecturally exposed.
7. Straighten and correct members damaged during handling, or replace without additional
cost to the Owner.
F.
Field Connections:
1. After frame is aligned and plumb, make final welded and bolted connections in
accordance with AISC Specifications.
2. Properly sequence welding to prevent distortion, and misalignment of the framework.
3. Maintain temporary bracing of the structure until connections are complete and other
required components of the structure (e.g. floor slabs and metal roof decks) are in place.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Touch-up field welds, abrasions and scarred areas of structural steel with same paint used for
shop coating after erection of frame and final connections are completed.
12/20/01 05100 - 9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.4 FIELD PAINTING
A. Refer to Section 09900 for field painting of exposed steel.
END OF SECTION 05100
12/20/01 05100 - 10
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 05200 - STEEL JOISTS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pre-engineered steel joists
2. Bridging
3. Ceiling extensions
4. Bearing plates
5. Side wall anchors
6. Extended ends
-B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05100 - Structural Steel
2. Section 05300 - Metal`Roof Deck
3. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Fabrications
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Steel Joist Institute, SJI:
1. Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists LH Series; and Standard Load Table,
Longspan Steel Joists, LH Series.
2. Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard
Fasteners.
C. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A5.5, Specification for Steel, Low -Alloy, Covered Arc Welding Electrodes.
2. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and erection drawings to include member marks, number, type,
location, and spacing of members; details of bridging, extended ends and attachment at
am 12/20/O1 05200 -1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
supports.
1. Reproduction of Contract Drawings shall not be used for drawings.
B. Design: Indicate on shop drawings where special designs have been provided, including a
detailed, written description of magnitudes and locations of loads for each special design
loading condition.
C. Submit Certified mill test reports showing compliance with requirements of ASTM and SJI
Specifications.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Member of Steel Joist Institute
2. Fabrications, handling, erection and connections of steel joists shall be in accordance
with latest editions of SJI Specifications.
B. Welding Operator Qualifications:
1. Certified within 6 months previous
1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Mark pieces for identification during erection.
B. Deliver to site in proper sequence for erection.
C. Store materials above ground; prevent corrosion, warpage and twisting.
D. Do not bend or damage members during handling.
E. Take precautions breaking bundles to prevent damage to materials and injury to workmen.
1.7 DESIGN
A. Joists shall be designed by the fabricator in accordance with the specifications of the Steel Joist
Institute.
B. Where loads are shown or specified, members shall be designed for the specific loading
conditions required.
C. Where loadings are not shown, members shall be designed for the maximum allowable load
indicated in the standard load tables published by the Steel Joist Institute for the member
designation and spans required.
D. Fabricator shall determine and include in the work any and all special bridging or temporary
bracing required for proper erection or final assembly of the work.
12/20/01 05200 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel bridging, bearing plates and wall anchors: comply with ASTM A36.
B. Bolts: comply with ASTM A307.
C. Welding Electrodes: comply with AWS A5.5, E70 or submerged arc Grade SAW-2.
D. Steel Joists: comply with SJI Specifications.
1. Provide double angle bottom chords.
2. Provide extended ends where required.
E. Paint: rust -inhibiting primer; comply with SJI Specifications; paint and methods of paint
application shall comply with applicable air -quality and environmental regulations.
2.2, FABRICATION
A. Design and fabricate joists in accordance with SJI Specifications.
B. Accessories: Provide required sag rods, bridging, extended bottom chords and top chords, side
wall anchors, wall connectorl, headers, and ceiling extensions.
C. Shop Paint: After fabrication, clean joists, bridging, and anchors of rust, mill scale, dirt and
other foreign material. Remove grease and oil with solvents. Apply one coat of paint, minimum
thickness of 2 mils.
1. Paint coat for steel exposed in crawl space not less than 3.0 mils thick.
D. Extended Ends: Design to cantilever from the main span of the joist, provide load capacity at
least equal to that of joist.
E. Provide horizontal and X-bridging as required, minimum bridging requirements in accordance
with SJI Specifications.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection
1. Inspect fabricating and welding procedures in shop.
2. Visually inspect shop welds.
3. Inspect painting procedures.
4. Check material certifications in shop.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
UM
12/20/01 05200 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.1 ERECTION
A. Replace joists damaged by bending or warping during handling and erection.
B. Bridging shall comply with SJI Specifications and with details on Drawings.
C. Minimum bearing and anchorage shall comply with SJI Specifications and Drawings as related
to particular type of support.
D. Provide erection bolts for joists located on column centerlines.
E. Set joists to lines, levels, and spacing as indicated. Provide bearing plates as indicated or
required to carry out structural requirements. Execute general handling and erection in
accordance with SJI Specifications.
F. Permanently fasten joists to supports and install bridging and anchorage before any construction
loads, other than workmen, are placed on joists.
G. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
H. Properly store and protect electrodes to prevent deterioration or damage by moisture and
climate.
I. After erection, touch up field connections and abraded places of shop paint with same kind of
paint as shop coat. ,
J. Do not weld bottom chords of joists to supports until full dead load of roof is applied. Brace
joists and supporting structure for safety and stability until permanent bracing structures are in
place.
K. Do not use bridging to support conduit, piping, duct work, or other equipment. ^
L. Do not attach hangers supporting loads in excess of 100 pounds directly to joist chords. See
details on Structural Drawings for methods of supporting loads in excess of 100 pounds on -
joists.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Touch-up abrasions and welds with shop paint.
B. Correct or replace damaged materials at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection
1. Inspect condition of materials after erection.
2. Inspect connections to supporting structure.
12/20/01 05200 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A
END OF SECTION 05200
P
12/20/O1 05200 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 05300 - METAL ROOF DECK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal Roof Deck
2. Sheet Metal Accessories
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05200 - Steel Joists
2. Section 05100 - Structural Steel
3. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Fabrications
1.3 REFERENCES (LATEST EDITION AVAILABLE)
A. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck.
B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel
Structural Members.
C. American Welding Society:
1. AWS AS. 1, Specification for Steel, Carbon, Covered Arc Welding Electrodes.
2. AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A90, Standard Tests for Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Iron or
Steel Articles.
2. ASTM A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -
Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process.
3. ASTM A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic -
Coated by the Hot -Dip Process.
4. ASTM A1008, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High -Strength Low -Allow and High -Strength Low -Allow with Improved Formability.
5. ASTM B117, Standard Salt Spray (Fog) Test.
6. ASTM D714, Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints.
7. ASTM D1654, Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments.
12/20/O1 05300 -1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
0
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1. Bulletin of Research No. 52, Development of Apparatus and Test Method for
Determining Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.
2. Standard UL580, Tests for Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for review prior to fabrication or installation of
materials.
1. Indicate erection layouts, details, steel deck dimensions and section properties, and
installation instructions. Show supporting framing, lengths and markings of deck to
correspond with sequence and procedure to be followed in installing and fastening deck.
Show methods of fastening deck and installing accessories. Show locations, types and
sequence of welded connections for deck units.
2. Indicate welds using standard AWS welding symbols. Show size and number of holes to
be cut in deck. .
3. Indicate allowable diaphragm shear capacity corresponding to pattern and type of
connections provided.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications
1. Member Steel Deck Institute.
2. Minimum 5 year's experience.
B. Erector Qualifications
1. Minimum 5 year's experience.
2. Welders certified within previous 6 months.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver deck in bundles. If required, store on pallets above the ground with one end elevated to
provide drainage. Protect from corrosion and damage. Rusted, crimped or bent deck shall not
be installed in the work.
B. Do not store materials on installed deck before connecting to supporting structure.
C. Do not overload deck during construction by workmen or storage of materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
• 2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Grades:
12/20/01 05300 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. ASTM A1008 for painted deck.
2. ASTM A653 for galvanized deck.
B. Minimum yield strength for steel deck: 33 ksi.
C. Miscellaneous steel plates at vents, sump pans, and closures: 20 gage material.
D. Welding Rods: AWS A5.1, E70
E. Weld Washers: 14 gage, with 7/8ths diameter hole at center.
F. Galvanizing:
1. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A924 with a minimum coating class of G60 (Z180)
as defined in A653.
2.- Wiped zinc coating, 0.2 to 0.5 ounces per square foot, complying with ASTM A653.
3. Comply with ASTM A90 and A239 for weight and uniformity.
G. Paint:
1. Resistant to solvents used to clean deck.
2. Resistant to solvents in foamed -in -place insulation.
3. Resistant to corrosion and blistering in accordance with ASTM B117, D714 and D1654.
2.2• MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Metal deck units shall comply with the Specifications of the Steel Deck Institute.
B. Design units for required spans and conditions of continuity.
C. Stresses under construction loads, gravity loads and wind loading shall not exceed
recommendations of the Steel Deck Institute.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in lengths as long as practical and piece -mark bundles for identification during
erection. Fabricate in lengths to provide a minimum of a 3 span condition.
B. Painting:
1. Thoroughly clean deck and coat both sides with phosphate prior to painting.
2. Apply paint .45 mils minimum thickness to both sides of deck and heat cure for tough,
abrasion -resistant finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not lay deck units in place until supporting structure is secured in place and final
12/20/01 05300 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
connections are complete.
r
B.
Layout deck units in accordance with shop drawings, do not stretch or bend units.
C.
Overlap ends a minimum of 2 inches. Interlock side laps as shown on shop drawings.
D.
Connections:
1. Anchor deck to supporting steel with full -fusion puddle welds. Use weld washers where
required.
2. Connect side laps with screws or welds.
r^°
3. Side lap connections of interlocking edges shall be made by button -punching with a
specially designed crimping tool.
E.
Weld metal fillers and closure pieces in place.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Laboratory Testing and Inspection:
1. Inspect condition of deck units for damage and corrosion.
2. Inspect connections of deck to structure and at side laps.
3.3-
ADJUSTING
A.
Touch-up scarred areas on both sides of deck including welds, rust spots and abrasions by wire -
brushing and painting with shop paint.
B.
Repair blow -holes at welds with 18 gage plates welded in place. Replace entire sections of
deck where holes cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
3.4
HANGERS FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A.
Do not attach hangers for ceiling grids, ductwork, and mechanical piping directly to metal roof
deck.
END OF SECTION 05300
12/20/O1
05300 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSUEM
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.
Wood framing.
2.
Wood supports.
3.
Wood blocking.
4.
Wood cants.
5.
Wood nailers.
6.
Wood furring.
7.
Wood grounds.
8.
Wood sheathing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product indicated.
1. Include data for wood -preservative and fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements.
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
12/20/01 06100 - 1 -
SILENT WINGS MUSUEM
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
n end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade,
compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood),
except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from
liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
B. Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and
15 percent for plywood.
C. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an. -inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade.
4. Wood floor plates thaVare installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
2.4 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply
with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify
fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber
Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated
wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood.
2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated.
r-
2.5 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with NIST PS 20 except where actual
sizes are specifically required.
Poll
�.. 12/20/01 06100 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSUEM
B. Miscellaneous lumber: Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary for the support of work
specifically specified in other sections; whether or not specifically indicated, including not not
limited to blocking, nailers, etc.:
1. Moisture content: 19% maximum (S-dry).
2. Lumber S4S, No. 2 or standard grade.
3. Boards: Construction, 2 common, or No. 2 grade.
4.
2.6 TIMBER AND MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1. • Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2: Blocking.
3. Cants.
4. Nailers.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of
the following species and grades:
I . Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.
3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
5.
2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged,
fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
thick.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners:
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 1531A 153M.
2. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
12/20/01 06100 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSUEM
3.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
washers.
B. Metal
Framing Anchors: Made from hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 6531A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
C. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
d. KC Metals Products, Inc.
e. Silver Metal Products, Inc.
f. Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc.
g. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
h. United Steel Products Company, Inc.
2.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show
compliance of metal framing anchors; for application indicated, with building code in
.�.
effect for Project.
3.
Allowable Design Loads: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published
values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber
and plywood.
C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
•- 1. CABO NER-272 for power -driven fasteners.
2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
D. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and
fill holes with wood filler.
12/20/01 06100 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSUEM
E. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 06100
r
12/20/01
06100 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
, A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
l . - Wood cabinets.
2. Plastic -laminate cabinets.
3. Wood countertops.
4. Plastic -laminate countertops.
5. Interior ornamental work.
6. Shop finishing interior woodwork.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in,other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural
woodwork.
12/20/01 06402 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material
indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following:
1. Wood -veneer -faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for
each species and cut. Include at least one face -veneer seam and finish as specified.
2. Lumber and panel products with shop -applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in for lumber and 8
by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with [1/2 of] exposed surface
finished.
3. Plastic -laminate -clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish.
4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses, of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An'experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificate indicating that woodwork
complies with requirements of grades specified.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified
in "Project Conditions" Article.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
12/20/01 06402 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
..b
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where. woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
-- dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, 'furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White oak, rift sawn or cut.
C. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1. Hardboard: ARA A135.4.
2. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA 1HP-1.
D. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or
medium -density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of
thermally fused, melamine -impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
E. Clear Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1,
Quality q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure
decorative laminates by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
12/20/01 06402 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
b. Laminart.
C. Pioneer Plastics Corp.
d. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
G. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: contact cement.
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets."
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of
opening. Acceptable manufacturers: Julius Blum, Hafele America, Stanley Commercial.
C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches long, clear anodized aluminum. Acceptable
manufacturers: Epco, Stanley Commercial, Trimco, H.B. Ives..
D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
'E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: Steel, recessed mounted, adjustable on %" centers,
zinc plated, clip type supports. Acceptable manufacturers: Knape & Vogt, Capitol Hardware.
i
F. Drawer Slides: Side -mounted, full -extension, zinc -plated steel drawer slides with steel ball
bearings, BHMA Al56.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads:
1. Box Drawer Slides: 75 lbf..
G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
H. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2 inch OD, black, molded -plastic grommets
and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements; acceptable manufacturers: Doug
Mockett and Co., Inc., Hafele America.
I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln -dried to
less than 15 percent moisture content.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
12/20/01 06402 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide premium grade interior woodwork complying with the
referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
-� areas.
C. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
1. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
F. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and in
GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.
2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species and Cut: White oak, rift sawn or cut.
2.6 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with WIC Section 14.
C. Grade: Custom.
D. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated.
E. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: White oak, rift sawn.
2.7 PLASTIC -LAMINATE CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets.
12/20/01 06402 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Grade: Custom.
C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated.
D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGL.
2. Postformed Surfaces: HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: VGS.
4. Edges: VGS
E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay.
3. ' Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Match Architect's sample.
2.8 PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative
laminate countertops.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Match Architect's sample.
E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
F. Core Material: Particleboard or medium -density fiberboard.
G. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue.
2.9 INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent -finished
architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated.
12/20/01 06402 - 6
0
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
r�
2.10 SHOP FINISHING
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section_ I500, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B.' General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section,
regardless of whether shop applied or applied `after" installation. The extent to which the final
finish is applied at fabrication shop is Contractor's option, except shop apply at least the prime
coat before delivery.
C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system,
staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
�., 1. Grade: Custom.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400
mm)•
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
E. Fire -Retardant -Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire -retardant -treated wood to comply
with recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer, including those for adhesives used
to install woodwork.
�, 12/20/01 06402 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and
matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible.
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base, if finished.
2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 118 inch
in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. with toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind
wall finish.
• I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
and to walls with adhesive.
2. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
J. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified
finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only
sealer/prime coats were applied in shop.
K. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06402
12/20/01 06402 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
'^ 1. Concealed building insulation.
2. Vapor retarders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Product test reports.
C. Research/evaluation reports.
IS QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test -
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84
for surface -burning characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS.
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards and, for preformed units, in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Wall insulation shall achieve a
minimum R value of 11. Roof insulation shall achieve a minimum R value of 20.
B. Isocyanurate foam core with nailable base: FM Approve, Class 1, with maximum flame -spread
and smoke -developed indices of 50 and 205, respectively, according to ASTM E84. Nailable
base with Class A (0-25) flame spread rating according to ASTM E84. Slag -Wool -/Rock -Wool -
Fiber Board Insulation:
C. Mineral -fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass:
12/20/01 07210 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Faced fiber glass batt Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; Category 1, faced
with foil-scrim-kraft, foil -scrim, or foil -scrim -polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on
one face.
2.2 UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: E-96, 10 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of
0.01 gr/sq ft/hr. _
B. Vapor -Retarder Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions
applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to
envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with
insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
;B. For roof insulation, install fasteners into ridge of metal roof deck. Fasteners shall not penetrate
or extend beyond the bottom surface of the metal roof deck.
C. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method
indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is
indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide
permanent placement and support of units.
1. Seal joints between closed -cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive,
mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place.
Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant.
2. Set vapor -retarder -faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
a. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
3. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm) support
unlaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to
flanges of metal studs.
4. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window
frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold
insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of
dimension indicated between insulation and glass.
5. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire -containment system to prevent
insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire -containment system.
12/20/01 07210 - 2 -
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected
from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as
indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including
those filled with loose -fiber insulation.
1. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor -retarder tape according
to vapor -retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations
with vapor -retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid
substrates.
2. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer.
3. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor -retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarder.
4. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
work. Cover with vapor -retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
END OF SECTION 07210
i
0M 12/20/01 07210 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 07411 - METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Factory -formed and field -assembled, standing -seam metal roof panels.
2. Metal soffit panels.
3. Metal flashing.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind -Uplift Resistance: As required, comply with UL 580 for wind -uplift resistance class
indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses, based on testing according to ASTM E 330.
1. Wind Loads: Minimum design wind pressures as required by code.
i
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of metal roof panel and accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal roof panels, including plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, comers, anchorages, trim,
flashings, closures, metal soffits and soffit framing, and accessories.
2. Shop drawings shall be sealed and signed by a registered professional engineer.
C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating metal roof panel installation with
penetrations and roof -mounted items.
D. Samples: Two 12" long, full width for each exposed finish.
E. Material certificates.
F. Field quality -control inspection reports.
G. Product test reports.
H. Maintenance data.
12/20/01 07411 - 1
K
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:. An employer of workers -trained and authorized by manufacturer. The
installer shall have. the capability for the preparation of shop details and fabrication of all
flashings not furnished by the manufacturer.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
C. Manufacturer and Installer shall be the same as those required for the metal wall panels.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCTS
A. SSR-18 Standing seam metal roof as manufactured by Morin Corporation, West Coast plant, or
approved equal by:
A-
1. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
2. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
.. 3. MBCI; Div. of NCI Building Systems.
.� 2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; structural quality.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
2. Exposed finish: Kynar Fluorocarbon coating, color: Old Town Grey.
3. Panel thickness: 22 gauge.
12/20/01 07411 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
4. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
B. Panel Sealants: Sealant used with the 'roofing shall be applied between surfaces during
assembly with a minimum amount exposed on the completed installation:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with
release -paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel
manufacturer.
3. Butyl -Rubber -Based, Solvent -Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.3 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD -ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANELS
A. Refer to Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type H No. 30, asphalt -saturated organic felts.
2:5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
;A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot -dip galvanized zinc coating.
B. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). _
2. Depth: As indicated.
C. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-
inch- (13-mm-) wide flange.
1. Depth: As indicated.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare
steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-
mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end -welded studs, and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with
heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating.
1. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self -drilling or self -tapping 410 stainless or zinc -alloy steel
hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on
weather side of metal roof panels.
12/20/01 07411 - 3
�a
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
r
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws with hex washer
head.
�-+ 3. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets.
2.7 METAL ROOF PANELS
2.9 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
A. General: Provide factory -formed metal soffit panels designed to be field assembled by lapping
and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to
supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight
installation.
M B. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide 22 gauge F12-1 or F16-1 as manufactured by Morin Company,
West Coast plant or approved equal Metal soffit panels shall be by same manufacturer and
installer as metal roof.
1. Finish: Match finish and color of metal roof panels.
2:9 ACCESSORIES
A. , Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips; and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof
panels.
2. Clips: Minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, stainless -steel panel clips designed to
withstand negative -load requirements.
3. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250-inch- (0.64-mm-)
thick, stainless -steel or nylon -coated aluminum sheet.
4. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed -cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure
strips; pre-cut or pre -molded to. match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips
where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick, metallic -coated steel sheet.
Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae,
and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
C. Gutters: Formed "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches
(900 mm) o.c., fabricated from same metal as 'gutters. Provide bronze, copper, or aluminum
wire ball strainers at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels.
�,. 12/20/01 07411 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick, metallic -coated steel sheet; in 10-
foot- (3-m-) long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Finish downspouts to
match metal roof panels.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
C. Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory -installed captive gaskets or
separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal -to -metal contact, in a manner that
will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated.
E. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Installer shall verify that the structure is ready to receive the work.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment on insulation under metal roof panels. Use
adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle
fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated
or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the
Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
3. Provide metal closures as recommended by panel manufacturer..
12/20/01 07411 - 5 --
P"
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
4. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of
all openings. Fasten with self -tapping screws.
5. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition.
6. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the
material.
7. Fasteners through the insulation into the metal deck shall be laid out so that the fasteners
are attached into the roof deck in the deck's ridges, not in the flat surfaces exposed to
view below.
B. Fasteners:
1. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and
galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
2. For weather tightness, screws shall_ have, separate washers with hot bonded neoprene
faces and pop rivets shall be set in wet sealant. Exposed fasteners shall be a minimum
#14 size screw or 3/8" diameter rivet.
3. Length of Fasteners: The fastener shall be attached through to the ridge of the metal deck
and shall not extend beyond the underside of the metal deck.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will, contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by
applying rubberized -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
i
1. Coat back side of aluminum roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will
contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies.
1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3.4 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD -ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF
PANELS
A. Board Insulation: Extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover entire roof. Comply with
installation requirements in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
�,. 3.5 FIELD -ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Standing -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at
.�, each standing -seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self -tapping fasteners.
12/20/01 07411 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Clips shall be designed to allow for expansion and contraction of the roof relative to the
structure.
3. Anchor clips shall be one piece or two piece units design to be determined by wind uplift
resistance.
B. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels
perpendicular to support framing.
1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at
perimeter of all openings.
3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items.
2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions,
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal — -
roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07411
12/20/01 07411 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 07412
METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1— GENERAL
1.1 Summary: All material, labor and equipment to complete the metal walls which include all
necessary'trim, flashing, gutter, downspouts, copings and accessories.
..
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS: Current editions of each apply.
A. Steel Association
1. American Institute of Steel Construction — Code of Standard Practice
2. American Iron & Steel Institute — AISI Light Gage Cold -Formed Design
B. American Society of Testing Material
1. A-792 General Requirements For Aluminum -Zinc Coated Sheet
2. B-209 Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
3. A-446 Steel Classification
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors Association
1. Construction Details
D. Metal Construction Association
1. Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines
E. Aluminum Association (AA)
1. Specification for Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction
.w,
1.3 _ SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawings must comply with the General Section of the specifications and must
be in a scale to clearly show all details. Include dimensions of fabricated work,
reference dimensions to structure, type, size and spacing of fasteners, metal thickness
and finish, layout showing panel length used in each area, erection sequence and
coordination required with other trades.
B. Submit with the drawings, copies of performance data of the panel, fastener and
v-
material samples or mock-up as required.
C. Submit samples for verification purposes of wall panels. Provide samples 12" long
by actual panel width. Provide finish, color and texture on metal color chips 2"x5".
Also provide samples of all clips, battens, fasteners, closures and other panel
accessories.
D. Prior to commencement of work, submit Manufacturer's Letter of Compliance
stating that all requirements of the specifications have been met or exceeded. Further
state that materials furnished are the same as those tested.
E. Submit calculations stamped by a Registered Engineer for all items furnished under
this section of the specifications.
MR 12/20/01 74124
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide Owner with a 2 year manufacturer's written warranty that material furnished
will meet or exceed the requirements in Referenced Standards as shown in this
section of the specification, and will not rupture, perforate or structurally fail.
B. Provide panel manufacturer's written warranty covering failure of the factory
applied exterior finish within a period of 20 years.
PART II — PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND INSTALLERS
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: The panel manufacturer shall have been in the
business as a panel manufacturer for at least 15 years. The manufacturer must
submit at least ten projects similar in size and scope prior to commencement of
work listing project name, location, scope and architect.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. The manufacturer shall authorize the installer and actual work shall be
supervised by personnel trained by the manufacture in the proper application
of the product. The Letter of Authorization must be included with the General
Contractor's Bid.
2. The installer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience with similar type
products. The installer must list five similar projects prior to commencement
of work. This list shall include project name, location, scope and architect.
C. Metal wall panel manufacturer and installer must be the same manufacturer and
installer utilized for the metal roof system under Division 7.
D. Approved Products:
1. Exterior preformed exposed fastener metal panel for horizontal application:
Morin Corporation, West Coast plant, type MR 36 panel or approved equal by: -�
a. Berridge Manufacturing
b. CENTRIA Architectural Systems
C. MCBI
2. Interior preformed concealed fastener metal panel for vertical application:
Morin Corporation, West Coast plant, type F24-1 panel or approved equal by
the same manufacturer as the exterior panel.
2.2 MATERIALS — PANEL AND SHEET
A. Wall panels shall be roll -formed from:
1. Galvalume 40 ksi pre -finished steel per ASTM A 792
2. Exterior horizontal panel thickness shall be a minimum of 18 ga steel.
12/20/01 7412-2 —
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. Interior vertical panel thickness shall be a minimum of 22 ga steel.
11
- B. Exposed Exterior Mitered/Welded Corners shall be fabricated from 0.050
aluminum substrate and coated with the same color and finish as the panel. These
corners shall be furnished in the same profile and width as the wall panels. Leg
length of each corner shall be 13". Mitered corners shall be factory welded and
factory finished.
C. Where indicated on the drawings, provide factory crimped panels to the required
radii.
D. Trim and flashing shall be fabricated from the same material type and finish as the
wall panels.
E. Fluorocarbon Coating/Finish:
1. Prepare galvalume steel coil in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to properly bond factory applied and baked on coating
systems.
`..
2. Apply manufacturers roll -coated chemically resistant primer to the exposed
side of the galvalume steel (aluminum) and dry to a minimum of 0.20 to 0.25
^'
mil.
3. Apply manufacturers roll -coated fluorocarbon finish top coat organically
pigmented with a minimum 70% Kynar 500 resins to primer at a dry film
thickness of a minimum of 0.70 to 0.90 mil. This coating is applied to the
exposed side o�the galvanized (galvalume or aluminum) sheet.
4. Apply manufacturers roll -coated polyester off-white primer to a dry thickness
to a minimum of 0.45 mil. This coating is applied to the backside of the
galvalume (or aluminum) sheet.
S. Color of the exterior finish of the exterior panels shall be Morin Corporation's
Old Town Grey.
6. Color of the exposed surface of the interior panels shall be Morin
Corporation's Regal White.
7. Finish coat shall provide a reflective specular gloss of 30 +/- when tested in
accordance with ASTM D523.
8. Durability: Provide coating that has been tested under normal range of
weathering conditions for a minimum of 20 years without significant peel,
blister, flake, chip, crack, or check in finish; without chalking in excess of No.
8 in accordance with ASTM D-659 and without fading in excess of 5 NBS
units.
2.3 PRODUCT PERFORMANCE
A. The wall panel system shall be designed to safely resist positive and negative loads
as required by authorities having jurisdiction with a maximum deflection of L/180.
Provide calculations by a Registered Engineer before commencing with the work.
B. Provide certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in
accordance with specified test methods as follows:
1. Air Infiltration: Provide wall system with an air infiltration rate of not more
then 0.06 cfm/sf of fixed wall area when tested in accordance with ASTM E-
331 at a static air pressure differential of 1.57 psf.
'" 12/20/01 7412-3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Water Penetration: Provide panel system with no uncontrolled water
penetration as defined in test method ASTM E-331 at an inward static pressure
differential of not less then 6.24 psf and not more than 12.0 psf.
2.4 MATERIALS — ACCESSORY ITEMS
A. Screws holding wall panels to the structure shall be stainless steel cadmium plated
self -tapping sheet metal screws into pre -drilled holes (or plated hardened steel self -
drilling screws).
B. For weathertightness, screws shall have washers with hot, bonded neoprene faces
and pop -rivets shall be set in wet sealant. Exposed fasteners shall be a minimum of
#14 size screw or 3/16" diameter pop -rivet. These fasteners shall be color matched
to the wall panels. Snap -on color caps shall not be used.
C. Precut profile closures shall be closed cell rubber RE-42 meeting ASTM D-1056
EPT. Metal profile closures, of the same material and color as the wall panel, shall
be placed in front of all rubber closures that have UV exposure.
D. Sealant used with the wall system shall be applied between surfaces with a
minimum amount of UV exposure on the complete installation.
1. Concealed sealant may be a non -curing, non -skinning butyl polyisobutylene or
butyl tape of sufficient thickness to make full contact with both surfaces. The
caulk must meet Federal Specification TT-C-1796A, Type I, Class A and the
tape must meet Federal Specification TT-C-1796A, Type II, Class B.
2. Exposed sealant shall be a curing type with excellent resistance to ultra -violet
radiation (sunlight), and will not crack, chalk or lose adhesion to the substrate
after exposure to 6,000 hours of weatherability testing and meet ASTM G-53
& C793. In addition, the sealant must meet Federal Specification TT-S-
00230C, Type II, Class A, Type NS, One Component, ASTM C-920 and be
USDA acceptable. The sealant must have excellent adhesion to Galvalume and
KYNAR 500 substrates. Color shall be as selected by architect. Color shall
match the metal wall panels. Apply in accordance with the sealant
manufacturer's recommendations.
3. All sealants shall have an indicated service life of 20 years.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. All fabrication shall be in accordance with Metal Construction Association
"Preformed Metal Wall Panel Guidelines".
B. Minimum bend radius shall be 3T or 1/8", whichever is greater, and all edges shall
have open hems for stiffness.
C. Insofar as possible, attachment fasteners shall be eliminated in favor of cleats or
clips.
PART III — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
12/20/01 7412-4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
i
W
A. Storage and Handling - Protections shall be provided during shipment, site storage
and installation to prevent mechanical abuse, stains, discoloration and corrosion.
The jobsite storage shall be in a clear dry area, out of direct contact with the
ground, under cover and sloped for drainage, protected from abuse by traffic and
from contamination by corrosive or staining materials. Stored materials and
unfinished work shall be secured against damage from wind. The general
contractor shall protect installed material from abuse from other trades.
B. Before installation of any panel .work the sub -contractor shall verify that the
structure is ready to receive their work. They shall check field dimensions and
alignment of the structural members to assure that the wall panel system can be
installed straight and true. The architect shall be notified of any conditions which
may adversely affect the appearance and performance of the installed wall and
work on that location will not proceed until resolved by the architect.
C. All work shall be installed in accordance with the approved layout drawings under
the direct supervision of an experienced sheet metal craftsman trained in the
installation of the product. Flashing and trim shall be installed in strict accord with
the recommended practice of AA; NRCA, SMACNA sheet metal manuals and
MCA preformed metal guidelines.
D. Completed work shall be plumb, true and free of dents. Panel ribs shall be on the
module indicated on the approved layout drawings and within the tolerance as set
forth in the Metal Construction Association "Preformed Metal Guidelines" and
• allowed by the actual construction dimensions. Excess sealant shall be removed.
Any panels that are.badly damaged and in the judgement of the architect cannot be
repaired shall be removed from the jobsite and replaced with acceptable material.
E. Panel lengths are to be continuous and only have lap joints where specifically
shown on the design drawings.
F. Upon completion of all work under this section of the specifications, the installing
contractor shall leave all panel material in a clean and workman like condition and
remove all excess material and equipment from the jobsite.
END OF SECTION
^- 12/20/01 7412-5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications:
1. Exterior structural and non-structural joint sealants.
2. Interior joint sealants..
3. Paving and sidewalk joint sealants.
4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-
resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS ;
A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. .
B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants
in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of
material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C. Compatibility and adhesion test reports.
D. Product certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single source responsibility:
1. Provide products for each sealant system from one manufacturer for entire Project.
2. Provide products from a single manufacturer to ensure material compatibility where
different sealant materials come in direct contact with one another.
3. Provide each sealant system as complete unit, including accessory items necessary for
proper function.
4. Applicator's Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer, specializing in applying
sealants, with documented experience on at least five projects of similar nature in past 5
years.
12/20/01 07920 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Exterior non-structural joints such as masonry control joints, window and door perimeters, and
curtainwalls: ASTM C920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Use M, A, and O:
1. Pecora "Dynatrol I".
2. Tremco "Dymonic".
3. Sika "IA".
B. Interior window and door perimeters, drywall, and other interior non-structural joints: ASTM C
834, one component acrylic latex, non -bleeding, non -sagging:
1. Pecora "AC-20".
2. Tremco "Acrylic Latex"
3. Sonnebome "Sonolac".
C. Exterior joints in paving, wlsk, and other exterior areas subject to foot and vehicular traffic, and
interior floor joints wider than 1_ inch: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Use T, M, and
O; two component urethane:
12/20101
07920 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Pecora "Urexspan NR-200".
2. Tremco "THC 900".
3. Sonneborne "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealer".
D. Interior floor joints up to 1 inch in width: ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade P; Class 25; Use T, M,
and O; self -leveling urethane:
1. Pecora "Urexspan NR-201 ". y
2. Sonneborne "Sonolastic SL1".
3. Sika "IA, SL".
E. Interior and exterior metal to metal joints: ASTM C 920: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Use NT,
A, and O; low modulus, moisture curing, single component silicone sealant:
1. Pecora "864".
2. Tremco "Spectrum 1".
P. Glass to glass, glass to metal, and metal to metal curtainwall joints: ASTM C 920; Type S;
Grade NS; Class 25; Use NT, G, A, and O. Medium modulus, single component, silicone
sealant:
1. Pecora "895"
2. Tremco "Spectrum 2".
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Dye -coating material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for
enhancing sealant adhesion to joint substrates. Non -staining to joint substrate beyond the
substrate surface.
B. Joint cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining, compatible with joint -forming materials, as
required by sealant manufacturer for substrates encountered.
C. Sealant Backing Bond Breaker Rod:
1. Non -staining material.
2. Compatible and non -adhering to sealant when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1087.
3. Compatible with sealant, joint substrates, primers, and other sealant backing bond
breaker.
4. Sealant manufacturer approved.
5. Sized and shaped to provide optimum performance and backing to sealant.
6. Preformed, compressible, resilient, non -extruding, cylinder -shaped plastic foam rods
compliant with ASTM D 1056 and D 1565.
7. Open cell polyurethane: Use not permitted unless required by sealant manufacturer.
12/20/01 07920 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
8. Closed cell polyethylene: Non absorbent to liquid water. Use in wall and ceiling joints
unless otherwise required by sealant manufacturer.
9. Unless otherwise required by sealant manufacturer, oversize rod to be larger than joint
width by following minimum amounts: Open cell polyethylene: 50%; Closed cell
polyethylene: 33 %; Reticulated polymeric: 25%.
D. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Filler:
l . Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing compliant with ASTM D 1056; shore hardness
of 70.
2. Compatible with sealant, joint substrates, primers, and other sealant backing bond
breakers.
3. Use sealant backing bond breaker to separate sealant from rod.
D. Sealant Backing Bond Breaker Tape: Pressure sensitive polyethylene tape or tetrafluorethylene
^° self-adhesive tape required by sealant manufacturer to suit application. Minimum thickness of
.275 mm (I I mils).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION joint sealants.
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant.
3.2 Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these m
a. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing ethods
to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint
sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by
vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air.
2. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete.
a. Clean nonporous surfaces with,chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint -sealant
manufacturer, based on joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
,,,, sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
OM 12/20/01 07920 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. �--
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
C. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant.movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Installation of Preformed Silicone -Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal
continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient
temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to
sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
END OF SECTION 07920
12/20/01 07920 - 5 --
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel doors and frames
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include door designation, type, level and model,
material description, label compliance, fire -resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings including Door Schedule. " Use same reference designations indicated on
Drawings, frame types, profiles, elevations, conditions at openings, methods and locations of
anchoring, hardware locations, and reinforcements for hardware, details of connections to
special constructions, and other custom features.
1:3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated. ,
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -
protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
2. Benchmark Commercial Doors; a division of General Products Co., Inc.
3. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company.
4. Copco Door Co.
5. Curries Company.
6. Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc.
7. Kewanee Corporation (The).
8. Mesker Door, Inc.
9. Pioneer Industries Inc.
10. Republic Builders Products.
11. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
12/20/01
08110 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or
ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness.
C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an
A40 (ZF120) zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness.
D. Electrolytic Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B
coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher -leveled standard of
flatness where used for face sheets.
2.3 DOORS
A. Interior Doors: Complying with SDI 110, ANSI 250.8, and ANSI A250.4.
1. Grade II, Heavy duty, 18 gage stretcher leveled sheets, style 3, seamless, hollow steel
construction.
B. Exterior Doors: Complying with SDI-110, ANSI A250.8, and ANSI A250.4.
1. Grade III, extra heavy duty, 16 gage stretcher leveled sheets, style 3, seamless, hollow
steel construction insulated.
2.4 FRAMES
A. General: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Frame Steel Sheet Thickness: 16 gage.
C. Door Silencers: Three silencers on single -door frames and two silencers on double -door
frames.
D. Plaster Guards: 0.016-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close
off interior of openings.
E. Supports and Anchors: Not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick zinc -coated steel sheet.
1. Masonry Wall Anchors: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire complying with
ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 51OM) may be used in place of steel sheet.
F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Zinc -coat items that are to be built
into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.
12/20/01 08110 - 2 -
rr.
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
M"
a"
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250,8 free from defects
including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
B. Exterior Doors: Fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic -coated steel sheet. Close top
and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-
inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, metallic -coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top
and bottom edges.
C. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of
nonflush units, from cold -rolled steel sheet.
D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying
with SDI standards.
E. Clearances for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads,
except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19
mm) at bottom.
F. Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80.
G. Door -Edge Profile: Square edge, unless beveled edge is indicated.
H. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117.
I. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door
hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable
requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame
preparation for hardware.
J. Frame Construction:
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless
face joints. Provide temporary spreader bars.
2.' Fabricate knock -down frames with mitered or coped corners, for field assembly.
3. Fabricate knock -down, drywall slip-on frames for in -place gypsum board partitions.
4. Provide terminated stops where indicated.
K. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface -applied hardware may be done at Project site.
L. Locate hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
M. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel sheet.
1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior
doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
2. Provide screw -applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other
panels in doors.
N. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated.
M 12/20/01 08110 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.6 FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory -applied coat of rust -inhibiting primer complying
with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.
B. Refer to Division 9 "Painting" for intermediate and final coats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces
smooth and undamaged.
1. Wall Anchors: Provide at least three anchors per jamb. For openings 90 inches (2286
mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs.
2. Gypsum Board Partitions: For in -place partitions, install knock -down, drywall slip-on
frames.
3. Fire -Rated Frames: Install according to NFPA 80.
B. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and
ANSI/DHI Al 15.IG.
1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80.
2. Smoke Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. C. After installation, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames and touch up prime coat
with compatible air -drying primer.
END OF SECTION 08110
12/20/01 08110 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes solid core doors as follows:
1. Doors with wood -veneer faces.
B. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking; mortises, holes, and cutouts and
other pertinent data.
C. Samples: For each face material and finish.
a
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality `Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards
Illustrated."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
2. Buell Door Company.
3. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.
4. VT Industries Inc.
5. Weyerhaeuser. Company.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Doors for Opaque Finish:
r" 12/20/01 08211 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Faces for Exterior Doors: Any closed -grain hardwood of mill option.
3. Faces for Interior Doors: Any closed -grain hardwood of mill option.
B. Exterior Doors:
1. Core: Either glued block or structural composite lumber.
2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
C. Interior Veneer -Faced Solid -Core Doors:
1. Core: Particleboard.
2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suii frame -opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire -rated
doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of
referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
D. Exterior Doors: Flash top of outswinging doors (with manufacturer's standard metal flashing).
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with one
coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard,
and as indicated.
B. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
END OF SECTION 08211
12/20/01 08211 - 2 ---
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
°"" A.
This Section includes the furnishing and' installation of access doors and panels where indicated
or noted in the construction drawings, or where required for the necessary operation and
maintenance of concealed equipment, and includes the following:
1. Access doors and frames.
7* B. _
Products Installed but Not Furnished Under this Section: Install access doors and panels
furnished by other trades under plumbing, fire protection, mechanical and electrical work where
'
necessary for operation and maintenance of concealed equipment, valves, cleanouts, controls,
,".
and other similar devices requiring access. Coordinate requirements with Divisions 15 and 16.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of access door indicated.
7 ' B..
Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating access door and frame installation
with ceiling support, ceiling -mounted items, and concealed Work above ceiling.
�..; C.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
D.
Schedule: Door and frame schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, construction
details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire -Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 and that are labeled and
listed by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction per test method indicated.
B.
Size and Location Verification:. Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed
to gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule. Obtain Architect's acceptance
of manufacturer's standard size units which may vary from sizes indicated.
PART 2
- PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
.�. 12/20/01
08311 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel: Coat to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for steel and iron
products and ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware.
B. Steel Sheet:
1. Hot -Rolled: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, and surface defects; pickled and oiled.
2. Cold -Rolled: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M,
Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness.
a. Electrolytic zinc -coated steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 591/A 591M,
Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator's option.
3. Electrolytic Zinc Coated: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), with Class C
coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting.
4. Metallic Coated: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with A60
(ZF180) zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 (Z180) mill-phosphatized zinc
coating; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness.
C. Paint:
1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal
modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664;
selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish
paint systems indicated, and capability to provide sound foundation for field -applied
topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
2. Shop Primer for Metallic -Coated Steel: Organic zinc -rich primer complying with SSPC-
Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat.
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Manufacturers: - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Bar -Co, Inc. Div.; Alfab, Inc.
2. Cesco Products.
3. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co.
4. J. L. Industries, Inc.
5. Karp Associates, Inc.
6. Milcor Limited Partnership.
7. Nystrom Building Products Co.
B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim:
1. Material: Prime -painted steel sheet.
2. Surface Type: Ceramic tile.
3. Locations: Walls.
4. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face
flange of frame.
12/20/01 08311 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide,
surface -mounted trim.
6. Hinges: Spring -loaded concealed pin type.
7. Latch: Screwdriver -operated cam latch.
C. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames:
1. Material: Prime -painted steel sheet.
2. Surface Type: Gypsum board
3. Locations: Walls and ceilings.
4. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding
finish surfaces.
-- 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with bead for type of surface
indicated.
6. Hinges: Spring -loaded concealed pin type.
7. Latch: Screwdriver operated cam latch.
2.3 FABRICATION
«A .
A. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic
. grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
B. Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on
aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor
door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as
locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
B. Install access doors with trimless frames flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to
receive finish material.
C. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
END OF SECTION 08311
12/20/01 08311 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior and interior aluminum -framed storefronts.
a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
2. Exterior and interior manual -swing aluminum doors.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum -framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding,
without failure, the effects of the following:
1. Structural loads.
2. Thermal movements.
3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads:
4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
5. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements, to glazing.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
f. Sealant failure.
g. Failure of operating units to function properly.
B. Structural -Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress in structural -sealant joints
of less than 20 psi (138 kPa).
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As required by local jurisdictions.
D. Deflection of Framing Members Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for
spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for
spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of
individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.
E. Structural -Test Performance: Systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
12/20/01 08411 - 1 _.
Fe
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
no
1.3
1. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems,
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.
F. Temperature Change (Range): Systems accommodate 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180
deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
G. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of systems of
0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static -
air -pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
H. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Systems do not evidence water penetration through
fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static -air -
pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 6.24
lbf/sq. ft.
A.
-B.
C.
D.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
I. Include certification by manufacturer that aluminum framing system complies with
performance requirements.
2. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
Product test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer and capable of preparation of data for
aluminum -framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis
of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 699 for
testing indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form' in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of aluminum -framed systems that do not comply with
requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.
12/20/01
08411 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
C. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
d. Failure of operating components to function properly.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes fail within specified five year warranty period.
Warranty does not include normal wearthering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Product: The design of the aluminum entrances and storefront is based upon
United States Aluminum Flush Front Series FF451. Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the comparable product by one of the following:
1. EFCO
2. Kawneer
3. Tubelite
4. Vistawall Architectural Products
5. YKK AP America, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded -aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Nonthermal.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: . Manufacturer's standard high -strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
12/20/01 08411 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
a C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural
movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing
compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to
^" match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible
deflection.
F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer
for joint type. _
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS.
A. Glazing: 1" insulated unit, tempered, as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded,
that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
2.5 DOORS
A. Doors: United States Aluminum Series 400 for manual swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-
(3.2-mm-) thick, extruded -aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten
corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that
incorporate concealed tie rods.
2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width with 9 1/2 —inch
bottom rail.
3. Glazing: ''/a" clear tempered glass, as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing".
4. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap -on, extruded -aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
2.6 DOOR HARDWARE
►.
A. General: Provide heavy-duty units in sizes and types recommended by entrance system and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated.\
„ , 12/20/01 08411 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Push/ Pull Bars: Radius PR032-PR031, 1 inch diameter, cast aluminum, clear anodized finish.
C. Cylinders: On exterior doors only, anufacturer's standard with clear anodized thumb -turn. D. Cylinder Keying: Master key system.
E. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard center pivots.
F. Door Closers: Manufacturer's standard, overhead concealed, ADA compliant.
G. Stops: At interior doors, manufacturer's standard, floor mounted.
H. Thresholds: Low-rise, ADA complaint. --
I. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
J. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior -door bottom sweep with concealed weather-
stripped insert..
2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum -framed systems, as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per
coat.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or —
grinding.
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,
and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
4. ' Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. —
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops). —
12/20/01 08411 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for
installing hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
F. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip
mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather "sweeps applied to door bottoms.
G. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and
tap for factory -installed hardware before applying finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: Class I, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
-3.1 INSTALLATION ;
A. General:
1. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
2. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
3. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
4. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within flaming
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing according to manufacturer's written instructions..
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp
or rack.
r 12/20/01 08411 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. —
1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight
closure. _
2. Field -Installed Hardware: Install surface -mounted hardware according to hardware
manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H. "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.
I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum -framed systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances: _.
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet
(3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. —
2. , Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch
(0.8 mm).
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch
(3 mm).
: END OF SECTION 08411
12/20/01 08411 - 7
r-
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 08711 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 Commercial door hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings.
C. Samples: For each exposed. finish.
D. Door Hardware Schedule: Organized into door hardware sets indicating type, style, function,
size, label, hand, manufacturer, fasteners, location, and finish of each door hardware item.
Include description of each electrified door hardware function, including sequence of operation.
E. Keying Schedule: Obtain from Owner and Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks.
F. Product certificates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualifications: Person who is or employs a qualified DHI Architectural Hardware
Consultant.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical
door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical
modifications, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
are acceptable.
C. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference
decisions into final keying schedule.
D. Keys: Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail.
E. Templates: • Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be
factory prepared for installing door hardware.
F. Standards: Comply with BHMA A156 series standards, Grade 1.
12/20/01 08711 - 1
s;
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
G. Certified Products: Provide door hardware that is listed in BHMA directory of certified
products.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Concealed Floor Closers: 5 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Product named for each door hardware item indicated in Door
Hardware Sets establishes the basis of design. Provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the manufacturers specified for each type of hardware item.
2.2 DOOR HARDWARE
A. Scheduled Door Hardware: :Provide door hardware according to indicated in door and frame
schedule. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated.
2.3 PIVOTS AND HINGES
A. Manufacturers:
L Hinges:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
b. Hager Companies (HAG).
C. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
B. General: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and
frames, provide only template -produced units.
C. Provide plain bearing hinges except at doors with closers where ball bearing hinges to be _
utilized. Pins to be flat button tip.
D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless -steel pin.
2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin; finish satin chromium plated.
3. Hinges for Fire -Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin, finish satin chromium plated.
12/20/01 08711 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
E. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that prevents removal of pin while door
is closed; for outswinging exterior doors.
F. Screws: Phillips flat -head screws; screw heads finished to match surface of hinges.
.�, 1. Metal Doors and Frames: Machine screws (drilled and tapped holes).
2. Wood Doors and Frames: Wood screws.
3. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Threaded -to -the -head wood screws.
2.4
A.
D.
;E.
2.5
2.6
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
Manufacturers:
1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
2. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
3. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).
4. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL).
Bored Lockset Design:. As scheduled.
Dummy Trim: Match LEVER lock trim and escutcheons.
Lock Throw: Comply with labeled fire door requirements.
Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
BOLTS
Fire -Rated Doors: Comply with labeled fire door requirements.
Flush Bolts: BHMA Grade 1, designed for mortising into door edge.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).
b. Glynn -Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).
C. Hager Companies (HAG).
d. Ives, H. B. (IVS).
e. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX).
f. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
EXIT DEVICES
Manufacturers:
1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
2. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
3. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD).
4. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL).
12/20/01 08711 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled for panic protection, based on testing according to
UL 305.
C. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire and panic
protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
2.7 OPERATING TRIM
A. Push -Pull Design: As illustrated on Drawings or as scheduled.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
b. Forms + Surfaces (FS).
C. Hager Companies (HAG).
d. HEWI, Inc. (HEW).
e. Ives, H. B. (IVS).
f. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
2.8 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).
b. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH).
C. Glynn -Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).
d. Hager Companies (HAG).
e. Ives, H. B. (IVS).
2.9 CLOSERS
A. Surface -Mounted Closers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
b. DORMA Door Controls Inc.; Member of The DORMA Group (DC).
C. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).
d. Norton Door Controls; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (NDC).
e. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX).
f. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
g. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL).
B. Size of Units: Factory -sized, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening
force.
2.10 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
12/20/01 08711 - 4 _
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
POM
PM
A. Protective Trim Units: Sized 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2
inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height scheduled or indicated. Fasten with
- = exposed machine or self -tapping screws.
1. Material: Metal.
a. Manufacturers:
1)
Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
2)
Hager Companies (HAG).
3)
Ives, H. B. (IVS).
4)
NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ).
5)
Pawling Corporation (PAW).
6)
Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
7)
Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM).
8)
Wilkinson Company, Inc. (WIL).
2. Material:
Plastic.
a. Manufacturers:
1)
Hager Companies (HAG).
2)
Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
3)
IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc. (IPC).
4)
Ives, H. B. (IVS).
• 5)
Koroseal Wall Protection Systems, Inc. (KWS).
6)
NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ).
7)
Pawling Corporation (PAW).
8)
Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
9)
Tepromark International, Inc. (TEP).
10)
Tri-Guards, Inc. (TG).
11)
Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM).
2.11 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Stops and Holders: Provide floor stops for doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled
or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall
stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. '
1. Manufacturers:
a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH).
b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
C. DORMA Door Controls Inc.; Member of The DORMA Group (DC).
d. Glynn -Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).
e. Hager Companies (HAG).
f. Ives, H. B. (IVS)
g. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).
h. Norton Door Controls; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (NDC).
i. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX).
j. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT).
-+-12/20/01 08711 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
k. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL).
B. Silencers for Door Frames: Neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled -in application to frame.
2.12 DOOR GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS
A. Door Gasketing: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide
smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated, scheduled, or required by
authorities having jurisdiction.. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and
elsewhere as indicated. Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.22.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Gasketing:
1) Hager Companies (HAG).
2) Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
3) Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
b. Door Bottoms:
1) Hager Companies (HAG).
2) Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
3) Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
2. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length
for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.
3. Smoke -Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and
labeled, based on testing according to UL 1784.
4. Fire -Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled, based on testing according to UL 1 OB or NFPA 252.
5. Sound -Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled, based on testing
according to ASTM E 1408.
6. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
B. Thresholds: Of type scheduled or indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
d. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX).
e. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).
2. Thresholds at fire rated door assemblies shall comply with NFPA 80.
3. Thresholds used at handicapped accessible door openings shall comply with the Texas
Accessibility Standards.
12/20/01 08711 - 6 —
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM _-
4. Thresholds used at exterior openings shall have serrated base edges to hold and retain
sealant.
2.13 CYLINDERS, KEYING, AND STRIKES
A. Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
1. Manufacturers:
u a. Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
2. Number of Pins: Five.
3. High -Security Grade: BHMA Grade 1A, listed and labeled as complying with UL 437
(Suffix A).
4. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; interchangeable
cores.
5. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.
,�. Provide 10 construction master keys.
a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores, as directed by Owner.
B. Keying System: Factory -registered keying system; master key system.
C. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved
Iip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set.
2.14 FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door
hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard
materials if different from specified standard.
B. Fasteners: Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware,
unless otherwise indicated. Provide steel machine or wood screws or steel through bolts for
fire -rated applications.
C. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.
D. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DIU WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
E. Finishes: Comply with BHMA Al56.18.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
•+ 12/20/01 08711 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled
fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting
performance. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of
wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.
B. Steel Door and Frame Preparation: Comply with DHI Al 15 series. Drill and tap doors and
frames for surface -applied hardware according to SDI 107.
C. Wood Door Preparation: Comply with DHI A115-W series.
D. Mounting Heights: Comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
E. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
1. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment and to comply with accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that from an open position of 70 deg rees, the door
will take at least three seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch,
measured to the leading edge of the door.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to
perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
Set No. I
Push/Pull Bar
Overhead Concealed Closer
Center Pivot Hinge
Low-rise threshold
Cylinder mortise lock w/
Thumbtum
Weatherstripping
Storefront Manufacturer, Specification Section 8411
cc
i
12/20/01 08711 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
Weather sweep
Set No. 2
Push/Pull Bar
Overhead Concealed Closer
Center Pivot Hinge
Low-rise threshold
Floor mounted stop
Weatherstripping
Weather sweep
Set No. 3
Latchset
Hinges
Wall bumper
Set No. 4
m
Storefront Manufacturer, Specification Section 8411
GG
u
Schlage AL50PD, Jupiter Lever, Finish 626.
1/1/2 pr Hager 4'/z" x 4'/z" five knuckle full mortise
Glynn -Johnson 25C, finish 26D
Latchset
Schlage AL80PD, Jupiter Lever, Finish 626.
Hinges
1/1/2 pr Hager 4'/z" x 4'/z" five knuckle full mortise
-Closer
LCN 4040 series mounted on push side, aluminum powder coat
Set No. 5
Latchset
Schlage AL50PD, Jupiter Lever, Finish 626.
Hinges
1/1/2 pr Hager 4 ''/z" x 4 ''/z" five knuckle full mortise
Closer
LCN 4040 series mounted on push side, aluminum powder coat
Floor stop
Glynn -Johnson FBI 3, finish 26D
Set No. 6
Latchset
Schlage AL53PD, Jupiter Lever, Finish 626
Deadbolt
Schlage B660 Single cylinder w/ thumbturn, Finish 626
Hinges
1/1/2 pr Hager 4 %s" x 4 %" five knuckle full mortise
Closer
LCN 4040 series mounted on push side, aluminum powder coat
Threshold
Pemko'/4" high saddle threshold, aluminum
Weatherstripping
Pemko, as specified
Door Gaskets
Pemko, as specified
Set No. 7
Latchset
Schlage ALTOS, Jupiter Lever, Finish 626.
Hinges
1/1/2 pr Hager 4'/z" x 4 %z" five knuckle full mortise
Wall bumper
Glynn -Johnson 25C, finish 26D
Set No. 8
Latchset Schlage AL40S, Jupiter Lever, Finish 626.
12/20/01 08711 - 9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
Hinges
Wall bumper
Set No. 9
Latchset
Hinges
Set No. 10
Push/Pull
Kick plate
Hinges
Closer
Floor stop
Set No. 11
each legD
Panic hardware
Hinges
Threshold
Weatherstripping
Door Gaskets
Set No. 12
s
1/1/2 pr Hager 4 %2" x 4 %2" five knuckle full mortise
Glynn -Johnson 25C, finish 26D
Schlage AL80PD, Jupiter Lever, Finish 626.
1/1/2 pr Hager 4 %2" x 4'/z" five knuckle full mortise
Hager 4" x 16" plates w/ 1/4" round pull at 10" oc, aluminum
Hager 8" x 34", aluminum
1/l/2 pr Hager 4 %2" x 41/2" five knuckle full mortise
LCN 4040 series mounted on pull side, aluminum powder coat
Glynn -Johnson FB 13, finish 26D
Von Duprin 9848-WDC-EO, finish 626
1/1/2 pr Hager 4'/2" x 4 %2" five knuckle full mortise
Pemko'/4" high saddle threshold, aluminum
Pemko, as specified
Pemko, as specified
Latchset
Schlage AL10S, Jupiter Lever, Finish 626.
Closer
LCN 4040 series mounted on push side, aluminum powder coat
Deadbolt
Schlage B662 Heavy Duty Double Cylinder, Finish 626
Flush bolt
Hager 281D &282 D; aluminum
Hinges
2 pr Hager 5" x 5" five knuckle full mortise (each leaf)
Astragal
Pemko Overlapping w/ silicone seal
Threshold
Pemko'/4" high saddle threshold, aluminum
Weatherstripping
Pemko, as specified
Door Gaskets
Pemko, as specified
Set No. 13
each lea
Panic hardware
Von Duprin CX9875 x 992NL x 07, finish 626
Power transfer hinge, power supply, and external alarm
Closer
LCN 4040 series mounted on push side, aluminum powder coat
Hinges
1/1/2 pr Hager 4 %2" x 41/2" five knuckle full mortise
Threshold
Pemko'/4" high saddle threshold, aluminum
Weatherstripping
Pemko, as specified
Door Gaskets
Pemko, as specified
END OF SECTION 08711
12/20/01 08711 - 10
SILENT WINGS MSUEUM
SECTION 08911 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes conventionally glazed aluminum curtain wall system.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems, including anchorage, capable of
withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following:
1. Structural loads as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly
distributed and concentrated live loads.
3. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
4. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements, to glazing.
r", d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
f. Sealant failure.
B. Structural -Test Performance: For systems, no material and deflection failures and permanent
deformation of structural members exceeding 0.2 percent of span when tested according to
ASTM E 330.
1. Test Pressure: 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures.
�^- C. Deflection of Framing Members:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm),
whichever is smaller.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and which reduces edge
clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than
1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
D. Temperature Change (Range): Systems accommodate 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180
deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
E. Air Infiltration: For systems, maximum air leakage
om 12/20/01 08911 - 1
SILENT WINGS MSUEUM
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer
detailing fabrication and assembly of glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Product test reports.
E. Field quality -control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer and capable of preparing data for glazed
aluminum curtain -wall systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering
analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this
Project.
;B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
i
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems that do not comply with
requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
C. Water leakage.
d. Failure of operating components to function normally.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes fail within specified five year warranty period.
Warranty does not include normal weathering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
12/20/01 08911 - 2 --
SILENT WINGS MSUEUM
A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems is based on
United States Aluminum Series 3250 Curtainwall.. Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:
l . EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer.
3. Tubelite, Inc.
4. Vistawall Architectural Products.
5. YKK AP America Inc.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant primer.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 611.
3. Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 570/A 570M.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high -strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
..� 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turn out from thermal and structural
movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. At movement joints, use slip joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type
recommended by manufacturer.
E. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation
tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: .Hot -dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable -iron, or steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
..........
.. F. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatble with adjacent materials.
G. Framing Gaskets: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
H. Framing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
12/20/01 08911 - 3
SILENT WINGS MSUEUM
2.3 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed -corner pressure -glazing system of black,
resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. ,Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
I . Sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
prevent glazing -to -glazing contact and to maintain required glazing edge clearances.
*.C. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding. i
D. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: Class 1, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
2. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
3. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
4. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
12/20/01 08911 - 4
w
SILENT WINGS MSUEUM
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install glazing as specified Division 8 Section "Glazing."
F. Install sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch, in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m).
2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m).
3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to
1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch
(13 to 25 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
C. Where surfaces#are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25 mm)
wide or greater, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/2 inch
(12.7 mm) over total length.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Water Spray Test: After the installation of minimum area of 75-feet- (23-m-) by-2-story glazed
aluminum curtain -wall system has been completed but before installation of interior finishes has
begun, test a 2-bay area of system designated by Architect according to AAMA 501.2.
1. Repair or remove work where test results indicate water penetration of systems.
2. Perform additional testing to determine resistance to water penetration of replaced or
additional work.
END OF SECTION 08911
12/20/01 08911 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
2. Tile backing panels.
3. Non -load -bearing steel framing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: 12" X 12" for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire -resistance ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with SIC ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to _
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Mockups: Before finishing gypsum board assemblies, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9
sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for the following applications:
a. Surfaces with texture finishes.
b. Surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes.
C. Surfaces indicated to receive textured paint finishes. —
2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL FRAMING
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Steel Framing, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
'-- 1. Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements.
a. Protective Coating:
1) Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot -dip
galvanized zinc coating.
B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing:
1. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-
mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
2. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch
(4.12-mm) diameter.
3. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of
0.0538 inch (1.37 mm), a minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, and in depth
indicated.
4. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
a. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with
minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm-) wide flange, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.
.C. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645; direct -hung system composed of
main beams and cross -furring members that interlock.
i
1. Products:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall.
b. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.
D. Partition and Soffit Framing:
1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
2._ Deep -Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep
flanges.
3. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with
minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, and in depth indicated.
a. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm) thick,
galvanized steel.
4. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to
reduce sound transmission. Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single
flange by a slotted leg (web) or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs.
6. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with
minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, and in depth indicated.
a. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum
bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
b. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641 /A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-
(1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter
wire.
7. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8
mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare metal thickness of
0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
8. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize
joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.
.B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
1. Regular Type: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered..
2. Type X: In thickness indicated with long edges tapered; location where required for fire -
resistive -rated assembly.
C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be
more flexible than standard regular -type panels of the same thickness, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick,
and with long edges tapered. Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.
D. Sag -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than
regular -type gypsum board, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply on
ceiling surfaces.
E. Foil -Backed Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, with core type and in thickness indicated, and
with long edges tapered.
F. Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M, with core type and in
thickness indicated.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 3 -
w,
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not received joint compound; use at
exposed panel edges or where indicated.
4. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated or as required.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim
accessories, and fasteners, use drying -type, all-purpose compound.
a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For fidal coat of Levels finish, use setting -type, sandable topping
compound.
6. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type,
sandable topping compounds.
2.5
A.
B.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products:
a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining,
gunnable, synthetic -rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce
airborne sound transmission.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Products:
a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro -Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.
b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98.
C. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
E. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
1. Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive -backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of
assembly.
2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES }
A. Primer. As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water -based, job -mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish
with flame -spread and smoke -developed indices of not more than 25 when tested according to —
ASTM E 84.
1. Products:
a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Perfect Spray.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Ceiling Spray Texture, QT Polystyrene.
2. Texture: Medium
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NON -LOAD -BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 5
r.
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Suspend ceiling hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects
within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension
system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
- - suspension system members, install supplemental ,suspension `members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
3. Attach hangers to structural members. Do not support ceilings from or attach hangers to
permanent metal forms, steel deck tabs, steel roof decks, ducts, pipes, or conduit.
4. Wire -tie furring channels to supports as required to comply with requirements for
assemblies indicated.
5. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members
to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track.
C. Partition and Soffit Framing:
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between
studs and wall.
2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings.
Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating
partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
3. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's
applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at
jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs)
at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or
roof structure above.
D. Z-Furring Members: Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members.
1. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch staples fabricated
from 0.0625-inch diameter, tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member.
E. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Building Insulation."
3.2 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION
A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
4. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of board.
5. On Z-fur ing members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
6. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill
screws.
7. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports
with screws.
B. Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water -Resistant .Gypsum Backing Board: Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut
other construction or penetrations.
3.3 FINISHING
A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to
framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Finishing Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control
joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
1. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not
intended for tape.
C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 940, for locations indicated:
1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies
and sound -rated assemblies.
2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners,
and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile.
3. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape,
fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface to
provide smooth, even surface for all exposed gypsum board assemblies.
4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.4 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a
uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin
application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture
finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite
these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately -remove droppings and
�= overspray to prevent damage according to texture finish manufacturer's written
recommendations.
END OF SECTION 09260
,K„
POO
�,, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Shaft enclosures.
2. Chase enclosures.
3. Stair enclosures.
4. Horizontal enclosures.
1.2 . SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft -wall assembly indicated.
B. Fire -Test -Response Reports:
1. Include data substantiating that elevator entrances and other items that penetrate each
gypsum board shaft -wall assembly do not negate fire -resistance rating.
C. Research/evaluation reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS .
A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies is based on
products named on Drawings by design designation of a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product
by one of the following:
1. National Gypsum Company.
2. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Comply with requirements of fire -resistance -rated assemblies indicated.
12/20/01 09265 - 1 —
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end -to -end butt
joints.
'^ 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft -wall assembly
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements.
1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot -dip galvanized coating.
C. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members and corner and end members and
for fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated.
1. Depth: As indicated.
2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated.
D. Track (Runner): Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long -leg length as standard with
manufacturer, but at least 2 inches (51 mm), in depth matching studs.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated
E. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long -leg length of 3 inches (76.2 mm),
in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 (0.84 mm) thick.
F. Gypsum Liner Panels: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels in 1-inch (25.4-mm) thickness
and with moisture -resistant paper faces.
G. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, core type as required by fire -resistance -rated assembly
indicated.
H. Water -Resistant, Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M, core type as required by fire -
resistance -rated assembly indicated.
I. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9, in manufacturer's standard thickness, but at least 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) thick.
J. Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" that comply with gypsum board shaft -wall
assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.
K. Gypsum Wallboard Joint -Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475 and as specified in Division 9
Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies."
L. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Joint -Reinforcing Materials: ASTM C 587 and as specified in
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plaster."
M. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Track (Runner) Fasteners: Power -driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand
loading conditions imposed on shaft -wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress
of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.
-•* 12/20/01 09265 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
O. Acoustical Sealant: As recommended by gypsum board shaft -wall assembly manufacturer for
application indicated.
P. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665 for Type I, unfaced mineral -fiber -blanket insulation
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from slag or rock
wool.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire -resistance -rated
assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following:
1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for applying and finishing panels.
B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft -wall assemblies; frame both sides of joints
with furring and other support.
C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies around openings and as
required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout Ioads of fixtures, equipment,
services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft -
wall assembly framing.
e
D. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire -resistance rating of shaft -wall assembly by installing
supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes
containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
E. Install control joints to maintain fire -resistance rating of assemblies.
END OF SECTION 09265
12/20/01 09265 - 3 _.
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
3. Crack -suppression membrane for thin -set tile installations.
p, .. 4. Stone thresholds.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints.
.C. Samples:
1. Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile and trim pieces.
2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type, composition, color, and finish of
tile.
3. Grout: Submit manufacturer's full range of standard and designated color samples for
each type for Architect's selection.
4. Crack suppression membrane: Submit 12" x 12" sample.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable provisions of following for design, materials, fabrication, and
installation of component parts: TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation by Tile Council
of America and ANSI Installation and Materials Specifications referenced in TCA handbook.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type and color tile material required from a single
source. Obtain setting and grouting materials from one manufacturer to ensure compatibility.
Obtain elastomeric membrane from sane manufacturer as setting material.
1. Installer Qualifications: Specializing in tile work having a minimum of five years
successful documented experience with work comparable to that required for this project.
PART2-PRODUCTS.
2.1 TILE PRODUCTS
' 12/20/01 09310 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Manufacturers:
1. American Olean; Div. of Dal -Tile International Corp.
2. Daltile; Div. of Dal -Tile International Inc.
3. Lone Star Ceramics Company.
B. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1,
"Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
C. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Factory- mounted flat tile as follows:
1. Composition: Porcelain.
2. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm).
3. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).
4. Products:
a. American Olean Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic #C-I 1 Alabaster
D. Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Factory -mounted flat tile as follows:
1. Composition: Porcelain.
2. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm).
3. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm)..
4. Products:
a. American Olean "Satinglo" 4D11 Gardenia (field); #D21 Cobalt, 4D30 Olive,
#D06 Satin Maize (border).
E. Ceramic Mosaic Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated
with sizes and coursing where applicable.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Crack -Suppression Membranes for Thin -Set Tile Installations: Manufacturer's standard
product that complies with ANSI A118.10:
1. Hydroment Ultra Set, Bostik Construction Products.
2. Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.
3. PRP 315, Mapei Corporation.
2.3 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bostik.
2. LATICRETE International Inc.
3. MAPEI Corporation.
4. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
12/20/01 09310 - 2 -�
rft
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B.
Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. -
1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
C.
Latex -Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1. Prepackaged dry -mortar mix containing dry additive to which only water must be added.
2. Prepackaged dry -mortar mix combined with liquid -latex additive.
3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
D.
Chemical -Resistant, Water -Cleanable, Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI Al 18.3.
E.
Water -Cleanable, Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
F.
Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I.
G.
Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI Al 18.6, color as indicated.
H.
Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI Al 18.6, color as indicated.
I.
Polymer -Modified Tile Grout: ANSI Al 18.7, color as indicated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that
comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement -based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile -setting materials.
C. Stone thresholds: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors..
D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints that does not change
color or appearance of grout.
PART 3 -.EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone, that are incompatible with tile -setting materials.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according
to tile -setting material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project
site before installing.
' 12/20/01 09310 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
E. Field -Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous
film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply , to types of setting and grouting materials and to
methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with
TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to
electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other. penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap
tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile
fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
Provide uniform joint widths; unless otherwise indicated.
F. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to
substrate.
1. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine that it is watertight.
H. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed
as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
J. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
' 12/20/01 09310 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior floor installation on crack -suppression membrane over concrete; thin -set mortar;
TCA F122.
l . Thin -Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer -modified unsanded grout.
3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior wall installation; thin -set mortar, over gypsum board; TCA W243.
1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex portland cement mortar.
` 2. Grout: Polymer -modified unsanded grout.
N END OF SECTION 09310
x
.� ' 12/20/01 09310 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include information for accessories and other
required components.
B. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required.
C. Informational submittals: Manufacturer's and installer's qualification data; Manufacturer's
instructions including applicable temperature range, floor moisture content range, special
procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
s
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C)] or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Properly prepare substrate prior to installation of floor tiles. Do not install floor tiles unless
substrate meets manufacturer's requirements for installation.
E. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
F. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of resilient flooring products
from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
G. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer with experience on at least five projects of
similar nature in past five years.
H. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
compounds for installation products.
I. Slip Resistance: ASTM D047, minimum static coefficient of friction; 0.6 for accessible routes;
0.8 for ramp.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Stonetex.
.B. Color and Pattern: #52128 Desert Dust, #52154 Leaf Green,#52132 Dusty Khaki, #52157 Clay
Red, 452156 Bamboo Yellow.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or
elw* blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
r.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
• 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 60651 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be- installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from _cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.
C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
nosings.
D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
F. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce
a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
G. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
r°^ 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
H. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a END OF SECTION 09651
�*+ RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wall base.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard -size Samples but not
less than 12 inches (306 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.
1:3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods: I
1. 48 hours before installation. --
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg Q.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; 4" Cove Base, 406 Olivine..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
12/20/01 09653 - 1 ~
r�
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
k resilient products.
*� B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where
they are to be installed.
+-� E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.
F. Job -Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without
producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends
occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to
produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an
inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave
back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
"", A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
12/20/01 09653 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
l . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09653
12/20/01 09653 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes carpet.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated:
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Seam locations.
2. Pattern type, repeat, location, direction, and starting point.
3. Pile direction.
4. Transition, and other accessory strips.
5. Transition details to other flooring materials.
C. Samples: For each for each carpet and exposed accessory and for each color and pattem
required.
D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation
Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS '
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
CARPET 09680 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet tile before installing these items.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Carpet Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace carpet
that does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet from unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10
percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
A. Products:
1. For flooring: Designweave
a. Pattern: Z6319 Lido
b. Color: 00324 Palm Desert
C. Fiber: Premsie SD Solution Dyed Nylon
d. Weight: 28 oz
2. For carpet wrapped benches: Designweave
a. Pattern and color: Monaco #650-979 Graphite
b. Weight: 32 oz
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. For Carpet on floors, comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue -Down."
B. For carpet on benches, attach as indicated.
C. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door
in closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Install pattern parallel to walls.
END OF SECTION 09680
CARPET 09680 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes carpet tile and installation.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Pattern of installation.
p.,
2. Pattern type, location, and direction.
3. Pile direction.
4. Insets and borders.
5. Transition and other accessory strips.
6. Transition details to other flooring materials.
.C.
Samples: For each for each carpet tile and exposed accessory and for each color and pattern
required.
1
D.
Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
E.
Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation
Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
,. A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
12/20/01 09681 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tile,
install carpet tile before installing these items.
D. Properly prepare substrate prior to the installation of carpet tiles. Do not proceed with
installation unless substrate meets manufacturer's requirements for installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace carpet
tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
I. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile from unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more
than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 5 sq yd.
i
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE
A. Products: As indicated in the drawings:
1. Interface "Sabi" #3958 Nature
2. Interface "Super Flor" #609178 Irish Coffee, #609023 Mid -Brown, #609162 Primavera.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules (Tiles)."
B. Install borders parallel to walls.
END OF SECTION 09681
12/20/01 09681 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, describing physical performance criteria and
composition on all finishing products.
B. Samples: For each type of finish -coat material indicated, provide two 12' x 12" samples
illustrating range of colors and textures selected for each surface finishing product scheduled.
1'.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
;A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample for each type of
coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.
1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
4. Accepted panel may remain as part of the Work.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with at least five years
experience.
C. Product labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label
analysis on label of containers.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
C. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).
12/20/01
09900 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
E. Do not store paints, thinners, and other flammable items inside the building. Store in approved
containers when not in actual use during the painting job. The fire hazard shall be kept to a
minimum. Furnish a temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity. Located
near flammable materials.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Quantity: 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each
material and color applied.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable building code for flame spread/ fuel contribution/ smoke development
rating requirements for finishes.
B. Comply with applicable, city, county, state, and federal requirements and ordinances regarding
maximum V.O.C. (Volatile Organic Compound) content of all coatings.
I
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Benjamin Moore
B. ICl/Devoe
C. P.P.G. Industries
D. Sherwin Williams
E. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be product of a single
manufacturer unless otherwise specified. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine,
and shellacs shall be first quality products of a reputable manufacturer.
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish -coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
12/20/01 09900 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
MPR
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating
types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will
` not be acceptable.
C. Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily
and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating with a good flow and brushing properties;
capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. Products containing zinc chromate,
,., steantium chromate pigment, and lead are prohibited.
D. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.3 PREPARATORY COATS
A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat
manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on
substrate indicated.
B. Exterior Primer: Exterior latex -based primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in
writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.
1. Ferrous -Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust -inhibitive metal primer.
2. Zinc -Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer.
3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate
indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.
C. Interior Primer: Interior latex -based primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in
writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.
1. Ferrous -Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust -inhibitive metal primer.
•-+ 2. Zinc -Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer.
3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate
indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.
2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Exterior Low -Luster Acrylic Paint:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcra$ Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Satin
Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2000 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Satin --Acrylic Latex.
4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-400 Series Pitt -Tech One Pack High Performance Waterborne Satin
DTM Industrial Enamels.
5. Sherwin-Williams; A 100 Exterior Latex Satin House & Trim Paint A82 Series.
2.5 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Interior Low -Luster Acrylic Enamel:
12/20/01 09900 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall &
Trim Enamel.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel.
4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg -Shell Enamel B20W200 Series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for inspection and acceptance of surfaces to be
painted.
B. Items not to be painted (considered pre-fmished):
1. Architectural finished metals such as aluminum, stainless steel, bronze, brass, or nickel
surfaces.
2. Factory finished surfaces.
3. Glazing, acoustical tile, resilient flooring, ceramic and quarry tile, and architectural
plastics.
4. Sealants specified by manufacturer to remain unpainted.
5. Sprinkler heads, fusible links, valve stems, etc.
C. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
D. Protection: Provide drop cloths, taping, and other means necessary to protect adjacent. and
surrounding surfaces and equipment from painting operations, Immediately clean up all spills
and drippings.
E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and _..
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
F. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release
agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to
improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
12/20/01 09900 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and
A-- according to SSPC-SP b/NACE No. 3, if required.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
,.. C. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -
brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
same primer as the shop coat.
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
G. Material Preparation:
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
H. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector
covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings
in these areas, as required, to`maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
I. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
J. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
... K. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
12/20/01 09900 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
L. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.
M. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint exposed mechanical ductwork and electrical conduits,
junction boxes, fire sprinkler lines, other exposed piping and conduits, etc..
N. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled.
O. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects
due to insufficient sealing.
P. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
Q. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,
orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paints
materials from Project site.
B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior low -luster acrylic paint.
B. Ferrous Metal:
12/20/01 09900 - 6 --
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
.w
P
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust -inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Exterior ferrous -metal primer (not required on shop -primed items).
b. Finish Coats: Exterior full -gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals.
C. Zinc -Coated Metal:
I . Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior full -gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals.
3.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
I . Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel.
B. Concrete Unit Masonry:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel.
C. Gypsum Board:
I . Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel.
D. Wood and Hardboard:
I . Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic -enamel and semigloss alkyd -enamel
finishes.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel.
E. Ferrous Metal:
l . Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel.
F. Zinc -Coated Metal:
12/20/01 09900 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
l . Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior zinc -coated metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel.
END OF SECTION 09912
0
12/20/01 09900 - 8 --
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plastic -laminate units as follows:
1. Toilet Enclosures: Floor anchored.
2. Urinal Screens: Wall hung.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and
relevant dimensions including requirements for barrier -free design and for Texas Accesssibility
Standards compiance..
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
2. Ampco.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.
5. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
6. Global Steel Products Corp.
7. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company.
B. Products based upon "Normandie" toilet compartments in plastic laminate as manufactured by
Sanymetal. Urinal screen products are based upon Type C wall hung bracket supported panels
�. in plastic laminate as manufactured by Sanymetal.
C. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS, 0.048-inch (1.2-mm) nominal thickness.
1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
12/20/01 10155 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Plastic -laminate facing sheets are pressure laminated to
core material without splices or joints in facings or cores. Laminate is applied to edges before
broad surfaces to seal edges and prevent laminate from being pried loose. Exposed core
material is sealed at cutouts to protect core from moisture.
1. Core Material: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 particleboard with 45-lb (20.4-kg) density.
2. Doors and Panels: Finished to not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
3. Pilasters: Provide construction to comply with the following:
a. Finished to not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 min) thick.
E. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304.
F. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, chrome -plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or
clear anodized aluminum.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware
and accessories.
1. Material: Chrome -plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear anodized
aluminum.
r
B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or
chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant -type heads.
Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip
galvanized or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. For toilet partitions- Floor -Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant
anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts
at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
B. For urinal screens- Wall -Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard polished and anodized
extruded aluminum alloy stirrup brackets, 3" long and provided with four holes for attachment
of screws to wall.
C. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in -swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out -swinging doors with a
minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible
to people with disabilities.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self -closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors
open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide
12/20/01 10155 - 2 --
r
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
0
i
units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at
compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized
to prevent door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out -swinging doors that complies with
accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides
of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. , Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less near top and
bottom of panel.
a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 10155
12/20/01 10155 - 3
SILETN WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 10801 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Toilet accessories.
2. Underlavatory guards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required. Use room designations indicated on Drawings.
1:3 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within 15 years from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Toilet Accessories:
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
b. Bradley Corporation.
C. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
2. Underlavatory Guards:
a. Brocar Products, Inc.
b. Truebro, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
12/20/01 10801 - 1 --
SILETN WINGS MUSEUM
I
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, ASTM B 16 (ASTM B.16M), or ASTM B 30 castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M, 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).
E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
F. Baked -Enamel Finish: Factory -applied, gloss -white, baked -acrylic -enamel coating.
G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with
silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with ES DD-
M-411.
H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication.
I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft
resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
J. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of 6 keys to Owner's representative.
s
2.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A. General: Refer to drawings for toilet accesssories required.
B. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Insulating Piping Coverings: White, antimicrobial, molded -vinyl covering for supply and
drain piping assemblies intended for use at accessible lavatories to prevent direct contact
with and burns from piping. Provide components as required for applications indicated
with flip tops at valves that allow service access without removing coverings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit
manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights
indicated.
1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to method in ASTM F 446.
P" 12/20/01 10801 - 2
SILETN WINGS MUSEUM
B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective
coatings.
END OF SECTION 10801
t
12/20/01 10801 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15000 - GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect are a part of these
specifications and shall be complied with in every respect; certain paragraphs included in this section
are supplemental to similar paragraphs in the above documents and are not intended to supersede those
paragraphs.
B. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for reading all sections of the specifications and reviewing all
drawings in order to understand thoroughly the nature of the entire project, the requirements for
w coordination among the several trades, and items in other sections which apply to mechanical and
electrical work.
1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. All contract documents shall be inspected by all bidders.
B. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, but the Contractor is warned to obtain the necessary
dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the Owner will be
considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on the drawings. Any
device or fixture roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied center -lines or as required by
good practice must be repositioned at no cost to the Owner.
i
C. The mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications are intended to be used together as
construction documents forming an integral part of the contract documents. They are intended to
define, not limit the required construction and delivery to the Owner of complete systems, in perfect
operating condition. Special items required may be shown or mentioned in either the drawings or the
specifications, or both; however, it is the intent of the Contract that these systems shall be constructed
completely and correctly and shall include all elements necessary to this end.
D. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor shall coordinate the work so that
interferences are avoided. Provide all necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly
install the work. Exposed work must be kept as close as possible to walls, ceilings, columns, etc., so
as to take up minimum amount of space; all offsets, fittings, etc., required shall be provided without
additional expense to the Owner.
E. Offsets, transitions and charges in direction in pipe and ducts shall be made as required to maintain
proper head room and pitch of graded lines. Provide all necessary traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc.,
required as a result of these offsets, transitions and changes in director.
F. Symbols for various elements and systems are shown on the drawings. Should there be any doubt
regarding the meaning or intent of the symbols used, an interpretation shall be obtained from the
Architect. The decision of the Architect shall be final.
G. It shall be the responsibility of each Contractor to examine the Contract Documents carefully before
submitting his bid, with particular attention to errors, omissions, conflicts with provisions of laws and
codes having jurisdiction, conflicts between drawings or drawings and specifications, and ambiguous
12/20/01 15000 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
definition of the extent of coverage between Contracts. Any such discrepancy shall be brought
immediately to the attention of the Architect for correction.
H. Should any of these errors, omissions, conflicts, or ambiguities exist, the Contractor shall have them
explained and adjusted in writing before signing the Contract or proceeding with the work; otherwise,
he shall, at his own expense, supply the proper materials and labor to make good any damage or
defects in his work or the results obtained therefrom, caused by such discrepancy.
I. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents, the greater quantity, the
better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the Contractor otherwise in
writing.
1.03 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE
A. The Contractor shall examine the site and all conditions thereon and/or therein. All conditions shall
be taken into consideration as they may affect the work. The Contractor shall be satisfied as to the
existing grades and the actual formation and soil condition. The lack of specific information on the
drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for taking into account all site conditions
before bidding.
1.04 PERMITS AND FEES
A. All necessary permits, licenses, and fees required to carry out the work shall be paid by the Contractor.
Also, all necessary certificates of approval which must be delivered to the Architect before final
acceptance of the work shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense.
1.05 CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATIONS
A. Each individual employed by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor or Contractor's Consultant shall
be experienced, qualified and competent to correctly perform all work required of him on this project
and to the satisfaction of the Architect.
B. Technical, supervisory and administrative personnel shall have knowledge of the engineering
principles involved in the design of the systems required by the Contract Documents and shall be
experienced and qualified in the correct interpretation of the requirements of these Documents to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any firm or individual not having the necessary experience and/or qualifications shall not be used on
this project.
1.06 CODES, ORDINANCES, AND STANDARDS
A. The Contractor is expected to know or to ascertain, in general and in detail, the requirements of all
Codes and Ordinances applicable top the construction and operation of the systems covered by this
Contract. He shall know or ascertain the rulings and interpretations of Code requirements being made
by all authorities having jurisdiction over the work to be performed by him.
B. In preparing his bid, the Contractor shall include the cost of all items and procedures necessary to
satisfy the requirements of all applicable Codes, Ordinance and Authorities, whether or not these are
specifically covered by the drawings and specifications. All cases of serious conflict or omission
12/20/01 15000 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
between the drawings, specifications and codes shall be brought to the Architect's attention as
hereinbefore specified. The Contractor shall carry -out his work and complete his construction as
required by applicable Codes and Ordinances and in such manner as to obtain approval of all
authorities whose approval is required.
C. The Contractor shall confine the storage of materials and the operation of his workmen to the limits
provided by law, ordinances, permits or as directed by the Architect.
A.. D. Except as modified by this specification, all work shall conform to the applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following standards:
1.
Local Codes, Ordinances and Amendments.
2.
All state ordinances, codes and amendments.
3.
UBC - 1997 Uniform Building Code.
4.
1997 International Plumbing Code
5.
1996 International Mechanical Code
6.
UFC - 1997 Uniform Fire Code
7.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
8.
AGA - American Gas Association.
9.
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
10.
ASTM - American Society Text Materials.
"^ 11.
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
12.
SBI - Steel Boiler Institute.
13.
NSF - National Sanitary Foundation.
14.
PDI - Plumbing Drainage Institute.
15.
UL - Underwriters' Laboratories.
16.
NEC - National Electrical Code.
17.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
18.
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
19.
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970.
20.
ARI - American Refrigeration Institute.
21.
MSS - Manufacturers Standard Society of Valve and Fittings Ind.
22.
ANSI - American National Standard Institute.
.., 23.
API - American Petroleum Institute.
24.
FM - Factory Mutual
1.07 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, machinery, equipment, and services necessary
to complete the mechanical work under this contract. All work shall be coordinated with the work of
other
trades so as to resolve conflicts without impeding job progress.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate work of this Division with that of other Divisions so that all systems,
�^^ equipment and other components of the building will be installed at the proper time, will fit the
available space, and will allow proper service access to those items requiring maintenance. This
means adequate access to all equipment, not just that installed under this Division.
a" 12/20/01 15000 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Any components of the Mechanical Systems which are installed without regard to the above shall be
removed and relocated as directed by the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Where various items of equipment and materials are specified and scheduled, the purpose is to define
the general type and quality level, not to set forth the exact trim required to fit the various types of
ceiling, wall or floor finishes. The Contractor shall provide materials which will fit properly the types
of finishes actually installed.
1.09 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A. It is the intent of these specifications to establish quality standards of materials and equipment
installed. Therefore, specific items are identified by manufacturer, trade name or catalog designation.
B. Where equipment is scheduled or noted on the drawings and other manufacturers are listed as equal, it
shall be the contractor's responsibility to assure dimensional and configuration compatibility. The
listing of more than one manufacturer as equal refers only to general standards of construction;
accessories and/or optional features shall be added as necessary to meet the standards of the equipment
scheduled.
C. Final decision as to whether or not a specific piece of equipment meets specifications shall rest with
the Architect.
D. Should the Contractor propose to furnish material and equipment other than specified, he shall submit
a written request for any or all substitutions to the Architect in conformance with other sections of
these specifications. Such request shall be alternatives to the original bid, and shall be submitted
complete with descriptive (manufacturer, brand name, catalog number, etc.) And technical data for all
items. The Contractor shall submit written answers to the following questions for each substitution
request.
l . Is the substitution of equal, greater or less quality than the design requirements?
2. If of less quality, what is the difference in value?
3. If of equal or better quality, what are the advantages to the Owner in accepting the
substitution at no change in Contract price?
4. Will the substitution meet physical space requirements?
E. Where such substitutions alter the design or space requirements indicated on the drawings, include all
items of cost for the revised design and include cost of all allied trades involved and for engineering
services associated therewith.
F. Acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitutions shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.
Ifrequested by the Architect, the Contractor shall submit for inspection samples ofboth the specified
and proposed substitute items.
G. In all cases where substitutions are permitted, the Contractor shall bear any extra cost of evaluating the
quality of the material and the equipment to be installed and of changing construction documents to
reflect such changes.
12/20/01 15000 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
H. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect detailed dimensioned shop Drawings covering all items of
electrical equipment. No equipment shall be put into manufacture or ordered until these Shop
Drawings or brochures have been approved by the Architect.
I. No substitutions will be considered or approvals given prior to bid time. Only written approvals will
be binding.
J. Should a substitution be accepted and subsequently proven unsatisfactory for service intended within
warranty period, replace this material or equipment with that as originally specified, or -as directed by
Architect.
1.10 ELECTRICAL
A. Furnish and install all electrical interlock, control and other wiring, not covered specifically under the
electrical plans and specifications, for proper operation and control of all equipment specified under
this division of the specifications.
B. Supervise and coordinate all electrical work in connection with mechanical system.
1.11 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels as required to service valves in piping, controls, items in duct, etc. No access
panels are to be located in public spaces
B. Access door shall be provided under this section of the specifications and installed under other
applicable sections. t
C. Access doors shall be equal to the following MILCOR types:
1. Style A door for acoustical tile.
2. Style B door for acoustical plaster.
3. Style K door for plastered surfaces.
4. Style M door for masonry, wallboard, etc.
5. Fire -rated door where required.
D. Size and type shall be as required for proper service and as directed by Architect.
E. Provide shop drawing clearly indicating location and size of all access doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 UTILITIES, REGULATIONS, METERS
A. Locations and elevations of utilities have been obtained from utility maps or to other sources and are
offered as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. The Contractor shall verify the
location and elevation of utilities and their relation to the work before entering into a contract.
fl
0 12/20/01 15000 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. The Contractor shall arrange with authorities and utility companies for service connections,
installation of meters and vaults, verifying locations and patching pavements, sidewalks, and other
surfaces, and restoring them to their original condition.
3.02 The Division 15 Contractor is responsible for all hoisting required for erecting, setting, and placement
of equipment and materials specified in the Division 15 Construction Documents.
END OF SECTION 15000
12/20/01 15000 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 15.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for mechanical installations.
The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the
requirements specified in Division 1:
1. Submittals.
2. Coordination drawings.
3. Record documents.
4. Maintenance marivals.
5. Rough -ins.
�- 6. Mechanical installations.
Cutting and patching.
'.B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 15 Section "ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT," for factory -installed motors, controllers, accessories, and connections.
2. Division 15 Section 'BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS," for
materials and methods common to the remainder of Division 15, plus general related
specifications including:
a. Access to mechanical installations.
b. Excavation for mechanical installations within the building boundaries, and from
building to utilities connections.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section "SUBMITTALS."
B. Increase, by the quantity listed below, the number of mechanical related shop drawings, product data,
and samples submitted, to allow for distribution as directed by the Architect plus one copy of each
submittal required, which will be retained by the Mechanical Engineer.
►"' 1. Shop Drawings - Initial Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black -line prints.
2. Shop Drawings - Final Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black -line prints.
3. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item.
r 4. Samples: 1 additional set.
C. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications.
P 12/20/01 15010 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.04 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT
COORDINATION," to a scale of 1/4"=F-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and
systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and
building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where
sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work,
including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:
1. Indicate the proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials. Include the
following:
a. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter
removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
C. Equipment connections and support details.
d. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
e. Fire -rated wall and floor penetrations.
f. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
g. Valve stem movement.
2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the
building during construction.
3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and
ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets,
light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling -mounted
items. ^-
1.05 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "PROJECT
CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed
conditions:
1. Ductwork mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of
dampers and other control devices; filters, boxes, and terminal units requiring periodic
maintenance or repair.
2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered,
concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers,
expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." Indicate actual inverts and
horizontal locations of underground piping.
3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.
4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.
5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.
B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the
project is located as specified in Division 1 Section "FIELD ENGINEERING" to record the locations
and invert elevations of underground installations.
12/20/01 15010 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.06 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT." In
addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment
P.e. items:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves,
W„ R engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of
replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and
normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency
instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions._
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,
compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.61 ROUGH -IN
A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual
equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough -in requirements.
3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials,
and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building
components.
roll 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured -in -place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
,.� efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning
prior to closing in the building.
6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and
equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
�, 12/20/01 15010 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead
utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including
coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the
Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic -
form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer
conflict to the Architect.
9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other —
building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.
10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,
with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible
location.
11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access
panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "ACCESS DOORS".
12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to
be installed at a specified slope.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section "CUTTING AND
PATCHING." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements
apply:
1. Protection of Installed{ Work: During cutting and patching operations,. protect adjacent
installations.
B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:
1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
2. Remove and replace defective Work.
3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
5. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide for
Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work
C. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be
removed.
D. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and
dirt to adjacent areas.
1. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching
existing materials and experienced installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials
and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.
2. Refer to Division 1 Section "DEFR- UTIONS AND STANDARDS" for definition of
"experienced Installer."
3. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the
original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials
12/20/01 15010 - 4 -
12/20/01
15010 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15030 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and
electrical connections are specified in Division 16.
1.02 SUMMARY A. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical
equipment are scheduled on the Drawings. `
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators
B. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
C. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
D. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches
E. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. A separate submittal of electrical is not required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and
other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as
required by the individual equipment specification sections.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MOTORS
A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more
detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications.
B. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads.
C. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in
the service factor range.
D. 2-speed motors shall have 2 separate windings on poly -phase motors.
E. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 deg.0 environment with maximum 50 deg.0 temperature rise for
continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).
12/20/01 15030 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
F. Starting capability: frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than
5 evenly time spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors.
G. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly -phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors.
H. Motor construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design "B", except
"C" where required for high starting torque.
I. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit
specific application.
J. Bearings:
1. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
2. Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular
maintenance.
3. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial
thrust in motor.
4. For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted.
K. Enclosure Type:
1. Open drip -proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located
during operation.
• 2. Guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building
occupants.
3. Weather protected Type I for outdoor use, Type 11 where not housed.
L. Each motor shall be protected by running overload protection. In general, this protection shall be
by means of three thermal type overload units located in the motor starter. Fractional horsepower
motors may be protected ny built-in thermal overload protection. Motors larger than 100
horsepower shall be equipped with bearing and winding temperature sensing devices suitable for
signaling and stopping motor at the starter.
M. Noise rating: "Quiet"
N. Efficiency: "Energy Efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance
with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher
efficiency than "average standard industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test
method B.
O. Nameplate: indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction,
special features and similar information.
2.02 STARTERS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, AND WIRING
A. Motor Starter Characteristics:
1. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet
"^ locations shall be NEMA 3R with conduit hubs, or units in hazardous locations which
shall have NEC proper class and division
2. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven
equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition.
12/20/01 15030 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Manual switches shall have:
1. Pilot lights and extra positions for multi -speed motors.
2. Overload protection: melting alloy type thermal overload relays.
C. Magnetic Starters:
1. Maintained contact push buttons and pilot lights, properly arranged for single speed or
multi -speed operation as indicated.
2. Trip -free thermal overload relays, each phase.
3. Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with
control requirements of Division-15 Controls sections.
4. Built-in 120 volts control circuit transformer, fused from line side, where service exceeds
240 volts.
5. Externally operated manual reset.
6. Under -voltage release or protection.
D. Motor connections:
1. Flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically indicated.
2.03 DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A. Fusible switches: fused, each phase; general duty; horsepower rated; non-teasible quick -make,
quick -break mechanism; dead front line side shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or
aluminum conductors; spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts;
hinged doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the "OPEN" position; arc quenchers;
capacity and characteristics as indicated. --
r
B. Non -fusible switches: for equipment 2 horsepower and smaller, shall be horsepower rated; toggle
switch type; quantity of poles and voltage rating as indicated. For equipment larger than 2
horsepower, switches shall be the same as fusible type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable).
END OF SECTION 15030
12/20/01 15030 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other
Division 15 Sections.
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Concrete base construction requirements.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings,
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
7. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
8. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in Division 15
Section "Mechanical Identification."
9. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations.
10. Field -fabricated metal equipment supports.
11. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.
12. Cutting and patching.
13. Touchup painting and finishing.
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe
and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces,
crawl spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples
include installations within unheated shelters.
12/20/01 15050 -1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and identification
materials and devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for
mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.
D. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment
and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space
requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and coordination of installations are
important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following:
1.
Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve -stem movement.
2.
Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
3.
Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties, including
space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
4.
Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
5.
Fire -rated wall, floor and roof penetrations.
6.
Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
7.
Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building during
construction.
8.
Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and
their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
9.
Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets, light
fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, and other ceiling -mounted items.
E. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASME A 13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions,
capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing
and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and
equipment spaces are increased. Additional costs shall be approved in advance by appropriate
Contract Modification for these increases. If minimum, energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment
are specified, equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, .AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage,
and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
12/20/01 15050 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete
and other structural components, as they are constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in
building.
E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and
controlling agencies.
'F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section
"Access Doors."
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are
applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Dielectric Unions:
a. Epco Sales Inc.
b. Hart Industries International, Inc.
C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
2. Dielectric Couplings:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
3. Metal, Flexible Connectors:
a. Central Sprink, Inc.
12/20/01
15050 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
b. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
C. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
d. Metraflex Co.
4. Rubber, Flexible Connectors:
a. General Rubber Corp.
b. Metraflex Co.
C. Red Valve Co., Inc.
d. Uniflex, Inc.
5. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Metraflex Co.
C. Thunderline/Link-Seal.
2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3. JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division IS piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel -flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10
percent lead content.
2. Alloy HB: Tin -antimony -silver -copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper -phosphorus alloys.
2. BAgl: Silver alloy.
12/20/01 15050 - 4
.•�
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G. Flanged, Ductile -Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AW WA C 110, rubber gasket, carbon -steel bolts
and nuts.
H. Couplings: Iron -body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain -end, pressure pipes.
I . Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent
galvanic action and stop corrosion.
Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld -neck end
types and matching piping system materials.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at
180 deg F.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe
connections. Include 125-psig minimum working -pressure rating, unless higher working pressure is
indicated, and ends according to the following:
l . 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Threaded.
2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
B. Bronze -Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze wire
braid. Include copper -tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to hose.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
"�" 12/20/01 15050 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep -pattern type if required to conceal
protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw.
a. Finish: Rough brass.
b. Finish: Polished chrome -plate.
4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set screw.
a. Finish: Rough brass. _
b. Finish: Polished chrome -plate.
5. Cast -Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
2.8 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as
referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application, selection
is Installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently
fastened to equipment.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and
power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible location.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with
recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4-inch-
high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4-inch-high letters for access door signs and similar
operational instructions.
1. Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior -type stenciling enamel; black, unless otherwise indicated;
either brushing grade or pressurized spray -can form and grade.
3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise
12/20/01 15050 - 6
A
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
indicated for piping systems, comply with ASME A13.1 for colors.
r m D. Snap -on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap on, color -coded,
complying with ASME A13.1.
E. Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper base, phenolic -resin -
laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine
subcore, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Fabricate in sizes required for message.
2. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment
identification.
3. Punch for mechanical fastening.
4. Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless -steel screws or contact -type permanent adhesive.
F. Plastic Equipment Markers: Color -coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following color code:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.
2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above.
6. For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
7. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as
possible: `
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
C. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and
rpm.
8. Size: Approximate 2-1/2 by inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2 by 6
inches for equipment.
G. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
mechanical identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and
wording indicated for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and
equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide
identification that indicates individual system number and service such as "Boiler No. 3," "Air
Supply No. 1H, or "Standpipe F12.
2.9 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, dry, hydraulic -cement grout, nonstaining,
t noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
""' 12/20/01 15050 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Design Mix: 5000-psig, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual
Division 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size
pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.
D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service
areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal
runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions,
and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome -Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome -plated
finish. Use split -casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and
chrome -plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set -screw or spring clips.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
12/20/01 15050 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other
wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below
floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.
3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS.
b. Steel, Sheet -Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6-inch NPS and larger, penetrating gypsum -
board partitions.
*�- C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe
insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for
materials.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral -curing silicone sealant, unless otherwise
indicated.
O. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
P. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Firestopping" for materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in
requirements.
.� S. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual
piping specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2 Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
' 12/20/01 15050 - 9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3 Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The
Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
4 Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
5 Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat
or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal
threading is specified.
C. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
6 Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and
Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding
operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
7 Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type,
and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble
• joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and
parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and
uniformly using torque wrench.
T. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
8 Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS or smaller threaded pipe connection.
9 Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
10 Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
11 Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials
of dissimilar metals.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in
diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Architect.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
12/20/01 15050 - 10
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.
F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to
equipment shafts if possible.
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of
now.
12 Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1.
13 Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot,
uninsulated piping.
14 Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, and
accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior nonconcealed
locations:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each
pipe at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious.
C. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter nonaccessible
enclosures.
• d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced at maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
congested areas of piping and equipment.
g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic -laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item
of mechanical equipment.
15 Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch-high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches, 1/2-inch-high lettering for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately
larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three -fourths of
size of principal lettering.
16 Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple
units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and
warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; or
provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing duct system service and direction of flow.
17 Location: In each space, if ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system,
locate signs near points where ducts enter into space and at maximum intervals of 50 feet.
D. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished construction.
r* 12/20/01 15050 - 11
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of
paint.
B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
18 Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic -enamel finish. Include finish coat over
enamel undercoat and primer.
19 Interior, Galvanized -Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic -enamel finish. Include two finish
coats over galvanized metal primer.
20 Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic -enamel finish. Include finish coat over
enamel undercoat and primer.
21 Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic -enamel finish. Include two finish coats over
rust -inhibitive metal primer.
22 Exterior, Galvanized -Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic -enamel finish. Include two finish
coats over galvanized metal primer.
23 Exterior, Ferrous. Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic -enamel finish. Include two finish coats
over rust -inhibitive metal primer,
C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory -applied finish.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 min) larger in both
directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for
anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psig (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive -strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. -
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel."
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.8 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and
other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
12/20/01 15050 - 12
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 15050
4
12/20/01 15050 - 13
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. _.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to
building structure.
2. Division 15 Sections on fire -suppression piping for fire -suppression pipe hangers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
.B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal -hanger
shield insert indicated.
B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section DC, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each _
multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to —
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
12/20/01 15060 -1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
.- A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Pipe Hangers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.
b. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
C. Grinnell Corp.
d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
e. National Pipe Hanger Corp.
f. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
2. Channel Support Systems:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corp.; Power -Strut Unit.
C. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
d. National Pipe Hanger Corp.
e. Unistrut Corp.
r—+ 3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts:
a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.
b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
C. Pipe Shields, Inc.
d. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
4. Powder -Actuated Fastener Systems:
a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp.
b. Hilti, Inc.
C. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory -fabricated components. Refer to
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support
types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field -applied
finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
r+� 12/20/01 15060 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive -strength insulation, encased in sheet
metal shield.
I. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
5. InsertLength: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Mechanical -Anchor fasteners: Insert -type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory -mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry,
hydraulic -cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and
exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps: For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16,
requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps: For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps: For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no
insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers: For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off -center closure for
hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid -Ring Hangers: For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1 /2 to
NPS 8.
12/20/01 15060 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
8.
Adjustable Band Hanger: For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9.
Adjustable Swivel -Ring Band Hangers: For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes,
NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
10.
Split Pipe -Ring with or without Turnbuckle -Adjustment Hangers: For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
11.
Extension Hinged or Two -Bolt Split Pipe Clamps: For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12.
U-Bolts: For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
13.
Clips: For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.
14.
Pipe Saddle Supports: For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
-• - 15.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles: For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base
stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U bolt to retain pipe.
16.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: For stanchion -type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron
floor flange.
17.
Single Pipe Rolls: For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
18.
Adjustable Roller Hangers: For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if
horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
19.
Complete Pipe Rolls: For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement
caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units: For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not
necessary.
21.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units: For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and
lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and
contraction.
D. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
"^ Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps: For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
+ 2.
Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamp: For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer
ends are required for riser clamps.
E. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles: For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises: For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles: For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable -Iron Sockets: For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments.
5. Steel 'Weldless Eye Nuts: For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts: For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from
concrete ceiling.
2. Top -Beam C-Clamps: For use under roof installations with bar joist construction to attach to
top flange of structural shape.
e• 12/20/01 15060 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
G
H.
12/20/01
3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps: For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center -Beam Clamps: For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments: For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and
rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps: For structural shapes.
7. Top -Beam Clamps: For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge.
8. Side -Beam Clamps: For bottom of steel I -beams.
9. Steel -Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts: For attaching to bottom of steel I -beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked -Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts: For attaching to bottom of steel I -beams for heavy
loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces: For attaching to structural steel.
12. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by
using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light: 750lb.
b. Medium: 1500lb.
C. Heavy: 3000lb.
13. Side -Beam Brackets: For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs: For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers: For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement
where head room is limited.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe -Covering Protection Saddles: To fill interior voids with insulation that matches
adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields: Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high -
density, 100-psi minimum compressive -strength, water -repellent -treated calcium silicate or
cellular -glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and
encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint -Control Devices: Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions: For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.
3. Spring -Cushion Roll Hangers: For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces:. To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping
systems.
5. Variable -Spring Hanger: Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to
absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable -Spring Base Supports: Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25
percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
7. Variable -Spring Trapeze Hangers: Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25
percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from
one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary
stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load -adjustment capability. These supports include the
following types:
15060 - 5
A
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
a. Horizontal: Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical: Mounted vertically.
C. Trapeze: Two vertical -type supports and one trapeze member.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field -assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping
and support together on field -fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
• Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments
within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS Sp-69. Install additional attachments at
concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes
in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and
install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install mechanical -anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install
fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
12/20/01 15060 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger shield insert
with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. . Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts maybe used. Include steel weight -distribution
plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Leno at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment
above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field -weld connections that cannot be
shop -welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D 1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
12/20/01 15060 - 7 r_
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
END OF SECTION 15060
a
�"' 12/20/01 15060 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semi -rigid duct, flexible duct and plenum insulation; insulating ; field -
applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
3. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
4. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.
i
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates
of tests.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
12/20/01 15081 - 1
c�*
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke -developed
rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke -developed
rating of 150 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on
segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS `
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation - 1 lb. Per Cubic_ Foot Density: Glass fibers bonded
with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type IL without facing and with all -
service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
�"" 12/20/01 15081 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-2007911, Type I for cloth and Type H for tape.
Woven glass -fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. Similar to facing
material of insulation.
1. Tape Width: 4 inches.
B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
C. Adhesive -Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface
temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100
lb. for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION {
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each duct system.
12/20/01 15081 - 3 -
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
P"
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor -retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -retarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
• ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
r
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor -Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing
insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor -retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor -
retarder mastic and pressure -sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure -sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor -retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
15081 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor -retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire -rated walls and partitions.
Q. Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves
for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at
top of floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation
ends with vapor -retarder mastic.
3.4 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square
foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline
of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 o.c. each way, and
3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
C. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure -sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface
with 6-inch-wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating
sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
12/20/01 15081 - 5 -
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
10. Apply vapor -retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated
to receive vapor retarder.
3.5 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this
Section.
C. Insulate the plenums and duct systems as noted in the Application Schedules.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner:
2. Factory -insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory -insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Vibration -control devices.
6. Testing agency labels and stamps.
7. Nameplates and data plates.
8. Access panels and doors in air -distribution systems.
3.6 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Round, supply -air ducts, concealed.
1. Material: Mineral -fiber blanket.
2. Thickness: 2 inches.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Field -Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
END OF SECTION 15081
12/20/01 15081 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15170 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory -installed and field -installed motors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements
for motor -driven equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and _
location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings.
B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide motors specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors Smaller than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
D. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected.
E. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. —
12/20/01 15170 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
- F. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start, accelerate,
and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
G. Enclosure: Open dripproof, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, medium induction motor.
1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1, Design B, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Energy -Efficient Design: Where indicated.
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have separate
winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double -shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
6. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush.Controllers:• Match wiring connection requirements for indicated
controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control method.
C. Motors Used with Variable -Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
- coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Critical vibration frequ6ncies are not within operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H.
4. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally
protected motors.
D. Rugged -Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum service
factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings are insulated
Em with nonhygroscopic material. External finish is chemical -resistant paint over corrosion -resistant
primer.
2.3
WR
E.
A.
Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to NEMA MG 1:
1. Measurement of winding resistance.
2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High -potential test.
5. Alignment.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting torque and
other requirements of specific motor application.
1. Split -phase start, capacitor run.
r 12/20/01 15170 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Shaded -Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 1/20 hp.
C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens power
supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature
rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets when motor temperature
returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bearings: Ball -bearing type for belt -connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ADJUSTING
A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt -driven motors.
B. Align pulleys and install belts.
C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 15170
12/20/01 15170 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15241 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
^^ A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases, vibration isolation roof curbs and snubbers.
" B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger restraints.
2. Division 15 Section "Metal Ductwork" for flexible duct connectors.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of isolator specified. Include load
deflection curves.
�^ B.
Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer, for the following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators, design of vibration isolation
•
bases, and selection of seismic restraints.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to the
structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.
t^ 1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic -restraint devices with other construction
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression -
system components, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts
into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
C.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in
..,
Division 7 Sections.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amber Booth
2. Mason
3. Peabody
°� 12/20/01 15241 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of the equipment
supported.
1. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single or multiple layers and
molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness to provide uniform loading
over the pad area.
2. Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than 1 inch thick and
precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times the rated load.
3. Load Range: From 10 to 50 psig and a deflection not less than 0.08 inch per 1 inch of thickness. Do
not exceed a loading of 50 psig.
B. Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double -deflection type, with molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene isolator
elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates. Factory -drilled and tapped top plate for bolted equipment
mounting. Factory -drilled baseplate for bolted connection to structure. Color -code to indicate capacity range.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open -spring -type isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or
failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 1/4-inch-thick, rubber isolatorpad
attached to the baseplate underside. Size baseplates to limit floor loading to 100 psig.
6. Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
7. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive -resistant finish.
D. Rubber Hangers: Double -deflection type, with molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements
bonded to formed -steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color -code to indicate capacity
range.
E. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and elastomeric insert in
compression.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30 degrees of
angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated
load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene.
5. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color -code to indicate capacity range.
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES
A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural -steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by the isolation equipment
manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings, power transmission, component misalignment, and
cantilever loadings.
1. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural -steel shapes, plates, and bars conforming to
ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M). Include support brackets to anchor base to isolation units. Include
prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
12/20/01 15241 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
clearance above the floor.
3. Concrete -Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame. Pour concrete into base
with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide for anchor bolts and
equipment support.
5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
-^ 6. Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
7. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive -resistant finish.
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATORS SCHEDULE/APPLICATION
A. Isolating material shall be selected in each case in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Isolators for supporting equipment, fans, etc., suspended from the construction above on rod hangers, not
internally isolated, shall be of the open spring type with housings and noise washers, lock washers, nuts, etc.
Isolators with a minimum 1" deflection for fans and fan coil units and 2" deflection for air handling units. For
,., fans and fan coil units less than 1000 CFM in capacity they may be isolated with rubber -in -shear isolating
grommets in lieu of spring isolators.
1. Amber Booth: BSW- 1, BSW-2 or KDXW-1, KDXW-2
C. Transformers, air-cooled condensing units or other equipment to be installed on housekeeping pads shall be
mounted on ribbed neoprene pads.
1. Amber Booth: Ampad NR or NRC, Style B Isolators.
D. Curb mounted fans and roof top HVAC units use two inch (2") wide x 3/8" thick neoprene isolation strips to,
be in continuous contact at all curb to equipment contact areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and anchor vibration-, sound-, and seismic -control products according to manufacturer's written
instructions and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt isolator baseplates
to structural floors as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt isolator baseplates
to structural supports as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 3000-psig concrete, and trowel to a smooth, hard
finish. Cast -in -place concrete is specified in Division 3.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After
equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operations.
B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 1/4 inch of movement at start and stop.
END OF SECTION 15241
P" 12/20/01 15241 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15330 - SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies sprinkler systems for buildings and structures.
B. Products specified in this Section with installation not in Contract include sprinkler cabinets with
spare sprinklers and sprinkler wrenches. Deliver to the Owner's maintenance personnel.
C. Products installed but not specified in this Section include water meters that will be furnished by the
utility company to the site and ready for installation.
D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Water and Sanitary Sewer Systems" for water supply piping from water
w source to inside of building.
2. Division 7 Section "Through Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire barrier sealers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Working plans as used in this Section refer to documents (including drawings and calculations)
prepared pursuant to requirements in NFPA 13 and Factory Mutual for obtaining approval of
authority having jurisdiction.
B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are included in referenced NFPA standards.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Wet -Pipe Sprinkler System: System with automatic sprinklers attached to piping system containing
water and connected to water supply so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they
are opened by fire.
B. Dry -Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed air.
Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry -pipe valve.
Water then flows into piping and discharges from opened sprinklers.
C. Sprinkler System Protection Limits: All spaces within areas indicated. Include closets, toilet and
locker room areas, each landing of each stair, and special applications areas.
D. Provide an alarm panel to monitor the fire sprinkler system flow and tamper switches as required by
the City of Grapevine, Texas.
12/20/01 15330 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design and obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction for fire protection systems specified.
B. Minimum Pipe Sizes: Not smaller than sizes indicated for connection to water supply piping, and
branches from sprinkler riser.
C. Conduct fire hydrant flow tests as required to obtain hydraulic data needed to prepare design for
hydraulically calculated systems.
D. Hydraulically design sprinkler systems according to:
1. Sprinkler System Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As follows:
a. Office and Public Areas: Light hazard.
b. Storage Areas: Ordinary hazard, Group II.
C. Equipment Rooms: Ordinary hazard, Group I.
d. Service Areas: Ordinary hazard, Group I.
2. Minimum Density Requirements for Automatic Sprinkler System Hydraulic Design: As
follows or as required by:
• a. Light Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. (6.3 mL/s over 140 sq. m) area.
b. Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. (9.5 mLls over 140
sq. m) area.
C. Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. (12.6 mL/s over
140 sq. m) area.
3. Maximum Sprinkler Spacing: As follows:
a. Office Space and Public Areas: 225 sq. ft./sprinkler (20.7 sq. m/sprinkler).
b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft./sprinkler (12 sq. m/sprinkler).
C. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft./sprinkler (12 sq. m/sprinkler).
d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft./sprinkler (12 sq. m/sprinkler).
e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13.
E. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum
working pressure ratings except where indicated otherwise.
1. Sprinkler Systems: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for fire protection system components. Include the following:
1. Valves.
2. Specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
3. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
4. Fire department connections. Include type of fire department connection; number, size, type,
°" 12/20/01 15330 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
and arrangement of inlets; size and direction of outlet; and finish.
5. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting, finish,
and other data.
B. Licensed engineer's sprinkler system drawings specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to authority
having jurisdiction. Include system hydraulic calculations where applicable.
C. Sprinkler system drawings, identified as "working plans" and prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authority having jurisdiction. Include system hydraulic calculations where
applicable.
D. Licensed engineer's installation report specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
E. Test reports and certificates as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material & Test
Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Underground
Piping."
F. Maintenance data for each type of fire protection specialty specified, for inclusion in "Operating and
Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."
G. 2 copies of NFPA 13A "Recommended Practice for the Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of
Sprinkler Systems." Deliver to Owner's maintenance personnel.
A 2 copies of NFPA 25 "Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water Based Fire
Protection Systems." Deliver to Owner's maintenance personnel.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory and FM Approval Guide
and that conform to other requirements indicated.
B. Listing/Approval Stamp, Label, or Other Marking: On equipment, specialties, and accessories made
to specified standards.
C. Listing and Labeling: Equipment, specialties, and accessories that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in "National Electrical Code," Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
D. Comply with requirements of authority having jurisdiction for submittals, approvals, materials, hose
threads, installation, inspections, and testing.
E. Comply with requirements of Owner's insurance underwriter for submittals, approvals, materials,
installation, inspections, and testing.
F. Licensed Engineer: Submit design drawings, design calculations, and installation inspection reports.
Include seal and signature of registered engineer licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located,
certifying compliance with specifications.
12/20/01 15330 - 3 --
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
G. Installer's Qualifications: Firms qualified to install and alter fire protection piping, equipment,
specialties, and accessories, and repair and service equipment. A qualified firm is one that is
experienced (minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project) in such work,
familiar with precautions required, and in compliance with the requirements of the authority having
jurisdiction. Submit evidence of qualifications to the Architect upon request. Refer to Division 1
Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" for definition of "Installer."
�-* H. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the
following:
1. NFPA 13 "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 26 "Recommended Practice for the Supervision of Valves Controlling Water Supplies
for Fire Protection."
3. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."
4. NFPA 231 "Standard for General Storage."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Specialty Valves, Water Motor Alarms, Air -Pressure Maintenance Devices, and Air
Compressor: `
a.
ASCOA Fire Systems
b.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
C.
Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.
d.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp.
e.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
f.
Star Sprinkler Corp.
.*+ g.
Viking Corp.
2. Detector Check Valves:
a. Cla-Val Co.
b. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp.
C. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc.
d. Viking Corp.
e. Watts Regulator Co.
3. Backflow Preventers:
a. Cla-Val Co.
""" b. Febco.
C. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp.
d. Watts Regulator Co.
e. Wilkins Regulator Div., Zurn Industries, Inc.
°'" 12/20/01 15330 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
4.
Waterflow Indicators and Supervisory Switches:
a.
Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.
b.
Potter Electric Signal Co.
C.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inca
d.
System Sensor Div., Pittway Corp.
e.
Victaulic Company of America.
f.
Watts Regulator Co.
5.
Fire
Department Connections:
a.
Badger-Powhatan, Figgie International Co.
b.
Croker Div., Fire -End and Croker Corp.
C.
Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
d.
Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.
e.
Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
f.
Potter -Roemer Div., Smith Industries, Inc.
g.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
h.
Sierra Fire Equipment Co.
6.
Sprinklers: 1
a.
ASCOA Fire Systems
•
b.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
C.
Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.
d.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp.
e.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
f.
Star Sprinkler Corp.
g.
Viking Corp.
7.
Indicator Posts and Indicator Post Gate Valves:
a.
Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.
b.
Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc.
C.
Nibco, Inc.
d.
Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc.
8.
Indicator Valves:
a.
Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. _
b.
Grinnell Supply Sales Co., Grinnell Corp.
C.
Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc.
d.
Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.
e.
Nibco, Inc.
f.
Victaulic Company of America.
9.
Fire
Protection Service Gate and Check Valves:
a.
Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp.
b.
Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc.
C.
Nibco, Inc.
12/20/01 15330 - 5
. SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
d. Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc.
e. Victaulic Company of America.
10. Grooved Couplings for Steel Piping:
a. Grinnell Supply Sales Co., Grinnell Corp.
b. Gustin-Bacon Div., Tyler Pipe Subsid., Tyler Corp.
C. Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc.
d. Victaulic Company of America.
11. Grooved Couplings for AWWA Ductile -Iron Piping:
a. Gustin-Bacon Div., Tyler Pipe Subsid., Tyler Corp.
b. Victaulic Company of America.
12. Grooved Couplings for Copper Tubing:
a. Victaulic Company of America.
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Refer to Part 3 Articles "Sprinkler System Piping Applications" and "Standpipe System Piping
Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and fitting materials specified below are used.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 30 in sizes 6 inches (DN 150) and smaller and Schedule 30 in
sizes 8 inches (DN 200) and larger, black and galvanized, plain and threaded ends, for welded,
threaded, cut -groove, and rolled -groove joints.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, Schedule 10 through 5-inch (DN 125) sizes and NFPA 13 specified wall
thickness for 6-inch (DN 150) through 10-inch (DN 250) sizes, with plain ends, black and
galvanized, for rolled -groove and welded joints.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, threadable lightwall, black and galvanized, for threaded joints.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795, black and galvanized, for joints listed and for use with fittings for plain -
end steel pipe.
1. Type: Standard -weight pipe, Schedules 30 and 40, for cut -groove, rolled -groove, threaded,
and welding joints.
2. Type: Lightweight pipe, Schedule 10, for rolled -groove and welding joints.
F. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M (ASTM B 88M, Types B and C), water tube, drawn
temper.
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Cast -Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B 16.1, Class 250, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
B. Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Flanged Fittings: AWWA C110, 250 psig (1725-kPa) minimum
pressure rating, with AWWA C104 cement -mortar lining.
�"" 12/20/01 15330 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4, Class 250, standard pattern, with threads according to
ASME B 1.20.1.
D. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.3, Class 300, standard pattern, with threads
according to ASME B 1.20.1.
E. Grooved -End Fittings for Ductile -Iron Pipe: ASTM A 536 ductile -iron or ASTM A 47 malleable -
iron, AWWA pipe -size, designed to accept AWWA C606 grooved couplings. Include cement lining
or Food and Drug Administration (FDA) -approved interior coating.
F. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, seamless or welded; ASME B 16.9, buttwelding; or
ASME B16.11, socket -welding type for welded joints.
G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.5.
H. Grooved -End Fittings for Steel Pipe: UL-listed and FM -approved, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12
ductile iron or ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable iron, with grooves or shoulders designed to
accept grooved couplings.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS -
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joining materials not
included in this Section.
B. Flanged Joints for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Ductile -Iron or Cast -Iron Fittings: AWWA C115 ductile -
iron or gray -iron pipe flanges,'rubber gaskets, and high -strength steel bolts and nuts.
C. Couplings for Grooved -End Steel Pipe and Grooved -End Ferrous Fittings: UL 213, AWWA C606,
ASTM A 536 ductile -iron or ASTM A 47 malleable -iron housing, with enamel finish. Include
synthetic -rubber gasket with central -cavity, pressure -responsive design; ASTM A 183 carbon -steel
bolts and nuts; and locking pin, toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
D. Couplings for Grooved -End Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings: UL 213, AWWA C606, ASTM A 536
ductile -iron housing, with enamel finish. Include synthetic -rubber gasket with central -cavity,
pressure -responsive design, and ASTM A 183 carbon -steel bolts and nuts to secure grooved pipe and
fittings.
E. Couplings for Grooved -End Copper Tube and Grooved -End Copper Fittings: UL 213,
ASTM A 536 ductile -iron or ASTM A 47 malleable -iron housing, with copper -colored enamel
finish. Include synthetic -rubber gasket with central -cavity, pressure -responsive design, and
ASTM A 183 carbon -steel bolts and nuts.
2.5 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general -duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves.
2.6 FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE VALVES
A. General: UL-listed and FM -approved, with 175 psig or 300 psig non -shock minimum working
pressure rating, as required.
12/20/01 15330 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Option: Valves for use with grooved piping may be grooved type.
B. Gate Valves, 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: UL 262, cast -bronze, threaded ends, solid wedge,
outside screw and yoke, rising stem.
C. Indicating Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) and Smaller: Butterfly or ball type, bronze body with
threaded ends, and integral indicating device.
1. Indicator: Electrical 115 volts a.c., prewired, 2-circuit, supervisory switch.
D. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge,
,., outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged
ends.
r» E. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) and Larger for Use with Indicator Posts: UL 262, iron body,
bronze mounted, solid wedge disc, non -rising stem with operating nut and flanged ends.
F. Indicator Posts: UL 789, wall type, cast-iron body, with windows for target plates that indicate valve
position, extension rod and coupling, locking device, and red enamel finish.
v
1. Operation: Operating wrench.
G. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap,
with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring and flanged ends.
H. Butterfly Check Valves, 4 Inches (DN 100) and Larger: UL 213, split -clapper style, cast-iron body
with rubber seal, bronze alloy discs, stainless -steel spring and hinge pin.
2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 175 psig (1200 kPa) or 300 psig working pressure as required,
designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved
seat with O-ring seals, and single -hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain,
electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, precision retarding chamber, and fill line attachment
with strainer.
1. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
2. Option: Grooved -end connections for use with grooved -end piping.
B. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, 3/4-inch (DN 20) size, spring -loaded, ball check
device with threaded ends.
C. Dry -Pipe Valves: UL 260, differential type; with bronze seat with O-ring seals, single -hinge pin and
latch design. Include UL 1486, quick -opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm
connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill -line attachment.
1. Air Pressure Maintenance Device: UL 260, automatic device to maintain correct air pressure
in piping. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping, bypass valve for
quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure, strainer, pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig
(95- to 410-kPa) adjustable range, and 175-psig (1200-kPa) maximum inlet pressure.
POR 12/20/01 15330 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
a. Manufacturers:
l . Central Sprinkler Corp.
2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporations.
3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
4. Star Sprinkler, Inc.
5. Viking Corp.
2.8 SPRINKLERS
A. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat -responsive element conforming to: -�
1. UL 199, for applications except residential.
B. Sprinkler types and categories are as indicated and as required by application. Furnish automatic
sprinklers with nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating
except where otherwise indicated and required by application.
1. Orifice: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm), with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.
2 Orifice: 17/32-inch (13.5-mm), with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2. 1
C. Sprinkler types, features, and options include:
3 Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including white cover plate for public areas and offices.
4 Pendent sprinklers. With chrome escutcheon in utility type areas.
5 Pendent, dry -type sprinklers.
6 Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
7 Sidewall sprinklers.
8 Sidewall, dry -type sprinklers.
9 Upright sprinklers.
D. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome -plated, bronze, and painted.
E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for following sprinkler mounting applications.
Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed -type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.
10 Ceiling Mounting: Chrome -plated steel, 2-piece, with 1-inch (24-mm) vertical adjustment.
11 Sidewall Mounting: Chrome -plated steel, 1-piece, flat.
F. Sprinkler Guards: Wire -cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
G. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space for minimum of 6 spare
sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench, suitable for wall mounting. Include number of sprinklers required
by NFPA 13 and 1 wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for
each style sprinkler on Project.
2.9 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS
A. Specialty Fittings: UL-listed and FM -approved, made of steel, ductile iron, or other materials
compatible with system materials and applications where used.
12/20/01 15330 - 9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Locking -Lug Fittings: Not allowed.
C. Mechanical-"T" Fittings: UL 213, ductile -iron housing with pressure -responsive gasket, bolts, and
threaded or locking -lug outlet.
D. Mechanical -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile -iron housing with pressure -responsive gaskets, bolts,
and threaded or locking -lug outlets.
E. Drop -Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals; adjustable.
F. Sprinkler Alarm Test Fittings: Ductile -iron housing with 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) inlet and outlet,
integral test valves, combination orifice and sight glass, and threaded or locking -lug ends.
2.10 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm Devices: Types and sizes that will match piping and equipment connections.
B. Waterflow Indicators: UL 346, electrical -supervision type, vane -type waterflow detector, rated to
250 psig (1725 kPa), and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include 2 SPDT (single -
pole, double -throw) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere,125
volts a.c. and 0.25 ampere, 24 volts d.c.; complete with factory -set, field -adjustable retard element to
prevent false signals and tamper -proof cover that sends a signal when cover is removed.
C. Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for valves, electrical -supervision type, SPDT (single -pole, double -
throw), normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled valve in other than full open position.
D. Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for indicator posts, electrical -supervision type, SPDT (single -pole,
double throw), normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled valve in other than full open
position.
2.11 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 inches (90 to 115 mm) diameter dial with dial range of 0-
250 psig (0-1600 kPa).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ' EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing -in for hose valves, hose racks, and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping
connections prior to installing cabinets.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke -rated construction, framing for
cabinets, and other conditions where cabinets are to be installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
'"�` 12/20/01 15330 10
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications on pipe and fittings products listed below.
Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications. Piping maybe
joined with flanges instead of indicated joints. Use grooved -end fittings with grooved couplings that
are made by the same manufacturer and that comply with listing when used together for grooved -
coupling joints.
12 Option: Mechanical"T" bolted -branch -outlet fittings, instead of fitting types specified, may
be used for branch connections.
B. Pipe Between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized -steel pipe instead of
black -steel pipe when steel pipe is specified for applications below. Do not use welded joints.
C. Sizes 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, A 135, or A 795; Schedule 40 steel pipe with
threaded ends, cast-iron or malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
D. Sizes 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 135, threadable, lightwall steel pipe with threaded
ends, cast-iron or malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
E. Sizes 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, Schedule 10 steel pipe,
welding -type fittings, and welded joints.
F. Sizes 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, A 135, or A 795; Schedule 40 steel pipe with
cut -groove ends, grooved -end _steel pipe fittings, and grooved -coupling joints.
G. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) to 6 Inches (DN 150): ASTM A 53, A 135, or A 795; Schedule 40 steel
pipe, welding type steel fittings, and welded joints.
H. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) to 6 Inches (DN 150): ASTM A 53, A 135, or A 795; Schedule 40 steel
pipe with cut -groove ends, grooved -end steel pipe fittings, and grooved -coupling joints.
I. Sizes 8 Inches (DN 200) and Larger: ASTM A 53 or A 795, Schedule 30 steel pipe, welding -type
steel fittings, and welded joints.
J. Sizes 8 Inches (DN 200) and Larger: ASTM A 53 or A 795, Schedule 30 steel pipe with cut -groove
ends, steel pipe grooved -end fittings, grooved couplings, and grooved -coupling joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
13 Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.
14 Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
12/20/01 15330 - 11
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Grooved -End Copper Tube and Grooved -End Fitting Joints: Use grooved -end fittings and grooved
couplings that are made by the same manufacturer and that are listed for use together. Roll -groove
tube and assemble joints with grooved coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling
and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Locking -Lug Joints: Not allowed.
D. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both piping
materials. _.
• 3.5 WATER SUPPLY CONNECTION
A. Connect fire protection piping to water supply piping of size and in location indicated.
B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories as required at
connection to water supply piping.
3.6 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
0.* A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
.B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location
and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
t
15 Deviations from approved "working plans" for sprinkler piping require written approval from
authority with jurisdiction. File written approval with the Architect prior to deviating from
approved "working plans."
C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes 2 inches (DN 50) and smaller. Unions are not required
on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved couplings.
E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch (DN 65)
and larger connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and
located according to NFPA 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain headers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipe.
y I. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves, and
where indicated. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
"" 12/20/01 15330 -12
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
K. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13. Install according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
16 Install hanger and support spacing and locations for steel piping joined with grooved
mechanical couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems.
L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than 1/4 inch (7 nun) and with soft metal
seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit
removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
3.7 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTING INSTALLATIONS
A. Install specialty sprinkler fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for installation of general -duty valves. Install fire -protection
specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14,
manufacturer's written instructions, and the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install fire -protection service valves supervised -open, located to control sources of
water supply except from fire department connections. Where there is more than 1 control valve,
provide permanently marked identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
C. Install check valve in each water supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check
valves in potable water supply sources.
D. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper driection of flow, including bypass
check valve and retard chamber, drain line connection.
E. Detector Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow, located to detect system leakage and
unauthorized use of water and to prevent backflow into public water mains. Install bypass with
water meter, with gate valves on each side of meter, and check valve downstream from meter.
3.9 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
B. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings (Including Public Areas Such as Toilets, Lobbies and Corridors):
Concealed sprinklers.
C. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent dry -type, and sidewall dry -type sprinklers.
D. Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with following finishes:
17 Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome -plated in finished spaces exposed to
view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view.
18 Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory -painted white cover plate.
19 Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
12/20/01 15330 13
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.10 SPRINKLER INSTALLATIONS
A. Install sprinklers in patterns as required.
B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical panels and tiles.
C. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet -type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry -type
sprinklers supplied from heated space.
3.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATIONS
A. Install fire department connections of types and features indicated in locations indicated.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains and where
indicated. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
3.12 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to specialty valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories.
B. Connect water supplies to sprinkler systems. Include backflow preventers.
C. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
D. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm system.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field acceptance tests of each fire protection system.
20 Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems according to NFPA 13 Chapter "System
Acceptance."
B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures specified. Then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
21 Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect.
22 Report test results promptly and in writing to authority having jurisdiction when required.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish with
new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited.
3.15 COMMISSIONING
A. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are prescribed by
manufacturer, proceed as follows:
'� 12/20/01 15330 - 14
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
23 Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories have been installed
correctly and operate correctly.
24 Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
25 Check that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified have been
replaced with new, correct type of sprinklers.
26 Check that sprinklers are correct type, have correct finish and temperature ratings, and have
guards where required for applications.
27 Check that water supplies have correct type of backflow preventer.
28 Pressurize and check dry -pipe sprinkler systems air pressure maintenance devices, and air
compressors.
29 Check that hose valves and fire department connections have threads compatible with local
fire department equipment and have correct pressure rating.
30 Fill wet -pipe sprinkler systems with water.
31 Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
B. Coordinate with fire alarm system tests. Operate systems as required.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties, and accessories. Review operating and maintenance
information.
B. Schedule demonstration with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15330
12/20/01 15330 = 15
GW
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
7""
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,
apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All other Sections of Division 15, including but not limited to the following:
1. Section 15010 - "General Conditions for Mechanical Work"
2. Section 15050 - "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
3. Section 15420 - "Drainage and vent systems"
4. Section 15411 -"Water Distribution piping"
5. Section 15458 - "Water Heaters - Electric"
6. Section 15080 - "Pipe Insulation"
B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and
drawings for all requirements.
1.3. SCOPE
A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to
the installation of a complete and operating plumbing system inside the building and to points
outside the building as indicated on the drawings and as specified.
B. Work Included:
1. Plumbing fixtures and accessories.
2. Plumbing equipment.
3. Sanitary drain, waste and vent system (Ref. Section 15420).
4. Storm drainage system (Ref. Section 15420).
5. Domestic hot and cold water systems (Ref. Section 15411).
6 E uipment drains and relief valve piping (Ref Section 15055)
J
C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 15010, General Requirements for
�• Mechanical Systems.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or
exceed minimum requirements as specified. All work shall conform to the requirements of
applicable codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
12/20/01
15400 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Plumbing brass (general): -
a. Base: Kohler
b. Optional: Symmons, Sloan, Speakman, Chicago Faucet, Delta, McGuire,
American Standard
2. Vitreous china plumbing fixtures:
a. Base: Kohler
b. Optional: Crane, American Standard
3. Janitors sinks:
a. Base: Fiat
b. Optional: Stern and Williams
4. Closet seats:
a. Base: Church
b. Optional: Olsonite
5. Stainless steel plumbing fixtures:
a. Base: Elkay
b. Optional: Just
6. Carriers and wall hydrants:
a. Base: Woodford
b. Optional: J.R. Smith
7. Electric water coolers:
a. Base: Elkay
b. Optional: Halsey -Taylor, Haws, Oasis
B. Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be furnished and installed complete with trim and all
other appurtenances required to connect to rough -in piping at floor and/or wall.
C. Fixtures, trim, drain bodies, hydrants, valves, grates, and all accessories shall be as specified,
or as scheduled.
D. Carriers shall be furnished with all wall mounted fixtures.
E. Refer to drawings for plumbing fixture schedule. -
12/20/01 15400 - 2 --
s•.
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.2 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
A. Floor Drains: REFER TO SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS
B. Cleanouts:
1. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and vandalproof
non-skid cover; Model 56040-15-1 as manufactured by Josam or approved equal.
2. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Ferrule type with coated cast iron body and round
tapered thread bronze cover, Model 58190-22 as manufactured by Josam or approved
equal.
3. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Coated cast iron body, round with scoriated cover
Model 56000 in service areas, square with bronze foot traffic cover Model 56020
compatible with floor finish in finished floor areas or carpet cleanout cover where
required; cleanouts shall be as manufactured by Josam or approved equal.
4. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Cast iron body, cast iron plug, and round flat stainless
steel access cover secured with machine screw; Model 58710 Series as manufactured
by Josam or approved equal.
5. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Cast iron tee with threaded plug. Provide
bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.
C. Access Boxes (Coordinate all locations with Architect prior to installation):
1. Provide 18 gauge steel frame and door with heavy duty piano hinge and keyed cam -
lock. t
2. Walls: Provide square frame and secured cover with brushed chrome plate finish in
tile walls. Provide square frame and cover with bonderized prime -coated steel face
and lock in walls of other finished rooms.
3. Ceilings: Provide square frame and cover with bonderized prime -coated steel face
and lock.
4. Floors: Provide plain steel frame with plain nickel -bronze scoriated cover.
5. Yard Boxes: Provide cast concrete boxes with cast iron rim and hinged self -closing
cast iron lid marked for appropriate service, size as required.
6. Set flush with finished grades with 4" thick concrete pad under perimeter (but not
under interior) of box.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Review millwork and other related shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixture
and/or opening before rough -in and installation.
B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough -in and finish work of this Section.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING PIPING
A. The plumbing piping system shall be installed as specified in Section 15060, 'Piping and
12/20/01 15400 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
Accessories", and as specified herein.
B. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs. Provide clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage
system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. --
3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and
escutcheons to make a watertight finished connection.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts.
E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as directed by the Architect.
F. InstaII fixtures per the following schedules:
ROUGH -IN CONNECTION SCHEDULE "
Hot Water Cold Water Waste Vent
Lavatory 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 2 inch 1%a inch
Mop Sink 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 3 inch 2 inch -�
Sink 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 2 inch 11/2 inch
Fountain, EWC N/A 1/2 inch 2 inch 2 inch
Water Closet N/A 1 inch 4 inch 2 inch
Urinal N/A 3/4 inch 2 inch 2 inch
FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHT SCHEDULE
Verify with Architect prior to Installation.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust stops and regulating valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing,
noise, or overflow. -
B. At completion, clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
12/20/01 15400 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Adjust flow of pumps, setting of tempering valves, and all other items to require flows and
temperatures as indicated on the drawings for all equipment and accessories furnished under
this Section.
.ow
END OF SECTION 15400
r�
rn 12/20/01 15400 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15403 - NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXTENT OF WORK:
A. Related work and materials are specified under Section 15010, General Provisions; Section 15050,
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, and other appropriate Sections of this Division.
B. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, service necessary for and
incidental to the natural gas distgribution system as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
C. Install piping as shown on the Drawings and as described in Section 15050, Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods, using methods of fabrication, grading, testing, repairing, cleaning and other
procedures established therein, but particular material application shall be as described in this
Section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:
1. 1997 International Plumbing Code, Gas Code and NFPA with Lubbock Amendments.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIAL:
A. The materials as scheduled and/or hereinafter listed shall be used in fabricating piping systems, but
new pipe materials shall be the same type as presently installed at locations as shown on the
Drawings. Where material changes occur, install suitable adaptors to provide tight sealing joints.
1. Exterior Gas Piping: Standard weight black steel.
a. Fittings 2-1/2-inch and Larger: Standard weight forged steel welding fittings.
b. Fittings 2-inch and Smaller: Black malleable iron screwed pattern.
C. Underground steel pipe and large fittings shall be "mill wrapped" with Keith-Kote,
Inc. specification A-2 jacket; small fittings shall be field wrapped with vinyl tape
equivalent to 3M Company's No. 51 Scotchrap.
2. Exterior Underground Gas Piping: Generally polyethylene pipe and fittings, Nipak or
equivalent. At the point where a turn emerges from the ground, change to pre -bent coated
standard weight black steel pipe. Trace with #16 copper tracing cable.
3•.. Above Ground Gas Lines: Standard weight, black steel pipe.
a. 2-1/2-inch and Larger: Use black steel welding fittings.
b. 2-inch and Smaller: Use black malleable iron screwed fittings.
B. Gas Piping shall not be routed in return air plenums
12/20/01 15403 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.2 GAS COCKS:
,M
A. Cocks on 2" lines and smaller shall be Jenkins 30A or Crane No. 324 or approved equal.
B. Cocks on 2-1/2" line and larger shall be Emco-Nordstrom No.143 flanged pattern or approved equal.
C. Provide removable handles for all plug cocks.
D. Other special type valves or patterns shall be used where required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING:
A. install piping as described in Section 15050, using methods of fabrication, grading, and other
procedures described therein. Grade systems to established low points and provide condensation
pockets.
B. All gas piping shall be run on top of roof, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 PAINTING
A. After leak testing, all exterior gas piping shall be cleaned, primed and painted. Color shall be
selected by the Architect. t
3.3 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL GAS PIPING
A. All underground steel gas pipe and fittings shall be protected by wrapping.
B. Prior to wrapping, clean and dry steel pipe and fittings and wire brush joints. Prime and hand wrap
steel surfaces with one of the listed tapes spirally wound with half -lapping, resulting in 2
thicknesses, a minimum thickness of 20 mils. Apply tape with a small amount of tension and
without wrinkles. The field application of primer and tape shall extend a minimum of 6 inches onto
the connecting material below ground and to a minimum of 4 inches above ground. Seal ends with
mastic.
3.4 PIPING ON ROOF
A. install piping on roof.
1. Piping to be supported on four by four redwood blocks with pitch pans as approved by the
architect and coordinate with roofing contractor on installation. Spacing shall not exceed
10'-0" on center and within 3'-0" of each equipment connection or branch pipe.
2. Offset pipes to be 8" minimum above the roof at all expansion joints, roof penetrations,
perimeter gravel stops/fascia and vertically flashed surfaces.
12/20/01
15403 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. Do not secure piping to supports unless detailed otherwise.
4. Exposed piping shall be coated with red primer and a minimum of two coats of paint.
Preparation of piping and painting shall comply with other applicable sections in Division
I.
5. Pipe installer shall determine exact layout of piping and locate all required supports.
1. Perform leak test per NFPA 54 and all local requirements for the existing gas piping that
will be reused.
END OF SECTION 15403
12/20/01 15403 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
r. SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
I. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:
1. Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3. Valves.
4. Hangers and Supports.
f�► yj—TUh
A. This Section specifies the water distribution piping system, including potable cold, hot, and
recirculated hot water piping, fittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet
outside the building.
B. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters which will be
provided by the utility company, to the site, ready for installation.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section.
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for trenching and backfilling materials and methods
for underground piping installations.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through basement walls and fire and smoke barriers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Water Distribution Piping: A pipe within the building or on the premises which conveys water
from the water service pipe or meter to the points of usage.
B. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each piping specialty and valve specified.
B. Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified for inclusion in Maintenance
Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
C. Welders' Certificates certifying that welders comply with requirements specified in Quality
Assurance below.
t `? 12/20/01 15411 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements specified in below.
E. Test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: comply with the provisions of the following:
1. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for, materials, products, and installation.
Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
2. ASME 'Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualification" for Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into
pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations.
1.8 EXTRA STOCK i
A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key operated hydrant, bibb, or faucet
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Balance Cocks:
a. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
C. Hammond Valve Corp.
d. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.
2. Bibbs and Faucets:
a. Nibco Inc.
b. J.R. Smith
C. Watts Regulator Co.
d. Josam
12/20/01 15411 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.
Hydrants:
a.
Josam Mfg. Co.
b.
Smith, (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.
C.
Tyler Pipe; Sub. of Tyler Corp.
d.
Woodford Mfg. Co.
e.
Zurn Industries Inc., Hydromechanics Div.
4.
Backflow Preventers:
a.
Febco Sales, Inc.; Subs. of Charles M. Bailey Co., Inc.
b.
Hersey Products, Inc.
C.
ITT Lawler; Fluid Handling Div.
d.
Watts Regulator Co.
5.
Pressure Regulating Valves:
a.
Cash (A. W.) Valve Mfr. Corp.
b.
Cla-Val Co.
C.
Spence Engineering Co., Inc.
d.
Watts Regulator Co.
6.
Relief Valves:
a.
Cash (A. W.) Valve Mfg. Corp.
b.
Conbrhco Industries, Inc.
C.
Watts Regulator Co.
d.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins -Regulator Div.
7.
Water Hammer Arresters:
a.
Josam.
b.
Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.
C.
Precision Plumbing Products.
d.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
8.
Dielectric Waterway Fittings:
a.
Victaulic Company of America
9.
Dielectric Unions:
a.
Perfection Corp.
b.
Watts Regulator Co.
10.
Y-Pattern Strainers:
a.
Armstrong Machine works.
b.
Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
C.
Metraflex Co.
12/20/01
15411 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
d. Spirax Sarco.
e. Trane Co.
f. Victaulic Co. of America. (low pressure applications Only)
g. Watts Regular Co.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Part 3, Article "PIPE APPLICATIONS" for identification of systems where_
the below materials are used.
B. Drawn Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L.
C. Annealed Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Wrought -Copper Fittings: ANSI B 16.22, streamlined pattern.
B. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B 16.24, Class 150; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
C. Unions: ANSI B 16.39, malleable iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket
joints, metal -to -metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends. Threads shall conform
to ANSI B 1.20.1.
D. Dielectric Unions: Threaded or soldered end connections'as required to suit application;
constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent corrosion.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, no -lead solder similar to "Silvabrite".
B. Gasket Material: thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled, and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.5 GENERAL DUTY VALVES
A. General duty valves (i.e., gate glove, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in M
Division 15 Section "General Duty Valves." Special duty valves are specified belowby their
generic name; refer to Part 3 Article "VALVE APPLICATION" for specific uses and
applications for each valve specified. ^`
2.6 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES
A. Balance Cocks: Class 125, bronze body, bronze plug, screw driver operated, straight or angle
pattern, with threaded in connections conforming to ANSI B1.20.1.
B. Balance Cocks: Class 125, bronze body, bronze plug, screw driver operated, straight or angle
pattern, with soldered end connections.
12/20/01 15411 - 4 -�
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: Piston type, with spun closed seamless copper casing, tested and
certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201 similar to Josam Series 75000-S.
B. Wall hydrants; cast bronze non -freeze wall hydrant with satin nickel bronze face, 3/4" outlet,
integral vacuum breaker-backflow preventer, 3/4" inlet,removeable T-handle, and wall clamp
similar to Josam Series 71050.
C. Pressure Regulating Valves: Single seated, direct operated type; having bronze body with
integral strainer, and complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003. Select proper
size for maximum flow rate and inlet and outlet pressures indicated.
D. Relief Valves: Provide proper size for relief valve, in accordance with ASME Boiler and
elk Pressure Vessel Codes, for indicated capacity of the appliance for which installed.
1. Combined Pressure -Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat,
,�•. complying with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge
capacity. Provide temperature relief at 210 deg F, and pressure relief at 150 psi.
., PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all water distribution piping may be
installed in accordance; with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the
referenced standards.
B. Examine rough -in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having water
connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. Install Type L, drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for 2-1/2
inch and smaller, above ground, within building. Install Type K, annealed temper copper
tubing for 2-1/2 inch and smaller, with no joints below ground.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate
the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of
piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing,
and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted, unless expressly indicated.
12/20/01 15411 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper
insulation applications.
E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of
the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1 inch clearance outside
the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel
removal.
G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and
servicing of valves.
H. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4
inch ball valve, and short 3/4 inch threaded nipple and cap.
I. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch
and larger shall be sheet metal.
J. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass though fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.
K. Install piping with 1/32 inch per foot (1/4 percent) downward slope towards drain point.
L. Install piping level with no pitch.
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section --
"SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of
supports:
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in
length.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet
and longer.
3. Pipe roller, complete -MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer,
support on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
C. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:
12/20/01 15411 - 6
0
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
Nom. Pipe Size
1
1-1/2
2
3
3-1/2
4
5
6
8
10
12
Support vertical runs of each floor.
Max. Span -Ft.
7
9
10
12
13
14
16
17
19
22
23
Min. Rod Size -Inches
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
5/8
5/8
3/4
7/8
7/8
7/8
3.5 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Soldered Joints: comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Soldering Manual."
1. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts
of piping specialties before soldering.
2. Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon
dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.
3. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature.
B. Threaded Joints: conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal
seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
2. Align threads at point of assembly.
3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except
where dry seal threading is specified).
4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which
the pipe is being threaded.
a. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or
damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that
portion of pipe shall not be used.
C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt
tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use
suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque
wrench.
3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE
A. Extend water distribution piping to connect to water service piping, of size and in location
indicated for service entrance to building.
12/20/01 15411 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at penetrations through foundation wall for
watertight installation.
C. Install shutoff valve at service entrance inside building; complete with strainer, pressure gage,
and test tee with valve.
3.8 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where
specific valve types are not indicated the following requirements apply:
1. Shut-off duty: use ball, and butterfly valves.
2. Throttling duty: use globe, ball, and butterfly valves.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where
branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere
as indicated. For sectional valves 2 inch and smaller, use ball valves; for sectional valves
2-1/2 inch and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and on inlet
of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inch and smaller,
use gate or ball valves; for shutoff valves 2-1/2 inch and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
I
C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to completely
drain equipment for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low
points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to completely drain distribution piping
system. For drain valves 2 inch and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for drain valves 2-1/2
inch and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
D. Check Valves: Install swing check valves on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as
indicated.
E. Balance Cocks: Install in each hot water recirculating loop, discharge side of each pump, and
elsewhere as indicated. _
F. Hose Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where indicated, with vacuum breaker.
G. Sill Faucets: Install on concealed piping where indicated with vacuum breaker.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Install non -freeze wall hydrants where indicated on the drawings. Unit shall be secured
tightly with a wall clamp.
B. Install pressure regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves, and balance -cock
bypass. Install pressure gage on valve outlet.
12/20/01 15411 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes
indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Plumbing Code.
B. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical
equipment as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection, provide drain
valve on drain connection. For connections 2-1/2" and larger, use flanges instead of unions.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows:
l . Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it
has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. During the progress of the. installation, notify the plumbing official having
jurisdiction, at least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in the presence of the plumbing official.
a. Rough -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before
concealed or closed -in after system is roughed -in, and prior to setting
fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to
observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the
requirements of the plumbing code.
3. Reinspections: Whenever the plumbing official finds that the piping system will not
pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection
by the plumbing official.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official.
B Test water distribution piping as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects all new water distribution piping systems and parts of
existing systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is
performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a
diagram of the portion of the system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced water
distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for
testing, that hag been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the
operating pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system
materials. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for a period of 4 hours. Leaks
and loss in test pressure constitute defects which must be repaired.
4. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action.
I
P" 12/20/01 15411 - 9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.13 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning and Disinfect water distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems, which
have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.
2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the authority having
jurisdiction, or in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure
described in either AWWA C601, or AWWA D105, or as described below:
a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at the points of outlet.
b. Fill the system or part thereof, with a water/chlorine solution containing at
least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system, or part
thereof, and allow to stand for 24 hours.
C. Drain the system, or part thereof, of the previous solution, and refill with a
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine
and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
d. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean potable
water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming for the system.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction.
Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority
shows evidence of contamination.
r. B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities.
3.14 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill the system.
B. Before operating the system perform these steps:
1. Open valves to full open position. Close drain, valves, hydrants, and sill cocks.
2. Remove and clean strainers.
-END OF SECTION 15411
12/20/01 15411 - 10
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:
1. Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3. Hangers and Supports.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building sanitary and vent piping systems, including drains and
drainage specialties.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 2 Section "Water and Sanitary Sewer System," for sanitary drainage piping
beginning from 5' - 0" outside the building.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations th>iough basement and foundation walls, and fire and smoke barriers.
3. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," for labeling and
identification of drainage and vent piping.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the
discharge from soil, waste, and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and
conveys it to the building sewer.
B. Building Sewer: That part of the drainage system which extends from the end of the building
drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal
system, or other point of disposal.
C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys
sewage, rain water or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains
of public sewer systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.
D. Vent System: A pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system,
or to provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and
back pressure.
12/20/01 15420 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for the following products:
1. Drainage piping specialties
2. Floor drains
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following:
1. 1997 International Plumbing Code and local published adopted code.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the installation of flashing and roof penetrations.
B. Coordinate flashing materials installation of roofing, waterproofing, and adjoining substrate
work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
drainage and vent systems which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints, drains,
trap primers, and vandal -proof vent caps:
a. Ancon Inc.
b. Josam Mfg. Co.
C. Precision Plumbing Products
d. Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co.
e. Tyler Pipe; Subs. of Tyler Corp.
f. Zurn Industries Inc; Hydromechanics Div.
2.2 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV for pipe, and cast -bronze, drainage pattern fittings,
with soldered joints.
1. Solder Filler Materials: ASTM B32, no -lead solder similar to ASilvabrite.
2. Solvent: ASTM D2564.
12/20/01 15420 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
w,
B. Cast -Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service weight, hub -and- spigot soil pipe and fittings.
I. Clamps and compression gaskets: ASTM C564.
C. Hubless Cast -Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and
fittings, with neoprene gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310.
2.3 UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Cast -Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service weight, hub -and- spigot soil pipe and fittings. Pipe
and fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and
P^ outside surfaces.
1. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.
2.5 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2 inch connections
matching piping system. Complying with ASSE 1018 similar to Precision Plumbing Products
"Prime -Rite" Model PR-500 valve and distribution unit if required.
B. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolts with wing nuts.
C. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring.
Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required.
D. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron calking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron
threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast -bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper
tubing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
+* 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to
•�, installations.
B. Examine rough -in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain
�., connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and
specialties are to be installed.
D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS - ABOVE GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING
A. Install copper tube with cast bronze fittings for 3 inch and smaller, drainage and vent pipe.
12/20/01 15420 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Install hub -and -spigot, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe with compression gasket joints for
larger than 3 inch drainage and vent pipe.
C. Install hubless, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for larger than 3 inch drainage
and vent pipe.
3.3 PIPE APPLICATIONS - BELOW GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING
A. Install hub -and -spigot, service weight, cast-iron, soil pipe and fittings with gasketed joints for
15 inch and smaller drainage pipe.
3.4 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Copper Tubing: Solder joints in accordance with the procedures specified in AWS "Soldering
Manual."
B. Cast -Iron Soil Pipe: Make compression joints, and hubless joints in accordance with the
recommendations in the CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Chapter IV.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate
the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of
piping layout take into account many design considerations. So far as practical, install piping
as indicated.
B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
C. Install exposed piping, at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted, unless expressly indicated.
D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper
insulation applications.
E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of
the building. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel
removal.
G. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch
and larger shall be sheet metal.
H. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings and
floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.
I. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes,
half-wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short
12/20/01 15420 - 4
` SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
91
quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction
of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long -turn tees where two fixtures are
installed back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be
used on vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made.
Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size, standard
increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is
prohibited.
J. Install underground building drains to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance
with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual. Lay underground building drains
beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
• continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other
special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it
r., is completed.
K. Install building drain pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for
piping 3 inch and smaller, and 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 4 inch and larger.
L. Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping, of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Sewer piping is specified in a separate section of Division 2.
M. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal through foundation wall for watertight installation.
3.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of
supports:
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in
length.
C. Install hangers at the following intervals:
Pipe Material
Max. Horiz. Spacing
Max Vert. Spacing
In Feet
In Feet
Cast -Iron Pie
5
15
Copper Tubing - 1-1/4
6
10
inch and smaller
Copper Tubing -1-1/2
10
10
inch and larger
0
""" 12/20/01 15420 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.7 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES —
A. Install backwater valves in sanitary building drain piping as indicated, and as required by the
plumbing code. For interior installation, provide cleanout cover flush to floor centered over —
backwater valve cover and of adequate size to remove valve cover for service.
B. Install expansion joints on vertical risers as indicated, and as required by the plumbing code.
C. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as
indicated, and: T
1. as required by plumbing code;
2. at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees;
3. at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping;
4. at base of each vertical soil or waste stack.
E. Cleanouts Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as �-
indicated.
F. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout
passing through waterproof membranes.
G. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in —
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS -
A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations
indicated. —
B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of
drains flush with finished floor. _
C. Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper
slope to drain:
DEPRESSION IN INCHES RADIUS OF AREA DRAINED - FEET
1/2 5
3/4 10
1 15
1-1/4 20
1-1/2 25
D. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer.
E. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
12/20/01 15420 - 6 --
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
P"
F. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS
A. Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8 inch per foot (1
percent). Adjust trap primer for proper flow.
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures
^� and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the
plumbing code.
-� B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or
drains.
�., 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections:
mom
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it
has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having
jurisdiction, at`least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in the presence of the plumbing official.
a. Rough -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before
concealed or closed -in after system is roughed -in, and prior to setting
fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to
observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the
requirements of the plumbing code.
3. Reinspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make
the required corrections, and arrange for reinspected by the plumbing official.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official.
B. Piping System Test Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the
authority having jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of
existing systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is
performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a
diagram of the portion of the system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage
and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for
testing, that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
12/20/01 15420 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open
jointed drain tile, test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon
completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping
system, and fill with water to the point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of
water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the
inspection starts, through completion of the inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and
their traps filled with water, their connections shall be tested and proved gas and
water -tight. Plug the stack openings on the roof and building drain where it leaves the building, and introduce air into the system equal to a pressure of 1 " water column.
Use a "U" tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this
pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without the introduction of additional air
throughout the period of inspection. Inspect all plumbing fixture connections for gas
and water leaks.
5. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action.
3.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.
i
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris,
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work,
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.
END OF SECTION 15420
12/201/01 15420 - S
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15458 - WATER HEATERS -ELECTRIC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division -I Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of water heater work required by this section is indicated on the plans and by requirements of
this section.
B. Electrical Work: Referto Division 15 Section AElectrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment@
for requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of water heaters of types and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
B. Codes and Standards: `
1. UL Compliances: Construct water heaters in accordance with the following UL standards:
a. UL 174, "Household Electric Storage -Tank Water Heaters".
2. Provide water heater components which are UL-listed and labeled.
3. NEC Compliance: Install electric water heaters in accordance with requirements of NFPA 70,
"National Electrical Code".
4. ASHRAE Compliance: Provide water heaters with Performance Efficiencies not less than
prescribed in ASHRAE 90A, "Energy Conservation in New Building Design".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's technical product data including rated capacities and efficiencies
of selected model clearly indicated; operating weights; wiring diagrams; furnished specialties and
accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, required
clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle water heaters and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do
!�*+ not install damaged water heaters or components; remove from site and replace with new.
""" 12/20/01 15458 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Store water heaters and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,
construction debris, and physical damage.
C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading water heaters, and
moving units to final location for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. General: Provide electric water heaters of sizes, capacities, and electrical characteristics as indicated
on plans.
B. Heater: Construct for working pressure of 150 PSI; magnesium anode rod; glass lining on internal
surfaces exposed to water.
C. Heating Elements: Low watt density with zinc plated copper sheath; double element,
non -simultaneous operation.
D. Safety Controls: Equip with high temperature cutoff for each element, factory wired.
E; Jacket: Equip with full size control compartments with front panel opening. Insulate tank with
vermin -proof glass fiber insulation. Provide outer steel jacket with baked enamel finish.
F. Accessories: Provide brass drain valve; 3/4" relief valve; cold and water dip tube.
G. Controls: Provide thermostat for each element, factory wired.
H. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering residential
electric water heaters which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following: —
1. Smith Corp. (A.O.); Consumer Products Div.
2. Rheem Water Heater Div; City Investing Co.
3. Ruud Water Heater Div; City Investing Co.
4. Lockinvar Water Heater Corp.
5. State Industries, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which water heaters are to be installed. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WATER HEATERS
A. General: Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units
plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended
clearances.
12/20/O1 15458 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Piping: Connect hot and cold water piping to units with unions. Extend relief valve discharge to
closest floor drain, or as indicated.
C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory -mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements of Division-16 sections. Do not proceed with water heater start-up
until wiring installation is acceptable to water heater Installer.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Start -Up: Start-up, test, and adjust electric water heaters in accordance with manufacturers' start-up
instructions. Check and calibrate controls.
END OF SECTION 15458
'�" 12/20/01 15458 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15782 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP HVAC UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rooftop heating and cooling units.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Controls and Automation" for temperature -control devices, and control wiring
and control devices.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities of
selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required clearances; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; accessories; and installation and startup instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Detail
mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof
membrane system. E
C. Commissioning Reports: Indicate results of startup and testing commissioning requirements. Submit copies
of checklists.
D. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration."
B. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of
New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings."
C. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater thanprescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design
of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings."
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver HVAC units as factory -assembled units with protective crating and covering.
12/20/01 15782 - 1 ""
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.
C. Handle HVAC units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading
and moving to final location.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights
the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by the manufacturer and signed by the Contractor, agreeing
to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship, within the specified warranty period, provided
manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed.
1. Warranty Period, Compressors: Manufacturers standard, but not less than 5 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
2. Contractor to offer as an alternate price the extended warranty on the compressors.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering
for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt -drive fan.
2. Filters: Two sets of filters for each unit, one spare after project is complete to be turned over to owner.
PART2-PRODUCTS -
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following.
1. Trane
2. Carrier
3. Lennox
2.2 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION
A. Units furnished and installed shall packaged rooftops as scheduled on contract documents and these
specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be based on ARI Standard 360. Units shall consist of insulated
weather tight casing with compressors, air cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, heating
section(where scheduled), filters, supply and exhaust fans(where scheduled), motors and drives, unit controls,
and roof curb.
B. Units shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-22.
C. Units shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate caution areas.
2.3 UNIT CASING
A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and furished with an air-dry paint coating with removable access
panels. Structural members shall be 16 gauge with access doors and removable panels of minimum 20
gauge.
V 12/20/01 - 15782 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 500 hours in salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B 117.
C. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exits, it shall be double hemmed and
gasket sealed.
D. Access Panels: Water and air tight panels with handles shall provide access to filters, heating section,
exhaust air fan section(where scheduled), supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and unit control
section.
E. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass insulation on all exterior panels in contact with the
return and conditioned air stream.
2.4 AIR FILTERS
A. Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the unit and shall be accessible thru access
panels. Two inch, pleated media filters shall be provided.
2.5 FANS AND MOTORS
A. Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal type fan.
B. Provide self -aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent lubrication fittings.
C. Provide units 5 tons and below with direct drive, multiple speed, dynamically balanced supply fans.
�. Provide units 6 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motor sheaves.
E. Outdoor and Indoor Fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have internal thermal overload protection.
F. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge
position.
G. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key -way, and protectively coated
with lubricating oil. —
2.6 GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION (Where Scheduled)
A. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit. UL approved specifically
for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or
cap provided. Provide capability for gas piping connection through side of unit.
B. Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment.
C. Gas Burner shall be forced combustion type power burner, negative pressure gas valve, manual shut-off, hot
surface ignition, and flame sensing safety control.
D. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion air prior to ignition, and
- continuous flame supervision. Upon a failure to ignite, two attempts of ignition will occur before lockout of
the ignition system.
E. Combustion blower shall be centrifugal type fan with built-in thermal overload protection on fan motor.
F. Heat Exchanger: Provide drum and tube heat exchanger of free floating design manufactured from 18-gauge
aluminized steel. Factory pressure and leak tested.
12/20/01 15782 - 3
M"
PM
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
G. Limit controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event of excessive temperatures
resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoor airflow.
2.7 EVAPORATOR COIL
A. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil.
B. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory pressure test at 450 psig and
leak tested at 200 psig..
C. Provide drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of galvanized steel with external connections.
2.8 CONDENSER SECTION
A. Provide internally finned 3/8 " seamless copper tube mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Factory pressure
tested to 450 psig.
B. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be statically balanced. Motors
shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal overload protection in a weather tight casing.
2.9 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
A. Compressors: Provide scroll or reciprocating compressor with direct drive operating at 3600 rpm. Integral
centrifugal oil pump, inlet dirt separator, rolling element bearings, crankcase heater, completely enclosed
compression chamber with no leakage paths. Provide suction gas cooled motor with over temperature and over
current protection.
i
B. Units shall have ambiant cooling capabilities down to 0 degree F as standard or manufacturer shall furnish unit
with installed,low ambient controls to allow for operation down to 0 degreeF.
C. Provide with thermostatic temperature control in the compressor windings, to protect against excessive
temperatures, high and low pressure conditions.
D. Provide each unit with refrigerant circuit(s) factory supplied completely piped with liquid line filter drier,
suction and liquid line Schraeder valves.
2.10 OUTDOOR AIR SECTION
D. Provide a fully integrated factory installed 100% modulating outside air economizer with unit return and
barometric relief air dampers. Unit operation is through primary temperature controls that automatically
modulate dampers to maintain space temperature conditions.
E. Provide economizer with automatic comparative enthalpy control.
F. Provide adjustable minimum position control located in the economizer section of the unit.
G. Provide spring return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shutdown or power interruption.
2.111 OPERATING CONTROLS - STAND ALONE
A. Provide microprocessor unit mounted control and electronic zone sensor to provide proportional integral room
control. This UCM shall perform all unit functions by making all heating, cooling and ventilating decisions
through resident software logic. Alternately, these functions may be controlled by standard electromechanical
thermostat if unit mounted control is not provided.
MR 12/20/01 15782 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Provide NEC Class II, adjustable zone control to control, heating stages in sequence with delay between
stages, compressor stages and supply fan to maintain zone temperature setting.
C. Provide the following operating controls:
1. Provide a minimum three minute off timer to prevent compressor from short cycling.
2. Provide a time delay to sequence the starting of compressors.
D. For each constant volume rooftop unit, provide an adjustable zone sensor or 2 heat/2 cool auto -changeover
thermostat.
2.122 UNIT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Units shall meet scheduled performance based on ARI and ANSI Z21.47 test conditions.
2.133 ROOF CURB
A. Contractor shall provide factory supplied insulated roof curb, 16 gauge perimeter made of zinc coated steel
with supply and return air gasketing and wood nailer strips. Provide sloped roof curb to accommodate roof
slope.
B. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors Association guidelines.
C. Provide 2" wide x 3/8" thick neoprene isolation strips to be in continuous contact at all curb to equipment
contact areas.
2.144 MOTORS i
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory -installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: Open, dripproof.
2.155 CONDENSATE DRAINS
A. Condensate drains from air conditioning equipment shall be type "M" or DWV (11/4" & larger) hard drawn
copper.
B. Fittings for copper pipe shall be Chase Sweat Fittings or Mueller Brass Company's "Streamline" solder
fittings. Drainage type fittings shall be used wherever possible. All solder for copper pipe shall be 95-5 Silfos.
C. Insulate all condensate drain piping with %:" thick unlit, Armstrong Armaflex. Butt glue all joints, no tape
allowed..
2.16 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed for each HVAC air handling equipment item handling
over 2,000 CFM of airflow; smoke detectors shall be mounted in the supply air stream and/or return air stream
as required per Code, to stop the fan motors upon detection of smoke.
B. Coordinate all requirements to inure sampling tubes are provided suitable to the width of duct in which
installed.
12/20/01 15782 - 5
I
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
PM
C.
The contractor shall wire the smoke detectors into the control system as required. Provide auxiliary contact in
each detector for connection to fire alarm system
t•.
2.17
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verification of Performance: Rate capacity according to ARI 360, "Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air -
Conditioning Equipment."
4 Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Standard for Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary
Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roof for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting installation and performance of
rooftop units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
�-* B.
Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C.
Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level, according to NRCA's written installation instructions.
e1e
Install and secure rooftop units on curbs and coordinate roofpenetrations and flashing with roof construction.
D.
Unit Support: Install unit on structural curbs and level. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall
construction.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general
arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
5 Install ducts to termination in roof mounting frames.
B.
Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
.., C.
Ground equipment.
6 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening
values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
3.4
COMMISSIONING
A.
Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
B.
Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checks and perform the following:
7 Level unit on housekeeping base, and flash curbs to unit and to roof.
8 Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
■^
9 Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
10 Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans.
opm
12/20/01 15782 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
11 Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
12 Check that labels are clearly visible.
13 Clean furnace flue and condenser and inspect for construction debris.
14 Verify that controls are connected and operable.
15 Remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps.
16 Verify that filters are installed.
17 Adjust vibration isolators.
18 Connect and purge gas line.
19 Check that burner and controls are suitable to operate at temperatures as low as minus 40°F (minus 40°C).
20 Check acoustic insulation.
21 Check operation of barometric dampers.
C. Lubricate bearings on fan.
D. Check fan -wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
E. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
F. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
22 Perform starting of refrigeration in summer only.
23 Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
G. Check and record performance of interlocks and protection devices; verify sequences.
H. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.
I. Calibrate thermostats. B
J. Adjust and check high -temperature limits.
K. Check internal isolators.
L. Check outside -air damper for proper stroke and interlock with return -air dampers.
M. Check controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency
shutdown.
N. Start refrigeration and measure and record the following:
24 Coil leaving -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures.
25 Coil entering -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures.
26 Outside -air, dry-bulb temperature.
27 Air -cooled -condenser, discharge -air, dry-bulb temperature.
O. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
28
Supply -air volume.
29
Return -air volume.
30
Relief -air volume.
31
Outside -air intake volume.
P. Simulate maximum cooling demand and check the following:
32 Compressor refrigerant suction and hot -gas pressures.
12/20/01 15782 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
33 Short circuiting air through condenser or from condenser to outside -air intake.
Q. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot -light operation and failure modes. Check the following:
34 High -limit heat exchanger.
... 35 . Warm-up for morning cycle.
36 Freezestat operation.
37 Free -cooling mode, outside -air changeover.
38 Alarms.
R. After starting and performance testing, change filters, vacuum heat exchanger and cooling and condenser coils,
lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and check operation of power vents.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
,.a A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:
39 Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
40 Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
41 Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15782
12/20/01 15782 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rectangular and round metal ducts -and plenums for heating, ventilating, and
air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct penetrations
and fire -damper installations in fire -rated floors, partitions, and walls.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation.
3. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct -mounted
access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
4. Division 15 Section 'Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
5. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for airbalancing and final adjusting
of manual -volume dampers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C 168.
In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at
the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.
1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air -moving and -distribution
equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system
must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications
with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without
increasing system total pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and
attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcement and spacing.
12/20/01 15815 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
5. Seam and joint construction.
6. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions.
7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, seismic
restraints, and duct attachment.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling -mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling- and wall -mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and
other operating devices.
2. Coordination with ceiling -mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements in "Quality Assurance Article.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
F. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed
accessories and devices.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel," for hangers
and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code --Aluminum," for aluminum supporting
members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with
labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot
life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
12/20/01 15815 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized,
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless -steel ducts.
C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches
2.2 DUCT LINER
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NADviNs "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner
Standard."
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass
fibers.
1. Thickness: 1 inch
2. Thickness: 2 inches where noted on exterior ductwork.
3. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
4. Fire -Hazard Classification: Maximum flame -spread rating of 25 and smoke -developed rating
of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
5. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916.
6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical
attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as
recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.
a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb tensile, dead -load test perpendicular to
duct wall.
b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting
- more than 1 /8 inch into airstream.
C. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire -hazard classification
of duct liner system.
7. Duct Liner Schedule/Applications:
a. All rectangular supply air ductwork and plenums shall be internally lined (V/1 lb).
b. All rectangular return air ductwork and plenums shall be internally lined (1 "/1 lb).
C. All rectangular return and transfer air ductwork shall be internally lined (1 "/1 lb).
d. All toilet/general exhaust ductwork within 10'-0" of exhaust fan shall be internally
lined (1"A lb).
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General:
1. Joint and Seam Sealant: One -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant,
formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
2. Flanged Joint Mastics: One -part, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying
with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners
appropriate for building materials.
12/20/01 15815 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for standard -weight aggregate concretes or for slabs
more than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight -aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rod or galvanized
rods with threads painted after installation.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --
Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with
duct materials. -
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal
and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
4
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class
required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
and discolorations..
B. Static -Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following:
1. Supply Ducts: 3-inch wg from constant volume HVAC unit supply fan.
2. Return Ducts: 2-inch wg, negative pressure.
3. Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch wg, negative pressure.
C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and
0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined.
2.6 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at
liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted -edge
overlapping.
12/20/01 15815 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless
duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12
inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as specified for
duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from duct without
compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies,
and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional;
when used, secure buildouts to' duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire
dampers at connection to fire -damper sleeve. j-
2.7 ROUND DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Diameter as applied to flat -oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of round
duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of .flat -oval duct.
B. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel, standard spiral seam, butt weld or lapped
and welded seam, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and
Flexible."
C. Round Double -Wall (Insulated) Ducts for Exposed Areas (As Indicated on Plans): Fabricate double -
wall (insulated) ducts with an outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally
insulated ducts are inside dimensions.
1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer -shell metal thickness on actual outer -shell dimensions. Fabricate
outer -shell lengths 2 inches longer than inner shell and insulation, and in metal thickness
specified for single -wall duct.
3. Insulation: 1-inch thick fibrous -glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated.. Terminate _
insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single -wall duct or uninsulated
components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to inner liner diameter.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat -oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of
thickness listed below:
5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat -oval inner liners with sheet metal having
12/20/01 15815 - 5
MM
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3/32-inch diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use the following
sheet metal thicknesses and seam construction:
a. Ducts 3 to 8 Inches in Diameter: 0.019 inch with standard spiral seam construction.
b. Ducts 9 to 42 Inches in Diameter: 0.019 inch with single -rib spiral seam construction.
C. Ducts 44 to 60 Inches in Diameter:0.021 inch with single -rib spiral seam construction.
d. Ducts 62 to 88 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch with standard spiral seam construction.
6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from
dislocation by mechanical means.
2.8 ROUND DUCT FITTING FABRICATION
A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam
straight duct.
B. Diverging -Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material
projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
C. Elbows: Fabricate in die -formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend radius of
die -formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered -Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards —Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise
• indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows; Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure
classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch.
b. Ducts 27 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
C. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter:' 0.064 inch.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure
classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 14 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch.
b. Ducts 15 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
C. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
4. Flat -Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as longitudinal
seam flat -oval duct.
5. 90-Degree, Two -Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust systems for
material -handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit using 1.5
bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single -thickness turning vanes.
6. Round Elbows, 8 Inches and Smaller: Fabricate die -formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree
elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend -
angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
7. Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90
degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend -angle
configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
8. Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches: Fabricate gored elbows, unless space restrictions
require a mitered elbow.
12/20/01 15815 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
9. Die -Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 0.040 inch thick with two-
piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored -Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non -elbow fittings specified above.
11. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches and Pressures through 10-Inch wg: 0.022 inch.
D. Double -Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double -wall (insulated) fittings with an outer shell and
an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside dimensions.
12 Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
13 Outer Shell: Base outer -shell metal thickness on actual outer -shell dimensions. Fabricate
outer -shell lengths 2 inches longer'than inner shell and insulation. Use the same metal
thicknesses for outer duct as for uninsulated fittings.
14 Insulation: 1-inch thick fibrous -glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate
insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single -wall duct or uninsulated
components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to nominal single -wall
size.
15 Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat -oval inner liners with sheet metal having
3/32-inch diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use the following
sheet metal thicknesses:
a0 Ducts 3 to 34 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch.
b0 Ducts 35 to 58 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
c0 Ducts 60 to 88 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
16 Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from
dislocation by mechanical means.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
C. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.
F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to
building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 nun), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless
specifically indicated.
12/20/01 15815 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke -control dampers, lighting layouts, and
similar finished work.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Non -Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct
insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides
by at least 1-1/2 inches.
N. Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,
install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are
specified in Division 15 Section 'Duct Accessories. Firestopping materials and installation
methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
N. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as described
in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible."
O. Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg: Transverse joints.
P. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round and rectangular metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible."
B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure
(proof -test) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder -actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage testing
"� 12/20/01 15815 - 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
and as required for compliance with test requirements.
B. Conduct tests, in presence of Architect, at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of
system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at
maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating
pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test
section.
D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for round,
Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2-
inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure
classifications from 2- to 10-inch wg.
E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust volume -control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system.
Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
END OF SECTION 15815
12/20/01 15815 - 9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
PM
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Fire and smoke dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct -mounted access doors and panels.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.
7. Accessories hardware.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for ceiling- and wall -mounted access panels and doors.
2. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for louvers installed in walls, connected to duct
systems. `
3. Division 15 Section "Air Outlets and Inlets" for diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data including details for materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and
finishes for the following items:
^~ 1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Fire and smoke dampers.
3. Duct -mounted access panels and doors.
4. Flexible ducts.
C. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing assemblies. Include dimensions, weights, loadings,
.„ required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection. Detail the following:
1. Special fittings and volume control damper installation (both manual and automatic) details.
2. Fire and smoke damper installations, including sleeves and duct -mounted access door and
panel installations.
D. Product Certification: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self -noise power levels;
and airflow performance data, static pressure loss, and dimensions and weights.
Duct Accessories 15820 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installation.
B. Frame: 18-gage galvanized steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
C. Blades: 0.025-inch-thick roll -formed aluminum. D. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
E. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
F. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
G. Return Spring: Adjustable tefision.
H. Chain Operator: 15-foot long galvanized -steel sash chain and pulley.
I. Wing -Nut Operator: Galvanized steel, with 1/4-inch galvanized -steel rod.
2.2 MANUAL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. General: Provide factory -fabricated volume -control dampers, complete with required hardware and -
accessories. Stiffen damper blades to provide stability under operating conditions. Provide locking
device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations
for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. Provide end bearings or other
seals for ducts with pressure classifications of 3 inches or higher. Extend axles full length of damper
blades. Provide bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
B. Standard Volume Control Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, parallel- or opposed -blade design as
indicated, standard leakage raring, with linkage outside of air stream, and suitable for horizontal or
vertical applications. _
1. Steel Frames: Hat -shaped, galvanized -steel channels, minimum of 16 gage, and with mitered
and welded comers. Provide frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls.
Provide flangeless frames where indicated for installation in ducts.
2. Roll -Formed Steel Blades: 16-gage galvanized steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C. Jackshafi: 1-inch diameter, galvanized -steel pipe rotating within a pipe bearing assembly mounted
Duct Accessories 15820 - 2
SILENT VvgNGS MUSEUM
on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple damper assemblies. Provide appropriate
length and number of mounting to connect linkage of each damper of a multiple damper assembly.
D. Damper Control Hardware: Zinc plated, die-cast core with a heavy -gage dial and handle made of
3/32-inch-thick zinc -plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Provide center hole to suit
damper operating rod size. Provide elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.3 FIRE DAMPERS
A. General: UL labeled according to UL Standard 555 "Standard for Fire Dampers." Refer to Fire
Damper Schedule at the end of this Section.
B. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours, as indicated to match rating of wall/floor.
C. Frame; SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream, fabricated with roll -formed, 21-gage,
galvanized -steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory -installed or field -installed galvanized steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.056-inch (16-gage) or 0.138-inch (10-gage) thick as indicated, and
length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter
mounting angles on each side of the wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame meets sleeve
requirements.
E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
F. Blades: Roll -formed, interlocking, 21-gage galvanized steel. In place of interlocking blades,
provide full-length, 21-gage, galvanized -steel blade connectors.
G. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless steel negator closure spring.
H. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F or 212 deg F rated as indicated.
2.4 SMOKE DAMPERS
4, A. General: UL-labeled according to UL Standard 5555, "Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for
Use in Smoke Control Systems." Combination fire and smoke dampers shall also be UL-labeled for
1-1/2 hour rating according to UL Standard 555 "Standard for Fire Dampers." Refer to the Smoke
Damper Schedule at the end of this Section for leakage classification, temperature category, and
other characteristics.
B. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F or 212 deg F rated as indicated.
C. Frame and Blades;_ 16-gage galvanized steel.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory -installed, 18-gage galvanized steel, length to suit wall or floor
application.
Duct Accessories 15820 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.5 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate turning vanes according to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Figures 2-2
through 2-7.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch-wide, curved blades set at 3/4 inchon center,
support with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2 incheson center, and set into side strips suitable for
mounting in ducts.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil -shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and
fiber glass fill.
2.6 DUCT -MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. General: Refer to the Access Door Materials Schedule at the end of this Section for frame and door
thickness, number of hinges and locks, and location of locks. Provide construction and airtightness
suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel. Provide with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets.
C. Door: Double -wall, galvanized sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness, number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Provide vision panel where indicated.
Provide 1-inch by 1-inch butt hinge or piano hinge and cam latches.
D. Seal around frame attachment ;to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber seals.
E. Insulation: 1-inch thick fiberglass or polystyrene foam board.
2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Flame -retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL
Standard 181, Class 1.
B. Standard Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory -fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide
attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 24-gage, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch aluminum
sheets. Select metal compatible with connected duct system. Fold and crimp metal edge strips onto
fabric as illustrated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Standard, Ist Edition, Figure 2-19.
C. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connectors Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
polychloroprene.
3 Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
4 Tensile Strength: 4801bf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
D. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connectors Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with Du
Ponfs HYPALON or other synthetic -rubber weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet _
rays and ozone environment.
5 Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
6 Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
7 High -Temperature System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber and
Duct Accessories 15820 - 4
A.
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
having a minimum weight of 16 oz./sq. yd. and tensile strength of 2851bf/inch in the warp,
and 185 lbf/inch in the filling.
8 High -Corrosive -Environment System Flexible Connectors; Glass fabric coated with a
chemical -resistant coating.
9 Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd.
10 Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch in the warp and 340 lbf/inch in the filling.
2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts - Insulated: Factory -fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing
1-1/2-inch-thick, glass fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
11 Reinforcement: Steel -wire helix encapsulated in the inner liner.
12 Outer Jacket: Glass -reinforced, silver mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fiber
glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.
13 Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
2.9 ACCESSORIES HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and
gasket and a flat mounting gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments
and provide in length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc -plated damper blade bracket 1/4-inch, zinc -plated operating rod,
and a duct -mounted, ball j oint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square -head set screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless steel band with cadmium -plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm -gear action. Provide in sizes from 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof and resistant to gasoline and
grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of duct accessories. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to manufacturer's installation instructions and applicable portions
of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards.
B. Install volume control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid
erosion of duct liner.
C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
"` Duct Accessories 15820 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Install fire and smoke dampers according to the manufacturer's UL-approved printed instructions.
E. Install fusible links in fire dampers. z
F. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings:
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing."
END OF SECTION 15820
i
Duct Accessories 15820 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15836 - UNIT HEATERS - ELECTRIC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electric unit heaters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between
manufacturer -installed wiring and field -installed wiring.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:' Firm experienced in manufacturing unit heaters similar to those
indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
2. All equipment and accessories shall be Underwriter s Laboratory (UL) listed..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide unit heaters by one of the
foIIowing:
1. Qmark
2.
2.2 UNIT HEATERS - ELECTRIC
A. Provide electric unit heaters which shall be complete packaged units with controls and accessories as
specified herein to meet scheduled capacities as indicated on the drawings.
B. Units shall be furnished with a minimum 18 gauge, die formed, steel cabinet with a factory applied
Unit Heaters - Electric 15836 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
phosphate coated and baked enamel paint finish.
C. Each unit shall have a direct drive fan motor with propeller fan and be permanently lubricated.
Motor shall be the totally enclosed type rated for continuous heavy duty all angle operation and
equipped with built-in thermal overload protection.
D. Electric heating elements shall be low temperature metal sheath type. Elements shall be made of
Nichrome wire and have a copper clad steel sheath and aluminum fins. Elements shall have
automatic reset thermal overload protection. Provide protective air inlet louvers.
E. Units shall be provided with a control transformer to utilize a 24 volt control circuit with fan time
delay control and an automatic high limit cut-out. Motor contacts shall be provided on three-phase
units and all units larger than 5.0 KW.
F. Units shall be furnished with wall mounting thermostat with Summer only fan switch, off switch,
and heat position switch with number of stages to match scheduled heater.
G. Provide mounting brackets for ceiling suspension or wall swivelmount suitable for the applicable
installation condition or as indicated on the Drawings. Provide two point threaded hanger
connection on suspended units over 100 pounds in weight.
H. Each unit shall be design -certified by Underwriters Laboratories and be UL listed and meet the
requirements of the NEC.
I. Provide individual, adjustable discharge louvers with 30 degrees downward stops to prevent
complete shut-off of air flow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of units. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install unit heaters as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Connect unit heaters and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
equipment manufacturer's published torque -tightening values for. equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according
to tightening requirements specified in UL 486A.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing unit heaters and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate
product capability and compliance with requirements.
Unit Heaters - Electric 15836 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean unit heater.
0-k
END OF SECTION 15836
Unit Heaters - Electric 15836 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
4
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound -power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
12/20/01
15838 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver fans as factory -assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural -steel support members.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
4
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Belts: One set for each belt -driven unit.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators:
a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
b. Cook, Loren Company.
C. Greenheck Fan Corp.
d. JennFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products, Inc.
e. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
12/20/01
15838 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt -driven or direct -driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan
shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Removable, spun -aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward -inclined blades.
D. Belt -Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self -aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable -pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
E. Accessories: As scheduled on the drawings.
F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) thick, rigid,
fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-nun) wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base and compatible with roof system.
_ 2.3 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory -installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound -Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Support units using vibration spring isolators. Vibration -control devices are specified in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls."
12/20/01 15838 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Secure vibration controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base.
C. Secure roof -mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium -plated hardware. Refer to Division 7
Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and vibration isolators.
Vibration -control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls."
E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
-C. Ground equipment.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Equipment Startup Checks:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal -overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature -control operators.
B. Starting Procedures:
1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
A
12/20/01 15838 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and
retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment. T
E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature -control operators.
F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.
B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilators.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
END OF SECTION 15838
12/20/01 15838 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
-� A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall -mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume -control
dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
2. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers,
and grilles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and
comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and
arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a
sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings for each
type of air outlet and inlet.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and
grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers'
products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for
the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
�"' 12/20/01 15855 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:
1. Carnes
2. Krueger
3. Metal -Aire
4. Titus
5. Tuttle & Bailey
B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
C. Accessories: Accessories/options as scheduled and indicated on the drawings.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the
Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 • EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and
accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air
volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where
indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the
center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify
Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
12/20/01 15855 - 2
A
- SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.4 CLEANING _.
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces
to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged
finishes.
.q
END OF SECTION 15855
�"' 12/20/01 15855 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15886 -AIR FILTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of air filters and accessories:
1. Replaceable (throwaway) pleated filters.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Rooftop HVAC Units" for installing filters specified in this Section.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for duct access doors required for air filters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification --
Sections.
B. Product data including dimensions, weights, required clearances and access, flow capacity including initial
and final pressure drop at rated air flow, efficiency and test method, and fire classification.
a
C. Shop drawings showing assembly of filter racks, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of
components.
1. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and other anchorages
to other units of Work.
2. Show dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide filters identical with those tested for the fire performance
characteristics indicated. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. m
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrical components that are listed and labeled.
1. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL)
as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NFPA 90A and 90B pertaining to installing air
filters.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52 for method of testing and rating air
filter units.
E. ARI Compliance: Comply with provisions of ARI Standard 850 pertaining to testing and performance of air
filter units. --
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
12/20/01 15886 - 1
RN
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Lift and support factory -assembled units only at designated lifting or supporting points, as indicated on shop
drawings. Deliver with protective crating and covering.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into pad. Concrete
reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly
describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each filter bank. If system includes prefilters and
afterfilters, provide only prefilters.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
'^ 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Air Filters, and Filter Holding Systems:
a. American Air Filter Co.
b. Bamebey-Sutcliffe Corp.
C. Cambridge Filter Corp.
d. Continental Air Filters.
e. Farr Co.
f. Flanders Filters Inc.
.n 2.2 REPLACEABLE (THROWAWAY) PLEATED FILTERS
A. Description: Factory -fabricated, 2-inch-thick, viscous -coated fibers encased in fiberboard cell with
v* perforated -metal media support, clean airflow resistance of 0.15 inch wg at maximum face velocity of 400
fpm and ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 70 to 82 percent
B. Media: Throwaway media of interlaced glass fibers, sprayed with nonflammable adhesive.
C. Frame: Cardboard frame with perforated metal retainer.
D. Duct Holding Frames: 20-gage galvanized steel capable of holding media and media frame in place, with
gaskets to prevent unfiltered air bypass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
r
A. Install filter frames and assemblies on housekeeping pads where indicated.
B. Install filter frames level and plumb, following manufacturer's written instructions, rough -in drawings, the
original design, and referenced standards.
12/20/01 15886 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Install air filters and holding devices of types indicated and where shown following air filter manufacturer's
written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that filters comply with requirements and
serve intended purposes.
D. Locate each filter unit accurately in position indicated in relation to other work. Position unit with clearance
for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames to substrate.
E. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
F. Install filter gage for each filter bank.
1. Install filter gage static -pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters to indicate, air pressure drop
through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible position.
Adjust and level inclined gages.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory -authorized service representative to supervise the
field assembly of components and installation of filters and filter frames and electrical wiring. Report results
in writing.
3.3 CLEANING
A. After testing, adjusting, and balancing air -handling and air -distribution systems, clean filter housings and
install new filter media.
r
END OF SECTION 15886
12/20/01 15886 - 3
Ma
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 15991 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING - DX
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives,
'^ including the following:
1. Balancing airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals,
�+ to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance. of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
-5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are included
in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality -control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment
installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a
damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air
velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a
person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable
results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
G. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan
when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.
"" 12/20/01 15991- 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
H. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
I. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
J. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
K. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
L. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
B. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as
specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
C. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by
NEBB.
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's
representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to
develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and
balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC
controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting
time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.
b. Contract Documents examination report. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and
balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing,
adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this
Specification.
12/20/01 15991- 2
I
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. D Te
sting, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from NEBB's "National Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's national standards.
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if
required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing
operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the efforts of factory -authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support
and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B.
Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
C.
Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
I.S.
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not
deprive the Owner of other -rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and'balaincing of systems
and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports and manual volume dampers, are required by
the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Division I Section "Project Record Documents."
12/20/01 15991-3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of
design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies
and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to
project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system
effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory.
To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and
Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systerns-Duct Design," Sections 5 and
6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been
performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.
I. Examine air -handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
K. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
1. Dampers and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open
positions. This includes dampers in variable -air -volume terminals.
4. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.
5. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
6. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
7. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes
in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
8. Interlocked systems are operating.
9. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational.
12/20/01 15991- 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and access to
I OF"balancing devices is provided.
6. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in
AABC national standards and this Section:
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
*-t extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close
probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor
barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including
damper -control positions, valve indicators, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls and
two devices, to show final settings.
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets.. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended
testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan
volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts.
C. For variable -air -volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air
dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air -handling unit components.
3.5 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, reportneed for adjustment in temperature regulation within
" the automatic temperature -control system.
12/20/01 15991- 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for period of 2 successive 8-hour
days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure
when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.6 TEMPERATURE -CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control
functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low -temperature controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water -flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.
G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a
grounded or nongrounded power supply.
J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.7 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow flow rates within the following tolerances:
7 Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
8 Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3.8 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in
"Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing
devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper
performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and
general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures
in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems
being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for
systems serving multiple floors.
3.9FINAL REPORT
12/20/01 15991- 6
61
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter -quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring
binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
9 Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
F
10
Fan curves.
11
Manufacturers' test data.
12
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
13
Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop
^^
Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final
-* report, as applicable:
14
Title page.
15
Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
16
Project name.
17
Project location.
18
Architect's name and address.
19
Engineer's name and address.
20
Contractor's name and address.
21
Report date.
22
Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
23
Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
24
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
25
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
�-° 26
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.
27
Test conditions for fan performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust -air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
e. Settings for supply -air, static -pressure controller.
f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with
single -line diagrams and include the following:
28 Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
29 Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
12/20/01 15991- 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
30 Terminal units.
31 Balancing stations.
F. Air -Handling Unit Test Reports: For air -handling units with coils, include the following:
32 Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
C. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
33 Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
C. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches
34 Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg
C. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg
e. Filter static -pressure differential in inches wg
f. Preheat coil static -pressure differential in inches wg
g. Cooling coil static -pressure differential in inches wg
h. Heating coil static -pressure differential in inches wg
i. Outside airflow in cfin
j. Return airflow in cfin
k. Outside -air damper position.
1. Return -air damper position.
M. Vortex damper position.
G. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
35 Coil Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
C. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
12/20/01 15991- 8
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
e.
Fin spacing in fins per inch
f.
Make and model number.
g.
Face area in sq. ft.
h.
Tube size in NPS
i.
Tube and fin materials.
j.
w Circuiting arrangement.
36 Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a.
Airflow rate in cfrn
b.
Average face velocity in fpm
C.
Air pressure drop in inches wg
.� d.
Outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F
e.
Return -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F
f.
Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F
g.
Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F
h.
Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
i.
Refrigerant suction pressure in psig
j.
Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F
H. Electric -Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-
, , station air -handling units, include the following:
37 Unit Data: Include the following:
a.
System identification.
' b.
Location. `
C.
Coil identification.
^' d.
Capacity in Btuh (kW).
e.
Number of stages.
f.
Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g.
Rated amperage.
h.
Airflow rate in cftn
i.
Face area in sq. ft.
^• j.
Minimum face velocity in fpm
38 Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a.
Heat output in Btuh (W).
b.
Airflow rate in cfm
C.
Air velocity in fpm
d.
Entering -air temperature in deg F
e.
Leaving -air temperature in deg F
f.
Voltage at each connection.
g.
Amperage for each phase.
I. Fan Test
Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
39 Fan Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
12/20/01 15991- 9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C.
Make and type.
d.
Model number and size.
e.
Manufacturer's serial number.
f.
Arrangement and class.
g.
Sheave make, size in inches and bore.
h.
Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches
40 Motor Data: include the following:
a.
Make and frame type and size.
b.
Horsepower and rpm.
C.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
d.
Full -load amperage and service factor.
e.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f.
Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches (nun).
g.
Number of belts, make, and size.
41 Test
Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a.
Total airflow rate in cfm
b.
Total system static pressure in inches wg
C.
Fan rpm. _.
d.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg
e.
Suction static pressure in inches wg
J. Round, Flat -Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
42 Report Data: Include the following:
a.
System and air -handling unit number.
b.
Location and zone.
C.
Traverse air temperature in deg F
d.
Duct static pressure in inches wg
e.
Duct size in inches
f.
Duct area in sq. ft.
g.
Design airflow rate in cfm
h.
Design velocity in fpm -
i.
Actual airflow rate in cfm
j.
Actual average velocity in fpm
k.
Barometric pressure in psig
K. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems or air-cooled
condensing units, include the following:
43 Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
C. Unit make and model number.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
e. Compressor make.
12/20/01 15991- 10
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
f.
Compressor model and serial numbers.
g.
Refrigerant weight in lb
h.
Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F
.�
44 Test
Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a.
Inlet -duct static pressure in inches wg
b.
Outlet -duct static pressure in inches wg
C.
Entering -air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F
PP" d.
Leaving -air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F
e.
Control settings.
f.
Unloader set points.
g.
Low -pressure -cutout set point in psig
h.
High -pressure -cutout set point in psig
i.
Suction pressure in psig
�^* j.
Suction temperature in deg F
k.
Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig
1.
Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F
�•, M.
Oil pressure in psig
n.
Oil temperature in deg F
o.
Voltage at each connection.
p.
Amperage for each phase.
q.
The kW input.
r.
.Crankcase heater kW.
S.
Number of fans.
t.
Condenser fan rpm.
U.
Condenser fan anflow rate in cfin
V.
Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
W.
Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
X.
Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
3.10 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and
'^ balancing to
verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual
conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during
near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during
near -peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 15990
12/20/01 15991- 11
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following electrical materials and methods:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Concrete equipment bases.
3. Electrical identification.
4. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
5. Touchup painting.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication and installation of supports and anchorage for electrical items.
D. Coordination Drawings for electrical installation.
1. Prepare Coordination Drawings according to Division 1 Section "Submittals" to a 1/4-inch-
equals-l-foot (1:50) scale or larger. Detail major elements, components, and systems of
electrical equipment and materials in relation to each other and to other systems, installations
and building components. Indicate locations and space requirements for installation, access,
and working clearance. Show where sequence and coordination of installations are important
to the efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate drawing preparation with effort specified in
other Specification Sections. Include the following:
a. Provisions for scheduling, sequencing, moving, and positioning large equipment in the
building during construction.
b. Floor plans, elevations, and details, including the following:
1) Clearances to meet safety requirements and for servicing and maintaining
equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic
maintenance.
2) Equipment support details.
3) Exterior wall, roof, and foundation penetrations of cable and raceway; and their
relation to other penetrations and installations.
4) Fire -rated interior wall and floor penetrations by electrical installations.
12/20/01 16050 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
5) Sizes and locations of required concrete pads and bases.
C. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installing air outlets and inlets, light
fixtures, alarm and communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling -
mounted items.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
..� A. Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components.
B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow
for electrical installations.
C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of
• the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment.
D. Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished under other Sections. w
E. Coordinate connecting electrical systems with exterior underground utilities and services. Comply
with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where electrical items requiring access are
concealed by finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access
Doors."
G. Coordinate installing electrical identification after completion of finishing where identification is
applied to field -finished surfaces.
H. Coordinate installing electrical identifying devices and markings prior to installing acoustical
ceilings and similar finishes that conceal such items.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Channel and angle support systems, hangers, anchors, sleeves, brackets, fabricated items, and
fasteners are designed to provide secure support from the building structure for electrical
components.
1. Material: Steel, except as otherwise indicated, protected from corrosion with zinc coating or
with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative finish or inherent
material characteristics.
12/20/01 16050 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot -dip galvanized steel, except as
otherwise indicated.
B. Steel channel supports have 9/16-inch (14-mm)-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (203 nun)
o.c., in at least 1 surface.
1. Fittings and accessories mate and match with channels and are from the same manufacturer.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps
with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps or "click"- type
hangers.
D. Sheet -Metal Sleeves: 0.0276-inch (0.7-mm) or heavier galvanized sheet steel, round tube, closed
with welded longitudinal joint.
E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and
insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and
size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable
iron casting with hot -dip galvanized finish.
,G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon -steel wedge or sleeve type.
H. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type.
I. Powder -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat -treated steel.
2.2 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Forms and Reinforcing Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
B. Concrete: 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast -in -Place Concrete."
2.3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION -
A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for a specified application,
selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors
prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.
B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Conform to ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for
legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway or cable size.
1. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with a clear,
weather- and chemical -resistant coating.
2. Color: Black legend on orange field.
3. Legend: Indicates voltage.
C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less
12/20/01 16050 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
than 3 mils thick by 1 inch wide (0.08 mm thick by 25 mm wide).
D. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and
letters.
E. Color -Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
F. Engraved, Plastic -Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine
"^ plastic laminate punched for mechanical fasteners 1/1 6-inch (1.6-mm) minimum thick for signs up to
20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on
white face.
G. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted, aluminum, baked -enamel finish signs, punched for
fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application.
H.
I.
2.4
Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Weather -resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose acetate
butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm), galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size
appropriate to the application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
Fasteners for Plastic -Laminated and Metal Signs: Self -tapping stainless -steel screws or No. 10/32
stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Provided by equipment manufacturer and selected to match equipment finish.
a:
B. For Nonequipment Surfaces: Matching type and color of undamaged, existing adjacent finish.
C. For Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting
heights or other location criteria are not indicated.
B. Install items level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,
except where otherwise indicated.
C. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D. Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING METHODS
A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot -dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system
12/20/01 16050 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
components.
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click -type clamp system.
D. . Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selecting supports.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry all present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least
4; 200-1b- (90-kg-) minimum design load.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install wires in raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's "Standard of
Installation."
B. Conductor Splices: Keep to the minimum and comply with the following:
1. Install splices and taps that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation
ratings than unspliced conductors.
2. Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible with conductor material.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install with at least 12 inches (300 nun) of slack conductor at each outlet.
D. Connect outlets and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
equipment manufacturer's published torque -tightening values for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according
to tightening requirements specified in UL 486A.
E. Install devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
F. Raceway Supports: Comply with NFPA 70 and the following requirements:
1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selecting and installing supports.
2. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.
Provide U bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and
for securing hanger rods and conduits.
3. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type hangers.
4. Spare Capacity: Size supports for multiple conduits so capacity can be increased by a 25
percent minimum in the future.
5. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable iron pipe hangers or clamps.
6. Hanger Rods: 1/4-inch (6-mm) diameter or larger threaded steel, except as otherwise
indicated.
G. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with conductors.
H. Miscellaneous Supports: Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards,
disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, }unction boxes, transformers, and other devices except
where components are mounted directly to structural features of adequate strength.
12/20/01 16050 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
r�
I. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported, except
where used for fixture support; support sheet -metal boxes directly from the building structure or by
bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and
support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.
'^ J. Sleeves: Install for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls, except where core -
drilled holes are used. Install for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire -rated gypsum
walls and of all other fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete
and masonry walls.
K. Firestopping: Apply to cable and raceway penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies.
Perform firestopping as specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping" to reestablish the original fire -
resistance rating of the assembly at the penetration.
L. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, securely fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware
to the building structure. Perform fastening according to the following:
1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw -type nails on wood; toggle bolts on hollow
masonry units; concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry; and by
machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring -tension clamps on steel.
2. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be
used instead of expansion bolts, machine screws, or wood screws.
3. In partitions of light steel construction use sheet -metal screws.
4. Drill holes in concrete beams so holes more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) deep do not cut main
reinforcing bars. r-
5. Drill holes in concrete so holes more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep do not cut main reinforcing
bars. `
6. Fill and seal holes drilled in concrete and not used.
7. Select fasteners so the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof -
test load.
XW M. Install concrete pads and bases according to requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
�-* N. Install utility -metering equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide
grounding and empty conduits as required by company.
0
O. Install identification devices where required.
1. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without
interference with operation .and maintenance of equipment.
2. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical
identification with corresponding designations indicated on the Contract Documents or
required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout the Project.
3. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films
before applying.
4. Identify raceways and cables of certain systems with color banding as follows:
a. Bands: Colored adhesive marking tape. Make each color band 2 inches (51 mm)
wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of 2-color markings in
contact, side by side.
b. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-
m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 feet (8 m) in congested areas.
O 12/20/01 16050 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Colors: As follows:
6 Fire -Alarm System: Red.
5 Tag or label power circuits for future connection and circuits in raceways and enclosures with
other circuits. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull box, junction box,
and outlet box. Color coding may be used for voltage and phase indication.
6 For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and
identification of items controlled byeach individual breaker.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
B. Repair disturbed surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.
3.5 TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Thoroughly clean damaged areas and provide primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree
of damage at each location.
B. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and
application of successive coats.
END OF SECTION 16050
12/20/01 16050 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
"^ A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
.- A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations
for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
i
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wires and cables according to NEMA WC 26.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and as
approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Wires and Cables:
a. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div.
b. American Insulated Wire Corp.; Leviton Manufacturing Co.
�""' 12/20/01 16120 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. BICC Brand -Rex Company.
d. Carol Cable Co., Inc.
e. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
f. Southwire Company.
2. Connectors for Wires and Cables:
a. AMP Incorporated.
b. General Signal; O-Z/Gedney Unit.
C. Monogram Co.; AFC.
d. Square D Co.; Anderson.
e. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
2.2 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES
A. UL-listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable construction, and
rating as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article.
B. Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 3.
C. Thermoplastic Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 5.
b. Cross -Linked Polyethylene Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 7.
E. Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 8.
F. Conductor Material: Copper.
G. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger than
No. 10 AWG.
2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. UL-listed, factory -fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for
application and service indicated. Comply with Projecfs installation requirements and as specified
in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and
cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 WIRE AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
12/20/01 16120 - 2
W
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
��
A. Service Entrance: Type THWN in raceway.
B. Feeders: Type TE HN/THWN, in raceway.
C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
D. Fire Alarm Circuits: Power -limited, fire -protective, signaling circuit cable.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's
"Standard of Installation."
B. Remove existing wires from raceway before pulling in new wires and cables.
C. Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;
compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not
damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
G. Seal around cables penetrating fire -rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
H. Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
I. Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Conductor Splices: Keep to minimum.
B. Install splices and tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings
than conductors being spliced.
C. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with conductor material.
D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 min) of slack.
E. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
12/20/01
16120 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: On installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Correct malfunctioning conductors and cables at Project site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 16120
12/20/01 16120 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
1. Raceways include the following:
a. Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
b. Flexible metal conduit.
C. Electrical metallic tubing.
d. Rigid non-metallic conduit.
2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following:
a. Device boxes. +
b. Floor boxes.
C. Outlet boxes.
d. Pull and junction boxes.
e. Cabinets and hinged -cover enclosures.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
2. Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceways and box supports.
3. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor -box service
fittings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C. RMC: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
D. RNC: Rigid non-metallic conduit.
E. LFMC:
r 12/20/01
16130 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures,
and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: include layout drawings showing components and wiring for nonstandard boxes,
enclosures, and cabinets.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide raceways and boxes specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation."
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to ensure
adequate headroom, working blearance, and access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Metal Conduit and Tubing:
a. Alflex Corp.
b. Anamet, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. _
C. Anixter Brothers, Inc.
d. Carol Cable Co., Inc.
e. Cole -Flex Corp.
f. Electri-Flex Co.
g. Flexcon, Inc.; Coleman Cable Systems, Inc.
h. Grinnell Co.; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.
i. Monogram Co.; AFC.
j. Spiraduct, Inc.
k. Triangle PWC, Inc.
1. Wheatland Tube Co.
2. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing:
12/20/01 16130 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3
4.
W?
6.
7.
a. Anamet, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
b. Amco Corp.
C. Breeze -Illinois, Inc.
d. Cantex Industries; Harsco Corp.
e. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & PIastics Group.
f. Cole -Flex Corp.
g. Condux International; Electrical Products.
h. Electri-Flex Co.
i. George -Ingraham Corp.
j. Hubbell, Inc.; Raco, Inc.
k. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
1. R&G Sloan Manufacturing Co., Inc.
M. Spiraduct, Inc.
n. Thomas & Betts Corp.
Conduit Bodies and Fittings:
a. American Electric; Construction Materials Group.
b. Crouse -Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries.
C. Emerson Electric Co.; Appleton Electric Co.
d. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
e. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
f. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
g. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM.
h. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
Metal Wireways:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Keystone/Rees, Inc.
C. Square D Co.
Nonmetallic Wireways:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
Surface Metal Raceways:
a. Airey-Thompson Co., Inc.; A-T Power Systems.
b. American Electric; Construction Materials Group.
C. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division.
d. Wiremold Co. (The); Electrical Sales Division.
Surface Nonmetallic Raceways:
a. Anixter Brothers, Inc.
b. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division.
C. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Device Division.
d. JBC Enterprises, Inc.; Enduro Fiberglass Systems.
e. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
MR 12/20/01 16130 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
f Panduit Corp.
g. Thenmotools Co.
h. United Telecom; Premier Telecom Products, Inc.
i. Wiremold Co. (The); Electrical Sales Division.
8. Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:
a. American Electric; FL Industries.
b. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division.
C. Crouse -Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries.
d. Electric Panelboard Co., Inc.
e. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
f. Hoffman Engineering Co.; Federal -Hoffman, Inc.
g. Hubbell Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
h. Hubbell Inc.; Raco, Inc.
i. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
j. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
k. Parker Electrical Manufacturing Co.
1. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Electrical Division.
in. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM.
n. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
o. Thomas & Betts Corp.
p. Woodhead Industries, Inc.; Daniel Woodhead Co.
- 2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
a
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
C. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Set -screw type.
D. FMC: Zinc -coated steel.
E. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit/tubing materials.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Material: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down
straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete
system.
C. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply
with NFPA 70.
D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.
12/20/01 16130 - 4
oft
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
2.5 FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
2.6 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Small Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
2.7 ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type .1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.
l . Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
�. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with
flush latch and concealed hingb. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate
wiring of different systems and voltage, and include accessory feet where required for freestanding
equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 WIRING METHODS
A. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods:
1. Exposed: RMC.
2. Concealed: RMC.
3. Underground: RNC.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
B. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods:
1. Exposed: EMT.
""" 12/20/01 16130 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Concealed: EMT.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC; except in wet or damp locations, use
LFMC.
4. Damp or Wet Locations: RMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:
a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
C. Conceal conduit and EMT, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
D. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 nun) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water
pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
E. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom.
F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
G. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
H. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
I. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of
bends is not visible above the finished slab.
J. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane
and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. For intermediate
steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
L. Run concealed raceways, with a minimum of bends, in the shortest practical distance considering the
type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
M. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and
follow the surface contours as much as practical.
1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical.
2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use
factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for
parallel raceways.
N. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight.
1. Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to
12/20/01 16130 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight.
2. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
O. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.
P. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations are not secure
with one locknut, use two locknuts: one inside and one outside the box.
Q. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the hub so
the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so
"" the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc -coated steel or monofilament plastic
line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at
each end of the pull wire.
S. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above
requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two
90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to
comply with these requirements.
T. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and
• semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subj ect to vibration, noise transmission, or movement;
and for all motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground
conductor across flexibleconnections.
U. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material.
Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.
V. Install hinged -cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each comer.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
d„ Installer, that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at the time
of Substantial Completion.
l . Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
3.5 CLEANING
r
A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove
burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and
abrasions.
END OF SECTION 16130
r" 12/20/01 16130 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes various types of receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each product specified.
C. Samples of devices and device plates for color selection and evaluation of technical features.
D. Operation and maintenance data for materials and products specified in this Section to include in the
"Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
~ A. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for devices and installation.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products that are listed and labeled for their applications and
installation conditions and for the environments in which installed.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article
100. —.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Wiring Devices for Owner Furnished Equipment: Match devices to plug connectors for Owner- v
furnished equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Wiring Devices:
a. Bryant Electric, Inc.
12/20/01 16140 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
b. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
C. General Electric Co.
d. Hubbell Inc.
e. Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc.
f. Pass & Seymour/Legrand.
2. Poke -Through, Floor Service Outlets, and Telephone/Power Poles:
a. Hubbell, Inc.
b. Pass & Seymour/LeGrand.
C. Walker Div., Butler Mfg. Co.
d. Wiremold Co.
�.. 2.2 WIRING DEVICES
A. Comply with NEMA Standard WD 1, "General Purpose Wiring Devices."
.w
B. Enclosures: NEMA 1 equivalent, except as otherwise indicated.
.... .. .......
r• C. Color: White except as otherwise indicated or required by Code.
D. Receptacles, Straight -Blade, 20 Amp and Locking Type: Comply with UL Standard 498, "Electrical
Attachment Plugs and Receptacles," heavy-duty grade except as otherwise indicated.
1. Ground -Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFC1) Receptacles: UL Standard 943, "Ground Fault
Circuit Interrupters," feed -through type, with integral NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle
`~ arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on the same circuit. Design units for
installation in a 2-3/4-inch (70-mm) deep outlet box without an adapter.
2. Isolated Ground Receptacles: Equipment grounding contacts are connected only to the green
grounding screw terminal of the device and have inherent electrical isolation from the
mounting strap.
a. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated ground receptacles.
b. Isolation Method: Integral to the receptacle construction and not dependent on
removable parts.
E. Snap Switches: Quiet -type a.c. switches, NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL Standard
20 "General Use Snap Switches," and with Federal Specification W-S-896,
F. Telephone Jack: 8-position, modular, latching -plug type, flush in face of wall plated.
G. Wall Plates: Single and combination types that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices.
Features include the following:
1. Color: Matches wiring device except as otherwise indicated.
2. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with heads colored to match plate fmish.
3. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth plastic.
4. Material for Unfmished Spaces: Smooth -plastic.
"°" 12/20/01 16140 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.
B. Install wall plates when painting is complete.
C. Arrangement of Devices: Except as otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical,
and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall
plates.
D. Protect devices and assemblies during painting.
E. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone/power service poles are installed to suit
the indicated arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Switches: Where 3 or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere where indicated, identify
each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.
2. Receptacles: Identify the panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use machine -
printed, pressure -sensitive, abrasion -resistant label tape on face of plate and durable wire
markers or tags within outlet boxes.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Isolated Ground Receptacles: Connect to isolated grounding conductor routed to designated isolated
equipment ground terminal of electrical system.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each operable
device at least 6 times.
B. Test ground -fault circuit interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations according
to manufacturer recommendations.
C. Replace damaged or defective components.
3.5 CLEANING
A. General: Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or
12/20/01 16140 - 3
PM
PRO
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
improperly painted wall plates or devices.
END OF SECTION 16140
t
12/20/01
16140 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
2.1 GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product Data, including dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings
for lighting control devices.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, for their indicated use and installation conditions by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Comply with 47 CFR 15, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
2.2 PRODUCTS
A. Line -Voltage Surge Protection: Include in all. 120- and 277-V solid-state equipment. Comply
with UL 1449 and with ANSI C62.41 for Category A locations.
B. Time Switches: Solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display complying with UL
917.
1. Astronomic dial. `
2. Two contacts, rated 30 A at 277-V ac, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Two pilot -duty contacts, rated 2 A at 240-V ac, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Eight -day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
5. Skip -day mode.
C. Photoelectric Relays: Solid state, with single -pole, double -throw dry contacts rated to operate
connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input, and complying with UL 773A.
1. Light -Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 3500 fc (0 to 37 673 lx), with an adjustment for
turn-on/turn-off levels.
2. Time Delay: Prevents false operation.
3. Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped
with sun -glare shield and ice preventer.
D. Multipole Contactors and Relays: Electrically operated and mechanically held, and complying
with UL 508 and NEMA ICS 2.
1. Current Rating for Switching: UL listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high -inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent
or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
12/20/01 16145 - 1 y
2.3 EXECUTION
A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and
requirements in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of unit for
wall -mounting devices.
D. Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for low -voltage
connections and Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Systems" for digital circuits.
1. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section
"Raceways and Boxes."
2. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
3. Ground equipment.
4. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A.
E. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
END OF SECTION 16145
12/20/01
16145 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16425 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general and installation
materials and methods.
2. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for identification materials.
3. Division 16 Section "Fuses."
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product and component specified.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard. Show dimensioned plans and elevations, including required
clearances and service space, component and device lists, and a single -line diagram showing main -
and branch -bus current ratings and short -time and short-circuit ratings of switchboard. Include the
following:
1. Utility company metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
2. Schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective
devices.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Details of wiring for power and control and differentiating between
manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring.
C. Manufacturer field service report.
D. Maintenance Data: For switchboards to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include detailed manufacturer's written instructions on adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide switchboard assemblies specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
12/20/01 16425 - 1
e
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 2.
D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboard
equipment, including clearances between switchboard and adjacent surfaces and items.
Switchboards having equal performance characteristics and complying with indicated maximum
dimensions maybe considered.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B. Store so condensation will not occur on or in switchboards. Provide temporary heaters as required to
avoid condensation.
C. Handle switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1. Use only factory -installed lifting provisions.
1:6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
'A. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
B. Determine suitable path for moving switchboard into place considering Project conditions.
C. Verify clearance requirements. Locate switchboard to meet installation tolerances.
D. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit Project conditions.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Fuses: 3 spares of each type and rating of fuse and fusible devices used. Include spares for the
following:
1. Potential transformer fuses.
2. Control power fuses.
3. Fuses for fusible switches.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
roll 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. — Preferred Manufacturer
2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division.
3. Square D Co.
12/20/01 16425 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Front -Connected, Front -Accessible Switchboard: Panel -mounted main device, panel -mounted
branches, and sections front and rear aligned.
1. Main Device: Individually fixed mounted above 1200A.
2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted through 1200A, individually fixed mounted above 1200A.
B. Ratings: Provide nominal system voltage, continuous main -bus amperage, and short-circuit current
ratings as indicated.
C. Nominal System Voltage: 480/277 V, 60 Hz.
2.3 FABRICATION AND FEATURES
A. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory -applied finish in manufacture's standard gray finish over
a rust -inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
B. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated compartment and section meeting utility company's
requirements when required by the local utility. If separate vertical section is required for utility
metering, match and align with basic switchboard.
Bus Transition and Incoming Line Pull Sections: When required, matched and aligned with basic
switchboard.
D. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.
E. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard: When required, include the following features:
1. Adequate ventilation to maintain air temperature in pull box within same limits as
switchboard.
2. Set back from front to clear circuit -breaker removal mechanism.
3. Removable covers forming top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear are easily removable for
drilling and cutting.
4. Bottom of insulating, fire-resistant material with separate holes for cable drops into
switchboards.
5. Cable supports arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables indicated,
including those for future installation.
F. Buses and Connections: 3 phase, 4 wire, except as otherwise indicated. Features as follows:
1. Phase- and Neutral -Bus Material: Hard -drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity with feeder
circuit -breaker line connections.
2. Load Terminals: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped with pressure connectors for
outgoing circuit conductors.
3. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm) minimum size, drawn -temper copper of 98 percent
conductivity; equipped with pressure connectors for feeder- and branch -circuit ground
conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway
ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.
12/20/01 16425 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
W
4. Main Phase Buses, Neutral Buses, and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity the
entire length of the switchboard main and distribution sections. No tapered bus allowed.
Provide for future extensions from both ends.
5. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking bus bolt tightness.
6. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of the phase buses, except as indicated, and
equipped with approved pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Bus
extensions for busway feeder neutral bus is braced.
2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Enclosed, Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: Thermal magnetic, NEMA AB 1, handle lockable.
1. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated
and interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application, including switching fluorescent lighting
loads or heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3. Circuit Breakers, 400 A and Larger: Field -adjustable solid state trip units with adjustable
long time pickup and delay, short time pick up and delay, and adjustable instantaneous pickup
(CSI), 80% rated:
4. Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power -distribution connectors for number, size, and material of
conductors indicated.
5. Shunt Trip: Where indicated or required by code.
'B. Enclosed, Insulated -Case Circuit Breaker: Above 2500A, 100% rated, encased power circuit
breaker.
E
1. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated
and interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current. Provide field adjustable solid
state trip units with adjustable long time pickup and delay, short time pickup and delay,
adjustable instantaneous pickup (CSI).
2. Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power -distribution connectors for number, size, and material of
conductors indicated.
C. Provide adjustable ground fault pickup and delay where indicated or required by code.
D. Future Devices: Where indicated, equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus
connections, and appurtenances designed for overcurrent protective device types and ampere ratings
indicated.
2.5 OTHER CIRCUIT CONTROL AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Factory -installed and factory -tested devices of types listed below, with indicated ratings, settings,
and features.
B. Factory mounted with UL-recognized mounting device.
2.6 INSTRUMENTATION
F"_ A. Multifunction Digital Metering Monitor: Microprocessor -based unit suitable for 4-wire systems and
""" 12/20/01 16425 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
with the following features:
1. Switch selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances
as indicated:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b. Phase -to -Phase Voltages, 3 Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
C. Phase -to -Neutral Voltages, 3 Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from 5 to
60 minutes.
i. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent. Accumulated values
unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.
j. Total harmonic distortion (THD), voltage and current.
k. KYZ pulse outlet.
1. RS485 communications output.
M. Date/time stamping.
2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment
door.
2.7 IDENTIFICATION E
A. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
B. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Compartment Nameplates: Engraved laminated -plastic or metal nameplate for each
compartment, mounted with corrosion -resistant screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboard for compliance with installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of switchboards.
1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboards level and plumb as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions
12/20/01 16425 - 5
er*
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
and NEMA PB 2.1.
` B. Support switchboards on concrete housekeeping bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
D. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount printed, basic operating instructions for switchboards,
including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of
finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on the front of
switchboards.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect switchboards and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed
by manufacturer.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
•A. Identify field -installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Identify field -installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Division 16
Section "Electrical Identification." -
C. Install compartment nameplates.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Make insulation -resistance tests of each switchboard bus, component, and connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuits.
2. Make continuity tests of each circuit.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original
finish.
►�, 12/20/01 16425 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to demonstrate and train
Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:
1. To identify each switchboard location.
2. To instruct in function, operation, and maintenance of each component.
3. To instruct in each distinct procedure and schedule related to servicing and preventive
maintenance.
END OF SECTION 16425
12/20/01
16425 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16452 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUNMARY
A.
This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for
grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified
in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for manhole bonding and
grounding requirements.
2. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for requirements for grounding conductors.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for grounding rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings.
C.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Comply with UL 467.
C.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Apache Grounding; Nashville Wire Products.
12/20/01 16452 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Boggs: H. L. Boggs & Co.
3. Chance: A. B. Chance Co.
4. Dossert Corp.
5. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
6. Galvan Industries, Inc.
7. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc.
8. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.
9. Ideal Industries, Inc.
10. ILSCO.
11. Kearney.
12. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.
13. Lightning Master Corp.
14. Lyncole XIT Grounding.
15. O-Z/Gedney Co.
16. Raco, Inc.
17. Salisbury: W.H. Salisbury & Co., Utility.
18. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
19. Utilco Co.
2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
A. Governing Requirements: Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of
. National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size,
rating, and quantity indications govern.
t
2.3 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables." Conform to NEC Table 8, except as
otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding.
1. Material: Copper. Use only copper wire for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in
direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation.
C. Grounding -Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
D. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, except as otherwise indicated.
E. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS
A. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed -copper bars of rectangular cross section.
B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with
12/20/01 16452 - 2
l�
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
a,
copper ferrules.
C. Bonding Straps: Soft copper, 0.05 inch (1 mm) thick and 2 inches (50 mm) wide, except as
indicated.
2.5 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Pressure Connectors: High -conductivity -plated units.
B. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty type.
C. Exothermic -Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's written
instructions for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.
2.6 GROUNDING ELECTRODES AND TEST WELLS
A. Grounding Rods: Copper -clad steel.
1. Size: 3/4 inch by 120 inches (19 by 3000 mm).
B. Test Wells: Fabricate from 15-inch- (400-mm-) long, square -cut sections of 8-inch- (200-mm-)
diameter, Schedule 80, PVC pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply withNEC Article 250 for types, sizes, and quantities of
equipment grounding conductors, except where specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than
required by NEC are indicated.
1. Install equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the items below in addition
to those required by Code:
+— a. - Feeders and branch circuits.
b. Lighting circuits.
C. Receptacle circuits.
d. Single-phase motor or appliance branch circuits.
e. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits.
f. Flexible raceway runs.
g. Armored and metal -clad cable runs.
2. Busway Supply Circuits: Install separate equipment grounding conductor from the grounding
bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding -bar terminal
on busway.
3. Isolated Grounding -Receptacle Circuits: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding
conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from
raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at the equipment grounding -
conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, except as otherwise indicated.
4. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways
12/20/01 16452 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
5. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct -mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and above, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond
conductor to each unit and to air duct.
6. Water Heater, Heat -Tracing, and Antifrost Heater Circuits: Install a separate equipment
grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat -tracing assembly, and antifrost heating
cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
B. Signal and Communication Systems: 'For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication systems, provide a No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in PVC
raceway from grounding -electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet,
and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6-by-50-by-300-nun) grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
C. Separately Derived Systems: Where NEC requires grounding, ground according to NEC Paragraph
250-26.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment according to NEC requirements, except where
• Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.
B. Grounding Conductors: Route along the shortest and straightest paths possible, except as otherwise
indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain,
impact, or damage.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select
connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact
will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot -tin -coated materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact
points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum -to -galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and
mechanical clamps.
4. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic -Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections, except those at test wells. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that
are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C. Equipment Grounding -Wire Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure -type grounding
lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors maybe terminated with winged pressure -type
connectors.
12/20/01 16452 - 4
9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where these requirements are not available, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
E. Compression -Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential
pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of
connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a
connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
F. Moisture Protection: Where insulated grounding conductors are connected to grounding rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of
insulation and cable.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to a megger test at each location where a maximum
ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at
ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than 2 full days after the last trace of
precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or
seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground
resistance. Perform tests by the 2-point method according to IEEE 81.
B. Maximum grounding to resistance values are as follows:
1. Equipment Rated 500 tb 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: Where resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner
promptly and in elude recommendations to reduce ground resistance and to accomplish
recommended work.
D. Report: Prepare test reports, of ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of
weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test
results.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, except as otherwise indicated. Where sod has been removed, replace it
as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of
dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include topsoiling, fertilizing,
liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Division 2 Section "Landscaping."
Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.
END OF SECTION 16452
r" 12/20/01 16452 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes lighting and power panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated
600 V and less.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general materials and
installation methods.
2. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labeling materials.
1:3 SUBMITTALS
'A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, accessory item, and component specified.
B. Shop Drawings: For panelboards. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show
tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include the following:
1. Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Bus configuration and current ratings.
3. Short-circuit current rating of panelboard.
4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and
auxiliary components.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Details of schematic diagram including control wiring and differentiating
between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.
F. Maintenance Data: For panelboard components to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for testing circuit breakers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
12/20/01 16470 - 1
I
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Keys: 6 spares of each type for panelboard cabinet lock.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.
2. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc.
3. Square D Co.
2.2 PANELBOARD FABRICATION
A. Enclosures: Flush- or surface -mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated
to meet environmental conditibns at installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps, unless otherwise indicated. Front for surface -
mounted panelboards shall be same dimensions as box. Fronts for flush panelboards shall overlap
box, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panelboard door.
D. Main and Neutral Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity. Full rated neutral.
E. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
F. Equipment Ground Bus: Copper. Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment ground
conductors. Bonded to box.
G. Service Equipment Approval: Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service
disconnect.
H. Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for
the overcurrent protective device ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices.
I. Special Features: As noted on the drawings, include the following features for panelboards:
1. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch -circuit equipment ground conductors;
insulated from box.
12/20/01 16470 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box with standard door within hinged trim
cover.
J. Feed -through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
B. Doors: In panelboard front, with concealed hinges. Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock, all
keyed alike.
2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Doors: In panelboard front, secure door with vault -type latch with tumbler lock, all keyed alike.
B. Branch -Circuit Breakers: Where overcurrent protective devices are indicated to be circuit breakers,
use bolt -on circuit breakers, except circuit breakers 225-A frame size and greater may be plug-in
type where individual positive -locking device requires mechanical release for removal.
2.5. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, handle lockable.
1. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices and
interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application, including Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads and Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating
equipment.
3. Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power -distribution connectors for number, size, and material of
conductors indicated.
2.6 CONTROLLERS
A. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held general-purpose controller, with
current rating, poles, and connections; factory mounted in indicated panelboard.
1. Control Power Source: Control -power transformer of capacity indicated, with fused primary
and secondary terminals, and connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.
2. Control Power Source: 24 Volt from Emergency Management System (EMS).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1
12/20/01 16470 - 3 "`
r+�
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
i
0
B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount flush panelboards uniformly flush
with wall finish.
D. Circuit Directory: Type directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads.
Obtain approval before installing.
E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
F. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups, and bundle and wrap with wire ties
after completing load balancing.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field -installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Identify field -installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Division 16
Section "Electrical Identification."
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved laminated -plastic or metal
nameplates mounted with corrosion -resistant screws.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards.
B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.
3.4
OR
A.
A.
B.
12/20/01
CONNECTIONS
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to
manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B..
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Make insulation -resistance tests of each panelboard bus, component, and connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuits.
2. Make continuity tests of each circuit.
Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate
product capability and compliance with requirements.
16470 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit breakers.
Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest.
C. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 2 months after Final Acceptance,
conduct load -balancing measurements and make circuit changes as follows:
1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by Owner.
2. Perform load -balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the
facility. Make special arrangements with Owner to avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services
such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving
equipment.
3. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not
acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as required to meet this minimum requirement.
D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 2 months after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of, each panelboard. Remove fronts to make joints and
connections accessible to a portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scanning of each
panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an approved infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device used.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying panelboards checked and
describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action
taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges.
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 16470
12/20/01 16470 - 5 -
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16475 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fuses.
2. Spare fuse cabinet.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each fuse type specified.
i
C. Product Data for each fuse type specified. Include the following:
1. Descriptive data and time -current curves.
2. Let -through current curves for fuses with current -limiting characteristics.
3. Coordination charts and tables and related data.
4. Fuse size for elevator feeder and disconnect applications.
D. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results.
E. Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from one source and by a single manufacturer.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide fuses specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
i
12/20/01 16475 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spare Fuses: Furnish quantity equal to 20 percent of each fuse type and size installed, but not
less than 1 set of 3 of each type and size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses by one of the following:
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div.
2. Gould Shawmut.
3. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.
2.2 SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Cabinet: Wall -mounted, 0.05-inch- (1.27-mm-) thick steel unit with full-length, recessed piano -
hinged door with key -coded cam lock and pull.
1. Size: Adequate for orderly storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity
minimum. i
2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
3. Identification: Stencil legend "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) letters on door.
4. Fuse Pullers: For each size fuse.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions to verify proper fuse
locations, sizes, and characteristics.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Main Service: Class L, fast acting.
B. Main Feeders: Class J, time delay.
C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
D. Other Branch Circuits: Class J.
12/20/01 16475 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so fuse ratings are readable without removing fuse.
B. Install spare fuse cabinet.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install typewritten labels on inside door of each fused switch to indicate fuse replacement
information.
END OF SECTION 16475
^
^
^
^
"" 12/20/01 16475 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16476 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted switches and circuit breakers used for the following:
1. Feeder and equipment disconnect switches.
2. Feeder branch -circuit protection.
3. Motor disconnect switches.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs and receptacles, and snap
switches used for disconnect switches.
2. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for individually enclosed, fused power -circuit devices
used as feeder disconnect switches.
3. Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for disconnect switches, circuit breakers, and accessories specified in this Section.
C. Product Data for switches, circuit breakers, and accessories specified in this Section. Include the
following:
1. Descriptive data and time -current curves.
2. Let -through current curves for circuit breakers with current -limiting characteristics.
3. Coordination charts and tables and related data.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating between
manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
F. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results.
G. Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1.
12/20101 16476 - 1 -
a-,
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain disconnect switches and circuit breakers from one source and by a single
A^^ manufacturer.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide disconnect switches and circuit breakers specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled.
r--
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide disconnect switches and circuit
breakers by one of the following:
1. Fusible Switches:
a. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division.
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
C. Square D Co.
.� 2. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers:
a. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division.
,..., b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
C. Square D Co.
3. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground Fault Trip:
a. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division.
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
'^ C. Square D Co.
2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.
B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate
specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2
padlocks, and interlocked with cover in CLOSED position.
C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental
'" 12/20/01 16476 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
conditions of installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS -
A. Enclosed, Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with lockable handle.
B. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated and
interrupting rating to meet available fault current.
C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application, including switching fluorescent lighting loads or
heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
D. Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power -distribution connectors for number, size, and material of
conductors indicated.
E. Enclosure: NEMA AB, 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental ^
conditions of installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches and circuit breakers in locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Install disconnect switches and circuit breakers level and plumb.
C. Install wiring between disconnect switches, circuit breakers, control, and indication devices.
D. Connect disconnect switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to ground as
indicated and instructed by manufacturer.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
E. Identify each disconnect switch and circuit breaker according to requirements specified in
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
F. Identify each disconnect switch and circuit breaker according to requirements specified in
Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
12/20/01 16476 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for disconnect switches and Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit
breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
�^* 3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Set field -adjustable disconnect switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.
END OF SECTION 16476
"' 12/20/01 16476 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16481 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ac motor -control devices rated 600 V and less that are supplied as enclosed
units.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general materials and
installation methods.
2. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labeling materials.
3. Division 16 Section "Fuses."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
0
A. Product Data: For products specified in this Section. Include dimensions, ratings, and data on
features and components.
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
C. Maintenance Data: For products to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
D. Load -Current and Overload -Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and -
arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full -load currents.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain, within 100 miles (160 km) of Project site, a service center
capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain similar motor -control devices through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide motor controllers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. _
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
1.5 COORDINATION
12/20/01 16481 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to
which they connect.
B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with the ratings and
characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence, and the duty cycle of
the motor and load.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
•- covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spare Fuses and Incandescent Indicating Lamps: Furnish 1 spare for every 5 installed units,
but not less. than 1 set of 3 of each kind.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D Co.
2.2 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A with toggle action and overload element.
2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across the line, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer, unless otherwise
indicated. Include a control power transformer with adequate capacity to operate connected pilot,
indicating and control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity.
C. Combination Controller: Factory -assembled combination controller and disconnect switch with or
without overcurrent protection as indicated.
1. Fusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection -type
fuse clips rated for fuses indicated. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection
according to IEC 947-4-1, as certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.
2. Nonfusible Disconnect: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch.
3. Circuit -Breaker Disconnect: NEMA AB 1, motor -circuit protector with field -adjustable
short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked -rotor amperes.
"""" 12/20/01 16481 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics selected to protect motor against
voltage unbalance and single phasing.
E. Multispeed-Motor Controller: Match controller to motor type, application, and number of speeds;
include the following accessories:
1. Compelling relay ensures motor will start only at low speed.
2. Accelerating relay ensures properly timed acceleration through speeds lower than that
selected.
3. Decelerating relay ensures automatically timed deceleration through each speed.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Description: Flush or surface -mounted cabinets. NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated to
meet environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
2.5_ ACCESSORIES
A. Devices are factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push -Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push -Button Station: Momentary -break push-button station with a factory -applied
hasp arranged so a padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit
open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time -delay relays.
E. Phase -Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for
hard -wired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply
circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load; and configuration
of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
C. Use fractional -horsepower manual controllers for single-phase motors, unless otherwise indicated.
12/20/01 16481 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
D. Hand -Off -Automatic Selector Switches: In covers of manual and magnetic controllers of motors
started and stopped by automatic controls or interlocks with other equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install independently mounted motor -control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory -authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly and connection of components, including the pretesting and adjustment
�-. of solid-state controllers.
C. Location: Locate controllers within sight of motors controlled, unless otherwise indicated.
D. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural -steel channels
bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks conforming to Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
E. Install freestanding equipment on concrete housekeeping bases conforming to Division 3 Section
"Cast -in -Place Concrete."
F. Motor -Controller Fuses: Install indicated fuses in each fusible switch.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify motor -control components and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
B. Identify motor -control components and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between motor -control devices according to Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect hand -off -automatic switch and other automatic control devices where available.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control devices that have
no safety functions when switch is in the hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor -control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for
safety -type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high -temperature cutouts,
and motor overload protectors.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings. Tighten field -connected connectors and
""" 12/20/01 16481 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
terminals, including screws and bolts, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening
values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing motor controllers and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Sections 7.5, 7.6, and 7.16. Certify compliance with test parameters. —
2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to
match original finish. Clean devices internally, using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to demonstrate solid-state and variable -
speed controllers and train Owner's maintenance personnel.
r, 1. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and maintenance as specified in
Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." Include training relating to equipment operation and
maintenance procedures.
2. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 16481
12/20/01 16481 - 5 T`
on
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16512 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of exterior lighting fixture work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B. Types of exterior lighting fixtures in this section include fixtures as described in the lighting
fixture schedule.
C. Applications of exterior lighting fixtures required for this project include the following:
1. Outdoor area lighting.
2. Automobile Parking Lots
D. wires/cables, raceways' and electrical boxes and fittings are specified in Division 16 Basic'
Materials and Methods sections, "Wires and Cables, "Raceways," and "Electrical Boxes and
Fittings".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Pre -Bid Approvals: At least 10 days prior to the project bid date, all bidding electrical
contractors shall submit to the Engineer a list of manufacturers whose building lighting
products will be supplied on the project in the event that they are awarded the project
contract. All intended product substitutions shall be clearly indicated therein with specific
product or fixture types indicated along with each substitute manufacturer.
B. Only those substitutions specifically allowed for by this specification will be considered.
Failure to submit for pre bid approvals or failure to obtain pre -bid approval on any proposed
lighting product substitution will require the successfully bidding contractor to provide the
products specified herein and on the Contract Drawings.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on exterior lighting fixtures, including photometric
data (optical performance rendered by independent testing laboratory) such as coefficients of
utilization, iso-footcandle curves, brightness values, distribution, maximum and average
illumination values and efficiency. Submit manufacturer's data for all standards, supports and
mounting brackets, and any other products determined necessary by the Architect or Engineer.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each
fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order with proposed fixture and
P" 12/20/01 16512 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
accessories clearly indicated on each sheet.
E. Submittal of fixtures listed by manufacturer's name and catalog number on Lighting Fixture
Schedule shall include the following:
A current manufacturer's data sheet (copies not acceptable) or construction drawing
for each light fixture type. Duplication of types on a single data sheet or drawing is
not acceptable.
Fixture options, finishes, electrical characteristics, and lamp type clearly called out on
submittal.
F. Submittal of fixtures listed only with manufacturer's name on Lighting Fixture Schedule shall
include all of the above in addition to the following:
1. Luminaire photometric test report issued by an approved independent testing
laboratory. Tests shall have been conducted in accordance with the recommended
testing procedures of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America and
include the following information:
a. Candlepower data, presented both graphically and numerically, in 10 degree
increments (0 degree, 5 degree, 15 degree, 25 degree, etc.). Data shall be
developed for both up and down light, normal, parallel, and at 22.5 degree,
45 degree and 67.5 degree when light output is asymmetrical.
.:: b. Zonal lumens stated numerically at 0-30 degrees, 0-40 degrees, 0-60 degrees
and 0-180 degrees.
G. Submittal of unlisted fixtures for approval as allowed by "or approved equal" indications
on the Lighting Fixture Schedule shall include all of the above. Products submitted for
approval on an "or equal" basis must correspond to manufacturers having first received -�
pre -bid approval for the fixture type in question. Other intended substitutions will not be
considered. Submittal of fixture samples may be requested at the time of shop drawing
review.
H. Special Finishes: Submit chips for all finishes and colors noted on the schedule to be
other than manufacturer's standard finish, to specifically match another project finish, or
to be selected by the Architect. Chip shall be minimum 4" x 4" and shall be a true
sample of the finish on the fixture material and not merely the color. Submittal shall
include a complete description of the finishing process.
I. Calculations: At time of shop drawing submittal, submit computer generated
calculations of predicted maintained horizontal illuminance on site parking areas and
roadways based on proposed products. Calculations shall provide a graphic array of
calculated illuminances depicting plan geometries and shall assume an overall
maintenance factor of 0.85.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of exterior lighting fixtures of types —
12/20/01 16512 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 years.
B. Installer: Qualified with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with
exterior lighting fixture work similar to that required for projects.
C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation construction of exterior
lighting fixtures, lighting poles, standards and luminaires.
- D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA Standard Publications
pertaining to general exterior, roadway and parking area lighting units.
E. ANSI and ANSVIES: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI and ANSIIIES
standards pertaining to exterior lighting fixtures and components.
F. UL Compliance: Provide exterior lighting fixtures which are UL-listed and labeled.
G. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast
Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver exterior lighting fixtures in factory -fabricated containers or wrappings, which
properly protect fixtures from construction debris and physical damage.
B. Store exterior lighting ;fixtures in original wrappings in a clean dry place. Protect from
weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and damage.
C. Handle exterior lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring. Do not
install damaged fixtures or components; remove units from site and replace with new.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate with other electrical work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and
raceways, to properly interface installation of exterior lighting fixtures with other work.
B. Sequence exterior lighting installation with other work to reduce possibility of damage and
soiling of fixtures during remainder of construction period.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each exterior lighting fixture
and accessory; including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Include that data, product
data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of
Division 1.
" 12/20/01 16512 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Extra Stock:
Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 10 percent (but not less than one
lamp in each case) of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver
replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space, and obtain receipt.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
manufacturer's indicated herein or on the Lighting Fixture Schedule, unless otherwise noted
and as follows:
1. For lighting fixtures where only one manufacturer is listed, the Electrical Contractor
shall provide the product listed. No substitutions will be allowed.
2. For lighting fixtures where more than one manufacturer is listed, the Electrical
Contractor shall select one for each fixture type and shall use that fixture on the entire
project.
3. For lighting fixtures where one or more manufacturer is listed followed by "or
approved equal", the Electrical Contractor shall select (one of) the product(s) listed or
a substitute product approved by the engineer as being substantially equal to the
product specified and shall use that fixture on the entire project. The Engineer
- retains the right, however, to require the Contractor to provide products of the
manufacturer(s) specified.
2.2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. General: Provide corrosion -resistant, aluminum luminaires of sizes, types and ratings listed in
the Lighting Fixture Schedule and indicate on the drawings. Provide fixtures complete with,
but not necessarily limited to, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, wiring and
mounting accessories compatible with support system, walls, foundations and earthwork."
Provide aiming and positive locking devices in adjustable fixtures, and aiming stop for
adjustable lamps. Provide for the dissipation of lampholder and ballast heat through fixture
housings. Provide wire mesh corrosion resistant screens in vent holes of outdoor fixtures.
B. Comply with additional fixture requirements noted on drawings.
C. Ballasts:
1. General: Ballasts shall comply with all applicable UL, CBM and ANSI standards
and shall be UL listed. All ballasts shall be high power factor (H.P.F.) 90%
minimum. Capacitors in ballasts shall not have PCBs. Ballasts shall be warranted
against failure due to defects in material and workmanship for a minimum period of
one (1) year from date of installation acceptance regardless of the date of
manufacture. If the manufacturer's standard warranty begins at date of manufacture,
the Electrical Contractor shall obtain from the ballast manufacturer agreement to the
preceeding specifications. Such agreement shall be signed by a person in authority
and shall be submitted with shop drawings. All ballasts shall be grounded per NEC
Article 410-E.
D. High -Intensity -Discharge -Lamp Ballasts: Provide HID lamp ballasts, externally fused,
12/20/01 16512 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
capable of operating lamp types with ratings indicated and of starting lamps between -20° F
and 105°F; constant wattage auto -transformer type, high power factor, core and coil assembly
encapsulated in non -melt resin; provide non -PCB capacitor outside ballast encapsulation for
easy field replacement; enclose assembly in drawn aluminum alloy or cast housing(s) with
necessary wiring compartments and provisions for electrical connections and devices; mount
assembly with necessary hardware and vibration dampers. Provide Type M-101 ballasts for
low -voltage (75/70E-17) medium screw base metal halide lamps. Encase ballasts in
weather-proof, water -tight enclosures and provide proper outdoor type wiring devices.
F. Lamps:
1. General: All lamps shall be fumished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.
Install all lamps at time fixtures are mounted. All burned -out lamps shall be replaced
by the Electrical Contractor prior to application for final inspection or before project
is accepted by Owner. Lamps listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shall take
precedence over this specification where they differ.
2. Lighting Sources:
a. Metal Halide lamps shall be clear or diffuse as noted and burning position
shall match fixture design requirements.
3. Manufacturer: All lamps in a source group shall be manufactured by the same
manufacturer. Approved manufacturer's are General Electric Co., Sylvania or Osram._
G. Lighting Fixture Schedule:
i
1. Fixture schedule on the drawings includes type designation, description, application, lamp
information, manufacturer's model or series number, and special requirements such as finishes,
built-in receptacles and switches, control devices, etc.
2. Model or series number specified in the schedule is for identification of type of fixture only to
- establish basic quality and construction. Exact mounting, lens, ballast type, and other components
and features shall conform to the details on the drawings and shall meet the requirements of this
section of the specifications.
2.3 LIGHTING STANDARDS AND POLES
A. General: Exterior area lighting units of sizes, types and ratings indicated, complete with, but not limited to,
poles/standards, brackets, luminaires and other components and accessories required for complete exterior
area lighting systems. Provide Bussman Type "HEB" in -line waterproof fuse holders within each poles
access for each phase conductor feeding overhead luminaires(s).
B. Metal Lighting Standards: Provide metal, raceway -type, lighting poles and standards, of sizes and types
indicated, comprised of shafts, luminaire bracket arms, and tenon joints. Equip with grounding connections
readily accessible from handhole access doors; and constructed of the following materials and additional
construction features:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Configuration: Anchor base type with handhole and cover where indicated.
3. Finishes: Paint finishes over corrosion resisting coatings.
4. Metal Lighting Standard Accessories: Provide accessories for metal lighting
standards, including anchor bolts, as recommended by standard manufacturer, of
0" 12/20/01 16512 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
sizes and materials needed to fulfill loading and erection application requirements
and tamper proof hardware for handhole access door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed, and substrate
which will support lighting fixtures. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to
proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Install exterior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with
fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's
"Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure
that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.
B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B, and the National Electrical
Code.
C. Fasten electrical lighting fixtures and brackets securely to indicated structural supports; and
ensure, that installed fixtures are plum and level.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Provide equipment grounding connections for exterior lighting fixtures. Tighten connections
to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective
grounds.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. At the Date of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in exterior lighting fixtures which are
observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by the
Architect.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Aim adjustable lighting fixtuies and lamps as directed by the Architect/Engineer in night test
of system. Verify that measured illuminance values comply with isolux plot diagram values.
B. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.
C. Protect installed fixtures from damage during construction period.
12/20/01 16512 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Upon completion of installation of exterior lighting fixtures, and associated electrical supply
circuitry, apply electrical energy to circuitry to demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
END OF SECTION 16512
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16515 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and
accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Emergency Lighting Unit: A fixture with integral emergency battery -powered supply and the means
for controlling and charging the battery. It is also known as an emergency light set.
B. Fixture: A complete lighting unit, exit sign, or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and
parts required to distribute light, position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to power supply.
Internal battery -powered exit signs and emergency lighting units also include a battery and the means
for controlling and recharging the battery. Emergency lighting units include ones with and without
integral lamp heads.
C. Average Life: The time after which 50 percent fails and 50 percent survives under normal
conditions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange Product
Data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the
following:
1. Outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures.
2. Electrical Ratings and Photometric Data: Certified results of independent laboratory tests for
fixtures and lamps.
3. Battery and charger data for emergency lighting units.
C. Shop Drawings detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating dimensions, weights, method of field
assembly, components, features, and accessories.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for control system showing both factory -installed and field -
installed wiring for specific system of this Project, and differentiating between factory -installed and
field -installed wiring.
12/20/01 16515 - 1
I
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
E. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that their products comply
with specified requirements.
F. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results specified in Part 3 of this Section.
G. Maintenance data for fixtures to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed
and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures, emergency lighting units, and accessory components
specified in this Section that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and installation conditions
on Project.
1. Special Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures for use in damp or wet locations, underwater,
and recessed in combustible construction that are specifically listed and labeled for such use.
Provide fixtures for use in hazardous (classified) locations that are listed and labeled for the
specific hazard:
2. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
C. Coordinate fixtures, mounting hardware, and trim with ceiling system and other items, including
711 work of other trades, required to be mounted on ceiling or in ceiling space.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fixtures that maybe incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Interior Lighting Fixture
Schedule.
2.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges.
12/20/01 16515 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and
sagging.
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under
operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames,
lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in
operating position.
D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, except as otherwise indicated:
I. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces; 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed
crystal glass, except as otherwise indicated.
1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and
UV radiation.
2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch (3 mm) minimum; except where greater thickness is indicated.
'.F. Fixture Support Components: Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
1. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as fixture.
2. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubes with single canopy arranged to
mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
3. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded steel rod.
4. Hook Hanger: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug.
G. Fluorescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570.
H. Fluorescent Ballasts: Electronic integrated circuit, solid-state, full -light -output, electronic type
compatible with lamps and lamp combinations to which connected.
1. Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).
2. Labeling by Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM).
3. Type: Class P, high power factor, except as otherwise indicated.
4. Sound Rating: "A" rating, except as otherwise indicated.
5. Voltage: Match connected circuits.
6. Lamp Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
7. Minimum Power Factor: 90 percent.
8. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of Ballast Current: Less than 20 percent.
9. Conform to FCC Regulations Part 15, Subpart J for electromagnetic interference.
10. Conform to IEEE C62.41, Category A, for resistance to voltage surges for normal and
common modes.
11. Multilamp Ballasts: Use 2, 3, or 4 lamp ballasts for multilamp fixtures where possible.
12. Lamp -ballast connection method does not reduce normal rated life of lamps.
12/20/01 16515 - 3 �`
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
P"
13. Low -Temperature Fluorescent Ballasts: Comply with above requirements, except ballast may
be Class P electromagnetic type. Starting temperature is minus 20 deg C or colder.
14. Dimming Ballasts: Electronic type providing smooth dimming over a minimum range from
100 to 5 percent light output. Listed for use with specific fluorescent dimming system
provided. Dimming systems are specified in Division 16 Section "Lighting Control
Equipment." Fluorescent wall dimmers are specified in Division 16 Section "Wiring
Devices."
I. High -Intensity -Discharge (HID) Fixtures: Conform to UL 1572.
J. HID Ballasts: Conform to UL 1029 and ANSI C82.4. Include the following features, except as
otherwise indicated.
1. Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulating high -power -factor type, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Operating Voltage: Match system voltage.
3. Single -Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of minus 30 deg C.
4. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 40 deg C.
5. Open circuit operation will not reduce average life.
K. Auxiliary, Instant -On, Quartz System: Automatically switches quartz lamp when fixture is initially
energized and when momentary power outages occur. Turns quartz lamp off automatically when
HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output.
L. Incandescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1571.
t
M. Exit Signs: Conform to UL 924 and the following:
1. Sign Colors: Conform to local code.
2. Minimum Height of Letters: Conform to local code.
3. Arrows: Include as indicated.
4. Lamps for AC Operation: LED.
2.3 LAMPS
A. Comply with ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp.
B. Noncompact Fluorescent Lamp Life: Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used
on rapid start circuits.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's standard, except as otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion -resistant treatment or
primer, free of streaks, runs, stains, blisters, and similar defects.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
12/20/01 16515 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Set units plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's
written instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Support fixtures according to requirements of
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Support for Recessed and Semirecessed Grid -Type Fluorescent Fixtures: Units may not be
supported from suspended ceiling support system. Install ceiling a minimum of 4 support rods or
wires for each fixture, located not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from fixture corners.
1. Install support clips for recessed fixtures, securely fastened to ceiling grid members, at or near
each fixture corner.
2. Fixtures Smaller than Ceiling Grid: Install a minimum of 4 rods or wires for each fixture and
locate at corner of ceiling grid where fixture is located. Do not support fixtures by ceiling
acoustical panels.
C. Support for Suspended Fixtures: Brace pendants and rods over 48 inches (1200 min) long to limit
swinging. Support stem -mounted, single -unit, suspended fluorescent fixtures with twin -stem
hangers. For continuous rows, use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end.
D. Lamping: Where specific lamp designations are not indicated, lamp units according to
manufacturer's instructions.
3.2. CONNECTIONS
A. Ground lighting units. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals,_ including grounding
connections, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replaced damaged fixtures and components.
B. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components.
C. Replace fixtures that show evidence of corrosion during Project warranty period.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
END OF SECTION 16515
12/20/01 16515 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
�. and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire alarm systems, including manual stations, detectors, signal equipment,
controls, and devices.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Electric -Drive, Vertical Fire Pumps" for coordinating fire alarm system
interconnections.
2. Division 15 Section "Fire Sprinkler Systems" for coordinating flow, pressure, and valve
tamper switch requirements.
1.3 DEFINITION
A. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Zoned, noncoded, addressable, microprocessor -based fire -detection and alarm system with
manual and automatic alarm initiation.
B. Signal Transmission: Multiplex signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.
C. Audible Alarm indication: Homs which produce a sound -pressure level of 90 dB, measured 10 feet
from the horn.
D. Visual Alarm Indication: By xenon -strobe -type units.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of system component specified including dimensioned plans and
elevations showing minimum clearances and installed features and devices. Include list ofmaterials
and Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)-listing data.
R"" 12/20/01 16721 - 1
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
C. Shop Drawings showing details of graphic annunciator.
D. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating clearly between factory- and field -installed
wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections
identified. Make all diagrams specific to this Project and distinguish between field and factory
wiring.
E. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations. and routings of raceway connections.
F. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
G. System operation description covering this specific Project, including method of operation and
supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for all manually and automatically
initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are
unacceptable.
H. Operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.
I. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of fire alarm system components certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
J. Maintenance data for fire alarm systems to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1. Include data for each type of product, including all features and operating
sequences, both automatic and manual. Include recommendations for spare parts to be stocked at the
site. Provide the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations that carry stock
of repair parts for the system to be furnished.
K. Submission to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to routine submission of the above
material, make an identical submission to the authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of
annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Upon
receipt of comments from the authorities having jurisdiction, submit them for review. Resubmit if
required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval.
L. Record of field tests of system.
M The contractor shall include the following information in the equipment submittal:
Power calculations.
a. Battery capacity calculations. Battery size shall be a minimum of 125% of the
calculated requirement.
b. Supervisory power requirements for all equipment.
C. Alarm power requirements for all equipment.
d. Power supply rating justification showing power requirements for each of the system
power supplies. Power supplies shall be sized to furnish the total connected load in a
worst case condition plus 25% spare capacity.
e. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs demonstrating worst case condition.
1.6 SYSTEM FUNCTION
A. The system shall be a complete, electrically supervised local style fire detection and evacuation system
12/20/01 16721 - 2
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
with microprocessor based operating system having the following capabilities, features and capacities:
1. On board event history log for recall of alarms, supervisors, troubles and reset actions.
2. Minimum zone capacity of 12 zones with expansion capacity to 32 zones.
3. Total maximum smoke detector capability in excess of 900 detectors.
4. Internal, on board capacity for expansion to sixteen notification appliance circuits and power
capabilities of 20 amperes.
5. Four line, LCD, English language readout of alarms and situation sensitive, operator prompts
to lead inexperienced operators through the operation of the panel during an emergency
condition
1.7 SYSTEM ZONING
A. Each classification of initiation device shall be separately zoned:
1.
3.
�.,
4.
5•
6.
7.
8.
9.
,.,
10.
A.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Manual stations by fire zone and floor with a maximum per zone of 5 devices when
configured as a two wire Class -B, Style-B.
Automatic smoke and heat detectors by fire zone, maximum 30 per zone, Class B.
Waterflow alarms by system and/or floor, maximum per zone 2 each when configured two
wire Class -13, Style-B.
Other extinguishing systems shall be zoned separately for alarm and trouble as directed on the
project drawings or maybe directed by the design engineer.
Sprinkler system supervision by floor, with a maximum of 4 devices per zone when
configured as two wire Class-B, Style-B.
HVAC system smoke detection and control by fire zone and floor.
Elevator lobbies, one zone for terminal floor and one zone for all other floors and elevator
machinery rooms.
Where elevator power shutdown is required, a dedicated initiating device circuit shall used for
machine room and shaft heat detectors.
Notification appliance circuits shall be wired by fire zone and/or floor area (configured as a
two wire Class-B, Style-Y.
The system shall incorporate a minimum of four Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC's) with
a total capacity of 16 NAC's for operation of direct, current audible or visual indicating
appliances.
Sounding devices shall be of sufficient number so that an alarm shall be clearly audible to all
occupants of the building and/or fire area, as required by these Specifications. Mounting
height shall be 80" inches to the centerline of the sounding device above the finished floor
except that in locations where ceilings prevent the installation at 80" inches centerline, the
centerline of the device shall be 6" inches below the ceiling.
Audible alarm signals shall produce a sound level at least 15 dBA above the average ambient
sound level or 5 dBA above the maximum sound level having a duration of a least 60 seconds
(whichever is greater) measured 5 feet above the floor in each occupiable area. The average
ambient sound level is the root mean square, A -weighed sound pressure measured over a 24-
hour period.
Audible notification appliances shall be powered by dedicated notification circuits. Visual
notification appliances shall be powered by dedicated notification circuits. Audible appliances
and visual appliances shall not be powered by the same notification circuit. Combination
audible/visual devices may be used, but shall be wired as per this specification.
Visual signals shall be installed as shown on the drawings in accordance with the
requirements of U.L.1971 standard and NFPA 72. Where multiple visual signals are visible
from any location, circuitry shall be incorporated for the synchronization of flash rate.
P" 12/20/01 16721 - 3
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
15. UL 1971 Listed for Emergency Devices for the Hearing Impaired in all public mode
installations.
16. Strobes shall meet UL 1971 and produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum
over the Listed input voltage (20VDC - 31 VDC) range.
17. All visual signals shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or
equivalent with solid state circuitry.
18. Strobe intensity shall be rated per UL 1971 for 15, 30,75 or 110 Candela. Dual listing strobes
of 15/75 intensity for UL1971/near-axis requirements shall be used where acceptable.
19. Strobes shall be available for semi -flush, surface mounting and in combination with audible
signals as required.
1.8 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. SYSTEM ALARM: Activation of any fire alarm initiating device shall cause the following actions and
indications:
1. The main fire control panel shall sound a local integral audible alarm. It shall visually show a
custom message on the system LCD screen display defining the activated alarm zone. System
acknowledge and control operational push buttons shall automatically indicate switch
functions to lead the operator through the necessary steps in operating the system during an
alarm event.
2. The zone alarm LED shall flash red to signify activation of an alarm device installed in that
zone.
w 3. Log the alarm condition to the system history archives.
4. Activate circuitry for transmission of the alarm to the appropriate off site receiving agency.
5. Activate fire emergency HVAC operational shutdowns and/or purge requirements.
6. Close all smoke doors where indicated on the drawings.
7. Activate detector alarm red LED.
8. Activate building evacuation audible and visual notification appliances.
a. Audible signals shall be silencable from the fire alarm control panel by an alarm
silence switch. Visual signals shall be programmable to flash until alarm silencing.
b. A signal dedicated to sprinkler system water flow alarm shall not be silencable while
the sprinkler system is flowing at a rate of flow equal to a single head.
9. Activation of a alarm verified smoke detector zone devoted to elevator lobby, elevator shaft or
elevator equipment room shall, in addition to the actions described in 1.09.A. above, shall
cause the recall of that bank of elevators to the terminal floor and the lockout of controls. In
the event of recall initiation by a detector in the terminal floor lobby, the recall shall be to the
alternate floor.
a. Actuation from a elevator hoistway and elevator machine room smoke detectors shall
cause separate and distinct visual annunciation at the control panel and required
annunciators.
b. Recall signal shall activate all required hoistway, vents and mechanical ventilation _
fans.
9. Sprinkler Protected Elevator Shafts: Activation of an elevator shaft heat detector or elevator
machine room heat detector shall cause the shunt trip of electrical power to the elevator
equipment prior to sprinkler operation.
12/20/01 16721 - 4
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
B. SYSTEM SUPERVISORY: Activation of any supervisory circuit, i.e.; supervised valve closure, air
pressure abnormal, low temperature, or HVAC supply or return air smoke detection shall cause the
following actions and indications;
1. The main fire control panel shall sound a local integral supervisory audible alarm. It shall
visually show a supervisory message on the system LCD screen display. System acknowledge
and control operational push buttons shall automatically indicate switch functions to lead the
operator through the necessary steps in operating the system during the supervisory alarm
event.
.� 2. The zone alarm LED shall flash yellow to signify activation of a supervisory device installed
in that zone.
3. Activate supervisory audible and dedicated visual signal at system remote annunciator.
4. Record the supervisory event within the system history log and activate circuitry for
transmission of the supervisory condition to an off site central station monitor.
5. Activate supervisory alarm indication at the appropriate receiving agency.
C. SYSTEM TROUBLE : Receipt of any trouble report, shall cause the following actions and
indications:
1. The main fire control panel shall sound a local integral audible trouble alarm. It shall visually
indicate on the system LCD alphanumeric display the origin of the trouble condition. System
acknowledge and control operational push buttons shall automatically indicate switch
functions to lead the operator through the necessary steps in operating the system during the
trouble alarm event. z
2. The zone alarm LED shall flash red to signify activation of an alarm device installed in that
r. zone.
3. Activate trouble audible and dedicated visual signal at system remote annunciator. (If
equipped)
4. Record the trouble event within the system history log and activate circuitry for transmission
of the supervisory condition to an off site central station monitor.
5. Activate trouble alarm indication at the appropriate receiving agency. (If required)
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced factory -authorized Installer to perform work of this
Section.
B. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain fire alarm components from a single source who assumes
responsibility for compatibility of system components.
C. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with the applicable building code, local ordinances,
and regulations, and the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide fire alarm systems and components specified in this Section that are
F" listed and labeled by Factory Mutual and U.L.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed, are
12/20/01 16721 - 5
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of
units installed, but not less than 1.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed, but not
less than 1.
3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the
number of units of each type installed, but not less than 1 of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type installed, but
not less than 1 of each type.
5. Printer Ribbons: 6 spares.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Fire Alarm Control Panel
A. The control panel shall be modular in construction and shall include, but not limited to; the hardware,
firmware and programming services required to perform the following major system functions:
1. Steel, red baked enamel cabinet with indicator viewing window, and hinged door with
' cylinder lock.
r 2. System power supplies, including necessary transformers rectifiers, regulators, filters and
surge protection required for system operation, with the capacity to power all system local
indicating appliances during an alarm condition without exceeding the listed ratings.
a. The control panel shall be capable of being equipped with internal power supplies
having a total capacity of up to 20 amperes for Notification Appliance Circuits
(NAC) to satisfy the requirements for UL 1971 audible and visual notification levels.
All NAC's shall be listed as power limited.
3. System core processor, with internal operating system to process incoming alarm signals and
issue output commands required as a result of the alarm reception or by system programming.
4. Digital communication capabilities supporting and supervising remote LED and graphic
annunciators.
5. The system shall incorporate a minimum of 12 initiation circuits with a total capacity of 32
circuits.
a. IDC's shall be programmable for alarm verification of connected smoke detectors.
The panel shall support intermixing of smoke detectors and other alarm causing
devices on a single circuit. Devices other than smoke detectors initiating an alarm
report shall bypass the alarm verification cycle, reporting immediately.
b. All IDC's shall be U.L. listed for limited energy use.
6. For control of operations requiring switching functions as indicated on the drawings, there
shall be provided a software controllable relay modules as required for described system
operation. A total of 32 programmable relays shall be supportable by the system CPU within
the control unit.
12/20/01 16721 - 6
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
.,
0
a. Relays shall be rated at 5 amperes resistive and be furnished in a form "C"
configuration.
b. Relay programming shall allow the grouping of zones in an "or" configuration to
furnish up to 32 "virtual" zones for purposes of building control functions.
7. System display consisting of a 4 line by 20 character back lighted alphanumeric LCD display.
8.
a. Twenty character user defined custom messages shall describe the location of the
active zone.
b. The display shall include six system status LED's indicating POWER, ALARM,
SUPERVISORY, TROUBLE, AUDIBLE SILENCED and PARTIAL SYSTEM
DISABLED.
The display shall be linked to a "HELP" push button and seven multipurpose pushbuttons
mapped to specific system state sensitive labels. The display shall furnish user prompts and
instructions, system state sensitive, similar to the menu prompts seen on ATM machines.
These pushbuttons shall also be used for user programming when activated by an approved
passcode.
a. In the programming mode, the keys and display shall be interactive, displaying
options and a means of selection at each step. No external computers, chip changes or
chip re -bums shall be required for user system programming. All programs shall be
retained in non-volatile memory.
C. 12 button alphanumeric keypad to be used for service, programming, passcode and
manual control
9. The control panel shall contain integral facilities for off site digital reporting via site telephone
lines. Upon sensing an alarm condition within the panel, the communicator shall capture an
operational telephone circuit and automatically dial the Central Receiving Station. Upon
making contact with either the primary or secondary Central Receiving Station numbers using
either the primary or secondary outgoing lines, the communicator shall establish its system
identity and report the alarm condition. The communicator shall include the following
features and capabilities:
a. Integral fire alarm control panel mounting and listing under U.L. Standard 864. All
operating power shall be derived from the control panel primary and secondary
power sources.
b. Operating data base firmware stored in non-volatile memory and permanently
installed on the system mother board. Entry into the programming mode shall be
password protected to prevent unauthorized modification. The system shall be
programmable by use of the software and passcode, on site or remotely using the data
reporting telephone line connections.
1. Changes in Central Station telephone numbers shall be programmable by
downloading from the Central Station. A site service call shall not be
required.
c. The communicator shall be capable of reporting up to four conditions present within
the control panel, as follows:
1. Fire Alarm Condition
am
12/20/01 16721 - 7
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2. System Trouble Condition
3. System Supervisory Condition.
4. Other conditions as required; i.e. Sprinkler system waterflow, low or high
temperature, water detection, etc.
10. Fire Alarm System Power Supplies:
a. System Primary Power
1. Primary power for the FACP and the secondary power battery chargers shall
be obtained from a dedicated emergency power circuits. Each circuit used
for fire alarm purposes shall be permanently labeled for function.
C. Secondary Power Supply
1. Provide sealed gelled electrolyte batteries as the secondary power supply for
all fire alarm functions. The battery supply shall be calculated to operate
loads in a supervisory mode for twenty four (24) hours for proprietary and
central station systems, sixty (60) hours for municipal or remote supervisory
systems, with no primary power applied, and after that time, operate in alarm
mode for five (5) minutes or fifteen (15) minutes for voice connected
systems. Batteries shall be sized at 125% of the calculated size to
compensate for deterioration and aging during the battery life cycle. Battery
calculations shall be submitted to justify the battery size.
i
2. Provide battery charging circuitry for each standby battery bank in the
system. The charger shall be automatic in design, adjusting the charge rate to
the condition of the batteries.
11. System on board historical memory shall provide for historical storage and recall of alarm,
supervisory, trouble and reset events. The most current 30 events shall be available for recall
in each category.
2.02. PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR
A. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings and
include the following features.
l . The detectors shall be microprocessor based, operating on the light refraction principle with a
zero background light level, eliminating calibration errors associated with field cleaning of the
chamber.
2. The detector electronics shall be protected, by means of filtering and internal logarithms,
against undesirable effects as a result of proximate electrical and electronic devices such as
flourescent light fixtures, cellular telephones, variable frequency motor controllers and other
sources of RFI interference.
3. Internal tracking and historical logging at a rate of once every 6-7 seconds of sensitivity
setting drift and detector contamination buildup.
a. In a fully operational state within the parameters of the U.L. sensitivity window, the
detector LED shall flash green once every 6-7 seconds.
b. In the event of the detectors sensing of a trouble state indicating contamination
buildup or sensitivity drift, the detector LED shall flash amber every 6-7 seconds.
12/20/01 16721 - 8 �`
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
Detection and the reporting of excessive levels of smoke (alarm conditions) during
self -testing modes shall continue without disruption.
c. Detection of excessive smoke within the U.L. defined sensitivity window shall cause
the detector LED to flash red every 2-3 seconds and initiate an alarm condition on the
control panel detection circuit.
4. The detector shall be listed by U.L. for self testing, eliminating the requirements for smoke
generators, sensitivity meters and .ladders to accomplish NFPA 72 mandated detector
sensitivity logging.
5. Self compensation for ambient temperature and humidity.
6. Detectors shall be operational with relay bases, audible bases and remote indicating LEDs,
controlled by the detector electronics. They shall be supplied and installed with these options
where indicated on the drawings or required by the operational requirements of this
specification.
7. Detector shall be readily disassembled without the requirement for special tools to gain access
to the detection chamber for cleaning and maintenance. Low profile case shall not exceed 2
inches extension below the finish ceiling.
8. Where indicated on the drawings, detector shall be furnished with integral relay for use in
local switching functions. Where the switching function is code mandated or life safety
related, system design shall be made in accordance with NFPA 72 paragraph A-7-2.2 to
assure relay operation under every possible alarm scenario.
9. Detectors shall be immune to false alarms caused by high air velocity.
2.01 HEAT DETECTORS, RATE COMPENSATED
b
A. Detectors shall berated at 135 degrees and rate of rise. Detectors shall be constructed to compensate
for the thermal inertia inherent in conventional type detectors due to the thermal mass, and alarm at the
set point of 135 degrees Fahrenheit.
1. The detectors furnished shall have a listed spacing for coverage up to 2,500 square feet for
use in environments as covered by Factory Mutual and UL (UQGS) and shall be installed
according to the requirements of NFPA 72E for open area coverage.
2.04 MANUAL FIRE PULL STATIONS
A. Provide single action manual stations where shown on the drawings, to be flush or surface mounted as
required. Mounting height shall be 48" inches above finished floor (AFF) to the activation mechanism.
1. Stations shall be equipped with terminal strip and pressure style screw terminals for the
connection of field wiring.
2. Surface mounted stations where indicated on the drawings shall be mounted using a
manufacturer's prescribed matching baked red enamel outlet box.
2.05. FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM INITIATION AND SUPERVISION
A. Furnish sensors for installation by the fire sprinkler system contractor and provide system
interconnection for the following functions:
1. Waterflow switches, vane type, with adjustable pneumatic retard of 0 - 75 seconds, single
pole double throw switch calibrated for actuation when flow rate equals 10 GPM or greater.
2. Waterflow switches, pressure type, with adjustable pneumatic retard of 0 - 75 seconds, single
"" 12/20/01 16721 - 9
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
pole double throw switch calibrated for actuation upon pressure increase of 4 - 8 PSI.
3. Outside screw and yoke valve supervisory switches in sizes as required for monitoring valves
as indicated on the drawings. The single pole double throw supervisory switch shall activate
an off normal report within one half turn of the valve.
4. Valve room temperature supervisory switch with single pole contacts activated on temperature
drop below 40 degrees F.
5. Tank temperature supervisory switch with single pole contacts activating upon temperature
drop below 40 degrees F.
6. Tank water level supervisory switch designed to furnish supervisory signals for high and low
water levels in sprinkler system storage tanks.
2.06 EVACUATION NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AS
SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, INCLUDING THE FOLLOWING FEATURES AND
CAPABILITIES:
A. Visual appliances shall be installed as shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of
the U.L.1971 standard and NFPA 72. Where multiple visual signals are visible from any location,
circuitry shall be incorporated for the synchronization of the flash rate.
1. UL 1971 Listed for Emergency Devices for the Hearing Impaired in all public mode
installation.
2. Strobes shall meet UL 1971 and produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second.
3. All visual signals shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or
equivalent with solid state circuitry.
4. The strobe intensity shall be rated per UL 1971 for 15, 75 or 110 Candela. Dual listing strobes
of 15/75 intensity for UL1971/near-axis requirements shall be used where acceptable.
5. The strobes shall be available for semi -flush mounting with or without audible signals as
required.
2.07 AUDIBLE EVACUATION SIGNALS
A. Audible evacuation signals shall be furnished and installed as shown on the drawings meeting the
following requirements:
1. Audible Notification appliance shall be electronic and use solid state components.
2. Each electronic signal shall provide three (3) field selectable alarm tones. The tones shall
consist of either horn, siren and warble.
3. The device shall provide U.L. dBA measurement at 10 feet shall be a minimum of 85 dBA for
separately mounted audible signals.
4. The device shall have provisions for standard reverse polarity type supervision and in/out
field wiring using terminals that accept #14 to #18 AWG wiring.
2.08 OFF SITE DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATIONS
A. The control panel shall contain integral facilities for off site digital reporting via site telephone lines.
Upon sensing an alarm condition within the panel, the communicator shall capture an operational
telephone circuit and automatically dial the Central Receiving Station. Upon making contact with
either the primary or secondary Central Receiving Station numbers using either the primary or
secondary outgoing lines, the communicator shall establish its system identity and report the alarm
condition.
12/20/01 16721 - 10 �'
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
2.09 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings an` alarm, supervisory and common trouble
annunciator suitable for interface communications with the fire alarm control panel, having the
following features and characteristics:
1. The annunciator shall incorporate 8 or 16 zone positions with a additional capability for the
.., system to indicate up to 32 zones, should project requirements indicate additional remote
annunciation.
2. Zone indication shall be accomplished by illuminating a zone LED, red for alarm and yellow
for supervisory alarm conditions.
3. In addition to zone annunciation, the annunciator shall be provided with a local lamp test, a
system common trouble buzzer and local trouble silence switch incorporating a system ring
back feature.
4. The annunciator shall have a red finish and be suitable for surface or flush mount installation.
2.10. CONTROL RELAYS
A. Furnish and install UL listed system control relays for elevator recall, remote annunciation, exit light
flashing circuits, BMS interface, HVAC control or other alarm output functions as may be required.
1. Each relay shall be fully field programmable through on board software, without need for
hardware programming tools. Each relay shall provide one form "C" contact rated for use with -
S. amp resistive loads.
2. Relay field programmability shall alternatively allow relays to be programmed to change state
on first alarm of any number of initiating zone activation's. Relays shall be programmable
capable to act as global system relays for alarm, supervisory or trouble. Relay software logic
shall allow for bypass mode applications.
2.11 FIELD REMOTE HVAC CONTROL RELAYS (NFPA 101)
A. All relays shall be supervised as required by NFPA 101 and mounted within three feet of the
emergency control device being controlled.
1. A UL listed system remote polarized relay shall provide, as a minimum, one form "C" alarm
activated contact rated 3. Amp at 28 VDC and 5. Amp at 120 VAC.
2. Should field conditions warrant higher rated control contacts, the contractor shall submit the
necessary drawings and supportive technical information for review and approval by the
project engineer.
3. Relays shall be mounted in a NEMA style enclosure suitable for the environment in which
they are installed, with identification on the exterior as a fire alarm control device.
2.12 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, magnetic door holders designed for positive release
to secure openings as indicated for limiting smoke spread. the units furnished shall be brushed
aluminum finish, compatible with the doors as listed in the door schedule as follows:
1. 24VDC concealed wiring with 25 lb holding force.
2. 24VDC surface wiring with 25 lb holding force..
3. 24VDC recessed door with 25 lb holding force.
4. 24VDC floor mounting, single door with 25 lb holding force.
OWN
12/20/01 16721 - 11
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
5. 24VDC floor mounting, double door with 25 lb holding force.
6. 24VDC sliding door with 120 lb holding force, gray hammertone finish.
7. 24VDC overhead door with 120 lb. holding force, gray hammertone finish
2.13 DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
A. Duct smoke detectors shall be photoelectric. The detector shall be self -compensating for the effects of
air velocity (from 300 to 4,000 CFM), temperature, humidity and atmospheric pressure. It shall not be
necessary to field adjust the sensitivity to compensate for the above effects, however, there shall be
provisions to check the detector sensitivity in place under actual air flow conditions. Each detector
shall utilize solid state components and be equipped with an alarm indicating multi -color LED which
shall flash red when the smoke detector is alarm activated. Detector mounting shall be accomplished
by twist/lock insertion into the duct detector housing.
1. Since most duct detection applications are installed in areas with restrictive access, the
detector shall be UL listed to incorporate self -testing circuitry which tests the detector for
defective operation or contamination every 6-7 seconds. If a problem is detected, the multi-
color LED detector indicator shall flash amber until the problem is corrected. Should the self -
testing circuitry indicate normal detection conditions, the multi -color LED shall flash green
indicating successful passing of self -testing mode.
a. Auxiliary integral relay functions shall be available with duct detector. See project
drawings for locations utilizing specific duct detector activation. (If required)
b. The detector shall be capable of simultaneous activation of one auxiliary duct
detector relay and one remote lamp.
C. When a duct detector housing relay is used to control a critical system function, the
relay and its associated detector shall be the only devices on the initiating device
circuit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install system according to NFPA standards referenced in Parts 1 and 2 of this Section.
B. Fire Alarm Power Supply Disconnect: Paint red and label "FIRE ALARM." Provide with lockable
handle or cover.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semiflush in recessed back boxes with operating handles 48 inches
(1220 mm) above the finished floor or lower as indicated.
B. Water -Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station
required to be supervised.
C. Smoke Detectors: Install ceiling -mounted detectors not less than4 inches (100 mm),from a side wall
to the near edge. Install detectors located on the wall at least 4 inches (100 mm), but not more than
12 inches (300 nun), below the ceiling. For exposed solid joist construction, mount detectors on the
12/20/01 16721 - 12
r-+
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
W"
N
bottom of the joists. On smooth ceilings, install detectors not over 30 feet (9 m) apart in any
direction. Install detectors no closer than 60 inches (1520 mm) from air registers.
D. Audible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install not less than 90 inches (2280 mm) above the finished
floor nor less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush -mounted
back boxes with the device -operating mechanism concealed behind a grille or as indicated. Combine
audible and visual alarms at the same location into a single unit.
E Visual Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and not more
than 80 inches (2030 mm) above the finished floor and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.
F. - Device Location -Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
G. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished
floor.
H. Graphic Annunciator: Arrange as indicated, with the top of the panel no more than 72 inches (1830
Trim) above the finished -floor.
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
,A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways,
Boxes, and Cabinets." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of
the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect
conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm
system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all
connections with approved crimp -on terminal spade lugs, pressure -type terminal blocks, or plug
connectors. .
C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment
enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D. Color Coding: Color -code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring.
Use one color code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits.
Color -code audible alarm -indicating circuits differently from alarm -initiating circuits. Use different
colors for visual alarm -indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
E. Risers: Install at least 2 vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close
proximity to each other with a minimum one -hour -rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not
prevent the receipt or transmission of signal from other floors or zones.
F. Wiring to Central -Station Transmitter: 1-inch (27) GRC between the FACP and the central -station
transmitter connection as indicated. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for
connecting wiring as needed to suit central -station monitoring function. Final connections to
terminals in central -station transmitter are made under another contract.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
12/20/01 16721 - 13
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section --
"Electrical Identification."
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's instructions to eliminate
shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns,
noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and
equipment grounding.
C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply with
installation requirements of Division 16 Section "Grounding."
D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the greatest
extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other
impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report
ground resistance.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory -authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and
adjustment of the system.
B. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pretesting.
Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings
and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged
items with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare
forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.
C. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is
complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests.
D. Final Test Notice: Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready for final
acceptance testing.
E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72.
Minimum required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation -testing device.
3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on the record
drawings.
4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's
12/20/01 16721 - 14
SILENT WINGS MUSEUM
operation and maintenance manual.
5.. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit
conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of the initiating
and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used.
�-- 6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the
control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and
maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each
station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all
communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required
to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays,
signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity, quality,
freedom from noise and. distortion, and proper volume level.
8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system is
capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.
F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such
deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies
with applicable standards.
G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test
results in the form of a test log. Submit log upon the satisfactory completion of tests.
H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed.
3.7 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred
finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to provide startup service and
to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.
I. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and preventive maintenance. Provide a
minimum of 8 hours training.
2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual as a
. training aid.
3. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days advance notice.
3.9 ON -SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on -site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to 3 requested adjustment visits to the site for this purpose.
END OF SECTION 16721
12/20/01 16721 - 15